M70V Set Up Manual (Ver-E)

Introduction
This is a setup manual for MITSUBISHI CNC M70V Series.

This manual is complied on the assumption that your machine is provided with all of the MITSUBISHI CNC M70V
Series functions. Refer to the specifications issued by machine tool builder to confirm the functions available for
your NC before proceeding to operation.
Notes on Reading This Manual
(1) This manual explains general parameters as viewed from the NC. For information about each machine tool,
refer to manuals issued from the machine tool builder. If the descriptions relating to "restrictions" and
"allowable conditions" conflict between this manual and the machine tool builder's instruction manual, the later
has priority over the former.
(2) This manual is intended to contain as much descriptions as possible even about special operations. The
operations to which no reference is made in this manual should be considered impossible.
(3) The "special display unit" explained in this manual is the display unit incorporated by the machine tool builder,
and is not the MITSUBISHI standard display unit.
(4) This manual is for the machine tool builders who set up the NC system.
CAUTION
If the descriptions relating to "restrictions" and "allowable conditions" conflict between this manual and
the machine tool builder's instruction manual, the later has priority over the former.
The operations to which no reference is made in this manual should be considered impossible.
This manual is complied on the assumption that your machine is provided with all optional functions. Refer
to the specifications issued by machine tool builder to confirm the functions available for your machine
before proceeding to operation.
In some NC system versions‚ there may be cases that different pictures appear on the screen‚ the machine
operates in a different way or some function is not activated.
Precautions for Safety
Always read the specifications issued by the machine tool builder, this manual, related manuals and attached
documents before installation, operation, programming, maintenance or inspection to ensure correct use.
Understand this numerical controller, safety items and cautions before using the unit.
This manual ranks the safety precautions into "DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
DANGER
When the user may be subject to imminent fatalities or major injuries if handling is mistaken.
WARNING
When the user may be subject to fatalities or major injuries if handling is mistaken.
CAUTION
When the user may be subject to injuries or when physical damage may occur if handling is mistaken.
Note that even items ranked as " CAUTION", may lead to major results depending on the situation.In any case,
important information that must always be observed is described.
The following sings indicate prohibition and compulsory.
This sign indicates prohibited behavior (must not do).
For example, indicates "Keep fire away".
This sign indicated a thing that is pompously (must do).
For example, indicates "it must be grounded".
The meaning of each pictorial sing is as follows.
CAUTION rotated Danger Electric shock

CAUTION CAUTION HOT Danger explosive
object risk
Disassembly is
Prohibited KEEP FIRE AWAY General instruction Earth ground
prohibited
For Safe Use
Mitsubishi CNC is designed and manufactured solely for applications to machine tools to be used for industrial
purposes.
Do not use this product in any applications other than those specified above, especially those which are
substantially influential on the public interest or which are expected to have significant influence on human lives or
properties.
DANGER
Not applicable in this manual.
WARNING
Do not cancel an emergency stop before confirming the basic operation.
Always set the stroke end and stroke limit. Failure to set this could result in collision with the machine end.
CAUTION
1. Items related to product and manual
If the descriptions relating to "restrictions" and "allowable conditions" conflict between this manual and
the machine tool builder's instruction manual, the later has priority over the former.
The operations to which no reference is made in this manual should be considered impossible.
This manual is complied on the assumption that your machine is provided with all optional functions. Refer
to the specifications issued by machine tool builder to confirm the functions available for your machine
before proceeding to operation.
In some NC system versions‚ there may be cases that different pictures appear on the screen‚ the machine
operates in a different way or some function is not activated.
2. Items related to faults and abnormalities
If the battery low alarm is output, save the machining programs, tool data and parameters to an input/
output device, and then replace the battery. If the BATTERY alarm occurs, the machining programs, tool
data and parameters may be damaged. After replacing the battery, reload each data item.
3. Items related to setup
Do not adjust the spindle when possible risks associated with adjustment procedures are not thoroughly
taken into consideration.
Be careful when touching spindle's rotating section, or your hand may be caught in or cut.
Since the analog output R registers are allocated in ascending order of channels and station numbers, the
analog output destination may change depending on added option.
[Continued to next page]
CAUTION
[Continued]
4. Items related to maintenance
Do not replace the battery while the power is ON.
Do not short-circuit, charge, heat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.
Dispose of the spent battery according to local laws.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
Do not pull the cables when connecting/disconnecting it.
Do not replace cooling fan while the power is ON.
Dispose of the replaced cooling fan according to the local laws.
Do not replace backlight while the power is ON.
Dispose of the spent backlights according to the local laws.
Do not touch backlight while the power is ON. Failure to observe this could result in electric shocks due to
high voltage.
Do not touch backlight while LCD panel is in use. Failure to observe this could result in burns.
LCD panel and backlight are made of glass, so do not apply impacts or pressure on them. Failure to
observe this could result in breakage.
Incorrect connections could cause the devices to damage. Connect the cable to the designated connector.
Do not replace control units while the power is ON.
Do not replace display units while the power is ON.
Do not replace keyboard units while the power is ON.
Do not replace DX units while the power is ON.
Do not replace hard disk units while the power is ON.
Dispose of the replaced hard disk unit according to the local laws.
Hard disk unit is a precision device, so do not drop or apply strong impacts on it.
5. Items related to servo parameters and spindle parameters
Do not adjust or change the parameter settings greatly as operation could become unstable.
In the explanation on bits, set all bits not used, including blank bits, to "0".
Disposal
(Note) This symbol mark is for EU countries only.

This symbol mark is according to the directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end-
users and Annex II.
Your MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product is designed and manufactured with high quality materials and
components which can be recycled and/or reused.
This symbol means that batteries and accumulators, at their end-of-life, should be disposed of
separately from your household waste.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, this chemical symbol means that the
battery or accumulator contains a heavy metal at a certain concentration. This will be indicated as
follows:
Hg: mercury (0,0005%), Cd: cadmium (0,002%), Pb: lead (0,004%)
In the European Union there are separate collection systems for used batteries and accumulators.
Please, dispose of batteries and accumulators correctly at your local community waste collection/
recycling centre.
Please, help us to conserve the environment we live in!

Trademarks
MELDAS, MELSEC, EZSocket, EZMotion, iQ Platform, MELSOFT, GOT, CC-Link, CC-Link/LT and CC-Link
IE are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation in Japan and/or other
countries.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Microsoft® and Windows® are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
CompactFlash and CF are either trademarks or registered trademarks of SanDisk Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and/or other countries.
Intel® and Pentium® are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the
respective companies.
本製品の取扱いについて
( 日本語 /Japanese)
本製品は工業用 ( クラス A) 電磁環境適合機器です。販売者あるいは使用者はこの点に注意し、住商業環境以外で
の使用をお願いいたします。
Handling of our product
(English)
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the
user may be required to take adequate measures.
본 제품의 취급에 대해서
( 한국어 /Korean)
이 기기는 업무용 (A 급 ) 전자파적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기 바라며 가정외의 지역에
서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다 .
CONTENTS
1 Setup Outline................................................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 Device Configuration .............................................................................................................................................. 2
1.2 Hardware Configuration ......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.3 Flow of Initial Setup ................................................................................................................................................ 4
2 Connecting and Setting the Hardware ....................................................................................................... 5

2.1 Connecting and Setting the Drive Unit ................................................................................................................. 6
2.1.1 Connecting with Servo Drive Unit ................................................................................................................ 6
2.1.1.1 Connecting with MDS-D2/DH2 Series .................................................................................................. 7
2.1.1.2 Connecting with MDS-DM2 Series ....................................................................................................... 9
2.1.1.3 Connecting with MDS-DJ Series ........................................................................................................ 10
2.2 Setting the Rotary and DIP Switches .................................................................................................................. 11
2.2.1 MDS-D2/DH2 Series...................................................................................................................................... 11
2.2.2 MDS-DM2 Series ........................................................................................................................................... 13
2.2.3 MDS-DJ Series .............................................................................................................................................. 13
2.3 Connecting the Batteries...................................................................................................................................... 14
2.3.1 Control Unit Battery ..................................................................................................................................... 14
2.3.2 Servo Drive Unit Battery .............................................................................................................................. 15
2.4 Connecting and Setting the Remote I/O Unit ..................................................................................................... 17
2.4.1 Outline of the Remote I/O Unit .................................................................................................................... 17
2.4.2 Connection and Station No. Setting on Remote I/O Unit.......................................................................... 19
2.4.3 Station No. Setting when Using Multiple Remote I/O Units...................................................................... 21
2.4.4 Device No. Assignment ............................................................................................................................... 25
2.5 Initializing the NC Internal Data (SRAM) ............................................................................................................. 27
3 Setting Up with M70/M700/E70 SETUP INSTALLER ............................................................................... 29

3.1 Compatible Data and Folder Configuration in the CF Card .............................................................................. 31
3.2 Operation Procedure ............................................................................................................................................ 32
3.2.1 Starting Up M70/M700/E70 SETUP INSTALLER......................................................................................... 32
3.2.2 Installing Language Data ............................................................................................................................. 32
3.2.3 Installing Custom Data ................................................................................................................................ 34
3.2.4 Uninstalling Custom Data............................................................................................................................ 35
3.2.5 Installing Custom Startup Screen............................................................................................................... 36
3.2.6 Uninstalling Custom Startup Screen .......................................................................................................... 37
3.3 List of Error Messages ......................................................................................................................................... 38
4 Setting the Parameters and Date/Time .................................................................................................... 39

4.1 Selecting the NC System Type ............................................................................................................................ 40
4.2 Setting on the System Setup Screen .................................................................................................................. 41
4.3 Setting the Parameters for the Machine Specifications .................................................................................... 45
4.4 Setting Date and Time .......................................................................................................................................... 47
5 PLC Program Writing................................................................................................................................. 49

5.1 Setting the Ethernet Communication.................................................................................................................. 50
5.2 Connecting the Control Unit and a Personal Computer.................................................................................... 51
5.3 Setting the Communication with GX Developer................................................................................................. 52
5.4 Setting the Parameters on GX Developer ........................................................................................................... 54
5.5 Writing a PLC Program with GX Developer ........................................................................................................ 56
5.6 Writing a PLC Program to ROM with GX Developer .......................................................................................... 57
5.7 Setting the PLC Parameters................................................................................................................................. 59
6 Confirming the Basic Operation ............................................................................................................... 61

6.1 Checking Inputs/Outputs and Alarms................................................................................................................. 62
6.2 Confirming Manual Operation.............................................................................................................................. 63
6.2.1 Using the Manual Pulse Generator ............................................................................................................. 63
6.2.2 Using JOG Feed ........................................................................................................................................... 63
6.3 Servo Simplified Adjustment ............................................................................................................................... 64
6.3.1 First Measure Against Vibration ................................................................................................................. 64
6.3.2 Outline of NC Analyzer ................................................................................................................................ 65
7 Setting the Position Detection System .................................................................................................... 67
7.1 Adjusting the Absolute Position Detection System .......................................................................................... 68
7.1.1 Marked Aligment Method I .......................................................................................................................... 69
7.1.2 Marked Point Alignment Method II ............................................................................................................. 70
7.1.3 Other Setting Method................................................................................................................................... 71
7.1.3.1 Machine End Stopper Method: Automatic Initialization .................................................................. 71
7.1.3.2 Machine End Stopper Method: Manual Initialization........................................................................ 74
7.1.3.3 Dog-type ............................................................................................................................................... 75
7.1.4 Precautions................................................................................................................................................... 76
7.1.4.1 Precautions common for the initilization operation......................................................................... 76
7.1.4.2 Precautions common for the dogless-type absolute position detector......................................... 76
7.2 Adjustment of Reference Position Return in Relative Position Detection System ........................................ 78
7.2.1 Dog-type Reference Position Return ......................................................................................................... 78
7.2.1.1 Dog-type Reference Position Return Operation .............................................................................. 78
7.2.1.2 Dog-type Reference Position Return Adjustment Procedures ....................................................... 79
8 Setting the Tool Entry Prohibited Range ............................................................................................... 85

8.1 Stroke End (H/W OT) ............................................................................................................................................ 86
8.2 Stored stroke limit (S/W OT) ................................................................................................................................ 87
8.2.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................... 87
8.2.2 Detailed Explanation.................................................................................................................................... 89
8.2.2.1 Stored Stroke Limit I ........................................................................................................................... 90
8.2.2.2 Stored Stroke Limit II .......................................................................................................................... 91
8.2.2.3 Stored Stroke Limit IB......................................................................................................................... 93
8.2.2.4 Stored Stroke Limit IC......................................................................................................................... 94
8.2.2.5 Movable Range during Inclined Axis Control ................................................................................... 95
8.2.2.6 Stored Stroke Limit for Rotation Axis ............................................................................................... 96
8.2.2.7 Change Area for Stored Stroke Limit l .............................................................................................. 96
8.2.2.8 Precautions .......................................................................................................................................... 97
9 Confirming the Spindle Operation............................................................................................................ 99

9.1 In Manual Operation (with Manual Numerical Command) .............................................................................. 100
9.2 In MDI Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 101
9.3 Confirming the Rotation Speed ......................................................................................................................... 101
10 Setting the System Lock ....................................................................................................................... 103

10.1 Setting the Encryption Key.............................................................................................................................. 104
10.2 Setting of Expiration Date................................................................................................................................ 105
10.3 Display of Time Limit Warning and Alarm Notification ................................................................................. 106
10.4 Caution .............................................................................................................................................................. 106
11 Setting the Deceleration Check ............................................................................................................ 107

11.1 Function............................................................................................................................................................. 108
11.2 Deceleration Check Method............................................................................................................................. 109
11.3 Deceleration Check for Opposite Direction Movement Reversal................................................................. 111
11.4 Parameter .......................................................................................................................................................... 112
11.5 Precautions ....................................................................................................................................................... 114
12 Data Backup and Restoration ............................................................................................................... 115

12.1 All Backup ......................................................................................................................................................... 116
12.2 All Restoration .................................................................................................................................................. 119
13 Hardware Replacement Methods.......................................................................................................... 121

13.1 Durable Parts .................................................................................................................................................... 122
13.1.1 Control Unit Battery ................................................................................................................................. 122
13.1.2 Backlight ................................................................................................................................................... 124
13.1.3 Fuse........................................................................................................................................................... 127
13.1.3.1 Control Unit Protection Fuse ......................................................................................................... 127
13.1.3.2 Operation Panel I/O Unit Protection Fuse ..................................................................................... 127
13.1.4 Front Memory Interface Card .................................................................................................................. 128
13.1.5 Touch Panel Protective Sheet................................................................................................................. 129
13.1.6 Key Sheet.................................................................................................................................................. 130
13.2 Control Unit ....................................................................................................................................................... 131
13.2.1 Installation on FCU7-DU120-12 (8.4-type).............................................................................................. 133
13.2.2 Installation on FCU7-DU140-12/32 (10.4-type) ....................................................................................... 134
13.2.3 Installation on FCU7-DU140-32 (10.4-type touch panel) ....................................................................... 135
13.2.4 Calibration Setting and Confirmation..................................................................................................... 136
13.3 Display Unit ....................................................................................................................................................... 139
13.4 Keyboard Unit.................................................................................................................................................... 140
13.5 Operation Panel I/O Unit................................................................................................................................... 141
13.6 CompactFlash (CF) Card .................................................................................................................................. 142
13.7 USB Memory...................................................................................................................................................... 143
14 Cables ..................................................................................................................................................... 145

14.1 Precautions when Connecting/Disconnecting Cables .................................................................................. 146
14.2 Precautions for Using Optical Communication Cable................................................................................... 149
14.2.1 Optical Communication Cable Outline and Parts.................................................................................. 149
14.2.2 Precautions for Handling Optical Communication Cable..................................................................... 149
14.2.3 Precautions for Laying Optical Communication Cable ........................................................................ 150
Appendix 1 Explanation of Parameters .................................................................................................... 151

Appendix 1.1 User Parameters ................................................................................................................................ 152
Appendix 1.2 Base Specifications Parameters ...................................................................................................... 220
Appendix 1.3 Axis Specifications Parameters ....................................................................................................... 291
Appendix 1.4 Servo Parameters .............................................................................................................................. 323
Appendix 1.5 Spindle Parameters ........................................................................................................................... 358
Appendix 1.6 Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters............................................................................................ 416
Appendix 1.7 Machine Error Compensation Parameters ...................................................................................... 423
Appendix 1.8 PLC Constants ................................................................................................................................... 425
Appendix 1.9 Macro List........................................................................................................................................... 429
Appendix 1.10 Position Switches ............................................................................................................................ 440
Appendix 1.11 Open Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 454
Appendix 1.12 Device Open Parameters ................................................................................................................ 455
Appendix 1.13 SRAM Open Parameters ................................................................................................................. 456
Appendix 1.14 CC-Link Parameters ........................................................................................................................ 457
Appendix 1.15 PLC Axis Indexing Parameters....................................................................................................... 469
Appendix 1.16 Screen Transition Chart .................................................................................................................. 480
Appendix 1.17 Unit.................................................................................................................................................... 481
Appendix 1.18 Inputting the Machine Parameters ................................................................................................. 481
Appendix 1.19 Machine Error Compensation (Function Details) ....................................................................... 482
Appendix 1.19.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................... 482
Appendix 1.19.2 Setting Compensation Data ................................................................................................... 485
Appendix 1.19.3 Example in Using a Linear Axis as Base Axis...................................................................... 486
Appendix 1.19.4 Example in Using a Rotary Axis as Base Axis ..................................................................... 488
Appendix 1.20 Position Switch (Function Details) ................................................................................................ 489
Appendix 1.20.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................... 489
Appendix 1.20.2 Setting and Operation Examples of dog1 and dog2............................................................ 489
Appendix 1.20.3 Canceling the Position Switch............................................................................................... 490
Appendix 1.21 Bit Selection Parameters #6449 to #6496 ...................................................................................... 491
Appendix 2 Explanation of Alarms............................................................................................................ 493

Appendix 2.1 Operation Errors (M).......................................................................................................................... 494
Appendix 2.2 Stop Codes (T) ................................................................................................................................... 514
Appendix 2.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms (S).................................................................................................................. 520
Appendix 2.3.1 Servo Errors (S01/S03/S04)...................................................................................................... 520
Appendix 2.3.2 Initial Parameter Errors (S02) .................................................................................................. 535
Appendix 2.3.3 Safety Function Errors (S05).................................................................................................... 535
Appendix 2.3.4 Parameter Errors (S51) ............................................................................................................. 536
Appendix 2.3.5 Servo Warnings (S52) ............................................................................................................... 537
Appendix 2.3.6 Safety Function Warnings (S53) .............................................................................................. 539
Appendix 2.4 MCP Alarms (Y).................................................................................................................................. 540
Appendix 2.5 System Alarms (Z) ............................................................................................................................. 552
Appendix 2.6 Absolute Position Detection System Alarms (Z7*)......................................................................... 560
Appendix 2.7 Distance-coded Reference Scale Errors (Z8*) ................................................................................ 564
Appendix 2.8 Emergency Stop Alarms (EMG)........................................................................................................ 565
Appendix 2.9 Computer Link Errors (L) .................................................................................................................. 568
Appendix 2.10 User PLC Alarms (U) ....................................................................................................................... 569
Appendix 2.11 Network Service Errors (N) ............................................................................................................. 572
Appendix 2.12 Program Errors (P) .......................................................................................................................... 574
Appendix 2.13 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 606
Appendix 2.13.1 Troubleshooting for NC ......................................................................................................... 606
Appendix 2.13.2 Troubleshooting for drive system......................................................................................... 606
1
Setup Outline
1
MITSUBISHI CNC
1 Setup Outline
1.1 Device Configuration
Keyboard unit
Display unit
Remote I/O
unit
Control unit
Manual pulse
generator
Operation panel
I/O unit
Remote I/O
unit
Manual pulse
Synchronous feed generator
encoder
Servo/Spindle drive units
Motors
2
M70V Series Setup Manual
1.2 Hardware Configuration
1.2 Hardware Configuration

The following shows the hardware names used in this manual.
(A) (B) (C) (D)
(A) Cancel key

(B) Menu changeover key
(C) CF card interface on front of display unit
(D) INPUT key
(C)
(A) (B)
(A) Rotary switch 1

(B) Rotary switch 2
(C) 7-segment LED
3
MITSUBISHI CNC
1 Setup Outline
1.3 Flow of Initial Setup

The following flow chart shows the procedures of the initial setup.
(Note) When setting up with backup files, refer to the section of "Data Backup and Restoration".
WARNING
Do not cancel the emergency stop before confirming the basic operation.
Start
Confirming the connection between

control unit and peripheral devices
Points
Is the power supply within a specified range?
Is the power supply polarity correct?
Is the connection of the motor power cable and the detector cable correct?
Is the grounding correct?
Connecting and setting the hardware Refer to section 2
Carry out the connecting and setting of drive units, batteries and remote I/O units.
Initialize the NC Internal data (SRAM).
Setting Up with
Refer to section 3
M70/M700/E70 SETUP INSTALLER
Carry out this procedure when installing language data other than Japanese and
English, as well as custom screens.
(Note) If you do not need the installation, go to the next procedure.
Setting Parameters and Date/Time Refer to section 4
Set the parameters on the system setup screen and the parameter screen.
Set the date and time on the integrated time screen.
PLC Program Writing Refer to section 5
Write the created PLC program to NC's ROM using GX Developer.

Confirming the Basic Operation Refer to section 6
Confirm the input/output of signals, the alarm display, the manual operation and
servo simplified adjustment.
Setting the Position Detection System Refer to section 7
Carry out the setting for establishing the reference position (zero point).
Setting the stored stroke limit Refer to section 8
Set the tool entry prohibited range.

Confirming the Spindle Operation Refer to section 9
Confirm that the spindle operates properly in manual/MDI operation.

Confirm the spindle rotation speed as well.
Setting the system lock Refer to section 10
Validate the system lock.

(Note) This procedure is required only when using the system lock.
Inputting the machining program Refer to Instruction Manual
End
For other settings, refer to the following sections:

- Setting the Deceleration Check
- Data Backup and Restoration
4
2
Connecting and Setting the Hardware
5
MITSUBISHI CNC
2 Connecting and Setting the Hardware
2.1 Connecting and Setting the Drive Unit

2.1.1 Connecting with Servo Drive Unit
Connect the optical communication cables from the NC to the each drive unit so that they run in a straight line from the
NC to the drive unit that is a final axis. Up to 11 axes can be connected per system. Note that the number of connected
axes is limited by the NC.
(Note) Refer to "Precautions for Using Optical Communication Cable" when handling and wiring optical
communication cable.
Cable application table
Panel internal wiring Panel external wiring

Cable
Under 10m 10 to 30m 10m or less 10 to 30m
G396 ○ × × ×
G395 ○ × ○ ×
G380 ○ ○ ○ ○
(Note) Wiring of over 30m can be applied when relaying the optical signal by optical communication repeater
unit. Refer to the specification manual of the drive unit for the details of the optical communication
repeater unit.
6
2.1.1.1 Connecting with MDS-D2/DH2 Series
CAUTION
1. Connect the NC and the drive units by the optical communication cables. The distance between the NC and the
final drive unit must be within 30m and the bending radius within 80mm.
2. For the main circuit wiring of the drive unit and power supply unit, the drive unit of 200V series is to be wired
with MDS-D2-CV, and the drive unit of 400V series is to be wired with MDS-DH2-CV.
3. A spindle drive unit that controls the high-speed synchronous tapping (OMR-DD control) has to be connected
on the farther side from the NC than the subject synchronous tapping control.
POINT
Axis Nos. are determined by the rotary switch for setting the axis No. (Refer to the instruction manual of Drive
unit.) The axis No. has no relation to the order for connecting to the NC.
(1) When using one power supply unit

Connect the largest-capacity spindle drive unit to the final axis of the NC communication bus in order to control the
power supply unit. The spindle drive unit must be installed adjacent to the power supply unit. In the system with
servo only, a servo drive unit for controlling unbalance axis must be installed in the same manner in the same way.
< Connection >
CN1A : CN1B connector on NC or previous stage's drive unit
CN1B : CN1A connector on next stage's drive unit
CN4 : Connector for communication between power supply unit (master side) and drive unit
MDS-D2/DH2-V2 MDS-D2/DH2-V1 MDS-D2-SP2 MDS-D2/DH2-SP MDS-D2/DH2-CV

1st/2nd axis 3rd axis 4th/5th axis 6th axis
(Final axis)
Connected CN4
to the NC
Optical
communication CN4
cable
The optical communication cables from the NC to the

final drive unit must be within 30m.
Connection when using one power supply unit
7
MITSUBISHI CNC
(2) When using two or more power supply units within a single NC communication bus system
Two or more power supply units may be required within a single NC communication bus system if the spindle drive
unit capacity is large. The drive unit receiving power (L+, L-) from each power supply unit must always have NC
communication cable connection at the NC side of each power supply unit. In the NC communication bus
connection example below, power supply [1] cannot supply power (L+, L-) to the 5th axis servo drive unit.
For basic connection information, refer to "(1) When using one power supply unit".
MDS-D2/DH2-V2 MDS-D2/DH2-V2 MDS-D2/DH2-CV MDS-D2/DH2-V1 MDS-D2-SP2 MDS-D2/DH2-SP MDS-D2/DH2-CV

1st/2nd axis 3rd/4th axis [1] 5th axis 6th/7th axis 8th axis [2]
(CV control axis) (CV control axis)
Connected
to the NC
CN4 CN4
Optical
communication CN4 CN4
cable
Power
cannot be
supplied
Connections when using two power supply units within a single NC communication bus system
CAUTION
1. The drive unit receiving power (L+, L-) from each power supply unit must always have NC communication bus
connection at the NC side of each power supply unit.
2. If two or more power supply units are connected in the drive system, confirm that the units are not connected
with each other through the L+ and L- lines before turning ON the power. Also make sure that the total capacity
of the drive units connected to the same power supply unit meets the unit's selected capacity.
8
2.1.1.2 Connecting with MDS-DM2 Series
CAUTION
1.Connect the NC and the drive units by the optical communication cables. The distance between the NC and the
2.A spindle drive unit that controls the high-speed synchronous tapping (OMR-DD control) has to be connected
on the farther side from the NC than the subject synchronous tapping control.
Thus, if you use an MDS-DM2 unit for servo control of the high-speed synchronous tapping, combinable
spindle drive is that of the MDS-DM2 unit only.
(1) When using only MDS-DM2-SPV Series

MDS-DM2-SPV3
Spindle:1st axis
Servo:2nd/3rd/4th axis
Connected
to the NC
Optical
communication
cable
(2) When using the MDS-D2 unit together

MDS-D2-V2 MDS-D2-SP MDS-D2-CV MDS-DM2-SPV3
5th/6th axis 7th axis Spindle:1st axis
(Final axis) Servo:2nd/3rd/4th axis
Connected CN4
to the NC
Optical
communication CN4
cable

POINT
For MDS-DM2-SPV Series, axis Nos. are fixed as follows.
1st axis : spindle
2nd axis : servo L axis
3rd axis : servo M axis
4th axis : servo axis (only MDS-DM2-SPV3)
9
MITSUBISHI CNC
2.1.1.3 Connecting with MDS-DJ Series
CAUTION
1. Connect the NC and the drive units by the optical communication cables. The distance between the NC and the
2. A spindle drive unit that controls the high-speed synchronous tapping (OMR-DD control) has to be connected
on the farther side from the NC than the subject synchronous control.
POINT
Axis Nos. are determined by the rotary switch for setting the axis No. (Refer to the instruction manual of drive
unit.) The axis No. has no relation to the order for connecting to the NC.
＜ Connection ＞
CN1A:CN1B connector on NC or previous stage's drive unit
CN1B:CN1A connector on next stage's drive unit
MDS-DJ-V1 MDS-DJ-V1 MDS-DJ-V1 MDS-DJ-SP

1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis
Connected
to the NC
Optical
communication
cable

10
2.2 Setting the Rotary and DIP Switches

2.2.1 MDS-D2/DH2 Series
(1) Setting the rotary switch
Set the axis number with the rotary switch.
<Drive unit>
1-axis 2-axis 3-axis 1-axis 2-axis

servo drive unit servo drive unit servo drive unit spindle drive unit spindle drive unit
(MDS-D2/DH2-V1) (MDS-D2/DH2-V2) (MDS-D2-V3) (MDS-D2/DH2-SP) (MDS-D2-SP2)
L axis M axis L axis M axis S axis

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#
$ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $
% % % % % % % % %
& & & & & & & & &
' ' ' ' ' ' '
( '
( '
(
(
(
(
(
(
(

MDS-D2/DH2-V1/V2/SP, MDS-D2-V3/SP2 setting
Rotary switch setting Axis No.

0 1st axis
1 2nd axis
2 3rd axis
3 4th axis
4 5th axis
5 6th axis
6 7th axis
7 8th axis
8 9th axis
9 10th axis
A 11th axis
B
C
D Not possible
E
F
11
MITSUBISHI CNC
<Power supply unit>
Power supply unit

(MDS-D2/DH2-CV)

#
$
%
&
'
(

MDS-D2/DH2-CV setting
When not using the external emergency stop: Set SW1 to "0"
When using the external emergency stop: Set SW1 to "4"
*Any other settings are prohibited.
(2) Setting the DIP switch

As a standard setting, turn the all DIP switches OFF.
The switches are OFF when facing bottom as illustrated.
Turning these switches ON sets the corresponding axis to the unused axis.
Carry out the unused axis setting when you use the multi-axes drive unit that has any unused axis.
(A) (B) (C)
(A) Used to set L axis to an unused axis

(B) Used to set M axis to an unused axis
(C) Used to set S axis to an unused axis
12
2.2.2 MDS-DM2 Series

The setting of the axis number is fixed as follows in the MDS-DM2 Series.
Setting the MDS-DM2 Details

1st axis Spindle axis
2nd axis L-axis
3rd axis M-axis
4th axis S-axis (Only MDS-DM2-SPV3/SPHV3)
When using the MDS-DM2 series and MDS-DJ/D2/DH2 together, set MDS-DJ/D2/DH2 axis numbers from 4th axis
or 5th axis.
2.2.3 MDS-DJ Series

Set the axis number with the rotary switch.
MDS-DJ-V1 MDS-DJ-SP
678 9A 678 9A
5 B 5 B
4 C 4 C
3 D 3 D
21 FE 21 FE
0 0
Rotary switch setting Axis No.

0 1st axis
1 2nd axis
2 3rd axis
3 4th axis
4 5th axis
5 6th axis
6 7th axis
7 8th axis
8 9th axis
9 10th axis
A 11th axis
B
C
D Not possible
E
F
13
MITSUBISHI CNC
2.3 Connecting the Batteries

2.3.1 Control Unit Battery
The battery is not connected when the machine is delivered. Be sure to connect the battery before
starting up.
A lithium battery in the control unit battery holder retains parameter settings, machining programs and the like, which
requires to be backed up at the power OFF.
Battery Q6BAT
Battery cumulative data holding time 45,000 hours (At 0 to 45°C. The life will be shorter if the temperature is high.)
Battery life Approx. 5 years (from date of battery manufacture)
[Installation method]
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Confirm that the control unit LED, 7-segment display, etc., are all OFF.
(3) Open the battery cover of the control unit. Pull the right side of the battery cover toward front.
(4) Fit the new battery into the battery holder.
(5) Insert the connector connected to the new battery into the BAT connector. Pay attention to the connector
orientation: do not insert backwards.
(6) Close the front cover of the control unit. At this time, confirm that the cover is closed by listening for the "click"
sound when the latch catches.
Battery cover
Battery
Battery holder
BAT connector
[Precautions for handling battery]

(1) Do not disassemble the battery.
(2) Do not place the battery in flames or water.
(3) Do not pressurize and deform the battery.
(4) This is a primary battery so do not charge it.
CAUTION
Do not short-circuit, charge, overheat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.
14
2.3 Connecting the Batteries
2.3.2 Servo Drive Unit Battery

(Note) The battery connection is not necessary unless the drive unit employs absolute position detection. (Spindle
drive unit does not require the battery, because the unit does not employ absolute position detection.)
There are batteries as shown below. Refer to the drive unit's specification manual for details.
Type ER6V-C119B A6BAT(MR-BAT) MDS-BTBOX-36 MR-BAT6V1SET
Unit and battery integration Drive unit with battery holder
Installation type Drive unit with battery holder type Dedicated case type
type type
Not applicable
Hazard class Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
(24 or less)
Up to 8 axes
Number of
Up to 3 axes (When using dedicated Up to 8 axes 1 axis
connectable axes
case)
Battery change Possible Possible Possible Possible
Battery
Battery connector A6BAT
(MR-BAT)
To the battery
holder バッテリ
Appearance
Battery Dedicated case

MDS-BTCASE
ER6V-C119B
Compatible
D2/DH2 ○ ○ ○ -
model
DM2 ○ ○ ○ -
DJ - - - ○
MDS-D2/DH2-V1/V2 and MDS-D2-V3

Connect the battery connector to the connector of the drive unit.
Battery connector connection part magnified figure
BTA
Battery connector
1 2 1 2
BTB
To battery holder
Battery 1 2
BT1
Connector for
connecting cell battery
Connect the cell battery with BT1.
15
MITSUBISHI CNC
MDS-DM2-SPV
Connect the battery connector to the connector of the drive unit.
Battery connector connection part magnified figure
BTA
12 12
Battery Battery
connector
Connect the cell battery with BT1.

To battery holder
BT1
Connector for
connecting cell battery
MDS-DJ-V1
Connect the battery connector to the connector BAT of the drive unit.
Pull out the connector with pushing

Place the battery in the holder, and the unlock lever.
then insert the plug into the BAT.
Pull out the case of

MR-BAT6V1SET with pushing the
unlock lever.
Install Remove
16
2.4 Connecting and Setting the Remote I/O Unit

2.4.1 Outline of the Remote I/O Unit
There are eight types of remote I/O unit (FCUA-DX1xx): DX10x, DX11x, DX12x and DX14x (x is "0" or "1").
Specifications are different as shown below. Each unit has one or two rotary switch(es) for unit No. setting, which links
the device Nos. (with X/Y).
Front
DX10x DX11x/12x DX14x
(H)
(A) (A) (E) (A)
(B) (B) (B)

(F)
(C) (C) (F) (C)
(D)
(D) (D) (G)
(A) Left input connector

(B) DIO specification switch
Currently not used. Always set to "OFF".
Front view View from A direction
OFF
(C),(F) Rotary switch

(D) Left output connector
(E) Right input connector
(G) Right output connector
(H) Analog input/output connector
17
MITSUBISHI CNC
Bottom
(A)
(B)
(C)
(A) RIO1 (From controller)

(B) RIO2 (To terminating resister or to next RIO unit)
(C) DCIN (24VDC input)
Number of
Machine control signals that can be
Unit type Left Right Total occupied
handled
stations
Digital input signal (DI) (Photocoupler
32 points - 32 points
DX10x (FCUA-DX10x) insulation) 1
Digital output signal (DO) (Non-insulated) 32 points - 32 points
32 points 32 points 64 points
DX11x (FCUA-DX11x) insulation) 2
Digital output signal (DO) (Non-insulated) 32 points 16 points 48 points
32 points 32 points 64 points
insulation)
DX12x (FCUA-DX12x) 2
Digital output signal (DO) (Non-insulated) 32 points 16 points 48 points
Analog output (AO) - 1 point 1 point
32 points - 32 points
insulation)
DX14x (FCUA-DX14x) Digital output signal (DO) (Non-insulated) 32 points - 32 points 2
Analog input (AI) - 4 points 4 points
Analog output (AO) - 1 point 1 point
(Note) "x" in the table is "0" when the output is sink type, and is "1" when the output is source type. The input is
changeable.
18
2.4.2 Connection and Station No. Setting on Remote I/O Unit

When connecting directly to the control unit
Control unit
Remote I/O unit
FCUA-DX1xx
Station No.1 - 8
0 7
Remote I/O 1ch

RIO1
FCUA-R211
Max. 8 channels
Max. input: 256 points (X000 to X0FF)
Max. output: 256 points (Y000 to Y0FF)
(Note) A remote I/O unit has one or two rotary switch(es) for unit No. setting, which links the device Nos. (with X/
Y). The rotary switch setting is as follows, from "0" to "7".
Station
Rotary switch
No.
1 0
2 1
3 2
4 3
5 4
6 5
7 6
8 7
19
MITSUBISHI CNC
When connecting to the operation panel I/O unit
Control unit
Operation panel I/O unit Remote I/O unit

FCU7-DX710/711 FCUA-DX1xx
Occupies
Station No.3 - 6
the station No. 1, 2, 7, 8
2 5
CG71 Remote I/O 3ch
RIO3 FCUA-R211
G011
Max. 4 channels
Max. input: 64 points (X200 to X23F) Max. input: 128 points (X240 to X2BF)
Max. output: 64 points (Y200 to Y23F) Max. output: 128 points (Y240 to Y2BF)
FCU7-DX720/721
/730/731
Occupies Station No.4 - 6
the station No. 1, 2, 3, 7, 8
3 5
Remote I/O 3ch
G011 RIO3 FCUA-R211
Max. 3 channels
Max. input: 96 points (X200 to X25F) Max. input: 96 points (X260 to X2BF)
Max. output: 96 points (Y200 to Y25F) Max. output: 96 points (Y260 to Y2BF)
(Note) Operation panel I/O unit occupies the specified Nos. of stations. (Station No. 7 and 8 are reserved for
manual pulse generator.)
RIO3 can use either four stations (3rd to 6th) or three stations (4th to 6th) which depends on the
operation panel I/O unit type.
20
2.4.3 Station No. Setting when Using Multiple Remote I/O Units
Multiple remote I/O units can be used, as long as the total No. of occupied stations connected with serial links is
eight or less. (three/four or less when connected to the operation panel I/O unit).
Unit type Number of occupied stations

FCUA-DX10x 1
FCUA-DX11x 2
FCUA-DX12x 2
FCUA-DX14x 2
When using multiple remote I/O units, a characteristic station No. must be set for each unit. The FCUA-DX10x unit
has one rotary switch, FCUA-DX11x, DX12x and DX14x unit have two. Each of these switches must be set to a
characteristic station No. within a range of 0 to 7 (2 or 3 to 5 when connected to the operation panel I/O unit).
When connecting directly to the control unit

Setting example 1
FCUA-DX100/101
0
Total number of occupied stations: 1
Setting example 2
FCUA-DX110/111
or
FCUA-DX100/101 FCUA-DX120/121
＋＋
0 1 2
Number of occupied stations: 1 2

21
MITSUBISHI CNC
Setting example 3
FCUA-DX110/111
or
FCUA-DX120/121
＋＋＋＋
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Number of occupied stations: 2 2 2 2

Total number of occupied stations: 8 (Maximum configuration)
22
When connecting to the operation panel I/O unit

Station No. 1, 2, 7, 8 (or 1, 2, 3, 7, 8) are occupied by the operation panel I/O unit. (Station No. 7 and 8 are reserved
for manual pulse generator.)
The maximum numbers of stations and I/O points assigned to remote I/O unit(s) via RIO3 are as follows.
Remote I/O
Max. number of stations (RIO3 Max. number of I/O points
Operation panel I/O unit type Rotary switch
connection) (RIO3 connection)
Setting range
FCU7-DX710 4 stations (No. 3 to 6) 128 points/128 points 2 to 5
FCU7-DX711 4 stations (No. 3 to 6) 128 points/128 points 2 to 5
FCU7-DX720/730/721/731 3 stations (No. 4 to 6) 96 points/96 points 3 to 5
Setting example 1
FCU7-DX710/711 FCUA-DX100/101
Number of occupied stations: 1

Setting example 2
FCU7-DX710/711 FCUA-DX110/111 FCUA-DX110/111

or or
FCUA-DX120/121 FCUA-DX120/121
＋＋
2 3 4 5

23
MITSUBISHI CNC
Setting example 3
FCU7-DX720/721 FCUA-DX110/111
/730/731 FCUA-DX100/101 or
FCUA-DX120/121
＋＋
3 4 5

24
2.4.4 Device No. Assignment

The devices used by the PLC are determined as follows after the station Nos. are set with the rotary switches.
Device No. read in Output device No. Analog output (AO)

Rotary switch No.
RIO channel 1 RIO channel 1 RIO channel 1
0 X00 to X1F Y00 to Y1F(Y0F)
1 X20 to X3F Y20 to Y3F(Y2F)
2 X40 to X5F Y40 to Y5F(Y4F) The rotary switches
3 X60 to X7F Y60 to Y7F(Y6F) correspond to the file
4 X80 to X9F Y80 to Y9F(Y8F) registers R200 to R207 in
5 XA0 to XBF YA0 to YBF(YAF) order of small numbers.
6 XC0 to XDF YC0 to YDF(YCF)

7 XE0 to XFF YE0 to YFF(YEF)
Device No. read in Output device No. Analog output (AO)

Rotary switch No.
RIO channel 3 RIO channel 3 RIO channel 3
0 - -
1 - -
2 X240 to X25F (*1) Y240 to Y25F(Y24F) (*1)
The rotary switches
3 X260 to X27F Y260 to Y27F(Y26F) correspond to the file
4 X280 to X29F Y280 to Y29F(Y28F) registers R200 to R203 in
5 X2A0 to X2BF Y2A0 to Y2BF(Y2AF) order of small numbers.
6 - -
7 - -
The values shown in parentheses are the device range of the card mounted to the right side of the unit.
(*1) Only for FCU7-DX710/DX711
25
MITSUBISHI CNC
(Note) When the analog output is attached to multiple RIO channels, up to four channels can be used in the following
order of priority.
(1) RIO channel 1, (2) RIO channel 3
(Ex.) When the analog output is equipped to RIO channel 1 and RIO channel 3.
RIO3
AO
RIO1
Control unit Sixth station
AO AO RIO unit Operation panel I/O unit

(M700VS/M70V/E70)
Fourth Second
station station
#3024 sout R register Allocation of AO

2 R200 (AO1) 2nd station of RIO 1
3 R201 (AO2) 4th station of RIO 1
4 R202 (AO3) 6th station of RIO 3
5 R203 (AO4) -
CAUTION
The analog output R registers are allocated in ascending order of channels and station numbers automatically.
Therefore, the analog output destination may change depending on the added option.
26
2.5 Initializing the NC Internal Data (SRAM)
2.5 Initializing the NC Internal Data (SRAM)

The initialization does not affect the settings of the option parameters.
(1) With the NC power OFF, turn the left rotary switch (RSW1) to "0" and the right rotary switch (RSW2) to "C". Then,
turn the power ON.
NCLD1 NCLD2
F 0 1 F 0 1
E 2 E 2
D 3 D 3
C 4 C 4
B 5 B 5
A 6 A 6
9 8 7 9 8 7
RSW1 RSW2
(2) The LED display will change to "08." -> "00" -> "01" -> ... "08". The process is completed when "0Y" is displayed.
NCLD1 NCLD2
(3) Turn the NC power OFF.
(4) Set the right rotary switch (RSW2) to "0".
NCLD1 NCLD2
F 0 1 F 0 1
E 2 E 2
D 3 D 3
C 4 C 4
B 5 B 5
A 6 A 6
9 8 7 9 8 7
RSW1 RSW2
(5) Turn the power ON again.
(Note) The initial screen after the initialization is displayed in English. Refer to "Setting on the System Setup Screen"
for how to set a language to display.
27
MITSUBISHI CNC
28
3
Setting Up with M70/M700/E70 SETUP INSTALLER
29
MITSUBISHI CNC
3 Setting Up with M70/M700/E70 SETUP INSTALLER
(Note) M70/M700/E70 SETUP INSTALLER is used to install language data other than Japanese and English, as well
as custom screens.
If you do not need the installation, go to the next section.
You can install the following data with M70/M700/E70 SETUP INSTALLER.
(1) Language data
(2) Custom data
- Custom screen
- PLC alarm guidance
(3) Custom startup screen
A CF card is used for the installation.

It is recommended to use genuine CF cards. MITSUBISHI is unable to guarantee the machine operation when a
commercially available CF card is used. In that case, performance check must be made carefully by machine tool
builder.
A genuine CF card dedicated for MITSUBISHI CNC is available for sale. Please contact our sales office in your area for
purchasing.
30
3.1 Compatible Data and Folder Configuration in the CF Card
3.1 Compatible Data and Folder Configuration in the CF Card

(1) M70/M700/E70 SETUP INSTALLER compatible data
Type Data Details Remarks

lang0_xxx.bin Language data (for FROM) Language
identification string is
Language data Language data (for expansion shown instead of xxx.
lang1_xxx.bin (ex. jpn: Japanese,
FROM)
fra: French)
Custom screen
Interpreter data and object data
module
A setting file to register custom
config.ini
screens
A setting file to register custom
screens on the menus and
Custom data customdef.ini
function buttons located to the
default screen
A setting file to register a name
customload.txt
and a load order of the object data
PLC alarm guidance HTML/JPEG files to be displayed
data in the PLC alarm guidance
A bitmap file to be displayed on Color: 256 colors
Custom startup
startupscreen.bmp the initial screen when the power (8 bit) Size:
screen
is turned ON 640 * 440
(2) Folder configuration in the CF card

The following shows the folder configuration of the M70/M700/E70 SETUP INSTALLER compatible data which is
stored in the CF card.
CF Card Lang (language data folder)
A0 (folder labeled by version)
lang0_jpn.bin (Japanese language data for FROM)
:
:
A1 (folder labeled by version)
custom (custom data folder)
PLCAlarm (PLC alarm guidance folder)
PLCAlarm_0001_jpn.htm (PLC alarm guidance data)

:
:
Custom screen modules
Setting files
startupscreen.bmp (bitmap data for custom startup screen)
Installer (installer folder)
installer.o (installer)
31
MITSUBISHI CNC
3.2 Operation Procedure

3.2.1 Starting Up M70/M700/E70 SETUP INSTALLER
(1) Insert the M70/M700/E70 SETUP INSTALLER CF card into the card interface on front of display unit.
(2) Turn the power ON while pressing the cancel key .

The M70/M700/E70 SETUP INSTALLER Mode Select screen will appear in about 15 seconds after the startup
screen appears.
(Note 1) Keep pressing the cancel key until the Mode Select screen appears.
(Note 2) Use the latest version of M70/M700/E70 SETUP INSTALLER (Ver. AC or later).
3.2.2 Installing Language Data

(1) Select [Lang Pack] on the Mode Select screen to switch to the Language Pack Install screen.
The language selection menus are displayed. The language currently installed is shown in the "Installed language"
field.
(Note) Pressing the menu changeover key (Next menu>>) displays the next language selection menus.
32
(2) Select the language to install with the menu key.

The language selected is shown in the "Now Selected Language" field.
(Note 1) To change the selected language, press [Clear] before selecting again.
(Note 2) The 2nd language can be selected when the expansion FROM is provided. (Cursor moves to the "2nd"
field after the 1st language has been selected.)
(3) Select [Install].
(4) A confirmation message appears. Select [Yes] to start the installation.
(Note 1) Selecting [No] displays the language selection menus.

(Note 2) The language data installation takes about 2 minutes. Do not turn the power OFF during the installation.
(5) A message appears when the installation has been completed.
(6) To close M70/M700/E70 SETUP INSTALLER, turn the power OFF and ON.
To return to the Mode Select screen, press the cancel key (<< Cancel).
33
MITSUBISHI CNC
3.2.3 Installing Custom Data

(1) Select [Custom Data] on the Mode Select screen to switch to the Custom Data Install screen.
(Note 1) Selecting [No] displays the previous menus.

(Note 2) Do not turn the power OFF during the installation.
34
3.2.4 Uninstalling Custom Data

(1) Select [Uninst] on the Custom Data Install screen.
(2) A confirmation message appears. Select [Yes] to start the uninstallation.

(Note 2) Do not turn the power OFF during the uninstallation.
(3) A message appears when the uninstallation has been completed.
35
MITSUBISHI CNC
3.2.5 Installing Custom Startup Screen

(1) Select [Custom StartUp] on the Mode Select screen to switch to the Custom Startup Screen Install screen.

(Note 2) Do not turn the power OFF during the installation.
36
3.2.6 Uninstalling Custom Startup Screen

(1) Select [Uninst] on the Custom Startup Screen Install screen.
(2) A confirmation message appears. Select [Yes] to start the uninstallation.
(3) A message appears when the uninstallation has been completed.

(Note 2) Do not turn the power OFF during the uninstallation.
37
MITSUBISHI CNC
3.3 List of Error Messages
Message Details
The first language has not been selected at the installation of
The 1st language is not selected.
language pack. Specify the first language again.
The same language has been selected as both first and second
The same language is selected. language at the installation of language pack.
Specify the language again.
The language data, selected as the 1st language at the
installation of language pack, does not exist.
The selected language does not exist.(1st)
Ensure that the language data has been stored in the CF card,
and that version of the data is appropriate.
The language data, selected as the 2nd language at the
installation of language pack, does not exist.
The selected language does not exist.(2nd)
Ensure that the language data has been stored in the CF card,
and that version of the data is appropriate.
The "custom" folder does not exist in the CF card.
The custom data does not exist.
Check the stored data in the CF card.
The "startupscreen.bmp" file does not exist in the CF card.
The file "startupscreen.bmp" does not exist.
Check the stored data in the CF card.
38
4
Setting the Parameters and Date/Time
39
MITSUBISHI CNC
4 Setting the Parameters and Date/Time
WARNING
Confirm the emergency stop state before carrying out the steps in this chapter.
4.1 Selecting the NC System Type

When employing the lathe system, set the parameter as follows.
(1) On the Mainte screen, select [Mainte] and then [Psswd input].
Enter "MPARA" in the setting area and press the INPUT key.
(Note 1) To enter the character "A", press the shift key and then "A" key. Do not press both keys at the same time.
(Note 2) The entered password is displayed as "*****". See below.
(2) Press the cancel key to return to the Mainte screen. Then select [Param].
(3) Select [Param number]. Enter "1007" in the setting area and press the INPUT key.
The screen changes to the base system parameters screen. The cursor moves to the "#1007 System type select"
field.
(4) Enter "1" in the setting area and press the INPUT key. (0: Machining center system 1: Lathe system)
(5) Turn the power OFF and ON.
40
4.2 Setting on the System Setup Screen

Set the following items on the system setup screen.
- Displayed language and the number of spindle connections
- Number of axes and command type for each part system
- Servo I/F connection channel and rotary switch setting for each spindle, as well as types of the motor and the
power supply connected to each spindle drive
- Servo I/F connection channel and rotary switch setting for each servo axis, as well as types of the motor,
encoder, and the power supply connected to each servo drive
(1) Enter the password on the Mainte screen.

(a) On the Mainte screen, select [Mainte] and then [Psswd input].
(b) Enter "MPARA" in the setting area and press the INPUT key.
(2) Select a displayed language.

(a) Press the cancel key to return to the Mainte screen. Select [Mainte] and then [System Setup].
(b) Set the No. of the language to display in "language displayed".
This setting is registered at the "#1043 lang".
41
MITSUBISHI CNC
(3) Carry out the spindle and servo axis settings. Set the following items.
Common setting
Number of spindles: Set the number of spindles connected to the NC. This setting is registered at "#1039
spinno (Number of spindles)".
Setting by system
Number of axes:
Set the number of axes for each part system and PLC. This setting is registered at "#1002
axisno (Number of axes)".
(Note) A setting error occurs if a value "1" or higher is set for any of the 2nd to 4th part
systems while the setting for the previous part system is "0".
Command type
Set the command type for each part system. This setting is registered at "#1037 cmdtyp
(Command type)".
(Note) Although this can be set individually for each part system, it will be shared by
the entire part system if specified for the machining center.
Setting by spindle area
Ch / Rotary SW No.
Set the servo I/F connection channel and the rotary switch No. (2-digit value) for each spindle
drive unit. This setting is registered at "#3031 smcp_no (Drive unit I/F channel No. (spindle))".
1st digit: Servo I/F connection channel
2nd digit: Rotary switch No.
Motor type:
Set the motor types that are connected to each spindle. Input the values as indicated at the
guidance display area. The input values are not converted to motor types.
Power Supply type:
Set the power supply types that are connected to each spindle drive unit.
Input the values as indicated at the guidance display area. The input values are then converted
to, and displayed as, power supply types. "0" means "No connection".
Setting by servo
Ch / Rotary SW No.
Set the servo I/F connection channel and the rotary switch No. (2-digit value) for each servo
drive unit. This setting is registered at "#1021 mcp_no (Drive unit I/F channel No. (servo))".
1st digit: Servo I/F connection channel
2nd digit: Rotary switch No.
Motor type:
Set the motor types that are connected to each servo axis.
to, and displayed as, motor types.
Detector type:
Set the encoder types that are connected to each servomotor.
to, and displayed as, encoder types.
Power Supply type:
Set the power supply types that are connected to each servo drive unit.
to, and displayed as, power supply types. "0" means "No connection".
42
Setting example (with three servo axes and a spindle)
X axis Y axis Z axis Spindle Power supply unit
43
MITSUBISHI CNC
(5) Write the parameter settings and format the system.

(a) Select [Param setting].
(b) The message "Set up parameter? (Y/N)" appears. Press "Y".
(c) The message "Param set ended. Format NC memory? (Y/N)" appears. Press "Y".
(d) The message "Format complete" appears when the format is completed.
(Note) When MDS-DJ Series is used, the regenerative resistor type must be set with the servo parameter "#2236
SV036" and the spindle parameter "#13032 SP032" in addition to the settings above.
44
4.3 Setting the Parameters for the Machine Specifications
4.3 Setting the Parameters for the Machine Specifications

(1) On the Mainte screen, select [Mainte] and then [Psswd input]. Enter "MPARA" in the setting area and press the
INPUT key.
(2) Press the cancel key to return to the Mainte screen. Then select [Param].
Set the parameters according to the machine specifications. Setting of the following parameters is necessary.
Base system parameters

"#1025 I_plane (Initial plane selection)"
"#1026 base_I (Base axis I)"
"#1027 base_J (Base axis J)"
"#1028 base_K (Base axis K)"
"#1029 aux_I (Flat axis I)"
"#1030 aux_J (Flat axisJ)"
"#1031 aux_K (Flat axis K)"
Base axis specification parameter

"#1013 axname (Axis name)"
Base common parameters

"#1038 plcsel (Ladder selection ... Set "0")"
"#1041 I_inch (Initial state (inch))"
"#1042 pcinch (PLC axis command (inch))"
"#1239 set11/bit1 (Handle I/F selection)"
"#1240 set12/bit0 (Handle input pulse)"
Axis specification parameter

"#2001 rapid (Rapid traverse rate)"
"#2002 clamp (Cutting feedrate for clamp function)"
"#2003 smgst (Acceleration and deceleration modes)"
"#2004 G0tL (G0 time constant)"
"#2007 G0tL (G1 time constant)"
Servo parameter
"#2201 SV001 (PC1 Motor side gear ratio)"
"#2202 SV002 (PC2 Machine side gear ratio)"
"#2218 SV018 (PIT Ball screw pitch)"
Spindle specification parameter

"#3001 slimt1 (Limit rotation speed (Gear: 00))"
"#3005 smax1 (Maximum rotation speed (Gear: 00))"
"#3023 smini (Minimum rotation speed)"
"#3109 zdetspd (Z phase detection speed)"
45
MITSUBISHI CNC
(Note 1) These parameters are not set on the system setup screen. Use the parameter screen to set them.
(Note 2) Refer to the section of "Explanation of Parameters" for the details of the parameters.
You can also refer to the parameter guidance display.
(Note 3) Parameters "#3001 slimt1 (Limit rotation speed (Gear: 00))" to "#3004 slimt4 (Limit rotation speed (Gear:
11))" are set with the spindle rotation speed which can be attained at the spindle motor's maximum
rotation speed. This value is obtained by multiplying the gear ratio on the value of "#13026 SP026 TSP
(Maximum motor speed)". Parameters "#3005 smax1 (Maximum rotation speed (Gear: 00))" to "#3008
smax4 (Maximum rotation speed (Gear: 11))" are set when the rotation speed is to be limited according
to the machine specifications, such as the spindle gear specifications. Up to four value can be set for
gear changeover.
Spindle motor rotation speed
SP026
(r/min)
0
smax1 slimt1 smax2 slimt2 smax(n) slimt(n)
Spindle rotation speed (r/min)
46
4.4 Setting Date and Time
4.4 Setting Date and Time

(1) Select [Time] on the Monitr screen.
(2) Select [Time setting] on the integrated time screen.

The time setting mode is entered. The cursor appears at the "#1 Date" position in the Run-out time display.
(3) Set the date and time to "#1 Date" and "#2 Time" respectively.
(4) Select [Self Diagn] on the diagn screen.
(5) Select [Battery clear] on the self diagn screen, and set "0" to battery used years.
(Note) If battery used years is not cleared, passed years from default date (2006/4/1) will be displayed on battery
used years.
47
MITSUBISHI CNC
48
5
PLC Program Writing
49
MITSUBISHI CNC
5 PLC Program Writing
In this manual, PLC program writing is executed by connecting a personal computer, which has GX Developer installed,
to the control unit. You can also save the PLC program in a CF card and write the data to NC using the external file
operations on PLC onboard. (M700V Series allows using a USB memory.) Refer to the PLC programming Manual for
details.
5.1 Setting the Ethernet Communication

(1) Click "Start" on the personal computer. Right-click on "My network" and select "Property".
(2) Right-click on "Local Area Connection" in My network window, and select "Properties".
(3) Click "Internet Protocol(TCP/IP)" on the "General" tab, and then click "Properties".
(4) Take a note of the displayed IP address and subnet mask.
50
5.2 Connecting the Control Unit and a Personal Computer
(5) Set the following addresses.

IP address: 192.168.200.2
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
(6) Click "OK" and close all the windows.
5.2 Connecting the Control Unit and a Personal Computer

Connect a personal computer, which has GX Developer installed, to the control unit.
GX Developer
LAN
(Note 1) GX Developer Version8 is required.

(Note 2) Use a cross LAN cable for the communication.
(Note 3) Carry out the Ethernet communication setting (IP address and so on) on the personal computer before
connecting it to NC.
51
MITSUBISHI CNC
5.3 Setting the Communication with GX Developer

(1) Start GX Developer on the personal computer. Open a created project.
(2) Select [Transfer setup...] from the [Online] menu.
(3) On the "Transfer Setup" screen, click "Ethernet board" in the "PC side I/F" field and double-click "Ethernet module"
in the "PLC side I/F" field.
(4) Select "QJ71E71" for "PLC", input "192.168.200.1" for IP address, then click "OK".
52
5.3 Setting the Communication with GX Developer
(5) Click "Other station(Single network)" in the "Other station" field on the "Transfer Setup" screen.
(6) Click "Connection test" to execute the test.
After confirming the message "Successfully connected", click "OK".
Click "OK" and close the "Transfer Setup" screen.
53
MITSUBISHI CNC
5.4 Setting the Parameters on GX Developer

(1) Double-click on [Parameter] --> [PLC parameter] in the project list on GX Developer. The "QnA Parameter" dialog
box appears.
(2) On the "Device" tab, confirm the followings are set.

Inside relay M: 10K
Retentive timer ST: 64 (Do not attach "K")
Confirm the other parameter settings.

(Note) There are two methods of ladder programming; independent program method and multi-program
method, which makes differences in parameter settings. An incorrect parameter setting in the ladder
programming may cause a write error.
For details of the parameter settings, refer to the PLC Programming Manual.
54
5.4 Setting the Parameters on GX Developer
(3) Check the "Allow" check box in the "Remote reset" field on the "PLC system" tab. Click "End".
55
MITSUBISHI CNC
5.5 Writing a PLC Program with GX Developer

(1) Select [Write to PLC...] from the [Online] menu.
(2) Check all the check boxes in the "Write to PLC" dialog box, and then click "Execute".
(3) GX Developer starts the PLC program writing. Confirmation dialog boxes appear during the writing. Select "Yes" on
all of them.
(Note 1) After the writing, select "Verify with PLC..." from the "Online" menu to check any error.
(Note 2) Do not turn the NC power OFF after the writing. Keep the power ON until the program is written to ROM.
56
5.6 Writing a PLC Program to ROM with GX Developer
5.6 Writing a PLC Program to ROM with GX Developer

(1) Select [Remote operation...] from the [Online] menu.
(2) Select "STOP" from the pull-down menu in the "Operation" field in the "Remote operation" dialog box. Click
"Execute".
57
MITSUBISHI CNC
(3) Select [Remote operation] again. Select "PAUSE" from the pull-down menu in the "Operation" field and click
"Execute". (Executing "PAUSE" starts the writing to NC ROM.)
(4) The message "Completed." appears when the writing to ROM is completed.
(Note) The program has been written to ROM although the on-board screen still shows the message "ROM-
Write incomplete".
The message will disappear when the screen has been changed.
(Note) You can also save the PLC program in a CF card and write the data to NC using the external file operations on
PLC onboard. Refer to the PLC programming Manual for details.
58
5.7 Setting the PLC Parameters
5.7 Setting the PLC Parameters

Select [Bit select] on the Mainte screen and set the bit selection parameters from #6449 to #6452.
See the following table for details of the parameters.
Symbol
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
name
#6449 Setting and Battery alarm /
Control unit display unit Counter C Integrated
warning PLC counter PLC timer
0 R7824 L thermal - detection timer ST
thermal retention program on program on
alarm on disabled retention
mgmt on
#6450 External 1 0
alarm Alarm/ Full screen R F
Operator Alarm
1 R7824 H - operator display of -
message message on method method message
change message
display on
#6451 GX Onboard Onboard
Developer editing not simple Onboard
2 R7825 L - - serial
communication
possible operation mode on
on on
#6452 Branch
destination Serial handy Extended PLC
3 R7825 H - terminal - - instruction -
label check
comm. on mode valid
valid
(Note 1) If the battery alarm/warning detection is disabled (#6449 bit4=1), "Battery alarm" signal and "Battery warning"
signal will not turn ON and the alarm messages will not be displayed either.
(Note 2) Functions marked with ■ may not be available for some machine types.
59
MITSUBISHI CNC
60
6
Confirming the Basic Operation
61
MITSUBISHI CNC
6 Confirming the Basic Operation
6.1 Checking Inputs/Outputs and Alarms

(1) Checking the input signals
(a) Select [I/F dia] on the Diagn screen.
(b) Confirm that signals turn ON/OFF properly on the IF Diagnosis screen.
(2) Checking the alarm display

(a) Select [Alarm message] on the Diagn screen.
(b) Check any other alarm than "Emergency stop EXIN" displayed on the Alarm screen.
62
6.2 Confirming Manual Operation
6.2 Confirming Manual Operation

6.2.1 Using the Manual Pulse Generator
(1) Select the handle mode.
(2) Set the handle feed magnification to a minimum value.
(3) Cancel the emergency stop. Confirm the READY lamp is ON on the keyboard.
(Note) If any abnormal noise or vibration occurs, execute an emergency stop and take a measure against
vibration. (Refer to "First Measure Against Vibration".)
(4) Select an axis and turn the manual pulse generator by one scale. Confirm the direction and the amount of the
movement on the current position display.
If the display is not correct, check parameters, PLC programs and devices' connections.
(5) Turn the manual pulse generator and confirm the direction and the amount of the machine's movement.
If the display is not correct, check parameters.
(Related parameters: "#1018 ccw (Motor CCW)", "#2201 PC1 (Motor side gear ratio)", "#2202 PC2 (Machine side
gear ratio)", "#2218 PIT (Ball screw pitch)" and so on)
(Note) Take care of the machine's movement range during the operation.
(6) Check the rest of the axes for each with the same operation as above.
6.2.2 Using JOG Feed

(1) Select JOG mode.
(2) Set the manual feed rate to 100mm/min.
(3) Cancel the emergency stop. Confirm the READY lamp is ON on the keyboard.
(Note) If any abnormal noise or vibration occurs, execute an emergency stop and take a measure against
vibration. (Refer to "First Measure Against Vibration". )
(4) Select an axis, press the JOG feed button and move the axis to safe area. Confirm the direction and the amount of
the movement on the current position display.
If the display is not correct, check parameters, PLC programs and devices' connections.
(5) Confirm the direction and the amount of machine's movement.

If the display is not correct, check parameters.
(Related parameters: "#1018 ccw (Motor CCW)", "#2201 PC1 (Motor side gear ratio)", "#2202 PC2 (Machine side
gear ratio)", "#2218 PIT (Ball screw pitch)" and so on)
(Note) Take care of the machine's movement range during the operation.
(6) Check the rest of the axes for each with the same operation as above.
63
MITSUBISHI CNC
6.3 Servo Simplified Adjustment
6.3.1 First Measure Against Vibration

Setting the filter can reduce the vibration.
(1) Select [Drv mon] and then [Servo unit] on the Diagn screen. See the displayed value in "AFLT frequency".
(Note) The screen above is when NC parameters have default values.
(2) Select [Param] and then [Servo param] on the Mainte screen. Set the AFLT frequency value you saw at (1) to
"#2238 SV038 FHz1 (Notch filter frequency 1)".
(Note) The screen above is when NC parameters have default values.
If the vibration is not reduced by the measure, refer to the manuals of the drive unit you are using.
64
6.3 Servo Simplified Adjustment
6.3.2 Outline of NC Analyzer

With NC Analyzer, the attribute of the servo motor system is measured and the bode diagram is output by activating the
motor with vibration signals and measuring/analyzing the machine characteristics. And the servo waveform
measurement function is supported, too.
NC Analyzer
<Function>
Waveform measurement function
Frequency response : Measures the frequency response (speed command - speed FB) of speed loop for the
measurement designated axis. The result will be presented as Bode diagram.
Frequency response : Measures the frequency response (torque command - speed FB) of machine system for the
measurement of machine designated axis. The result will be presented as Bode diagram.
Measurement function : Measures the Time-series data measurement, Circular error measurement, Synchronous
(with program creation tapping error measurement, Arbitrary path measurement.
function)
Automatic adjustment function
Program creation : Creates machining programs for adjustment.

Initial notch filter setup : Automatically adjusts the notch filter when the initial resonance is large.
Velocity loop gain adjustment : Automatically adjusts the notch filter and the speed loop gain.
Time constant adjustment : Automatically adjusts the acceleration/deceleration time constant.
Position loop gain adjustment : Automatically adjusts the position loop gain.
Lostmotion adjustment : Automatically adjusts the quadrant protrusion amount of the designated axis.
Lostmotion 3 adjustment : Automatically adjusts the lost motion type 3 for the quadrant protrusion amount of the
designated axis.
Environment setup
Communication path setup : Sets the path to communicate with NC. The model of connected NC is selected.
Parameter setup : Saves/changes the servo parameters.
For details, refer to "NC Analyzer instruction manual" (IB-1501086).

Former MS Configurator can be used. For detail, refer to "MS Configurator instruction manual"(IB-1500154).
65
MITSUBISHI CNC
66
7
Setting the Position Detection System
67
MITSUBISHI CNC
7 Setting the Position Detection System
There are two kinds of position detection system: one is "relative position detection", which establishes the reference
position (zero point) at every CNC power-ON; the other is "absolute position detection", which allows to start the
operation without establishing the reference position (zero point) again after the CNC power-ON.
7.1 Adjusting the Absolute Position Detection System

There are four types of the absolute position zero point initialization set: "marked point alignment method", "marked point
alignment method II", "machine end stopper method", and "dog-type".
Set the parameter "#2049 type (Absolute position detection method)" for the type and method of absolute position zero
point initialization set.
The required components differ depending on the detection method.
Marked point Marked point

Machine end stopper method Dog type
alignment method I alignment method II
Required
None None Machine end stopper Dog, dog-sensor
component
#2049 type 2 4 1 3
The position where the table is pushed
The first grid point
against the machine end stopper.
which is returned from The position where the The first grid point after
Basic position Or the first grid pointed which is
where the mark is marks are aligned. the dog OFF.
returned from where the table is pushed
aligned.
against the machine end stopper.
7.1.3.1 Machine End Stopper Method:
7.1.1 Marked Point 7.1.2 Marked Point Automatic Initialization
Reference 7.1.3.3 Dog-type
Alignment Method I Alignment Method II 7.1.3.2 Machine End Stopper Method:
Manual Initialization
Each method has the following characteristics

(1)Marked point alignment method I
Align the table side’s mark and the machine side’s mark.
The first grid point which is returned from the marks are aligned is determined as the basic position.
Because the first grid point which is returned from the marks are aligned is determined as the basic position, the
reproducibility is kept even the position information is lost due to runnning out of battery etc.
(2) Marked point alignment method II

Align the table side’s mark and the machine side’s mark.
The position where the marks are aligned is determined as the basic position.
Because the position where the marks are alinged is determined as the basic position, the reproductivity is low if the
position information is lost due to running out of battery etc.
(3) Machine end stopper method

[When #2059 zerbas = 0]
Push the table against the machine end stopper.
The position where the table is pushed against the machine end stopper is determined as the basic position.
[When #2059 zerbas = 1]
Push the table against the machine end stopper.
The first grid point which is returned from where the table is pushed against the machine end stopper is
determined as the basic position.
There are two types of the machine end stopper method: automatic initialization and manual initialization.
When the automatic initialization is applied, the axis travels automatically after the JOG is started.
When the manual initialization is applied, the axis travels by handle mode or JOG mode while confirming each
operation.
68
(4) Dog method

This method requires a dog sensor.
Move the table until the dog is kicked, and the first grid point after the dog OFF is determined as the basic position.
The parameters for the approach speed and grid mask amount etc. need to be adjusted.
7.1.1 Marked Aligment Method I

(1) Select [Param] -> [Abs.Posit.Param.] in the maintenance screen.
Set the following parameters in the "Abs.Posit.Param." screen.
Parameter Setting value

2 (marked point alignment method
#2049 type (absolute position detection type)
isselected)
#2050 absdir (basic Z - direction) 0/1
#2059 zerbas (zero point parameter) 1

(3) Select [Mainte] -> [To abs pos]. The absolute position setting screen will appear.
(4) Select [Axis select]. Enter the axis name (the name set in "#1022 axname2 (2nd axis name), and hold down INPUT
key.
(5) Select HANDLE (handle axis) or "JOG" mode.
(6) Set "1" to "#0 Absolute posn set".
(7) Enter an arbitrary value to "#2 Zero-P".
(8) Move the axis toward the mechanical basic position and align it to the marked point. (a in the diagram)
(9) Set "1" to "#1 Origin-P".
(10) Move the axis in the direction designated with the parameter "#2050 absdir".
(11) The axis reached the first grid point. (c in the diagram)
When the absolute position is established, [Complete] will appear in [State].
Select [Next axis] menu, and perform the absolute position initial set up for all axes.
Initialization start point a
b Machine end
Basic machine c stopper
coordinate system Reference (Mechanical
zero point position basic position)
Grid point
Zero point parameter (electric basic
"#2037 G53ofs" position)
#2 Zero-P "Machine end"
(Note 1) To change just the basic machine coordinate zero point, set "#0 Absolute posn set" and "#2 Zero-P", and then
turn the power OFF and ON.
(Note 2) If aligning axis on the marked point is attempted without passing the grip point once after turning the power
ON, the operation message "Not passed on grid" will appear. Return to a point before the last grid, and then
repeat from step of aligning the axis on the marked point.
(Note 3) If the first grid point is covered by the grid mask (#2028 grmask) as a result of return to the electric basic
position, the axis stops at the next grid point.
Note that zero-point shift amount (#2027 G28sft) is invalid.
(Note 4) Reconfirm the "absdir" setting if the machine does not move in the direction of "#2050 absdir". The machine
will move only in the positive direction when set to “0”, and the negative direction when set to "1".
69
MITSUBISHI CNC
7.1.2 Marked Point Alignment Method II

This is a method to align to the marked point (matchmark or marking line) on the machine.
(1) Select [Param] on the Mainte screen, then select [Abs pos param].
On the absolute position parameter screen, set "#2049 type (Absolute position detection method)" to "4" for the axis
for which the zero point is to be initialized.
(3) Select [Mainte] and then [To abs pos]. The absolute position setting screen appears.
(4) Select [Axis select]. Enter the axis name (in "#1022 axname2 (2nd axis name)") and press the INPUT key.
(5) Select the handle (handle axis) or JOG mode.
(6) Input "1" to "#0 Absolute posn set" on the absolute position setting screen.
(7) Input a value to "#2 Zero-P".
(8) Move the axis toward the machine basic position and align it to the marked point. ((a) in the following diagram)
Initialization start point (a)
Basic machine
coordinate system Reference Mechanical basic position
zero point position (Marked point)
Reference position
parameter
"#2037 G53ofs"
"#2 Zero-P"
(9) Input "1" to "#1 Origin-P" on the absolute position setting screen.
(10) When the absolute position has been completed, "State" area on the absolute position setting screen shows
"Complete".
Select [Next axis] and execute the absolute position initialization for all the axes.
(Note 2) If aligning to the marked point is attempted without passing the grid point even once after turning the power
ON, the operation message "Not Passed on grid" will appear. Return to a point before the last grid, and then
repeat from the step of aligning the axis on the marked point.
(Note 3) If the first grid point is covered by the grid mask ("#2028 grmask") as a result of return to the electric basic
position, the axis stops at the next grid point. Note that the zero point shift ("#2027 G28sft") is invalid.
(Note 4) This method is not interfered by the setting of "#2059 zerbas", and the basic position is always where the
marked point alignment is attempted.
70
7.1.3 Other Setting Method

7.1.3.1 Machine End Stopper Method: Automatic Initialization


1 (machine end stopper method
isselected)
#2054 clpush (current limit) 0 to 100
#2055 pushf (push speed) 1 to 999
#2056 aproch (approach point) 0 to 999.999
1 (on the grid point immediately
#2059 zerbas (zero point return parameter)
beforethe stopper)
The parameters other than "#2049 type" can be set in the "Zero point set" screen.
(3) Select [Mainte] -> [To Abs pos.]. The absolute position setting screen will appear.
key.
(5) Select [Auto init set] mode.
(7) Enter the value in "#2 Zero-P".
71
MITSUBISHI CNC
(8) Start JOG operation.
The axis moves automatically as follow.

1) The axis moves toward the machine end stopper at the push speed. (a in the diagram).
2) The axis pushes against the machine end stopper. After the current reached its limit continually during given
time period, the axis returns toward the approach point at the "push speed". (b in the diagram)
3) After arrived at the approach point, the axis moves toward the machine end stopper at the "push speed". (c in
the diagram)
4) The axis pushes against the machine end stopper. After the current reached its limit continually during the
given time period, the axis returns toward the grid point immediately before the stopper at the "push speed". (d
in the diagram)
If "#2059 zerbas" is set to "0" (absolute position origin point = mechanical basic position), the axis will stop
automatically at this point without moving in the opposite direction, and "Complete" appears in the [State] and
"0.000" in the [Machine end].
[State] will change as follow:

[Stopper1] -> [Zero-P. Rel.] -> [Stopper2] -> [Ret. Ref. P.]
(9) When the axis has reached the grid point immediately before the stopper (e in the diagram) and the absolute
position is established, "Complete" will appear in "State".
The distance between the machine end stopper and the grid point immediately before the stopper will appear in
[Machine end].
Initialization start point Push speed a
c
Basic machine coordinate system
Reference e d
zero point
position
Grid point
(electric basic "Machine end"
position) Machine end stopper
Reference position (mechanical basic
parameter position)
"#2037 G53ofs" "#2056 aproch"
"#2 Zero-P" (#2059 zerbas=1)
"#2 Zero-P" (#2059 zerbas=0)
"#2 Zero-P" depends on the setting of "#2059 zerbas".
72
(Note 2) If pressing against the machine end is attempted without passing the grip point once after turning the power
repeat from step of pressing against the machine end stopper.
(Note 4) Acceleration/deceleration during movement at the specified push speed is performed in smoothing-off
(stepfeed) mode.
(Note 5) If "0" is specified for "#2056 aproch" of the absolute position parameters, the machine zero point is regardedas
the approach point.
(Note 6) Automatic initialization is interrupted if one of the following events occurs. If it is interrupted, [State] indicates
"Jog Start" (after selecting the "Auto init set" mode if it is caused by mode change), so restart operation from
the step of JOG-start.
- An absolute position detection alarm occurs.
- Operation preparation signal turns OFF.
- The mode is changed.
- The system is reset.
If [State] is "Complete" before automatic initialization is started, "State" returns to "Complete" when power is
turned OFF and ON again without restarting the operation.
(Note7) Automatic initialization cannot be started in the following cases. The operation message "Can't start" will
appear if starting is attempted.
- When "#0 Absolute posn set" is not set.
- When the "#2 Zero-P" setting is inappropriate.
- When "#2055 pushf" is not set.
- When "Z71 Abs encoder failure 0005" has occurred.
In the above cases, if the "#2 Zero-P" setting is inappropriate, this means that the relation of "#2 Zero-P" and
"#2037 G53ofs" is inappropriate. That is, if "#2 Zero-P" is smaller than the "#2037 G53ofs", the machine end
stopper will be located between the basic machine coordinate system zero point and reference position; this
disables automatic initialization. (Refer to the following left figure.)
If "#2 Zero-P " is set to "0", the machine end stopper direction is unpredictable; this also disables automatic
initialization. (Refer to the following right figure.)
Machine end
Basic machine coordinate stopper
system zero point Reference position
(Mechanical
basic position)
Machine end stopper

(Mechanical basic
"#2 Zero-P" position)
Basic machine coordinate
system zero point
#2037 "G53ofs"
If the "#2 Zero-P" setting is "0", the
basic machine coordinate system
Looking from the basic machine coordinate system zero point, zero point is located on the machine
the reference position is located far beyond the machine end end stopper.
stopper, thus the reference position return cannot be carried out. The direction of axis movement is
thus unpredictable.
73
MITSUBISHI CNC
7.1.3.2 Machine End Stopper Method: Manual Initialization


1 (machine end stopper method is
selected)
#2054 clpush (current limit) 0 to 100
1 (on the grid point immediately
#2059 zerbas (zero point return parameter)
before the stopper)
The parameters other than "#2049 type" can be set in the "Zero point set" screen.

key.
(5) Select HANDLE (handle axis) or "JOG" mode.
(7) Enter an arbitrary value to "#2 Zero-P".
(8) Move the axis toward the machine end stopper. (a in the diagram)
(9) Press the axis against the machine end stopper. (b in the diagram)
The current limit is reached continually during the given time period. (c in the diagram)
The display for [State] changes from [Stopper] to [Release].
(10) Move the axis in the counter direction. (d in the diagram)
[Ret. Ref. P.] will appear in [State].
If "#2059 zerbas" is set to "0" (absolute position origin point = mechanical basic position), the axis will stop
automatically at this point without moving in the opposite direction, and "Complete" appears in the [State] and
"0.000" in the [Machine end].
(11) When the axis has reached the grid point immediately before the stopper (e in the diagram) and the absolute
position is established, "Complete" will appear in "State".
Initialization start point (a) (b)
(d) (c)
Basic machine coordinate system Reference (e)
zero point position
Grid point Machine end stopper

Zero return parameter (electric basic (Mechanical basic
"#2037 G53ofs" position) position)
"Machine end"
"#2 Zero-P" (#2059 zerbas=1)
"#2 Zero-P" (#2059 zerbas=0)
"#2 Zero-P" depends on the setting of "#2059 zerbas".
(Note 2) If pressing against the machine end is attempted without passing the grip point once after turning the power
repeat from step of pressing against the machine end stopper.
74
7.1.3.3 Dog-type
Set "3" for the axis for which the absolute position initialization is performed to "#2049 type (absolute position
detection type)".
key.
(5) Execute the manual or automatic dog-type reference position return.
(6) When the reference position return is completed and the absolute position is establised, "Complete" will appear in
"State".
(Note 1) If the dog-type reference position return is interrupted by resetting, the previous state ("Complete" or
"Illegality") will display in the [State] column.
(Note 2) With dog-type reference position return, reference position return can be executed again even if the [State] is
"Complete".
75
MITSUBISHI CNC
7.1.4 Precautions
7.1.4.1 Precautions common for the initilization operation
(1) The "#0 Absolute posn set" parameter (axis for which zero point is to be initialized) can be set simultaneously for all
axes or individually for each axis.
(2) The "#0 Absolute posn set" parameter cannot be turned OFF with the keys. It is turned OFF when the power is
turned ON again.
(3) "#2 ZERO-P" can be set at any time as long as "#0 Absolute posn set" is set to "1".
(4) The grid point must be passed at least once after turning the power ON before initializing the zero point. If the grid
point has not been passed, the operation message "Not passed on grid" will appear at the "Machine posn".
(5) When the absolute position is established, the required data will be stored in the memory.
7.1.4.2 Precautions common for the dogless-type absolute position detector

(1) Example of setting "#2 Zero-P" parameter
For the "#2 Zero-P" parameter, set the coordinate value of the absolute position origin point (mechanical basic
position or electrical basic position" looking from the basic machine coordinate system zero point.
"#2 Zero-P" = 50.0
(Example 1) To set the zero point Basic machine coordinate Absolute position
at 50.0mm before absolute system zero point origin point
position origin point on + end
(Mechanical basic
position or electrical
basic position)
"#2 Zero-P" = 400.0 Basic machine

(Example 2) To set the zero point coordinate system
at 400.0mm before the machine zero point
basic position or absolute position
origin point on - end. Absolute position (Mechanical basic
origin point position or electrical
basic position)
(Example 3)To set the basic machine coordinate system zero point on the grid point, calculate the "#2 Zero-P" parameter
setting value as shown below using the value displayed at "Machine end". "Machine end" shows the distance from the
mechanical basic position to the previous grid point.
(Note that when setting the electrical basic position coordinate value in "#2 Zero-P", the "Machine end" value does not
need to be considered.)
"#2 Zero-P" = 25.3
Basic machine coordinate Mechanical

To set the third gird point as the
system zero point basic position
zero point when the "Machine
end"display is -5.3 at the + end
basic position. (Example of 10.0 10.0
10.0mm grid interval.)
"Machine end" = -5.3
76
(2) Setting the reference position

The reference position can be set as shown below by setting the "#2037 G53ofs".
Reference Absolute position

"G53ofs" = 0 origin point
position
(Example 1) To set the reference
position to the same position as (Mechanical basic
the basic machine coordinate position or electrical
system zero point. basic position)
Basic machine "#2 Zero-P"
coordinate system
zero point
(Example 2)To set the reference

"G53ofs" = 200.0 Absolute
position at a position 200.0mm to position
the + side from the basic machine Reference position origin point
coordinate zero point.
(To set the basic machine Basic machine (Mechanical
coordinate system zero point coordinate basic position
300.0mm front of the absolute system "#2 Zero-P" = 300.0 or electric
position origin point.) zero point basic position)
77
MITSUBISHI CNC
7.2 Adjustment of Reference Position Return in Relative Position Detection

System
7.2.1 Dog-type Reference Position Return
7.2.1.1 Dog-type Reference Position Return Operation
In the dog-type reference position return, the axis moves as follows:
(1) Starts moving at G28 rapid traverse rate.
(2) Decelerates to stop when the near-point dog is detected during the movement. Then, resumes moving at G28
approach speed.
(3) Stops at the first grid point after leaving the near-point dog.
This grid point, where the axis stopped at (3), is called the electrical zero point. Normally, this electrical zero point is
regarded as the reference position.
(1) Reference position

G28 rapid traverse rate
Grid point (2)

G28 approach speed
(3)
Grid space
Near-point dog
Grid amount
Limit switch for
near-point detection
Direction of Electrical zero point

reference position return
The first reference position return after turning the power ON is carried out with the dog-type reference position
return. The second and following returns are carried out with either the dog-type reference position return or the
high-speed reference position return, depending on the parameter.
High-speed reference position return is a function that directly positions to the reference position saved in the
memory without decelerating at the near-point dog.
(Note) If reference position return has never been executed after turning the power ON and a movement command
other than G28 is executed, the program error (P430) will occur.
78
7.2 Adjustment of Reference Position Return in Relative Position Detection System
7.2.1.2 Dog-type Reference Position Return Adjustment Procedures

Adjust the dog-type reference position return with the following steps.
(1) Select [Param] menu from the maintenance screen, and then select zero point parameter screen by feeding the
page.
The zero point parameter screen appears.
(2) Set "0" for the following parameters on the [ZERO-RTN PARAM] screen.
Reference position shift amount (#2027 G28sft)
Grid mask amount (#2028 grmask)
(3) Turn the power OFF and ON, and then execute reference position return.
(Note) Use the switches on the machine operation panel to command "reference position return mode" and
operate the axis movement. The GOT project and the panel switches are made by the machine tool
builder.
(4) Select [Drv mon] screen from the diagnosis screen, and display the drive monitor screen. Feed the page and check
"Grid space" and "Grid amnt".
79
MITSUBISHI CNC
(5) Determine the grid mask amount according to the state as shown below.
Grid space
When is smaller Axis speed
2 Electrical zero point
(the first grid after the switch is turned ON and OFF)
than the grid amount
0
Reference position
Position
+
Grid point Near-point dog Grid mask
#2027 G28sft
Reference position
#2028 shift distance
Grid mask Grid space
OFF ON amount
2
Switch
Grid amount
Grid space
Grid space
Grid mask amount = Grid amount -
2
Grid space
When is larger Axis speed
2 Electrical zero point after the grid mask setting
than the grid amount Electrical zero point before the grid mask setting
(the exact point is set after the grid mask setting)
Reference position
Position
Grid space
Grid point
Near-point dog Grid mask #2027 G28sft
Reference position
shift distance
Grid space
OFF ON 2
Switch Grid amount

Grid amount
#2028 after the grid mask
Grid mask amount setting
Grid space
Grid mask amount = Grid amount +
2
(6) Set the determined grid mask amount for "#2028 grmask" of the [ZERO-RTN PARAM] screen.
80
(7) Turn the power OFF and ON, and then execute reference position return.
(8) Confirm the grid space and grid amount values on DRIVE MONITOR screen.
If the grid amount value is approximately half of the grid space, the grid mask amount has been set correctly. If the
value is not approximately half, repeat the procedure from step (1).
(9) Set the reference position shift amount (#2027 G28sft).

To designate the electrical zero point as reference position, set "0" to "#2027 G28sft".
(10) Turn the power OFF and ON, and then execute the reference position return.
(Note) The axis moves at the speed of "#2025 G28rap G28 rapid traverse rate".
The parameter "#2025 G28rap G28 rapid traverse rate" is usually set the maximum speed, which makes
the high-speed movement in the 2nd reference position return and later. Take extra care for the safe axis
movement.
(11) Set the machine coordinate system offset amount (#2037 G53ofs).
[Terms and parameters related to the dog-type reference position return]
Axis speed #2025 G28rap

(G28 rapid traverse rate)
Electrical zero point
#2026 G28crp
(G28 approach speed)
Basic machine coordinate Reference position

system zero point
Grid space (for the reference position return)
Position
Grid point Near-point dog Grid mask

#2027 G28sft
Reference position
shift distance
#2028 grmask
OFF ON Grid mask
amount Grid amount
Switch
#2030 dir (-)

(Reference position
return direction)
#2037 G53ofs
Electrical zero point

The first grid point after the dog OFF.
If the grid point is at the position where the near-point dog is kicked OFF, the position of electrical zero point may be at
the grid point where the dog is kicked OFF or at the next grid point because of the delay of the limit switch operation. This
causes a deviation of reference position by the amount of the grid space.
Setting the grid mask amount ("#2028 grmask") prevents this deviation.
Reference position
The base for position and coordinate.
The axis is positioned to this position by the manual reference position return command or G28 command in the
machining program.
The position is determined by shifting from the electrical zero point by the amount of "#2027 G28sft Reference position
shift amount".
81
MITSUBISHI CNC
Grid point
The position detector has a Z-phase that generates one pulse per rotation. The 0-point position of this Z-phase is the grid
point.
Thus, there is a grid point per rotation of the position detector, and the machine has many grid points at a regular pitch.
The grid point can be set at intervals of grid space by setting the grid space (#2029 grspc). Thus, multiple grid points can
be set per detector rotation.
Grid amount
The grid amount is the distance from where the near-point detection limit switch leaves the near-point dog to the grid
point (electrical zero point) as the dog-type reference position return is executed.
The grid amount can be confirmed on the DRIVE MONITOR screen.
After setting the grid mask, the grid amount shows the distance from the grid mask OFF to the grid point.
G28 rapid traverse rate (#2025 G28rap)

Set the feedrate for dog-type reference position return in manual operation and the automatic operation.
The rapid traverse rate (#2001 rapid) is applied for the feedrate during the high-speed reference position return.
G28 approach speed (#2026 G28crp)

Set the approach speed to the reference position after decelerating to a stop by the near-dog detection. Since the
approach speed is accelerated and decelerated in steps (no-acceleration/deceleration), the mechanical shock, etc. could
occur if the speed is too large. The G28 approach speed should be set between 100 and 300 mm/min., or within 500
mm/min. at the fastest.
Reference position shift amount (#2027 G28sft)

When shifting the reference position from the electrical zero point, set the shift amount.
The shifting direction can be set only in the reference position return direction.
If the reference position shift amount is "0", the grid point (electrical zero point) will be the reference position.
Grid mask amount (#2028 grmask)

The first grid point after the dog OFF is regarded as the electrical zero point.
If the grid point is at the position where the near-point dog is kicked OFF, the position of electrical zero point may be at
the grid point where the dog is kicked OFF or at the next grid point because of the delay of the limit switch operation. This
causes a deviation of reference position by the amount of the grid space. Thus, the position that the dog is kicked OFF
needs to be at the approximate center of the grid space.
Adjustments are made by setting the grid mask amount or changing the near-point dog.
Setting the grid mask has the same effect as lengthening the near-point dog. Refer to the previous procedures for setting
the grid mask amount.
Grid space (#2029 grspc)

Set the distance between grids.
Set either the ball screw pitch value (#2218 PIT) or the movement amount per motor rotation as the normal grid space.
To make the grid space smaller, set a divisor of the grid space.
<Calculation method for movement amount per motor rotation>

(1) When linear feed mechanism is a ball screw:
The movement amount per motor rotation = the motor side gear ration / the machine side gear ratio x the ball
screw pitch
(2) When linear feed mechanism is a rack and pinion:
The movement amount per motor rotation = the motor side gear ration / the machine side gear ratio x number
of pinion gear teeth x the rack pitch
(3) For the rotary axis:
The movement angle per motor rotation = the motor side gear ration / the machine side gear ratio x 360
82
Reference position return direction (#2030 dir (-))

The direction of the (axis) movement, after the dog-type reference position return is executed and the limit switch kicks
the dog and decelerate to stop, is set to either positive "0" or negative "1".
Set "0" if the reference position is in the positive direction from the near-point dog.
Set "1" if the reference position is in the negative direction from the near-point dog.
When reference position return direction is positive (+) When reference position return direction is negative (-)
Movement in (+) Movement in (-) Movement in (+) Movement in (-)

direction direction direction direction
(-) (+) (-) (+)
Dog Dog
Reference position Reference position
Axis with no reference position (#2031 noref)

Set "0" for the axis to carry out dog-type reference position return and the axis for absolute position detection.
Set "1" for the axis without carrying out reference position return during the relative position detection.
Machine coordinate system offset (#2037 G53ofs)

Set the amount to shift the basic machine coordinate system zero point position from the reference position.
When "0" is set, the reference position will be the position of the basic machine coordinate system zero point.
In “G53ofs” parameter, set the position of the reference position looking from the basic machine coordinate system zero
point with the coordinates of basic machine coordinate system. By the reference position return after the power is turned
ON, the machine position will be set and the basic machine coordinate system will be established.
Selection of grid display type (#1229 set01/bit6)

Select the grid display type on DRIVE MONITOR screen during dog-type reference position return.
0:Distance from dog OFF to electric zero point (including the grid mask amount)
1:Distance from dog OFF to electric zero point (excluding the grid mask amount)
83
MITSUBISHI CNC
84
8
Setting the Tool Entry Prohibited Range
85
MITSUBISHI CNC
8 Setting the Tool Entry Prohibited Range
Following functions are available for setting a tool entry prohibited range to detect over travels (OT).
(1) Stroke end (H/W OT)
The limit switch signal will detect the stroke end and limit the movement of the axis.
(2) Stored stroke limit (S/W OT)
Prohibited ranges are set with parameters.
(1) (2) (2) (1)
When stroke end (H/W OT) is set, the axis will move the distance required to decelerate and stop after H/W OT is
activated.
When stored stroke limit (S/W OT) is set, the axis will stop before the prohibited range of S/W OT including the
deceleration distance.
For safety, set the stroke end (H/W OT) and also, the stored stroke limit (S/W OT).
WARNING
Stroke end (H/W OT) and stored stroke limit (S/W OT) must always be set. If not, the tool may hit the machine end.
8.1 Stroke End (H/W OT)

The axis movement is controlled by the limit switch which detects the stroke end.
Signal device No. is allocated by the following parameters.
Parameter "#2074" and "#2075" will be valid only when "#1226 aux10/bit" is set to "1".
#1226 aux10/bit5: Set to "1" (assigning the signal is valid).

#2074 H/W OT+: Set the input device for assigning the OT (+) signal. (Setting range 0000 to 02FF (Hexadecimal))
#2075 H/W OT-: Set the input device for assigning the OT (-) signal. (Setting range 0000 to 02FF (Hexadecimal))
(Note 1) When "OT IGNORED" (R248) signal is set to ON, the stroke end signal associated with a specific control axis
can be ignored.
(Note 2) When parameter "#1226 aux10/bit5" is set to "1", do not set the same device No. to #2073 to #2075.
Setting the same device No. may cause the emergency stop. However, the device number will not be checked
for the axis which is set the signal to ignore (R248,R272).
86
8.2 Stored stroke limit (S/W OT)

8.2.1 Outline
Three tool entry prohibited ranges can be set with stored stroke limit I, stored stroke limit II, IIB and stored stroke limit IB.
Part of the prohibited range on the outside of stored stroke limit I can turn into a moveable range with stored stroke limit
IC.
Set the parameters to select the entry prohibited range, stored stroke limit II or IIB.
(II: Prohibits entering outside the range IIB: Prohibits entering inside the range)
(C)
(B)
(D)
(A)
: Moveable range
: Prohibited range
(A): Prohibited range by stored stroke limit I
(B): Prohibited range by stored stroke limit IIB
(C): Prohibited range by stored stroke limit IB
(D): Moveable range by stored stroke limit IC
If the axis is moving over the set range, an alarm will appear and the axis will decelerate to a stop.
If the prohibited range is entered and an alarm occurs, movement will be possible only in the direction opposite the entry
direction.
87
MITSUBISHI CNC
Valid Conditions of Stored Stroke Limit

When using the relative position detection system, the stored stroke limit is invalid until the reference position return
is completed after the power is turned ON.
The stored stroke limit can be validated even if the reference position return is not yet completed, by setting "#2049
type (Absolute position detection method)" to "9".
(Note) If the absolute position detection is valid when using the absolute position detection system, the stored
stroke limit will be validated immediately after the power is turned ON.
Stored Stroke Limit Coordinates

The stored stroke limit check is carried out in the basic machine coordinate system established by the reference
position return.
When the stored stroke limit has been validated while the reference position return has not been completed, the
stored stroke limit check is executed with the basic machine coordinate system at the time of last power-OFF as
temporary one.
When the 1st dog-type reference position return is completed after the power is turned ON, the proper coordinate
system is established.
(Note) While the reference position return has not been completed, only the manual and handle feed mode allow
the axis movement. Automatic operation is validated after the reference position return is completed.
CAUTION
Always set the stored stroke limit. Failure to set this could result in collision with the machine end.
88
8.2.2 Detailed Explanation

The stored stroke limit sets a prohibited range with the parameters or program command. The minimum and maximum
values of the prohibited range are set as the coordinate value (radius value) on the machine coordinate system for each
axis.
- The stroke check will not be executed when both maximum and minimum value are set to the same value.
- This function is valid after the reference position return if the system does not apply the absolute position detection
system.
- Before the machine enters the prohibited range, an error "M01 Operation error 0007" (S/W stroke end) will occur,
and the machine movement will stop. The alarm can be reset by moving the erroneous axis in the opposite
direction.
- During automatic operation, if an alarm occurs with even one axis, all axes will decelerate to a stop.
- During manual operation, only the axis that caused the alarm will decelerate to a stop.
- The axis will always stop at a position before the prohibited range.
- The distance between the prohibited range and stop position will depend on the feedrate, etc.
The stored stroke limits I, II, IIB, IB and IC are handled as follows.
Prohibit
Type ed Description Range setting parameters Validating conditions
range
- Set by the machine tool builder. "#2013 OT - - Reference position return is
- When used with II, the confined range (Soft limit I -)" completed.
I Outside
designated by the two functions becomes the "#2014 OT + - #2013 and #2014 are not set
movement valid range. (Soft limit I +)" to the same value.
- "#8210 OT- - Reference position return is
II Outside INSIDE" = "0" completed.
- Set by the user.
- Used with I. "#8204 OT-CHECK-N" - #8204 and #8205 are not set
- Select II or IIB with the
"#8205 OT-CHECK-P" to the same value.
parameters. - "#8210 OT-
IIB Inside - "#8202 OT-CHECK OFF" =
INSIDE" = "1" "0"
"#2061 OT_1B- - Reference position return is
(Soft limit IB-)" completed.
IB Inside - Set by the machine tool builder.
"#2062 OT_1B+ - #2061 and #2062 are not set
(Soft limit IB +)" to the same value.
- Reference position return is
"#2061 OT_1B- completed.
(Soft limit IB-)" - #2061 and #2062 are not set
IC Outside - Set by the machine tool builder.
"#2062 OT_1B+ to the same value.
(Soft limit IB +)" - "#2063 OT_1Btype (Soft limit
IB type)" = "2"
89
MITSUBISHI CNC
8.2.2.1 Stored Stroke Limit I

This is a stroke limit function used by the machine tool builder. The boundary is set with the parameters ("#2013 OT -
(Soft limit I -)" and "#2014 OT + (Soft limit I +)"). The outside of the set boundary is the prohibited range. The outside of
the set boundary is the prohibited range.
When used with the stored stroke limit II function, the confined range designated by the two functions becomes the
moveable range.
(A) (B)
: Moveable range
: Prohibited range
(A): Set value for (-) side
(B): Set value for (+) side
Point 1: "#2014 OT+ (Soft limit I +)" and
Point 2: "#2013 OT- (Soft limit I -)" are set with the coordinate values in the basic machine
coordinate system.
(Note 1) This function will be invalid if the same value excluding "0" is set for both "#2013 OT -" and "#2014 OT +".
90
8.2.2.2 Stored Stroke Limit II

The boundary is set with the axis parameters "#8204 OT-CHECK-N" and "#8205 OT-CHECK-P" or with program
commands. Either the inside or the outside of the set boundary is the prohibited range. Whether the inside or outside of
the range is prohibited is determined by "#8210 OT-INSIDE". When the inside is selected, this function is called stored
stroke limit IIB.
When using program commands, entry of the tool into the prohibited range is prohibited with G22, and entry into the
prohibited range is enabled with G23. The stored stroke limit II can be invalidated for each axis with setting "#8202 OT-
CHECK OFF" to "1".
Prohibited range
X: Outside Z: Outside X: Inside Z: Outside X: Inside Z: Inside
X X X
Z Z Z
: Moveable range
: Prohibited range
(1) Stored stroke limit II (When prohibited range is on outside)

When used with the stored stroke limit I function, the narrow range designated by the two types becomes the
movement valid range.
(C)
(A) (B)
: Moveable range
: Prohibited range
(C): Prohibited range by stored stroke limit II
Point 3: "#8205 OT-CHECK-P" and
Point 4: "#8204 OT-CHECK-N" are set with the coordinate values in the basic machine
coordinate system.
Points 1 and 2 are the prohibited range set with stored stroke limit I.
91
MITSUBISHI CNC
(2) Stored stroke limit IIB (When prohibited range is on inside)

A range except for that of the stored stroke limit I becomes the movement prohibited range.
(C)
(A)
(B)
: Moveable range
: Prohibited range
(C): Prohibited range by stored stroke limit IIB
Point 3: "#8205 OT-CHECK-P" and
Point 4: "#8204 OT-CHECK-N" are set with the coordinate values in the basic machine
coordinate system.
92
8.2.2.3 Stored Stroke Limit IB

The boundary is set for each axis with the axis parameters "#2061 OT_1B-" and "#2062 OT_1B+". The inside of the set
boundary is the prohibited range.
3 5
(D)
(C)
6
(A)
(B)
: Moveable range
: Prohibited range
Point 5: "#2062 OT_1B+ (Soft limit IB+)" and
Point 6: "#2061 OT_1B- (Soft limit IB-)" are set with the coordinate values in the basic machine
coordinate system.
(D): Prohibited range by stored stroke limit IB
Points 3 and 4 are the prohibited range set with stored stroke limit IIB.
93
MITSUBISHI CNC
8.2.2.4 Stored Stroke Limit IC

The boundary is set for each axis with the axis parameters "#2061 OT_1B-" and "#2062 OT_1B+". The inside of the set
boundary is the machine movement valid range.
This is valid when the axis parameter "#2063 OT_1Btype (Soft limit IB type)" is set to "2". Cannot be used with soft limit
IB.
2 3
: Moveable range
: Prohibited range
coordinate system.
94
8.2.2.5 Movable Range during Inclined Axis Control

By setting "#2063 OT_1Btype" to "3", the inclined axis control axis can be checked with the program coordinates using
the stored stroke limit IB/IC range setting ("#2061" and "#2062"). The stored stroke limit IB and IC cannot be used
together at this time.
By using this function with stored stroke limit I, the check can be carried out simultaneously with the actual axis and
program coordinate value. In this case, the range that does not fit into either of the following two prohibited ranges will be
the movable range.
: Moveable range
: Prohibited range
coordinate system.
95
MITSUBISHI CNC
8.2.2.6 Stored Stroke Limit for Rotation Axis

Stored stroke limits I and II are used as the stored stroke limit for the rotation axis. The area between the maximum and
minimum values of the prohibited range's parameters, which does not contain the 0 point of the basic machine
coordinate system, is the entry prohibited range.
The prohibited range parameters for the rotation axis can be set to establish "maximum value < minimum value"("#2014
OT+" < "#2013 OT-", "#8205 OT-CHECK-P" < "#8204 OT-CHECK-N"). This will be handled in the same manner as if
"maximum value > minimum value"("#2014 OT+" > "#2013 OT-", "#8205 OT-CHECK-P" > "#8204 OT-CHECK-N").
(Example)Stored stroke limit I (maximum value and minimum value of prohibited range parameter)
#2013 OT -: -70.000°
#2014 OT +: 60.000°
Stored stroke limit II (maximum value and minimum value of prohibited range parameter)
#8204 OT-CHECK-N: 30.000°
#8205 OT-CHECK-P: 80.000°
(A): Moveable range

(B): Prohibited range by stored stroke limit I
(Note) Do not use stored stroke limits IB, IIB or IC. Invalidate stored stroke limits IB, IIB and IC by setting the
parameters as shown below.
#8210 OT INSIDE: 0 (stored stroke limit II valid, IIB invalid)
#2061, #2062 set to same value (stored stroke limits IB and IC invalid)
8.2.2.7 Change Area for Stored Stroke Limit l

The range of the stored stroke limit l can be switched to a value set in the R register per axis. When the changeover
request signal is turned ON, the range of the stored stroke limit switches. An area change for stored stroke limit l can be
operated during automatic operation also. The current setting of the stored stroke limit l can be checked from the R
register.
Refer to "PLC Programming Manual" and "PLC Interface Manual" for details.
96
8.2.2.8 Precautions
(1) If the maximum value and minimum value of the stored stroke limit's prohibited range are set to the same value, the
following will occur.
(a) When the maximum value and minimum value are set to "0", if the outside is the prohibited range, the entire
range will be prohibited. If the inside is the prohibited range, the entire range will be the moveable range.
(b) If data other than 0 is set for the maximum value and minimum value, the entire range will be the moveable
range.
(2) The stored stroke limit IC is valid when the axis parameter #2063 is changed. If changed during automatic
operation, the function will be validated after the smoothing for all axes reaches 0.
(3) Make sure that the lower limit value of the stored stroke limit IC setting value is "smaller than the upper limit value".
(4) To set the inside of the specified range as a prohibited range, set the parameters as follow:
EX. There are 2 methods to set 10° to 70° as a prohibited range.
(Method 1) #2013 OT-: 70° #2014 OT+: 370°
(Method 2) #2013 OT-: 370°#2014 OT+: 70°
97
MITSUBISHI CNC
98
9
Confirming the Spindle Operation
99
MITSUBISHI CNC
9 Confirming the Spindle Operation
Confirm that the spindle operates properly in manual/MDI operation. Confirm the spindle rotation speed as well.
CAUTION
1. Do not adjust the spindle when possible risks associated with adjustment procedures are not thoroughly taken
into consideration.
2. Be careful when touching spindle's rotating section, or your hand may be caught in or cut.
9.1 In Manual Operation (with Manual Numerical Command)

(1) Select [MST] on the Monitr screen. Enter a spindle rotation speed (ex. 100r/min) in "S" field.
(2) Enter "3" in "M" field to rotate the spindle.
(3) Check the rotation speed of the spindle motor while the spindle is rotating. Refer to the section of "Confirming the
Rotation Speed".
(4) After checking the rotation speed, set "5" in "M" field or press the spindle stop button to stop the spindle rotation.
100
9.2 In MDI Operation
9.2 In MDI Operation

(1) Select MDI mode.
(2) Select [MDI] on the Setup screen. Enter a program to issue an S command.
Program example (to rotate the spindle at 100r/min for 5 seconds)

S100 M03 ;
G04 X5.0 ;
M05 ;
Press the INPUT key after entering the program.
(3) Press the automatic start button.
(4) Check the rotation speed of the spindle motor while the spindle is rotating. Refer to the section of "Confirming the
Rotation Speed".
9.3 Confirming the Rotation Speed

(1) Select [Drv mon] and then [Spindle unit] on the Diagn screen.
(2) Check the rotation speed of the spindle motor. (To obtain the spindle rotation speed, apply the gear ratio to the
motor's rotation speed.)
(Note) If the vibration is not reduced by the measure, refer to the manuals of the servo drive unit.
101
MITSUBISHI CNC
9 Confirming the Spindle Operation
102
10
Setting the System Lock
103
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 Setting the System Lock
System lock is a function for a machine tool builder to set a valid term to use the machine that machine user is using.
If a decryption code is not input by a specified limit, the servo ready finish signal will be forcibly turned OFF and the use
of the machine will be disabled.
Encryption key and decryption code need to be set in order to enable the system lock.
(Note) This procedure is required only when using the system lock.
10.1 Setting the Encryption Key

The system lock function is enabled by inputting an encryption key file while the system lock is disabled.
While the system lock is enabled, the date and time of the CNC cannot be set to a past date and time. Make sure to set
the date and time correctly before inputting the encryption key.
(1) Save the encryption key file on a compact flash (or USB memory).
(2) Insert the compact flash (or USB memory) card into the control unit.
(3) Select [Input/Output] on the Mainte screen.
(4) Enter an encryption key in the Input/output screen.
(a) Set the device name, directory and file name in the "A:Dev" area.
(b) Set "Memory" in the device section and "/CRE" in the directory section of the "B:Dev" area.
Contents in the directory and file name sections will be written over.
Directory section: "Encryption Key"
File name section: "ENCKEY.DAT"
(c) Press the menu key [Trnsfr A->B].
(d)When a confirmation message appears, press either [Y] or [INPUT].

If the encryption key has been set, “Setting complete normally” appears.
If the encryption key has not been set, the message “Can't write file for dev B” appears.
Check the encryption key file and set it correctly.
If an encryption key not intended to be input has been input, it can be reset by setting the correct encryption
key with the same process. Note that, however, an encryption key cannot be reset after an expiration date is
set by inputting the decryption code.
If the option is not provided, an error occurs when an encryption key is input.
(5) The system lock is enabled and an expiration date can be set.
104
10.2 Setting of Expiration Date
10.2 Setting of Expiration Date

Set an expiration date by inputting a decryption code file.
(1) Save the decryption code file in a compact flash (or USB memory).
(2) Insert the compact flash (or USB memory) into the control unit.
(3) Enter a decryption code in the Input/output screen.
(a) Set the device name, directory and file name in the "A:Dev" area.
(b) Select "Memory" from "B:Dev" device section and press [Dir] to display [Decrypt code] on menu key of the
screen.
Contents in the directory section and file name section will be written over by pressing [Decryption code].
Directory section: "Decryption Code"
File name section: "PASSCODE.DAT"
Setting "Memory" in the device section and "/RLS" in the directory section of the "B:Dev" area will be the same.
(c) Press the menu key [Trnsfr A->B].
(d) When a confirmation message appears, press either [Y] or [INPUT].

If the decryption code has successfully been set, “Setting complete normally” appears.
- If the warning message is on the screen, this message will be removed.
- If an alarm is activated, the alarm message will be deleted but SA will not turn ON. Turn ON the NC power
again.
- If the decryption code is wrong, the message “Can't write file for dev B” will appear.
- The ”Executing automatic operation” error occurs during program operation, and setting the code is
disabled.
(4) Turn the power OFF and ON after the setting is completed.
(5) Select [Self diag] on the Diagn screen and confirm that the system lock expiration date is indicated.
If the encryption key is already input and the time limit is not set, the time limit will not display.
105
MITSUBISHI CNC
10 Setting the System Lock
10.3 Display of Time Limit Warning and Alarm Notification

(1) If the number of days remaining before expiration reaches 7 or less, the warning “Z64 Valid term soon to be
expired” appears at the bottom right of the screen.
This warning appears at every cycle start after power ON until the expiry date comes, but can be cancelled by
Reset. Cycle start operation is enabled before the expiry date.
(2) If the expiry date is passed, the alarm message “Z65 Valid term has been expired” appears, which disables cycle
start operation. Reset signal is unable to cancel this alarm. Instead, enter the decryption code issued by a machine
tool builder, and then turn OFF and ON the CNC power.
If the expiry date is over during a cycle start operation, the operation will continue until Reset is input.
10.4 Caution
(1) The system lock function is enabled by setting an encryption key while the system lock is disabled. While the
system lock is enabled, the date and time of the CNC cannot be set to a past date and time. Be careful when setting
the date and time because they can be set forward only.
(2) If you turn OFF and ON the power after the time limit has expired, “EMG Emergency stop LINE” may appear at the
same time.
106
11
Setting the Deceleration Check
107
MITSUBISHI CNC
11 Setting the Deceleration Check
11.1 Function
The purpose of the deceleration check is to reduce the machine shock that occurs when the control axis feedrate is
suddenly changed, and prevent corner roundness. The check is carried out at block joints.
(1) Deceleration check during rapid traverse

The deceleration check is always carried out at the block joints (before executing the next block) during rapid
traverse.
(2) Deceleration check during cutting feed
The deceleration check is carried out at the block joints (before executing the next block) during cutting feed when
any one of the following conditions is valid.
(a) When the error detect switch is ON.
(b) When G09 (exact stop check) is commanded in the same block.
(c) When G61 (exact stop check mode) has been selected.
(3) Designating deceleration check
The deceleration check by designating a parameter includes "deceleration check specification type 1" and
"deceleration check specification type 2". The setting is selected with the parameter "#1306 InpsTyp".
(a) Deceleration check specification type 1 ("#1306 InpsTyp" = 0)
The G0 and G1 deceleration check method can be selected with the base specification parameter deceleration
check method 1 "#1193 inpos" and deceleration check method 2 "#1223 aux07/bit1".
Rapid traverse Other than rapid traverse command (G1:

Parameter Parameter
command other than G0 command)
Inpos G0 -> XX AUX07/BIT-1
G1+G9 -> XX G1 -> XX
(#1193) (G0+G9 -> XX) (#1223/BIT-1)
Command Command
0 0 No deceleration
deceleration check deceleration check
check
1 In-position check 1 In-position check
(Note 1) XX expresses all commands.
(Note 2) "#1223 aux07" is the part system common parameter.
(b) Deceleration check specification type 2 ("#1306 InpsTyp" = 1)

Rapid traverse and cutting feed in-position are designated with the parameter "#1193 inpos".
Parameter Command block

#1193 inpos G0 G1+G9 G1
Command deceleration Command deceleration
0 No deceleration check
check check
1 In-position check In-position check No deceleration check
(Note 1) "#1193 inpos" is the parameter per part system.
(Note 2) "G0" means the rapid traverse, and "G1" means the cutting feed.
108
11.2 Deceleration Check Method
11.2 Deceleration Check Method

(1) Command deceleration check
After interpolation for one block has been completed, the completion of the command system deceleration is
confirmed before execution of the next block. The time required for the deceleration check is determined according
to the acceleration/deceleration mode and acceleration/deceleration time constant.
(a) For linear acceleration/deceleration
Preceding block Succeeding block
Ts
Ts : Acceleration/deceleration time constant
Td : Deceleration check time
Td
Td = Ts + (0 to 14ms)
(b) For exponential acceleration/deceleration
Ts
Td
Td = 2 × Ts + (0 to 14ms)
(c) For exponential acceleration and linear deceleration
2×Ts
Td Ts

Td = 2 × Ts + (0 to 14ms)
The deceleration check time required during rapid traverse is the longest rapid traverse deceleration check time of
all axes. This check time is determined by the rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration mode and rapid traverse
acceleration/deceleration time constant of simultaneously commanded axes.
The deceleration check time required during cutting feed is determined in the same manner. It is the longest cutting
feed deceleration check time of all axes. This check time is determined by the cutting feed acceleration/deceleration
mode and cutting feed acceleration/deceleration time constant of simultaneously commanded axes.
109
MITSUBISHI CNC
(2) In-position check

When the in-position check is valid, the command deceleration check is carried out. After that, it is confirmed that
the servo system positional error is less than the parameter setting value, and the next block is executed.
The in-position check width can be designated with the servo parameter in-position width (SV024). Note that G0
and G1 can be designated independently with the axis specification parameter G0 in-position check width (G0inps)
and G1 in-position check width (G1inps). If both the servo parameter and axis specification parameter are set, the
larger value will have the priority.
Speed
G0inps(G1inps)
SV024
Command to motor
Motor speed
Next block command
Time
Judge completion of deceleration with
G0inps (G1inps) setting value
ON Deceleration check signal

OFF
If the SV024 setting value is larger, in-position check will end when the SV024 setting value is established.
110
11.3 Deceleration Check for Opposite Direction Movement Reversal
11.3 Deceleration Check for Opposite Direction Movement Reversal

As is mentioned in "(3) Designating deceleration check" in the section "Function", deceleration check cannot be
designated for G1 -> G0 or G1 -> G1, but it can be designated in the following manner only when the movement reverses
to the opposite direction in successive blocks. Deceleration check can also be executed if even one axis is moving in the
opposite direction while several axes are interpolating.
(1) Designating deceleration check for G1 -> G0 opposite direction movement reversal
If the axis movement reverses to the opposite direction in a G1 to G0 successive block, the deceleration check for
the movement in the opposite direction can be changed with the base specification parameter G1 -> G0
deceleration check (#1502 G0Ipfg).
Same direction Opposite direction
The acceleration is
excessive due to the G1
and G0 composite speed.
G0Ipfg: 0
G1 G0
G1 G0
G0Ipfg: 1
G1 G0
G1 G0 Commanded
deceleration
(2) Designating deceleration check for G1 -> G1 opposite direction movement reversal
If the axis movement reverses to the opposite direction in a G1 to G1 successive block, the deceleration check for
the movement in the opposite direction can be changed with the base specification parameter G1 -> G1
deceleration check (#1503 G1Ipfg).
Same direction Opposite direction
The acceleration is
excessive due to the G1
and G1 composite speed
G0Ipfg: 0
G1 G1 G1 G1
G0Ipfg: 1
G1 G1
G1 G1 Commanded
deceleration
111
MITSUBISHI CNC
11.4 Parameter
Base specification parameter
# Item Details Setting range

The definitions are changed with the setting of "#1306 InpsTyp
1193 inpos
Deceleration check specification type".
When
Select the deceleration check method for G0.
Deceleration
0: Command deceleration check 0/1
check method 1 is
1: In-position check
selected
When Select the deceleration confirmation method for the
Deceleration positioning or cutting command.
0/1
check method 2 is 0: G0, G1+G9 Command deceleration check
selected 1: G0, G1+G9 In-position check
Select the deceleration check method in G1+G9.
0: Command deceleration check in G1+G9
1: In-position check in G1+G9
Deceleration The deceleration check is not performed for the
1223 aux07/bit1 0/1
check method 2 commands except G1+G9.
When "#1306 InpsTyp deceleration check
specification type" is set to "1" (Deceleration check
specification type 2), this parameter will be invalid.
Select the parameter specification type for the G0 or
G1 deceleration check.
Deceleration 0: Deceleration check specification type 1
1306 InpsTyp check G0 is specified with "#1193 inpos", 0/1
specification type and G1+G9 with "#1223 aux07/bit1".
1: Deceleration check specification type 2
G0 or G1+G9 is specified with "#1193 inpos".
(2) Deceleration check during opposite direction travel

Base specification parameter

Select whether to perform a deceleration check when the
G1 -> G0
travel direction is changed from G1 to G0.
1502 G0Ipfg deceleration 0/1
0: Not perform
check
1: Perform
Select whether to perform a deceleration check when the
G1 -> G1
travel direction is changed from G1 to G1.
1503 G1Ipfg deceleration 0/1
0: Not perform
check
1: Perform
112
11.4 Parameter
(3) Designation of in-position check width

(a) Servo parameter

Set the in-position detection width.
Set the accuracy required for the machine.
SV024 In-position The lower the setting is, the higher the positioning
2224 0 to 32767 (μm)
INP detection width accuracy gets; however, the cycle time (setting time)
becomes longer.
The standard setting value is "50".
(b) Axis specification parameter

Set the in-position width for G0.
Between SV024 and this parameter, the parameter with
G0
2077 G0inps a larger value will be applied. 0.000 to 99.999 (mm)
in-position width
When "0" is set, this parameter will be invalid: only
SV024 will be available.
Between SV024 and this parameter, the parameter with
G1
2078 G1inps a larger value will be applied. 0.000 to 99.999 (mm)
in-position width
When "0" is set, this parameter will be invalid: only
SV024 will be available.
113
MITSUBISHI CNC
11.5 Precautions
When in-position check is valid, set the in-position width in the servo parameters.
(2) Deceleration check for opposite direction movement reversal
- When deceleration check is valid (G0Ipfg=1), deceleration check will be executed when the axis reverses its
movement to the opposite direction at the G1 -> G0 successive block regardless of whether G0 non-
interpolation is ON or OFF.
- When deceleration check is valid (G0Ipfg=1), deceleration check will be executed when the axis reverses its
movement to the opposite direction at the G1 -> G0 successive block even in the fixed cycle.
- In the G1 -> G28, G1 -> G29 or G1 -> G30 successive blocks, deceleration check will always be executed
when the G1 movement is completed, when movement to the intermediate point is completed and when
movement to the return point is completed. Note that if the base specification parameter's simple zero point
return "#1222 aux06/bit7" is valid, the base specification parameter G1 -> G0 deceleration check (G0Ipfg) will
be followed when the G1 movement is completed and when movement to the intermediate point is completed.
(Deceleration check will always be executed when movement to the return point is completed even in this
case.)
(3) Designating in-position width
- The in-position width (programmable in-position check width) designated in the machining program has a
priority over the in-position width set in the parameters (SV024, G0inps, G1inps).
- When error detect is ON, in-position check will be forcibly carried out.
(4) Deceleration check in G1 -> G0, G1 -> G1 opposite direction movement reversal during high-speed machining
mode
When the axis movement reverses to the opposite direction in a G1 -> G1 successive block during the high-speed
machining mode, the commanded deceleration will not take place even if G1Ipfg is set to 1. Note that the G0Ipfg
setting will be followed if the axis direction reverses to the opposite direction in a G1 -> G0 successive block.
(5) Deceleration check in movement including spindle/C-axis
- The deceleration check for spindle/C-axis movement command is as described in the table below. That is
because a vibration and so on occurs in the machine when the position loop gain (#13002 PGN) is changed
during the axis movement.
Rapid traverse Other than rapid traverse command (G1:

Parameter Parameter
command other than G0 command)
Inpos G0 -> XX AUX07/BIT-1 G1-> G0
G1-> G1
(#1193) (G0+G9 -> XX) (#1223/BIT-1) (G0+G9 -> XX)
Command In-position check
0 0 No deceleration
deceleration check (Applicable only to
check
1 In-position check 1 SV024)
(Note 1) When G1 command is issued, the in-position check is performed regardless of the deceleration
check parameter.
(Note 2) XX expresses all commands.
(6) Deceleration check in polar coordinate interpolation / milling interpolation / cylindrical start / cancel command
- The deceleration check in polar coordinate interpolation / milling interpolation / cylindrical start / cancel
command are as follows.
Parameter: #1223 aux07 BIT1 Deceleration check method

0 Command deceleration check
1 In-position check
114
12
Data Backup and Restoration
115
MITSUBISHI CNC
12 Data Backup and Restoration
The following two functions are available for the data backup and restoration: all backup function for files in batch and
input/output function for separate files.
All backup function allows the batch backup of NC memory data into a Compact Flash card, as well as the batch restore
of the Compact Flash card data into NC memory.
Files to be backed up/ restored are as follows.
Screen display File name Data type

SRAM data (binary files)
System data SRAM.BIN
Programs, parameters, R registers and so on
Ladder USERPLC.LAD User PLC program
APLC data APLC.BIN C language module created by user
Custom screen data (binary files)
Custom data CUSTOM.BIN (Custom screen modules, setting files (Config.ini/
customdef.ini/customload.txt) and PLC alarm messages)
This manual explains the procedures of all backup using a CF card.

For the input/output function for separate files, refer to the Instruction Manual.
12.1 All Backup

(1) Carry out the emergency stop.
(2) Insert a CF card into the interface on front of display unit.
(3) Enter the password on the Mainte screen.

(a) On the Mainte screen, select [Mainte] and then [Psswd input].
(b) Enter "MPARA" in the setting area and press the INPUT key.
(4) Press the cancel key to return to the Mainte screen. Select [Mainte] and then [All backup].
116
12.1 All Backup
(5) The all backup screen appears. "Device" shows the backup destination.
To change the destination, click [Device select] and select the device.
(6) Select [Backup].
117
MITSUBISHI CNC
(7) The menu is highlighted. The operation message "Select directory to backup" appears. Select the backup
destination ("Manual" or "Master data") in the backup list. Then press the INPUT key.
(Note) "Backup list" shows the list of backup destination directories and backup dates/times (year, month, date
and hour). The date field is blank when the backup has never been executed.
Auto1 to 3: Files automatically backed up
Manual: Files manually backed up
Master data: Files manually backed up, basically for shipping
"Auto1 to 3" cannot be selected at all backup.
(8) The operation message "OK? (Y/N)" appears. Press Y or INPUT key to start the backup.
(Note) If any data exists in the backup directory (backup date is shown), the overwriting confirmation message
appears when Y or INPUT key has been pressed. Press Y or INPUT key to start the backup.
(9) The operation message "Performing Backup" appears.
(10) When the backup is completed without error, the operation message "Backup complete" appears.
Open the interface door on front of display unit and eject the CF card.
(Note) Press the eject lever twice to eject the CF card.
(11) Cancel the emergency stop.
118
12.2 All Restoration
12.2 All Restoration

(1) Carry out the emergency stop.
(2) Insert the CF card containing the backed up data into the interface on front of display unit.
(3) Select [Mainte] and then [All backup]. Select [Device select].
(4) The all backup screen appears. "Device" shows the restoration source.
To change the destination, click [Device select] and select the device.
119
MITSUBISHI CNC
(5) Select [Restore].
(6) The menu is highlighted. The operation message "Select directory to restore" appears. Move the cursor to select
the area. Press the INPUT key.
(7) The operation message "OK? (Y/N)" appears. Press Y or INPUT key to start the restore.
(8) The operation message "Restoring" appears.
(9) When the restore is completed without error, the operation message "Restore complete" appears.
Open the interface door on front of display unit and eject the CF card.
(Note) Press the eject lever twice to eject the CF card.
(10) Cancel the emergency stop.
(Note) Restored data writes over the previous absolute position data. Carry out the absolute position detection again
after restoration.
120
13
Hardware Replacement Methods
121
MITSUBISHI CNC
13 Hardware Replacement Methods
13.1 Durable Parts

[List of durable parts]
Durable parts Part type

Control unit battery Q6BAT
84LHS06
(for MADE IN JAPAN and unit version "*" to "C")
Backlight for FCU7-DU120-12 (*) 84LHS16
(for MADE IN JAPAN and unit version "D" and later)
84LHS16(for MADE IN CHINA)
104LHS39 (for unit version "*")
Backlight for FCU7-DU140-12/32 (*)
104LHS52 (for unit version "A" and later)
Touch panel protective sheet for FCU7-
N939B036G51
DU140-32
Key sheet for FCU7-KB024/44 N330B532G51
Key sheet for FCU7-KB025 N330B532G52
Key sheet for FCU7-KB029 N330A565G51
(Note) For unit version, check the rating nameplate.
(*) Contact the Service Center, Service Station, Sales Office or delayer for repairs or part replacement.
[List of replacements]
Replacements Part type

Protection fuse LM40
Front memory I/F card CF-70 (*) FCU7-HN791
Front memory I/F card CF-700 (with USB) (*) FCU7-HN793
(*) Contact the Service Center, Service Station, Sales Office or delayer for repairs or part replacement.
13.1.1 Control Unit Battery

A lithium battery in the control unit battery holder retains parameter settings, machining programs and the like, which
requires to be backed up at the power OFF.
Battery Q6BAT
45,000 hours (At 0 to 45°C. The life will be shorter if the
Battery cumulative data holding time
temperature is high.)
Battery life Approx. 5 years (from date of battery manufacture)
(Note) Replace the battery within one month after the alarm "Z52 Battery drop 0001" appears on the NC screen.
The internal data may have been damaged if the alarm "Z52 Battery drop 0003" appears.
[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the battery with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
Complete the replacement within 30 minutes after turning the power OFF. (If the battery is not connected within 30
minutes, the data being backed up might be destroyed.)
(2) Confirm that the control unit LED, 7-segment display, etc., are all OFF.
(3) Open the battery cover of the control unit. Pull the right side of the battery cover toward front.
(4) Disconnect the battery connector from the control unit BAT connector.
(5) Remove the battery from the battery holder.
(6) Fit the new battery into the battery holder.
(7) Insert the new battery connector into the control unit BAT connector. Pay attention to the connector
orientation: do not insert backwards.
(8) Close the front cover of the control unit. At this time, confirm that the cover is closed by listening for the "click"
sound when the latch catches.
122
13.1 Durable Parts
(9) Turn the power ON and check the integrated time screen. Should the displayed current time and/or date be
inaccurate, correct them and turn the power OFF and ON.
(10) Select [Battery clear] on the self diagn screen, and set "0" to battery used years.
(Note) If battery used years is not cleared, passed years from default date (2006/4/1) will be displayed on battery
used years.
Battery cover
Battery
Battery holder
BAT connector
[Precautions for handling battery]

(1) Always replace the battery with the same type.
(2) Do not disassemble the battery.
(3) Do not place the battery in flames or water.
(4) Do not pressurize and deform the battery.
(5) This is a primary battery so do not charge it.
(6) Dispose the spent battery as industrial waste in accordance with the local law.
WARNING
If the battery low warning is issued, save the machining programs, tool data and parameters in an input/output
device, and then replace the battery. When the battery alarm is issued, the machining programs, tool data and
parameters may have been destroyed. Replace the battery and then reload the data.
CAUTION
1. Do not short-circuit, charge, overheat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.
2. Dispose the spent battery according to the local laws.
123
MITSUBISHI CNC
13.1.2 Backlight
- 8.4-type (for MADE IN JAPAN and unit version "D" and later, or for MADE IN CHINA)
Screen size Backlight driver Backlight for replacement

8.4-type HN281 84LHS16
(Note) To check the unit version, refer to [Example for rating name plate of 8.4-type display unit].
Backlight life: 70,000 hours (Duration of time until luminance drops to 50% of the initial value.)
The life is estimated on the assumption that it is used under 25℃ environment. Keep in mind that the value above is
not a guaranteed value.
Always replace the backlight for LCD panel with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
(2) Disconnect the backlight connector from the backlight driver (one for top).
(3) Disconnect the MENU connector.
(4) Remove the escutcheon fixing screws (at 4 places) and take the escutcheon off.
(5) Remove fixing screws (at 4 places) of LCD panel and take the LCD panel off. At this time take off LCD cable
from LCD panel.
(6) Pull out the LED backlight cable.
(7) Pull out the backlight installed on the left side of the LCD panel. (The backlights have locking claws on the
front. Hold these claws down while pulling the backlight out.)
(8) Insert the new backlight into the upper and lower sections at the left end of the LCD panel. (Press in until the
locking claws click.)
(9) Put on LED backlight cable to the backlight.
(10) Mount the LCD panel with 4 fixing screws (one each for 4 sections) after LCD cable is put on to the LCD panel.
(11) Mount the escutcheon with 4 fixing screws (one each for 4 sections).
(12) Connect the backlight connector to the backlight driver.
(13) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.
(14) Connect the MENU connector.
- 8.4-type (for MADE IN JAPAN and unit version "*" to "C") / 10.4-type
Screen size Backlight driver Backlight for replacement

8.4-type 84PW031 84LHS06
10.4-type 104PW161 104LHS39,104LHS52
(Note) To check the unit version, refer to [Example for rating name plate of 8.4-type display unit].
Backlight life : 50,000 hours (ambient temperature 25°C) (Duration of time until luminance drops to 50% of the initial
value.)
The life is estimated on the assumption that it is used under 25℃ environment. Keep in mind that the value above is
not a guaranteed value.
Always replace the backlight for LCD panel with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
(2) Disconnect the backlight connector from the backlight inverter (one for top).
(3) Disconnect the MENU connector.
(4) Remove the escutcheon fixing screws (at 4 places) and take the escutcheon off.
(5) Pull out the backlight installed on the left side of the LCD panel. (The backlights have locking claws on the
front. Hold these claws down while pulling the backlight out.)
(6) Insert the new backlight into the upper and lower sections at the left end of the LCD panel. (Press in until the
locking claws click.)
(7) Mount the escutcheon with 4 fixing screws (one each for 4 sections).
(8) Connect the backlight connector to the backlight inverter.
(10) Connect the MENU connector.
124
13.1 Durable Parts
[Precautions for using LCD panel]

(1) Response time, brightness and color may differ depending on the ambient temperature.
(2) Brightness nonuniformity, flickers and streaks may be observed on LCD display depending on the display
contents.
(3) Because cold cathode-tube is used for LCD display, optical characteristics (brightness nonuniformity and
display) change according to the operation time. (Especially in low temperature.)
(4) Screen display color may differ depending on the angle to view it.
CAUTION
1. Do not replace the backlight while the power is ON.
2. Dispose the spent backlight according to the local laws.
3. Do not touch the backlight while the power is ON. Failure to observe this could result in electric shocks due to
high voltage.
4. Do not touch the backlight while the LCD panel is in use. Failure to observe this could result in burns.
5. Do not apply impact or pressure on the LCD panel or backlight. Failure to observe this could result in breakage
as they are made of glass.
[8.4-type/10.4-type display unit]
Backlight connector
MENU connector
Backlight inverter
Backlight
125
MITSUBISHI CNC
[Example for rating name plate of 8.4-type display unit]
Example of MADE IN JAPAN
xxxxxxxxxxxD The last digit: Software, hardware version

xx-xx
In this example, the version is "D".
Example of MADE IN CHINA
xxxxxxxxxxx% xx-xx
The last digit: Software, hardware version

In this example, the version is "*".
126
13.1 Durable Parts
13.1.3 Fuse
13.1.3.1 Control Unit Protection Fuse
Disconnection of the protection fuse will be caused by misconnections such as a reverse connection of 24VDC power
supply connector between +24V terminal and the ground.
Hold the upper part of the protection fuse and pull it when replacing it.
Protection fuse
Protection fuse

13.1.3.2 Operation Panel I/O Unit Protection Fuse

Disconnection of the protection fuse will be caused by misconnections of digital inputs/outputs.
Hold the upper part of the protection fuse and pull it when replacing it.
Protection fuse

127
MITSUBISHI CNC
13.1.4 Front Memory Interface Card

Replace the front memory interface card on which the connector CF has been broken due to a wrong insertion or
repetitive insertions/removals of the CF card.
(1) Remove the control unit as described in the section of "Control Unit".
(2) Remove the two screws which fix the front memory interface card.
(3) Remove the damaged front memory interface card, and install a new one with the two screws.
(4) Mount the control unit on the display unit.

Front memory I/F card CF-70 FCU7-HN791
Front memory I/F card CF-700(with USB) FCU7-HN793
128
13.1 Durable Parts
13.1.5 Touch Panel Protective Sheet

Type of 10.4-type touch panel protective sheet : N939B036G51
(1) Remove the old protective sheet and clean the surface of the display unit.
(Note) Peel off the protective sheet slowly.
(2) Remove the release paper on the back of the new protective sheet.
Fit the position of the sheet as shown in the figure and stick the sheet to the display unit.
Fit the edge of the protective sheet
to the upper side of the gray line
(3) Remove the protective film on the surface of the protective sheet.
129
MITSUBISHI CNC
13.1.6 Key Sheet

The key sheet covering the sheet-key type keyboard can be replaced.
Remove the old key sheet as shown below, then place the new one.
Key sheet for FCU7-KB024/44 N330B532G51

Key sheet for FCU7-KB025 N330B532G52
Key sheet for FCU7-KB029 N330A565G51
(Note 1) Clean the surface before placing the new key sheet.
(Note 2) The figure in the above is an example of FCU7-KB024/44. The keysheet for other can be removed in a similar
way.
130
13.2 Control Unit
13.2 Control Unit

Always replace the control unit with the machine power turned OFF.
(2) Disconnect all the external cables from the control unit.
(3) Disconnect all the internal cables from the control unit. (MENU, INV and LCD connectors)
(Note) Open the battery cover to disconnect the LCD connector.
(4) Remove the screws fixing the control unit, and remove the control unit from the control unit installation fitting.
(Loosen the two lower fixing screws first, and then remove two upper fixing screw while supporting the control
unit with a hand. Then lift the control unit upward and take it off. The two lower fixing screws do not need to be
removed.)
(5) Install a new control unit onto the control unit installation fitting with fixing screws.
(6) Connect all the cables back to the control unit. (Always connect the cables to the designated connectors.)
INV connector
LCD connector
Battery cover
MENU
connector
CAUTION
1. Incorrect connections could cause devices to damage. Connect the cables to designated connectors.
2. Do not replace the control unit while the power is ON.
3. Do not connect or disconnect the cables between units while the power is ON.
131
MITSUBISHI CNC
(Note) Wire the control unit optical cable as shown below. Refer to the Connection Manual when handling and wiring
optical communication cable.
Control unit
Recommended clamp material

CKN-13SP
KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES
Optical communication cable

(section with reinforced sheath):
Bending radius: Refer to the specification of
your optical communication cable.
132
13.2 Control Unit
13.2.1 Installation on FCU7-DU120-12 (8.4-type)
LCD cable G097

(with ferrite core)
F480 cable
84PW031 + cover
(Note) After mounting a new control unit, check the screen's brightness with a slide switch LCDSEL.
133
MITSUBISHI CNC
13.2.2 Installation on FCU7-DU140-12/32 (10.4-type)
LCD cable G492

(with ferrite core)
Backlight cable
G484
104PW161 + cover
F480 cable
(Note) After mounting a new control unit, check the screen's brightness with a slide switch LCDSEL.
Calibrate the touch panel when using it, referring to the section of "Calibration Setting and Confirmation".
134
13.2 Control Unit
13.2.3 Installation on FCU7-DU140-32 (10.4-type touch panel)
TESTIN
TP G422
(Note) Calibrate the touch panel, referring to the section of "Calibration Setting and Confirmation".
135
MITSUBISHI CNC
13.2.4 Calibration Setting and Confirmation

The touch panel calibration is saved in the control unit. When only the control unit has been replaced, the calibration
must be carried out again.
(Note) Use a round-tip stick to set the position properly. Take care not to scratch the protective sheet covering
the panel.
(1) Turn the right rotary switch (RSW2), which is on the back of the touch panel display unit, to "F". Then turn the
power ON. After the system starts up, display the calibration setting screen.
(2) On the calibration setting screen, keep pressing the center of the upper-left cross with a red circle for more
than one second. Then lift the stick off the screen.
When the data has been achieved, the upper-left cross turns green and the red circle moves to the bottom-
right.
136
13.2 Control Unit
(3) Keep pressing the center of the bottom-right cross with a red circle for more than one second. Then lift the
stick off.
When the data has been achieved, the bottom-right cross turns green.
When the two points have been measured, a completion message will appear.
(4) Check whether the calibration settings have been successfully measured.
Press the rightmost menu key . The calibration setting confirmation screen will appear.
Touch the target (a white square) shown on the confirmation screen.
Touching the target moves it to the next point. The target will move in the following order.
137
MITSUBISHI CNC
(5) After touching ten points, the display will show the result.
<Result: OK> <Result: NG>
Points which has resulted

in NG will be shown in red.
When the result shows "OK":

The calibration settings have been successfully measured.
Turn the right rotary switch (RSW2) back to "0", then turn the power ON again.
When the result shows "NG":
Press the leftmost menu key and carry out the confirmation again.
If "NG" still shows after reconfirmations, carry out the calibration again from the step (1).
(Note) Pressing the rightmost menu key after the result has showed "OK" displays the maintenance
screen. When the screen appears, turn the right rotary switch (RSW2) back to "0" and turn the power ON
again.
138
13.3 Display Unit
13.3 Display Unit

Always replace the display unit with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
(2) Open the electric cabinet door.
(3) Disconnect all the cables connected to the display unit.
(4) Remove the screws fixing the display unit (at 4 places) and take the display unit off.
(5) Install a new display unit with fixing screws.
(6) Connect all the cables back to the display unit. (Always connect the cables to the designated connectors.)
Fixing screws (4)
CAUTION
2. Do not replace the display unit while the power is ON.
139
MITSUBISHI CNC
13.4 Keyboard Unit

Always replace the keyboard unit with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
(3) Disconnect all the cables connected to the keyboard unit.
(4) Remove the screws fixing the keyboard unit and take the keyboard unit off.
(5) Install a new keyboard unit with fixing screws.
(6) Connect all the cables connected to the keyboard unit. (Always connect the cables to the designated
connectors.)
Fixing screws (4)
CAUTION
2. Do not replace the keyboard unit while the power is ON.
140
13.5 Operation Panel I/O Unit
13.5 Operation Panel I/O Unit

Always replace the operation panel I/O unit with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
(3) Disconnect all the cables connected to the operation panel I/O unit.
(4) Remove the screws fixing the operation panel I/O unit, and take the unit off.
(5) Install a new operation panel I/O unit with fixing screws. (Fix so that the NCKB connector slot is placed at the
lower part.)
(6) Connect all the cables back to the operation panel I/O unit. (Always connect the cables to the designated
connectors.)
NCKB cable can be easily inserted by fitting the Δ1st pin position with the connector.
Fixing screw (4 pcs.)

M3x25 (with plain washer and spring washer)
NCKB connector
CAUTION
2. Do not replace the operation panel I/O unit while the power is ON.
141
MITSUBISHI CNC
13.6 CompactFlash (CF) Card

[Card insertion procedures]
(1) Open the card interface door on the display unit right end.
(2) Insert the CF card. (Insert it so that the top surface faces to the observer's right or display side.)
[Card ejecting procedures]

(1) Open the card interface door on the display unit right end.
(2) Press the eject lever twice to eject the CF card.
CompactFlash
Eject lever
(Note 1) Do not eject a CF card during the data reading/writing.

(Note 2) It is recommended to use genuine CF cards. MITSUBISHI is unable to guarantee the machine operation when
a commercially available CF card is used. In that case, performance check must be made carefully by
machine tool builder.
142
13.7 USB Memory
13.7 USB Memory

The USB memory slot is above the CF card interface.
Open the door located on the display unit right end and insert/remove the USB memory.
USB memory slot
(Note 1) Do not remove a USB memory during the data reading/writing.

(Note 2) USB memory cannot be used for the following system types of M70V series as they do not support USB
memory:
・FCA70P-2AV
・FCA70P-4AV
・FCA70H-4AV
・FCA70P-2BV
・FCA70P-4BV
・FCA70H-4BV
(Note 3) Do not connect devices other than USB memories. When using a commercially available USB memory,
performance check must be made by machine tool builder.
143
MITSUBISHI CNC
144
14
Cables
145
MITSUBISHI CNC
14 Cables
14.1 Precautions when Connecting/Disconnecting Cables

If the cable is connected/disconnected without turning the power OFF, the normal unit or peripheral devices could be
damaged, and risks could be imposed.
Disconnect each cable with the following procedures.
(a) For the following type of connector, press the tabs with a thumb and forefinger in the direction of the arrow, and pull
the connector off.
(1) Press
Y (1) Press
(2) Pull (2) Pull
(1) Press
View from above
(1) Press
(2) Pull
(2) Pull
CAUTION
2. Do not pull the cables when connecting/disconnecting them.
146
14.1 Precautions when Connecting/Disconnecting Cables
(b) For a flat cable type connector with latches, open the latches in the directions of the arrows, and pull the connector
off.
(1) Open
(2) Pull
(c) For a flat cable type connector without latches, hold the connector with a thumb and forefinger, and pull the connector
off.
(1) Hold with thumb and forefinger.
(2) Pull
(d) For the screw fixed type connector, loosen the two fixing screws, and pull the connector off.
(1) Loosen
(1) Loosen
(2) Pull (2) Pull
CAUTION
147
MITSUBISHI CNC
14 Cables
(e) For the optical cable connector, pull off while holding down the lock button.
(1) Press
(2) Pull
(f) For the Ethernet connector, pull off while holding down the locked latch.
(1) Press
(2) Pull
CAUTION
148
14.2 Precautions for Using Optical Communication Cable
14.2 Precautions for Using Optical Communication Cable

An optical communication cable is used for communication between the control unit and the drive unit.
Special precautions, differing from the conventional cable, are required when laying and handling the optical
communication cable.
(Note) If the cable you use is not Mitsubishi's, malfunctions resulted from connection problems or aged deterioration
are not covered under the warranty.
14.2.1 Optical Communication Cable Outline and Parts
Fiber code/connector connection section

Bushing Reinforced
Optical connector
Fiber cord sheath
20.3
22.7 150 35
7
To ensure the system performance and reliability, purchase the optical communication cable from Mitsubishi. A
machining drawing is given in the Connection Manual as reference, but the purchased optical communication cable
cannot be cut or connected by the machine tool builder.
14.2.2 Precautions for Handling Optical Communication Cable

(1) A protective cap is attached to the optical module and optical communication cable mounted on the PCB when the
system is delivered. Leaving this protective cap unattached could result in connection faults from the adherence of
dirt and dust. Do not remove the protective cap when not connecting the cable. If dirty, wipe off lightly with a piece
of dry gauze, etc. (Do not use solvents such as alcohol as the optical fiber material could melt.)
(2) Hold the connector section when connecting or disconnecting the optical connector. Holding the fiber cord will result
in force exceeding the tolerable tension on the fiber cord and connector connection section, and could cause the
fiber cord to dislocate from the optical connector thereby inhibiting use.
(3) The optical connector cannot be connected in reversed. Check the connector orientation when connecting the
optical communication cable to the optical module. Align the connector lock lever with the lock holes on the PCB's
optical module, and press the connector straight in. Confirm that the lock lever connects with the optical module and
that a "click" is heard.
(4) When disconnecting the optical communication cable from the PCB, press the lock release buttons on the lock
lever, and pull out the cable while holding the connector section. The connector could be damaged if the cable is
pulled without pressing down on the lock release buttons.
(5) Do not apply excessive force onto the optical communication cable by stepping on it or dropping tools, etc., on it.
149
MITSUBISHI CNC
14 Cables
14.2.3 Precautions for Laying Optical Communication Cable

(1) Do not apply a force exceeding the cable's tolerable tension. Binding the cables too tight with tie-wraps could result
in an increased loss or a disconnection. Use a cushioning material such as a sponge or rubber when bundling the
cables and fix so that the cables do not move.
(2) Do not connect the cables with a radius less than the tolerable bending radius. Excessive stress could be applied
near the connector connection section and cause the optical characteristics to drop. The cable bending radius
should be 10 times or more than the outer diameter at the reinforced sheath, and 20 times or more than the outer
diameter at the fiber cord section.
(3) Do not apply torsion to the optical communication cable. Laying a twisted cable could cause the optical
characteristics to drop.
(4) When laying the cables in a conduit, avoid applying stress on the fiber cord and connector connection section. Use
the tensile end such as a pulling eye or cable grip, etc.
(5) Fix the reinforced sheath with a cable clamp so that the mass of the optical communication cable is not directly
applied on the fiber cord and connector connection section.
(6) Never bundle the cables with vinyl tape. The plasticizing material in the vinyl tape could cause the POF cable to
break.
(7) Loop the excessive cable with twice or more than the minimum bending radius.
Control unit
Recommended clamp material

CKN-13SP
KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES
Optical communication cable

(section with reinforced sheath):
Bending radius: Refer to the specification of
your optical communication cable.
Recommended clamp material: CKN-13SP KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES.
150
Appendix
付録 1
Ap1
章
Explanation of Parameters
151
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1 Explanation of Parameters
Appendix 1.1 User Parameters

The parameters with "(PR)" requires the CNC to be turned OFF after the settings. Turn the power OFF and ON to enable
the parameter settings.
(Note) This parameter description is common for M700V/M70V/E70 Series.
It is written on the assumption that all option functions are added.
Confirm with the specifications issued by the machine tool builder before starting use.
【#8001】 WRK COUNT M

Set the M code for counting the number of the workpiece repeated machining.
The number of the M-codes set by this parameter is counted.
The No. will not be counted when set to "0".
---Setting range---
0 to 999
【#8002】 WRK COUNT

Set the initial value of the number of workpiece machining. The number of current workpiece
machining is displayed.
---Setting range---
0 to 999999
【#8003】 WRK COUNT LIMIT

Set the maximum number of workpiece machining.
A signal will be output to PLC when the number of machining times is counted to this limit.
---Setting range---
0 to 999999
【#8004】 SPEED
Set the feedrate during automatic tool length measurement.
---Setting range---
1 to 1000000 (mm/min)
【#8005】 ZONE r
Set the distance between the measurement point and deceleration start point.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8006】 ZONE d
Set the tolerable range of the measurement point.
An alarm will occur when the sensor signal turns ON before the range, set by this parameter, has not
been reached from the measurement point, or when the signal does not turn ON after the range is
passed.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8007】 OVERRIDE
Set the override value for automatic corner override.
---Setting range---
0 to 100 (%)
【#8008】 MAX ANGLE

Set the maximum corner opening angle where deceleration should start automatically.
When the angle is larger than this value, deceleration will not start.
---Setting range---
0 to 180 (°)
152
【#8009】 DSC. ZONE

Set the position where deceleration starts at the corner.
Designate at which length point before the corner deceleration should start.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8010】 ABS. MAX. (for L system only)

Set the maximum value when inputting the tool wear compensation amount.
A value exceeding this setting value cannot be set.
Absolute value of the input value is set.
(If a negative value is input, it is treated and set as a positive value.)
If "0" is input, this parameter will be disabled.
---Setting range---
0 to 999.999 (mm)
(Input setting increment applies)
【#8011】 INC. MAX. (for L system only)

Set the maximum value for when inputting the tool wear compensation amount in the incremental
mode.
A value exceeding this setting value cannot be set.
Absolute value of the input value is set.
(If a negative value is input, it is treated and set as a positive value.)
If "0" is input, this parameter will be disabled.
---Setting range---
0 to 999.999 (mm)
(Input setting increment applies)
【#8012】 G73 n
Set the return amount for G73 (step cycle).
Set the return amount for MITSUBISHI CNC special format G83.1.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8013】 G83 n
Set the return amount for G83 (deep hole drilling cycle).
---Setting range---
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8014】 CDZ-VALE (for L system only)

Set the screw cut up amount for G76 and G78 (thread cutting cycle).
---Setting range---
0 to 127 (0.1 lead)
【#8015】 CDZ-ANGLE (for L system only)

Set the screw cut up angle for G76 and G78 (thread cutting cycle).
---Setting range---
0 to 89 (°)
【#8016】 G71 MINIMUM (for L system only)

Set the minimum value of the last cutting amount by the rough cutting cycle (G71, G72).
The cutting amount of the last cutting will be the remainder. When the remainder is smaller than this
parameter setting, the last cycle will not be executed.
---Setting range---
0 to 999.999 (mm)
153
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#8017】 G71 DELTA-D (for L system only)

Set the change amount of the rough cutting cycle.
The rough cutting cycle (G71, G72) cutting amount repeats d+ ⊿ d, d, d- ⊿ d using the value (d)
commanded with D as a reference. Set the change amount ⊿ d.
---Setting range---
0 to 999.999 (mm)
【#8018】 G84/G74 n
Set the retract amount m in a G84/G74/G88 pecking tapping cycle.
(Note) In the case of a normal tapping cycle, set to "0".
【#8019】 R COMP
Set a compensation coefficient for reducing a control error in the reduction of a corner roundness
and arc radius.
The larger the set value is, the smaller the theoretical error will be. However, since the speed at the
corner goes down, the cycle time will be extended.
Coefficient = 100 - set value
(Note) This function will be enabled when "#8021 COMP_CHANGE" is set to "0".
---Setting range---
0 to 99 (%)
Theoretical radius decrease error amount

Displays the theoretical radius decrease error amount, ΔR(mm), from the automatic calculation by
NC.
Command path
ǍR
+
Path after
servo control
Theoretical radius decrease amount in arc
R5mm arc deceleration speed

Displays a deceleration speed(mm/min) along an arc of 5(mm) radius.
R1mm arc deceleration speed

Displays a deceleration speed(mm/min) along an arc of 1(mm) radius.
154
【#8020】 DCC ANGLE

Set the minimum value of an angle (external angle) that should be assumed to be a corner.
When an inter-block angle (external angle) in high-accuracy mode is larger than the set value, it will
be determined as a corner and the speed will go down to sharpen the edge.
If the set value is smaller than ǰ,

ǰ
the speed goes down to optimize
the corner.
(Note) If "0" is set, it will be handled as "5" degrees.
---Setting range---
0 to 89 (°)
0: 5 degree (Equals to setting "5")
Theoretical corner dull amount

Displays the corner dull amount Δc(mm) in respect to the corner's angle (external angle) θ(°).
Path after servo control

㰱cs㩷
Path after soft acceleration/ ǰ Command path

deceleration 2 㰱ca
Theoretical roundness amount at corner

ca(mm): Error (Δ) caused by the soft acceleration/deceleration 2
cs(mm): Error (Δ) caused by the servo system
Corner deceleration speed
Display corner deceleration speed c (mm/min) for the corner of the angle (external angle) with θ(°).
Theoretical dull amount at 90 degree

Display corner dull amount when the angle is 90 degree.
Corner deceleration speed at 90 degree

Display corner deceleration speed when the angle is 90 degree.
【#8021】 COMP_CHANGE
Select whether to share or separate the compensation coefficient at the corner/curve during the
high-accuracy control mode.
0: Share ("#8019 R COMP" is applied.)
1: Separate
- Corner : #8022 CORNER COMP
- Curve : #8023 CURVE COMP
(Note) Set "1" when using SSS control.
【#8022】 CORNER COMP

Set the compensation coefficient to further reduce or increase the roundness at the corner during the
high-accuracy control mode.
Coefficient = 100 - setting value
(Note) This is valid when "#8021 COMP CHANGE" is set to "1".
Reference to "#8020 Corner decreasing speed "for theoretical corner roundness amount, corner
decreasing speed, theoretical 90 degree dull amount, 90 degree corner decreasing speed.
---Setting range---
-1000 to 99 (%)
155
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#8023】 CURVE COMP

Set the compensation coefficient to further reduce or increase the radius reduction amount at the
curve (arc, involute, spline) during the high-accuracy control mode.
Coefficient = 100 - setting value
(Note) This is valid when "#8021 COMP CHANGE" is set to "1".
For theoretical radius reduction error amount, R5mm arc deceleration speed and R1mm arc
deceleration speed, refer to "#8019 R COMP".
---Setting range---
-1000 to 99 (%)
【#8025】 SPLINE ON (for M system only)

Select whether to enable the spline function.
0: Disable
1: Enable
Spline interpolation is valid during G61.2 modal, regardless of this setting.
【#8026】 CANCEL ANG. (for M system only)

Set the angle where the spline interpolation is temporarily canceled.
When the angle made by blocks exceeds this parameter setting value, spline interpolation will be
canceled temporarily. In consideration of the pick feed, set a value a little smaller than the pick feed
angle.
---Setting range---
0 to 180 (°)
0: 180 (°)
【#8027】 Toler-1 (for M system only)

Set the maximum chord error (tolerance) in a block that includes an inflection point. Set the tolerance
applicable when the applicable block is developed to fine segments by CAM. (normally about 10
μm)
When "0.000" is set, the applicable block will be linear.
---Setting range---
0.000 to 100.000 (mm)
【#8028】 Toler-2 (for M system only)

Set the maximum chord error (tolerance) in a block that includes no inflection point. Set the tolerance
applicable when the applicable block is developed to fine segments by CAM. (normally about 10
μm)
When "0.000" is set, the applicable block will be linear.
---Setting range---
0.000 to 100.000 (mm)
【#8029】 FairingL (for M system only)

Set the length of the block subject to fairing.
(Enabled when "#8033 Fairing ON" is set to "1".)
---Setting range---
0 to 100.000 (mm)
【#8030】 MINUTE LENGS (for M system only)

Set the fine-segment length where the spline interpolation is temporarily canceled.
When the length of one block exceeds this parameter setting value, spline interpolation is canceled
temporarily and linear interpolation is performed. Set a value a little smaller than one block length of
the program.
If "-1" is set, spline interpolation will be performed regardless of block length.
---Setting range---
-1 to 127 (mm)
0: 1 (mm)
156
【#8033】 Fairing ON (for M system only)

Select whether to use the fairing function.
0: Not use
1: Use
Fairing function is enabled during G61.2 modal, regardless of this setting.
【#8034】 AccClamp ON (for M system only)

Select the method for clamping the cutting speed.
0: Clamp with parameter "#2002 clamp" or the corner deceleration function.
1: Clamp the cutting speed with acceleration judgment.
【#8036】 CordecJudge (for M system only)

Select the condition to decide a corner.
0: A corner is decided from the angle of the neighboring block.
1: A corner is decided from the angle of the neighboring block, excluding minute blocks.
【#8037】 CorJudgeL (for M system only)

Set the length of the block to be excluded when deciding a corner.
(Enabled when "#8036 CordecJudge" is set to "1".)
---Setting range---
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8041】 C-rot.R
Set the length from the center of the normal line control axis to the tool tip. This is used to calculate
the turning speed at the block joint.
This is enabled during the normal line control type II.
---Setting range---
0.000 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8042】 C-ins.R
Set the radius of the arc to be automatically inserted into the corner during normal line control.
This is enabled during the normal line control type I.
---Setting range---
0.000 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8043】 Tool HDL FD OFS

Set the length from the tool holder to the tool tip.
---Setting range---
0.000 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8044】 UNIT*10
Set the command increment scale.
The scale will be "1" when "0" is set.
---Setting range---
0 to 10000 (fold)
0: One fold
【#8051】 G71 THICK

Set the amount of cut-in by the rough cutting cycle (G71, G72)
---Setting range---
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
157
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#8052】 G71 PULL UP

Set the amount of pull-up when returning to the cutting start point for the rough cutting cycle (G71.
G72).
---Setting range---
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8053】 G73 U
Set the X-axis cutting margin of the forming rough cutting cycle (G73).
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8054】 G73 W
Set the Z-axis cutting margin of the forming rough cutting cycle (G73).
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8055】 G73 R
Set how many times cutting will be performed in the forming rough cutting cycle (G73).
---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (times)
【#8056】 G74 RETRACT

Set the amount of retract (amount of cut-up) of the cutting-off cycle (G74, G75).
---Setting range---
0 to 999.999 (mm)
【#8057】 G76 LAST-D

Set the amount of final cut-in by the compound type thread cutting (G76).
---Setting range---
0 to 999.999 (mm)
【#8058】 G76 TIMES

Set how many times the amount of final cut-in cycle (G76 finish margin) will be divided in the
compound type thread cutting (G76).
---Setting range---
0 to 99 (times)
【#8059】 G76 ANGLE

Set the angle (thread angle) of the tool nose in the compound type thread cutting (G76).
---Setting range---
0 to 99 (°)
【#8060】 G71 ERR

Set the tolerable error range to avoid a program error (a shape change at pocket machining) against
minute inversion when the finished shape's Z axis (or X axis at G72 command) does not move
monotonously.
---Setting range---
0.000 to 0.010 (mm)
158
【#8071】 3-D CMP (for M system only)

Set the value of the denominator constants for 3-dimensional tool radius compensation.
Set the value of "p" in the following formula.
Vx = i x r/p, Vy = j x r/p, Vz = k x r/p
Vx, Vy, Vz : X, Y, and Z axes or vectors of horizontal axes
i, j, k : Program command value
r : Offset
p = √ (i2 + j2 + k2) when the set value is "0".
---Setting range---
0 to 99999.999
【#8072】 SCALING P (for M system only)

Set the scale factor for reduction or magnification in the machining program specified by G50 or G51
command.
This parameter will be valid when the program specifies no scale factor.
---Setting range---
-99.999999 to 99.999999
【#8075】 SpiralEndErr (for M system only)

Set the tolerable error range (absolute value) when the end point position, commanded by the spiral
or conical interpolation command with the command format type 2, differs from the end point position
obtained from the speed and increment/decrement amount.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8078】 Screen Saver Timer

Set the period of time before turn-OFF of the display unit backlight.
When "0" is set, the backlight is not turned OFF.
---Setting range---
0 to 60 (min)
0: The backlight is not turned OFF
【#8081】 Gcode Rotat (for L system only)

Set the rotation angle for the program coordinate rotation command.
This parameter is enabled when "1" is set in "#1270 ext06/bit5 (Coordinate rotation angle without
command)".
This parameter is set as absolute value command regardless of the "#8082 G68.1 R INC" setting. If
the rotation angle is designated by an address R in G68.1 command, the designation by program will
be applied.
---Setting range---
-360.000 to +360.000 (°)
【#8082】 G68.1 R INC (for L system only)

Select absolute or increment command to use for the rotation angle command R at L-system
coordinate rotation.
0: Use absolute value command in G90 modal, incremental value command in G91 modal
1: Always use incremental value command
(Note) If G91 does not exist in the G code system, the command type is decided by this parameter
only.
【#8083】 G83S modeM (for M system only)

Set the M command code for changing to the small diameter deep hole drilling cycle mode.
---Setting range---
1 to 99999999
159
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#8084】 G83S Clearance (for M system only)

Set the clearance amount for the small diameter deep hole drilling cycle (G83).
---Setting range---
0 to 999.999 (mm)
【#8085】 G83S Forward F (for M system only)

Set the feedrate from the R point to the cutting start position in the small diameter deep hole drilling
cycle (G83).
---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (mm/min)
【#8086】 G83S Back F (for M system only)

Set the speed for returning from the hole bottom during the small diameter deep hole drilling cycle
(G83).
---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (mm/min)
【#8090】 SSS ON (for M system only)

Set whether to enable the SSS control with G05 P10000.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#8091】 StdLength (for M system only)

Set the maximum value of the range for recognizing the shape.
To eliminate the effect of steps or errors, etc., set a large value. To enable sufficient deceleration, set
a small value.
If "0.000" is set, the standard value (1.000mm) will be applied.
---Setting range---
0 to 100.000 (mm)
【#8092】 ClampCoeff (for M system only)

Set the clamp speed at the curved section configured of fine segments.
Coefficient = √ setting value
---Setting range---
1 to 100
【#8093】 StepLeng (for M system only)

Set the width of the step at which the speed is not to be decelerated. (Approximately the same as the
CAM path difference [Tolerance].)
If "0" is set, the standard value (5μm) will be applied.
If a minus value is set, the speed will decelerate at all minute steps.
---Setting range---
-1.000 to 0.100 (mm)
【#8094】 DccWaitAdd (for M system only)

Set the time to wait for deceleration when the speed FB does not drop to the clamp speed.
---Setting range---
0 to 100 (ms)
【#8101】 MACRO SINGLE

Select how to control the blocks where the user macro command continues.
0: Do not stop while macro blocks continue.
1: Stop every block during signal block operation.
160
【#8102】 COLL. ALM OFF

Select the interference (bite) control to the workpiece from the tool diameter during tool radius
compensation and nose R compensation.
0: An alarm will be output and operation stops when an interference is judged.
1: Changes the path to avoid interference.
【#8103】 COLL. CHK OFF

Select the interference (bite) control to the workpiece from the tool diameter during tool radius
compensation and nose R compensation.
0: Performs interference check.
1: Does not perform interference check.
【#8105】 EDIT LOCK B

Select the edit lock for program Nos. 8000 to 9999 in the memory.
0: Enable the editing.
1: Prohibit the editing of above programs.
When "1" is set, the file cannot be opened.
【#8106】 G46 NO REV-ERR (for L system only)

Select the control for the compensation direction reversal in G46 (nose R compensation).
0: An alarm will be output and operation will stop when the compensation direction is reversed
(G41 -> G42' G42 -> G41).
1: An alarm won't occur when the compensation direction is reversed, and the current
compensation direction will be maintained.
【#8107】 R COMPENSATION
Select whether to move to the inside because of a delay in servo response to a command during arc
cutting mode.
0: Move to the inside, making the arc smaller than the command value.
1: Compensate the movement to the inside.
【#8108】 R COMP Select

Select the arc radius error compensation target.
0: Perform compensation over all axes.
1: Perform compensation axis by axis.
(Note) This parameter is effective only when "#8107 R COMPENSATION" is "1".
【#8109】 HOST LINK

Select whether to enable computer link B instead of the RS-232C port.
0: Disable (Enable normal RS-232C communication.)
1: Enable (Disable normal RS-232C communication.)
【#8110】 G71/G72 POCKET

Select whether to enable the pocket machining when there is a dimple (pocket) in the rough cutting
cycle (G71, G72) finishing program.
0: OFF
1: ON
【#8111】 Milling Radius

Select the diameter and radius of the linear axis for milling (cylindrical/pole coordinate) interpolation.
0: All axes radius command
1: Each axis setting (follows "#1019 dia")
(Note) This parameter is valid only in the milling (cylindrical/polar coordinate) interpolation mode.
【#8112】 DECIMAL PNT-P

Select whether to enable the decimal point command for G04 address P.
0: Disable
1: Enable
161
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#8113】 Milling Init G16

Set which plane to execute for milling machining after the power is turned ON or reset.
#8113:0, #8114:0 ---> G17 plane

#8113:0, #8114:1 ---> G19 plane
#8113:1, #8114:0 ---> G16 plane
#8113:1, #8114:1 ---> G16 plane
0: Not G16 plane

1: G16 plane
(Note) This parameter is valid for the G code system 2 or 3 ("#1037 cmdtyp"="3" or "4").
【#8114】 Milling Init G19

Set which plane to execute for milling machining after the power is turned ON or reset.
#8113:0, #8114:0 ---> G17 plane

#8113:0, #8114:1 ---> G19 plane
#8113:1, #8114:0 ---> G16 plane
#8113:1, #8114:1 ---> G16 plane
0: Not G19 plane

1: G19 plane
(Note) This parameter is valid for the G code system 2 or 3 ("#1037 cmdtyp"="3" or "4").
【#8116】 Coord rot para invd

Select whether to enable the coordinate rotation by the parameters.
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#8117】 OFS Diam DESIGN

Select tool radius or tool diameter compensation amount to be specified.
0: Tool radius compensation amount
1: Tool diameter compensation amount
【#8119】 Comp. unit switch

Select the setting unit of compensation amount that has no decimal point.
0: 1mm (or 1inch) unit
1: The minimum command unit (follows "#1003 iunit")
【#8120】 FONT SELECTION

Select the font when Simplified Chinese is selected for "#1043 lang".
0: MITSUBISHI CNC GOTHIC font
1: Standard Windows font
(Note) This parameter is available for M700VW only.
【#8121】 Screen Capture

Select whether to enable the screen capture function.
0: Disable
1: Enable
(Note 1) By setting this parameter to "1", and by keeping pushing the [SHIFT] key, screen capture
will be executed.
(Note 2) This parameter is valid with M700VS/M70/M70V/E70 Series.
【#8122】 Keep G43 MDL M-REF

Select whether to keep the tool length offset by high speed manual reference position return during
tool length offset.
0: Will not be kept (Cancel)
1: Kept
162
【#8123】 H-spd retract ON

Select whether to enable the drilling cycle at high-speed retract in fixed cycle for drilling.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#8124】 Mirr img at reset

Select the operation type of the mirror image by parameter setting and the mirror image by external
input.
0: The current mirror image is canceled, and new mirror image will start with the machine position
at reset as the mirror center.
1: The mirror center is kept to continue the mirror image.
【#8125】 Check Scode in G84

Select how to operate when there is no S command in synchronous tapping block.
0: Use the spindle function modal value as S-command value.
1: Output a program error.
【#8126】 Disable op tone

Select whether to disable keyboard/touch panel operation tones.
0: Enable the operation tones
1: Disable the operation tones
(Note)This setting is valid only for M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series.
【#8127】 R-Navi manu F coor

Select the initial value of the coordinate system for a manual feed while a machining surface is
selected in the R-Navi function.
0: Feature coordinate system
1: Machine coordinate system
【#8129】 Subpro No. select

Select the subprogram No. to be called preferentially in subprogram control.
0: Commanded program No.
1: Four-digit program No. beginning with O No.
2: Eight-digit program No. beginning with O No.
(Note)The program to be called in user macro, figure rotation, macro interruption and compound
type fixed cycle also follows this setting.
【#8135】 G5P4 single block

Single block stop is disabled during direct command mode.
0: Not disable single block stop
1: Disable single block stop
【#8145】 Validate F1 digit

Select whether to execute the F command with a 1-digit code command or with a direct numerical
command.
(The same value as "#1079 F1digt" will be reflected. When either setting changes, the other will
change accordingly.)
0: Direct numerical command (command feedrate during feed per minute or rotation)
1: 1-digit code command (with the feedrate specified by the parameters "#1185 spd_F1" to "#1189
spd_F5")
【#8154(PR)】
Not used. Set to "0".
【#8155】 Sub-pro interrupt

Select the method for the user macro interrupt.
(The same value as "#1229 set01/bit0" will be reflected. When either setting changes, the other will
0: The user macro interrupt of macro type
1: The user macro interrupt of sub-program type
163
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#8156】 Fine thread cut E

Select the address E type when cutting an inch screw.
0: Specify the number of threads per inch for inch screw cutting.
1: Specify the precision lead for inch screw cutting.
【#8157】 Radius comp type B (M system) / Nose R comp type B (L system)

For M system
Select the method of the arithmetic processing for the intersection point when the start-up or cancel
commands are operated during radius compensation.
0: The processing does not handle the start-up or cancel command block: handle the offset vector
in the direction vertical to that of the command instead.
1: The processing is executed for the intersection point between the command block and the next
block.
For L system
commands are operated during nose R or radius compensation.
block.
【#8158】 Init const sur spd

Select the initial state after power-ON.
0: Constant surface speed control cancel mode.
1: Constant surface speed control mode.
【#8159】 Synchronous tap

Select whether to use the floating tap chuck in G74 and G84 tap cycles.
0: With a floating tapping chuck
1: Without a floating tapping chuck
【#8160】 Start point alarm

Select an operation when the operation start point cannot be found while moving to the next block of
G117.
0: The auxiliary function is enabled after the block for the movement has finished.
1: The program error (P33) occurs.
【#8173】 Hold intr amount

Select whether to clear or hold the interruption amount after the "NC reset 1 (or 2)" signal is ON
when the manual ABS switch is OFF.
0: Clear (Reset the coordinate deviation due to the interruption)
1: Hold
【#8201】 AX. RELEASE

Select the function to remove the control axis from the control target.
0: Control as normal.
1: Remove from control target.
164
【#8202】 OT-CHECK OFF

Select whether to enable the stored stroke limit II function set in #8204 and #8205.
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#8203】 OT-CHECK-CANCEL
When the simple absolute position method ("#2049 type" is "9") is selected, the stored stroke limits I,
II (or IIB) and IB can be disabled until the first reference position return is executed after the power is
turned ON.
0: Enable (according to #8202)
1: Temporarily cancel
(Note) "#8203 OT-CHECK-CANCEL" affects all the stored stroke limits.
【#8204】 OT-CHECK-N
Set the coordinates of the (-) direction in the movable range of the stored stroke limit II or the lower
limit coordinates of the prohibited range of stored stroke limit IIB.
If the sign and value are the same as #8205, the stored stroke limit II (or IIB) will be invalid.
If the stored stroke limit IIB function is selected, the prohibited range will be between two points even
when #8204 and #8205 are set in reverse. When II is selected, the entire range will be prohibited if
#8204 and #8205 are set in reverse.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8205】 OT-CHECK-P
Set the coordinates of the (+) direction in the movable range of the stored stroke limit II or the upper
limit coordinates of the prohibited range of stored stroke limit IIB.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8206】 TOOL CHG. P

Set the coordinates of the tool change position for G30. n (tool change position return).
Set with coordinates in the basic machine coordinate system.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8207】 G76/87 IGNR (for M system only)

Select whether to enable the shift operation at G76 (fine boring) and G87 (back boring).
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#8208】 G76/87 (-) (for M system only)

Select the shift direction at G76 and G87.
0: Shift to (+) direction
1: Shift to (-) direction
【#8209】 G60 SHIFT (for M system only)

Set the last positioning direction and distance for a G60 (unidirectional positioning) command.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8210】 OT INSIDE
Select whether the stored stoke limit function set by #8204 and #8205 prevents the machine from
moving to the inside or outside of the specified range.
0: Inhibits outside area (Select stored stroke limit II.)
1: Inhibits inside area (Select stored stroke limit II B.)
165
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#8211】 MIRR. IMAGE

Select whether to enable the parameter mirror image function.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#8213(PR)】 Rotation axis type

Select the rotation type (short-cut valid/invalid) or linear type (workpiece coordinate linear type/all
coordinate linear type).
This parameter is enabled only when "#1017 rot" is set to "1". (Note)
0: Short-cut invalid
1: Short-cut valid
2: Workpiece coordinate linear type
3: All coordinate linear type
(Note) The movement method is as follows by the specified rotation axis type.
<Workpiece coordinate value>

0,1 : Display range 0° to 359.999°
2,3 : Display range 0° to ±99999.999°
<Machine coordinate value/relative position>
0,1,2 : Display range 0° to 359.999°
3 : Display range 0° to ±99999.999°
<ABS command>
0 : The incremental amount from the end point to the current position is divided by 360, and the
axis moves by the remainder amount according to the sign.
1 : Moves with a short-cut to the end point.
2,3 : In the same manner as the normal linear axis, moves according to the sign by the amount
obtained by subtracting the current position from the end point.
<INC command>
0,1,2,3 : Moves in the direction of the commanded sign by the commanded incremental
amount starting at the current position.
<Reference position return>
0,1,2 : The movement to the middle point applies to the ABS command or the INC command.
Returns with movement within 360 degrees from the middle point to reference position.
3 : The movement to the middle point applies to the ABS command or the INC command.
Moves and returns in the reference position direction for the difference from the current
position to the reference position.
【#8215】 TLM std length

Set the TLM standard length.
TLM standard length is the distance from a tool replacement point (reference position) to the
measurement basic point (surface) which is used to measure the tool length.
(The same value as "#2016 tlml+" will be reflected. When either setting changes, the other will
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8216】 Type in G28 return

Select the performance after establishing the reference position in reference position return
command.
0: Moves to the reference position.
1: Won't move to the reference position.
【#8217】 Check start point

Set a drawing start position in graphic check of each axis.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
166
【#8218】 Dir cmd retrct amt

Set in which direction and how much the tool escapes when the operation is halted during direct
command mode. (Radius value)
The tool does not escape when "0" is set.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8219】 Hob retract amount 1

Set the retract amount using the radius value when the Hob retract amount selection signal is OFF.
Retract is carried out in the negative direction if a negative value is set.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8220】 Hob retract amount 2

Set the retract amount using the radius value when the Hob retract amount selection signal is ON.
Retract is carried out in the negative direction if a negative value is set.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8221】 Hob retract speed

Set the retract speed during hobbing.
---Setting range---
1 to 1000000 (mm/min)
【#8300】 P0 (for L system only)

Set the reference X-coordinates of the chuck and the tail stock barrier.
Set the center coordinate (radius value) of workpiece by the basic machine coordinate system.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

Set the area of the chuck and tail stock barrier.
Set the coordinate from the center of workpiece (P0) for X-axis. (radius value)
Set the coordinate value by basic machine coordinate system for Z-axis.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
167
MITSUBISHI CNC

---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8310】 Barrier ON (for L system only)

Select whether to enable the chuck and tailstock barrier.
0: Disable (Setting from special display unit will be enabled)
1: Enable

Set the area of the left spindle section.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

Set the area of the left spindle section.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

Set the area of the right spindle section.
X axis: Set the coordinate from the workpiece center (P0). (radius value)
Z axis: Set the coordinates in the basic machine coordinate system.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

Set the area of the right spindle section.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
168
【#8315】 Barrier Type (L) (for L system only)

Select the shape of the left chuck and tailstock barrier.
0: No area
1: Chuck
2: Tailstock
【#8316】 Barrier Type (R) (for L system only)

Select the shape of the right chuck and tailstock barrier.
0: No area
1: Chuck
2: Tailstock
【#8317】 ELIV. AX. Name (for L system only)

Set the name of the delivery axis when the right chuck and tailstock barrier is movable.
When using the multi-part system method and the delivery axis is an axis in the other part system,
designate the axis including the part system as 1A, 1B or 2A, 2B. If the part system is not designated
as A and B, the set part system will be used.
---Setting range---
A/B/.. (axis name)
1A/1B/..
2A/2B/.. (with part system designated)
0: Cancel
【#8318】 Stock Angle (L) (for L system only)

Set the angle for the left tailstock end section.
The angle will be interpreted as 90° if there is no setting (when "0" is set).
---Setting range---
0 to 180 (°)
0: 90° (default)
【#8319】 Stock Angle (R) (for L system only)

Set the angle for the right tailstock end section.
The angle will be interpreted as 90° if there is no setting (when "0" is set).
---Setting range---
0 to 180 (°)
0: 90° (default)
【#8621】 Coord rot plane (H)

Set the plane (horizontal axis) for coordinate rotation control.
Usually, set the name of the 1st axis.
When this parameter is not set, the coordinate rotation function will not work.
---Setting range---
Axis name
【#8622】 Coord rot plane (V)

Set the plane (vertical axis) for coordinate rotation control.
Usually, set the name of the 2nd axis.
When this parameter is not set, the coordinate rotation function will not work.
---Setting range---
Axis name
【#8623】 Coord rot centr (H)

Set the center coordinates (horizontal axis) for coordinate rotation control.
---Setting range---
-999999.999 to 999999.999 (mm)
169
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#8624】 Coord rot centr (V)

Set the center coordinates (vertical axis) for coordinate rotation control.
---Setting range---
-999999.999 to 999999.999 (mm)
【#8625】 Coord rot vctr (H)

Set the vector components (horizontal axis) for coordinate rotation control.
When this parameter is set, the coordinate rotation control angle (#8627) will be automatically
calculated.
---Setting range---
-999999.999 to 999999.999 (mm)
【#8626】 Coord rot vctr (V)

Set the vector components (vertical axis) for coordinate rotation control.
When this parameter is set, the coordinate rotation control angle (#8627) will be automatically
calculated.
---Setting range---
-999999.999 to 999999.999 (mm)
【#8627】 Coord rot angle

Set the rotation angle for coordinate rotation control.
When this parameter is set, the coordinate rotation vector (#8625, #8626) will be "0".
---Setting range---
-360.000 to 360.000 (°)
【#8701】 Tool length

Set the length to the touch tool tip.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8702】 Tool Dia

Set the diameter of the sphere at the touch tool tip.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8703】 OFFSET X
This sets the deviation amount (X direction) from the touch tool center to the spindle center.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8704】 OFFSET Y
Set the deviation amount (Y direction) from the touch tool center to the spindle center.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8705】 RETURN
Set the one-time return distance for contacting again.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
170
【#8706】 FEED
Set the feedrate when contacting again.
---Setting range---
1 to 60000 (mm/min)
【#8707】 Skip past amout (H)

Set the difference (horizontal axis direction) between the skip read value and actual skip position.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8708】 Skip past amout (V)

Set the difference (vertical axis direction) between the skip read value and actual skip position.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#8709】 EXT work sign rvs

Reverse the sign of external workpiece coordinate.
Select when using the external workpiece coordinate system with Z shift.
0: External workpiece offset without sign reversal
1: External workpiece offset with sign reversal
【#8710】 EXT work ofs invld

Set whether to enable external workpiece offset subtraction when setting the workpiece coordinate
offset.
0: Not subtract the external workpiece offset. (Conventional specification)
1: Subtract the external workpiece offset.
【#8711】 TLM L meas axis

Set the tool length measurement axis.
Set the "#1022 axname2" axis name.
---Setting range---
Axis name
(Note) If the axis name is illegal or not set, the 3rd axis name will be set as default.
【#8712】 TLM D meas axis

Set the tool diameter measurement axis.
Set the "#1022 axname2" axis name.
---Setting range---
Axis name
(Note) If the axis name is illegal or not set, the 1st axis name will be set as default.
【#8713】 Skip coord. Switch (For M system only)

Select the coordinate system for reading skip coordinate value.
Select whether to read the skip coordinate in the workpiece coordinate system or in the feature
coordinate system during inclined surface machining command.
Select whether to read the skip coordinate in the workpiece coordinate system or in the workpiece
installation coordinate system during workpiece installation error compensation.
0: Workpiece coordinate system
1: Feature coordinate system/Workpiece installation coordinate system
171
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#8880】 Subpro stor D0: dev

Select the storage destination (device) for the subprogram.
M:Memory, G:HD(Note), F:FD(Note), R:Memory card, D:Data server(Note)
(Note) This is available only with M700/M700VW Series.
When D0 is designated at a subprogram call, the subprogram to be called will be searched from the
device selected with this parameter.
(Example) M98 P (program No.), D0

-> Device: "#8880 Subpro stor D0: dev" device
Directory: "#8881 Subpro stor D0: dir" directory
The device and directory above will be searched.
(Note 1) When the called subprogram is not found in the selected storage destination, a program
error will occur.
(Note 2) When D0 to D4 is not designated at a subprogram call, the subprogram will be searched
from the memory.
【#8881】 Subpro stor D0: dir

Select the storage destination (directory) for the subprogram.
directory selected with this parameter.
Refer to "#8880 Subpro stor D0: dev".
---Setting range---
Directory 48 characters
【#8882】 Subpro stor D1: dev


error will occur.
from the memory.

---Setting range---
172
【#8884】 Subbro stor D2: dev


error will occur.
from the memory.

---Setting range---


error will occur.
from the memory.

---Setting range---
173
MITSUBISHI CNC


error will occur.
from the memory.

When D4 is designated at a subprogram calling, the subprogram to be called will be searched from
the directory selected with this parameter.
---Setting range---
【#8890-8894】 Subpro srch odr D0 to D4

Specify the search order of D0 to D4 (devices and directories storing
subprograms) when D0 to D4 are omitted from subprogram call.
Search is performed in the order from 1 to 5. When 0 is set, the device is excluded from search.
If the same value is set for more than one device, search is carried out in the order from the one with
a smaller parameter number.
If 0 is set for all the devices, the memory is searched.
---Setting range---
0 to 5
【#8901】 Counter type 1

Set the type of counter displayed at the upper left of the AUTO/MDI display on the Monitor screen.
1: Current position
2: Workpiece coordinate position
3: Machine position
4: Program position
8: Remain command
9: Manual interrupt amount
10: Next command
11: Restart position
12: Remain distance
16: Tip workpiece coordinate position
18: Tool axis movement
19: Tip machine position
20: Relative position
21: Table coordinate position
22: Workpiece installation position
23: Inclined surface coordinate
---Setting range---
1 to 23
174

Set the type of counter displayed at the lower left of the AUTO/MDI display on the Monitor screen.
1: Current position
3: Machine position
4: Program position
8: Remain command
10: Next command
12: Remain distance
---Setting range---
1 to 23

Set the type of counter displayed at the upper right of the AUTO/MDI display on the Monitor screen.
1: Current position
3: Machine position
4: Program position
8: Remain command
10: Next command
12: Remain distance
---Setting range---
1 to 23

Set the type of counter displayed at the lower right of the AUTO/MDI display on the Monitor screen.
1: Current position
3: Machine position
4: Program position
8: Remain command
10: Next command
12: Remain distance
---Setting range---
1 to 23
175
MITSUBISHI CNC

Set the type of counter displayed at the left of the Manual display on the Monitor screen.
1: Current position
3: Machine position
4: Program position
8: Remain command
10: Next command
12: Remain distance
---Setting range---
1 to 23

Set the type of counter displayed at the right of the Manual display on the Monitor screen.
1: Current position
3: Machine position
4: Program position
8: Remain command
10: Next command
12: Remain distance
---Setting range---
1 to 23
【#8909(PR)】 Aut/Manual switch

Select the counter display method on Monitor screen.
0: "AUTO/MDI" and "Manual" display is switched by the mode selection switch.
1: Display AUTO/MDI counter only.
2: Display Manual counter only.
3: Display the enlarged counter of "#8901 Counter type 1".
(Note) This parameter is disabled when "#11019 2-system display (2-part system simultaneous
display)" is set to "1" or "2".
【#8910】 Edit undo

Set whether to enable the Undo function during program edit on the Monitor screen or Edit screen.
0: Disable
1: Enable
(Note) This parameter is valid only with M700VW/M700VS/M700/M70V Series.
176
【#8913】 Touch panel sense

Set the sensibility of the touch panel.
The smaller the setting value is, the more sensitive the panel will be.
(1: sensitive, 4: insensitive)
When set to 0, the sensibility will be the same as when the standard setting of 2 is applied.
(Note) This parameter is available for M700VS/M70V/M70 Series.
---Setting range---
0 to 4
【#8914】 Auto Top search

Select the operation method for restart search type 2.
0: It is necessary to set the top search position arbitrarily.
1: The restart search is executed from O No. that is designated as head.
【#8915】 Auto backup day 1

When the NC power is ON after the designated date was passed over, the automatic backup is
executed.
When "-1" is set to this parameter, the automatic backup is executed every turning NC power ON.
When "0" is set to all on "Auto backup day 1" to "4", the automatic backup is not executed.
It is possible to specify the designated date up to 4 days for a month.
---Setting range---
-1 to 31

executed.
When "-1" is set to "Auto backup day 1", the automatic backup is executed every turning NC power
ON.
---Setting range---
0 to 31

executed.
ON.
---Setting range---
0 to 31

executed.
ON.
---Setting range---
0 to 31
177
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#8919】 Auto backup device

Select the automatic backup target device.
[M700/M700VW Series]
0: DS
1: HD
2: Memory card
[M700VS/M70V/E70 Series]
0: Memory card
3: USB memory
[M70 Series]
0: Memory card
(Note) The setting range differs according to the model.
【#8920】 3D tool ofs select

Select the method to calculate the drawing position when drawing a solid.
With 3D drawing, the drawing position (tool tip position) is calculated with the method designated
with this parameter, and the image is drawn.
0: For tool radius compensation, use the tool compensation amount set in tool compensation
screen. For tool length, use the value in tool set window. (for tool length measurement type I)
1: Use the tool compensation amount set in tool compensation screen for both tool radius and tool
length compensation. (for tool length measurement type II)
2: Use the value set in tool set window for both tool radius and tool length compensation. (for tool
length measurement type I)
3: Use the value set in tool set window for both tool radius and tool length compensation. (for tool
length measurement type II)
【#8921】 Mass Edit select

Select the editing mode for the machining programs saved in HD, FD, and memory card.
When the program size is 1.0MB (When "#8910 Edit Undo" is invalid, 2.0MB) or more, mass-editing
will be applied.
0: Regular editing mode
1: Mass-editing mode
【#8922】 T-reg-dup check

Set whether to enable the duplication check in registering tools to magazine pots, and in setting tool
Nos. for spindle/standby.
0: Duplication check valid for all valid magazines
1: Duplication check invalid
2: Duplication check valid only for the selected magazine
【#8923(PR)】 Hide Edit-IO menu

Set whether to enable the edit-in/out menu. When disabled, the edit-input/output menu won't appear.
However, the maintenance-in/out menu is always enabled regardless of this parameter setting.
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#8924】 MEAS. CONFIRM MSG

Select whether to display a confirming message when attempting to write compensation data for tool
measurement, or coordinate system data for workpiece measurement.
However, the confirmation message will not appear in L system tool measurement simple mode
"#8957 T meas (L)-Simple".
0: Not display a confirming message
1: Display a confirming message
178
【#8925】 SP on 1st part sys

Set a spindle No. to be displayed on the 1st part system window when 2-part system simultaneous
display is valid. On the 15-type display, 1-part system display can be also specified.
High-order: Select an upper side spindle No.
Low-order: Select a lower side spindle No.
(Note 1) When "00" is set in 2-part system simultaneous display, spindles will be displayed in a
default order (the 1st spindle on the upper side, the 2nd spindle on the lower side). When "00"
is set in 1-part system display of the 15-type display, all spindles will be displayed.
(Note 2) If you designate a bigger number than the setting of "#1039 spinno", or either the high-order
or low-order setting is "0", the 1st spindle will be displayed.
(Note 3) If the low-order is set to "F", the spindle speed command value and the actual rotation
number which are specified in the high-order will be displayed.
---Setting range---
High-order: 0 to 6
Low-order: 0 to 6, F
【#8926】 SP on 2nd part sys

Set a spindle No. to be displayed on the 2nd part system window when 2-part system simultaneous
---Setting range---
High-order: 0 to 6
【#8927】 SP on 3rd part sys

Set a spindle No. to be displayed on the 3rd part system window when 2-part system simultaneous
---Setting range---
High-order: 0 to 6
179
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#8928】 SP on 4th part sys

Set a spindle No. to be displayed on the 4th part system window when 2-part system simultaneous
---Setting range---
High-order: 0 to 6
【#8929】 Disable=INPUT:comp
Select whether to enable [=INPUT] menu in [T-ofs] (tool compensation amount setting) or [Coord]
(workpiece coordinate system offset setting) menu on [Setup] screen.
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#8930】 Disable=INPUT:var
Select whether to enable [=INPUT] menu in [Com var] (common variables) menu on [Monitr] screen.
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#8931】 Display/Set limit

Select the restriction of the connected NC's screen display/settings on/from the remote control tool.
0: Permit the screen display/settings
1: Permit the screen display only
2: Restrict the connection
【#8932(PR)】 Hide measure scrn

Select whether to display the tool measurement screen and workpiece measurement screen.
0: Display
1: Not display
【#8933】 Disable lngth comp

Set whether to disable the setting of tool shape compensation amount.
0: Not disable
1: Disable
The shape compensation amount covers the following data according to the tool compensation type.
- Compensation type I ("1" in "#1037 cmdtyp(command type)")
... Compensation amount (the sum of shape compensation and wear compensation amount)
- Compensation type II ("2" in "#1037 cmdtyp(command type)")
... Length dimension and radius dimension
- Compensation type III ("3" in "#1037 cmdtyp(command type)")
... Tool length and tool nose R
180
【#8934】 Disable wear comp

Select whether to disable the setting of tool wear compensation amount.
0: Not disable
1: Disable
The wear compensation amount covers the following data according to the tool compensation type.
- Compensation type I ("1" in "#1037 cmdtyp(command type 1)")
... This parameter is disabled.
- Compensation type II ("2" in "#1037 cmdtyp(command type)")
... Length wear and radius wear
- Compensation type III ("3" in "#1037 cmdtyp(command type)")
... Tool wear and tool nose wear
【#8935】 W COORD CONFIRM

Select whether to display confirmation message when setting workpiece coordinate system offset in
[Simple setting] menu.
0: Not display
1: Display
【#8936】 Delete leading 0

In creating a file, or in transferring a file, if the file name of the new file, or the file name of the transfer
destination consists only of numerical figures, 0 of the file name head will be deleted from the name.
0: Designated file name (0 remains in the file name)
1: 0 will be deleted from the file name
【#8937】 File sort volume

Set the maximum number of files to sort in the memory card and DS lists.
If the setting is large, update of the list may take longer.
With M70V/M70/E70 Series, the maximum number will be 64 regardless of the setting of this
parameter.
---Setting range---
64 to 1000(M700/M700VW Series)
64 to 250(M700VS Series)
Standard: 64
【#8938】 Edit-Not show Prg

Select whether to enable the automatic display on the Edit screen, when selected, of the programs
searched by operation/check search or the MDI programs in MDI mode.
0: Enable the automatic display
1: Disable the automatic display
【#8939】 Undo confirm msg

Display a confirming message when operating the [Undo] menu.
0: Not display a confirming message
1: Display a confirming message
【#8940】 Set select display

Select what to display in the selectable display area.
0: Common variable
1: Local variable
2: Workpiece coordinate system offset
3: All spindles' rotation speed
4: Expanded counters
5: Tool center coordinate display
6: Custom release window
(Note 1)This parameter is available for 15-type display unit only.

(Note 2)Tool center coordinate display is available only when any of the 5-axis related options is
enabled.
181
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#8941(PR)】 ABS/INC for T-ofs

Enable switching the method to set tool compensation data
(absolute/incremental value) with INPUT key.
0: Fix it to the absolute value input.
1: Enable to switch between absolute and incremental value input.
【#8942(PR)】 $1 color
Set the color to be shown on the top-left of screen for the 1st part system. This enables switching the
color patterns for each part system.
When set to the values 1 to 4, the part system name is shown in the form of button image.
When set to 0, the settings between #8943 and #8945 is disabled and the screen is shown by the
default color pattern for all the part systems.
0: Purple (no button image) (default)
1: Purple
2: Pink
3: Light blue
4: Orange
【#8943(PR)】 $2 color
Set the color to be shown on the top-left of screen for the 2nd part system. This enables switching
the color patterns for each part system. When set to the values 1 to 4, the part system name is
shown in the form of button image.
Note) Enabled when #8942 ($1 color) is set to the values 1 to 4.
1: Purple (default)
2: Pink
3: Light blue
4: Orange
【#8944(PR)】 $3 color
Set the color to be shown on the top-left of screen for the 3rd part system. This enables switching the
color patterns for each part system. When set to the values 1 to 4, the part system name is shown in
the form of button image.
1: Purple (default)
2: Pink
3: Light blue
4: Orange
【#8945(PR)】 $4 color
Set the color to be shown on the top-left of screen for the 4th part system. This enables switching the
color patterns for each part system. When set to the values 1 to 4, the part system name is shown in
the form of button image.
1: Purple (default)
2: Pink
3: Light blue
4: Orange
【#8951】 No Tab counter sw.

Disable Tab key to change the counter type.
0: Enable Tab key to change counter typ
(The value of #8905 also changes)
1: Disable Tab key to change counter type
【#8952】 Edit-win $ switch

Select whether to enable switching of program displayed in the edit window on Monitor screen
according to the displayed part system when part system switch is performed.
0: Not switch
1: Switch
182
【#8953】 2$ disp switch typ

Select how to switch the part system to display when the 2-part system simultaneous display is
enabled.
0: Switch by incrementing the No. of part system to display by one.
1: Switch by skipping the system displayed in the non-active area. When a window is being
popped up, however, this skip is not performed and the system is switched by incrementing
the No. by one.
【#8954】 Initial type

Select the default setting of the coordinate axis direction designation method to be displayed on the
[Surface detail] screen of R-Navi.
0,1: Point (+) on the axis
2: Latitude/Longitude
3: Latitude/Projection angle
4: Start point/End point
5: Index angle
【#8955】 Init axis pair

Select the default coordinate axis combination to be displayed on the [Surface detail] screen of R-
Navi.
0,1: Z/X
2: Z/Y
3: X/Y
【#8956(PR)】 User key type

Select the definition type of the user-defined keys.
There are two user-defined keys.

Type 1：
It is the same as the conventional specification. A line feed between "[]" is not dealt as ";".
It is dealt as an upper case/lower case letter depending on the CapsLock status.
A symbolic character may be converted into a specific character.
Type 2:
A line break inside square brackets "[]" is dealt as ";".
Regardless of the CapsLock status, the defined character is input.
A symbolic character is also input as defined.
0 : Type 1 (Conventional specification)

1 : Type 2
(Note) This parameter is valid for M700VW series.
【#8957(PR)】 T meas (L)-Simple

Select the operation mode of the manual tool length measurement 1 for L system.
0: Normal operation mode (Conventional specification)
Select an axis to measure using the cursor position.
1: Simple operation mode
Select an axis to measure using an axis address key or menu.
More than one axis can be selected.
【#9001】 DATA IN PORT

Select the port for inputting the data such as machine program and parameters.
1: ch1
2: ch2
【#9002】 DATA IN DEV.

Select the device No. for inputting the data. (The device Nos. correspond to the input/output device
parameters.)
---Setting range---
0 to 4
183
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#9003】 DATA OUT PORT

Select the port for outputting the data such as machine program and parameters.
1: ch1
2: ch2
【#9004】 DATA OUT DEV.

Select the device No. for outputting the data. (The device Nos. correspond to the input/output device
parameters.)
---Setting range---
0 to 4
【#9005】 TAPE MODE PORT

Select the input port for running with the tape mode.
1: ch1
2: ch2
【#9006】 TAPE MODE DEV.

Select the device No. to be run with the tape mode. (The device Nos. correspond to the input/output
device parameters.)
---Setting range---
0 to 4
【#9007】 MACRO PRINT PORT

Select the output port used for the user macro DPRINT command.
1: ch1
2: ch2
9: Memory card
【#9008】 MACRO PRINT DEV.

Select the device No. used for the DPRINT command. (The device Nos. correspond to the input/
output device parameters.)
---Setting range---
0 to 4
【#9009】 PLC IN/OUT PORT

Select the port for inputting/outputting various data with PLC.
1: ch1
2: ch2
【#9010】 PLC IN/OUT DEV.

Select the device No. used for the PLC input/output. (The device Nos. correspond to the input/output
device parameters.)
---Setting range---
0 to 4
【#9011】 REMOTE PRG IN PORT

Select the port for inputting remote programs.
1: ch1
2: ch2
【#9012】 REMOTE PRG IN DEV.

Select the device No. used to input remote programs. The device Nos. correspond to the input/
output device parameters.
---Setting range---
0 to 4
184
【#9013】 EXT UNIT PORT

Select the port for communication with an external unit.
1: ch1
2: ch2
【#9014】 EXT UNIT DEV.

Select the unit No. used for communication with an external unit(The unit Nos. correspond to the
input/output device parameters.)
---Setting range---
0 to 4
【#9017】 HANDY TERMINAL PORT

Select the port for communication with a handy terminal.
1: ch1
2: ch2
【#9018】 HANDY TERMINAL DEV.

Select the device No. used for communication with a handy terminal. (The device Nos. correspond to
the input/output device parameters.)
---Setting range---
0 to 4
【#9051】 Data I/O port

Select whether to use display side serial port or NC side serial port for data input/output function.
0: Display side serial port
2: NC side serial port
【#9052】 Tape mode port

Select whether to use display side serial port or NC side serial port for tape mode.
【#9053】 M2 macro converter

Select whether to enable the macro converter when inputting M2/M0 formatted program via RS-
232C (serial connection).
When enabling the converter, select whether to convert the comment part enclosed with brackets ().
0: Disable
1: Enable; convert the comment part enclosed with brackets ().
2: Enable; not convert the comment part enclosed with brackets ().
【#9054】 MACRO PRINT FILE

Set the file name to save the output data to a memory card with the DRPNT command for the user
macro.
If this parameter is not set, the data will be output under the following name.
dprt$-MMDDhhmmssff
$ is the part system No. in which DPRNT is commanded, MMDDhhmmssff is the current date.
(MM: month, DD: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second, ff: millisecond)
(Note) This parameter is enabled when "#9007 Macro print directory" is set to "9".
---Setting range---
Program name or file name (32 characters)
185
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#9101】 DEV0 DEVICE NAME

Set the device name corresponding to the device No.
Set a simple name for quick identification.
---Setting range---
Use alphabet characters, numerals and symbols to set a name within 3 characters.
【#9102】 DEV0 BAUD RATE

Select the serial communication speed.
0: 19200 (bps)
1: 9600
2: 4800
3: 2400
4: 1200
5: 600
6: 300
7: 110
【#9103】 DEV0 STOP BIT

Select the stop bit length used in the start-stop system.
Refer to "#9104 DEV0 PARITY CHECK". At the output of data, the number of characters is always
adjusted for the parity check.
1: 1 (bit)
2: 1.5
3: 2
【#9104】 DEV0 PARITY CHECK

Select whether to add the parity check bit to the data.
1character
ON
OFF
b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 bn
Start bit Data bit Parity bit Stop bit
Set this parameter in accordance with the I/O device specifications.

0: Not add a parity bit in I/O mode
1: Add a parity bit in I/O mode
【#9105】 DEV0 EVEN PARITY

Select odd or even when parity is added to the data. This parameter is ignored when no parity is
added.
0: Odd parity
1: Even parity
【#9106】 DEV0 CHR. LENGTH

Set the length of the data bit.
Refer to "#9104 DEV0 PARITY CHECK".
0: 5 (bit)
1: 6
2: 7 (NC connection not supported)
3: 8
【#9107】 DEV0 TERMINATR TYP

Select the code to terminate data reading.
0, 3: EOR
1, 2: EOB or EOR
[When M700/700VW display side serial port is selected]
0: No terminator
1: EOR
2: EOB
3: EOB or EOR
186
【#9108】 DEV0 HAND SHAKE

Select the transmission control method.
No handshaking will be used when a value except 1 to 3 is set.
1: RTS/CTS method
2: No handshaking
3: DC code method
【#9109】 DEV0 DC CODE PRTY

Select the DC code type when the DC code method is selected.
0: Not add parity to DC code (DC3 = 13H)
1: Add parity to DC code (DC3 = 93H)
【#9111】 DEV0 DC2/4 OUTPUT

Select the DC code handling when outputting data to the output device.
DC2 / DC4
0: None / None
1: Yes / None
2: None / Yes
3: Yes / Yes
【#9112】 DEV0 CR OUTPUT

Select whether to add the (CR) code just before the EOB (L/F) code during output.
0: Not add
1: Add
【#9113】 DEV0 EIA OUTPUT

Select ISO or EIA code for data output.
In data input mode, the ISO and EIA codes are identified automatically.
0: ISO code output
1: EIA code output
【#9114】 DEV0 FEED CHR.

Set the length of the tape feed to be output at the start and end of the data during tape output.
---Setting range---
0 to 999 (characters)
【#9115】 DEV0 PARITY V

Select whether to perform the parity check for the number of characters in a block at the input of
data.
At the output of data, the number of characters is always adjusted to for the parity check.
0: Not perform parity V check
1: Perform parity V check
【#9116】 DEV0 TIME-OUT (sec)

Set the time out time to detect an interruption in communication.
Time out check will not be executed when set to "0".
---Setting range---
0 to 30 (s)
【#9117】 DEV0 DR OFF

Select whether to enable the DR data check in data I/O mode.
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#9118】 DEV0 DATA ASCII

Select the code of the output data.
0: ISO/EIA code (Depends on whether #9113, #9213, #9313, #9413 or #9513 EIA output
parameter is set up.)
1: ASCII code
187
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#9119】 DEV0 INPUT TYPE

Select the mode for input (verification).
0: Standard input (Data from the very first EOB is handled as significant information.)
1: EOBs following the first EOB of the input data are skipped until data other than EOB is input
【#9120】 DEV0 OUT BUFFER

Select the buffer size of the output data which is output to output device using NC side serial port.
If the output device has a data receiving error (overrun error), decrease the buffer size with this
parameter.
If the buffer size is decreased, output time will prolong according to the size.
0: 250 bytes (default)
1: 1 byte
2: 4 bytes
3: 8 bytes
4: 16 bytes
5: 64 bytes
【#9121】 DEV0 EIA CODE [

Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code "
[ ".
When output with EIA code, data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO
code, not included in EIA, is specified.
---Setting range---
0 to FF (hexadecimal)
【#9122】 DEV0 EIA CODE ]

] ".
---Setting range---
【#9123】 DEV0 EIA CODE #

Set the code in hexadecimal, which does not duplicate the existing EIA codes, for the special code
"#".
---Setting range---
【#9124】 DEV0 EIA CODE *

"*".
---Setting range---
【#9125】 DEV0 EIA CODE =

"=".
---Setting range---
188
【#9126】 DEV0 EIA CODE :

: ".
---Setting range---
【#9127】 DEV0 EIA CODE $

"$".
---Setting range---
【#9128】 DEV0 EIA CODE !

"!".
---Setting range---

---Setting range---

0: 19200 (bps)
1: 9600
2: 4800
3: 2400
4: 1200
5: 600
6: 300
7: 110

adjusted to for the parity check.
1: 1 (bit)
2: 1.5
3: 2

Select whether to add a parity check bit to the data.
1character
ON
OFF

189
MITSUBISHI CNC

Select whether even or odd parity will be used when parity is used. This parameter is ignored when
no parity is added.
0: Odd parity
1: Even parity

Select the length of the data bit.
0: 5 (bit)
1: 6
3: 8

0, 3: EOR
1, 2: EOB or EOR
0: No terminator
1: EOR
2: EOB
3: EOB or EOR

1: RTS/CTS method
2: No handshaking
3: DC code method


DC2 / DC4
0: None / None
1: Yes / None
2: None / Yes
3: Yes / Yes

0: Not add
1: Add

0: ISO code output
1: EIA code output

---Setting range---
190

data.

---Setting range---
0 to 30 (s)

0: Enable
1: Disable

1: ASCII code


If the output device has a transmission error (overrun error), decrease the buffer size with this
parameter.
1: 1 byte
2: 4 byte
3: 8 byte
4: 16 byte
5: 64 byte

[ ".
---Setting range---

] ".
---Setting range---
191
MITSUBISHI CNC

"#".
code, not included in EIA, is specified. .
---Setting range---

"*".
---Setting range---

"=".
---Setting range---

: ".
---Setting range---

"$".
---Setting range---

"!".
---Setting range---

---Setting range---
192

0: 19200 (bps)
1: 9600
2: 4800
3: 2400
4: 1200
5: 600
6: 300
7: 110

1: 1 (bit)
2: 1.5
3: 2

1character
ON
OFF


no parity is added.
0: Odd parity
1: Even parity

0: 5 (bit)
1: 6
3: 8

0, 3: EOR
1, 2: EOB or EOR
0: No terminator
1: EOR
2: EOB
3: EOB or EOR

1: RTS/CTS method
2: No handshaking
3: DC code method
193
MITSUBISHI CNC


DC2 / DC4
0: None / None
1: Yes / None
2: None / Yes
3: Yes / Yes

0: Not add
1: Add

0: ISO code output
1: EIA code output

---Setting range---

data.

---Setting range---
0 to 30 (s)

0: Enable
1: Disable

1: ASCII code

194

parameter.
1: 1 byte
2: 4 byte
3: 8 byte
4: 16 byte
5: 64 byte

[ ".
---Setting range---

] ".
---Setting range---

"#".
---Setting range---

"*".
---Setting range---

"=".
---Setting range---

: ".
---Setting range---
195
MITSUBISHI CNC

"$".
---Setting range---

"!".
---Setting range---

---Setting range---

0: 19200 (bps)
1: 9600
2: 4800
3: 2400
4: 1200
5: 600
6: 300
7: 110

1: 1 (bit)
2: 1.5
3: 2

1character
ON
OFF


no parity is added.
0: Odd parity
1: Even parity
196

0: 5 (bit)
1: 6
3: 8

0, 3: EOR
1, 2: EOB or EOR
0: No terminator
1: EOR
2: EOB
3: EOB or EOR

1: RTS/CTS method
2: No handshaking
3: DC code method


DC2 / DC4
0: None / None
1: Yes / None
2: None / Yes
3: Yes / Yes

0: Not add
1: Add

0: ISO code output
1: EIA code output

---Setting range---

data.
197
MITSUBISHI CNC

---Setting range---
0 to 30 (s)

0: Enable
1: Disable

1: ASCII code

1: EOBs following the first EOB of the input data are skipped until data other than EOB is input.

If the output device has a data receiving error (overrun error), decrease the buffer size with this
parameter.
1: 1 byte
2: 4 bytes
3: 8 bytes
4: 16 bytes
5: 64 bytes

[ ".
---Setting range---

] ".
---Setting range---

"#".
---Setting range---
198

"*".
---Setting range---

"=".
---Setting range---

: ".
---Setting range---

"$".
---Setting range---

"!".
---Setting range---

---Setting range---

0: 19200 (bps)
1: 9600
2: 4800
3: 2400
4: 1200
5: 600
6: 300
7: 110
199
MITSUBISHI CNC

1: 1 (bit)
2: 1.5
3: 2

1character
ON
OFF


no parity is added.
0: Odd parity
1: Even parity

0: 5 (bit)
1: 6
3: 8

0, 3: EOR
1, 2: EOB or EOR
0: No terminator
1: EOR
2: EOB
3: EOB or EOR

1: RTS/CTS method
2: No handshaking
3: DC code method


DC2 / DC4
0: None / None
1: Yes / None
2: None / Yes
3: Yes / Yes
200

0: Not add
1: Add

0: ISO code output
1: EIA code output

---Setting range---

data.

---Setting range---
0 to 30 (s)

0: Enable
1: Disable

1: ASCII code

1: EOBs following the first EOB of the input data are skipped until data other than EOB is input.

parameter.
1: 1 byte
2: 4 byte
3: 8 byte
4: 16 byte
5: 64 byte
201
MITSUBISHI CNC

[ ".
---Setting range---

] ".
---Setting range---

"#".
---Setting range---

"*".
---Setting range---

"=".
---Setting range---

: ".
---Setting range---

"$".
---Setting range---
202

"!".
---Setting range---
【#9601】 BAUD RATE

Select the rate at which data is transferred.
0: 19200 (bps)
1: 9600
2: 4800
3: 2400
4: 1200
5: 600
6: 300
7: 110
8: 38400
【#9602】 STOP BIT

Refer to "#9603 PARITY EFFECTIVE". At the output of data, the number of characters is always
1: 1 (bit)
2: 1.5
3: 2
【#9603】 PARITY EFFECTIVE

Select whether to add the parity bit to the data.
The parameter is set when using a parity bit separately from the data bit.
1character
ON
OFF
Set this parameter according to the specifications of input/output device.

0: Not add a parity bit at the input/output
1: Add a parity bit at the input/output
【#9604】 EVEN PARITY

Select odd or even when parity is added to the data. This parameter is ignored when no parity is
added.
0: Odd parity
1: Even parity
【#9605】 CHR. LENGTH

Refer to "#9603 PARITY EFFECTIVE".
0: 5 (bit)
1: 6
3: 8
【#9606】 HAND SHAKE

"3" (DC code method) should be set for computer link B.
0: No control
1: RTS/CTS method
2: No handshaking
3: DC code method
203
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#9607】 TIME-OUT SET

Set the time-out time at which an interruption of data transfer during data input/output should be
detected.
"0" means infinite time-out.
---Setting range---
0 to 999 (1/10s)
【#9608】 DATA CODE

Set the code to be used for the data description.
Refer to "#9603 PARITY EFFECTIVE".
0: ASCII code
1: ISO code
【#9609】 LINK PARAM. 1
bit1: DC1 output after NAK or SYN

Select whether to output the DC1 code after the NAK or SYN code is output.
0: Not output the DC1 code.
1: Output the DC1 code.
bit7: Enable/disable resetting
Select whether to enable the resetting in the computer link.
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#9610】 LINK PARAM. 2
Bit 2: Specify the control code parity (even parity for the control code).
Select whether to add an even parity to the control code, in accordance with the I/O device
specifications.
0: Not add a parity bit to the control code
1: Add a parity bit to the control code
Bit 3: Parity V
Select whether to enable checking of parity V in one block at the input of the data.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#9611】 Link PARAM. 3


Not used. Set to “0”.

【#9614】 START CODE

Select the code used to command the first transfer of file data.
This parameter is used for a specific user. Normally set "0".
0: DC1 (11H)
1: BEL (07H)
204
【#9615】 CTRL. CODE OUT
bit 0: NAK output

Select whether to send the NAK code to the host if a communication error occurs in computer link B.
0: Not output the NAK code
1: Output the NAK code.
bit 1: SYN output
Select whether to send the SYN code to the host if NC resetting or an emergency stop occurs in
computer link B.
0: Not output the SYN code.
1: Output the SYN code.
bit 3: DC3 output
Select whether to send the DC3 code to the host when the communication ends in computer link B.
0: Not output the DC3 code.
1: Output the DC3 code.
【#9616】 CTRL. INTERVAL

【#9617】 WAIT TIME

【#9618】 PACKET LENGTH

【#9619】 BUFFER SIZE

【#9620】 START SIZE

【#9621】 DC1 OUT SIZE

【#9622】 POLLING TIMER

【#9623】 TRANS. WAIT TMR

【#9624】 RETRY COUNTER

【#9701(PR)】 IP addr auto set

The IP address is automatically assigned from the server.
0: Manual setting
1: Automatic setting
(Note) When the automatic setting is selected, "#11005 PC IP address, PC Subnet, PC Gateway"
will be invalid.
【#9706】 Host No.

Select the No. of the host to be used from host 1 to host 4.
---Setting range---
1 to 4 : Host No.
205
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#9711】 Host1 host name

Set the host computer name.
This parameter allows the NC to easily recognize the host computer on the network. Set the host
computer's name (name registered in C:\windows\hosts) or the IP address.
<Setting example>
For host name: mspc160
For IP address: 150.40.0.111
(Note) Set the host computer's TCP/IP address if communication is not carried out correctly.
---Setting range---
15 characters (alphanumeric) or less
【#9712】 Host1 user name

Set the user name when logging into the host computer.
---Setting range---
【#9713】 Host1 password

Set the password when logging into the host computer.
---Setting range---
【#9714】 Host1 directory

Set the directory name of the host computer.
The directory released to the client (NC unit) with the host computer's server is handled as root
directory by the NC unit.
---Setting range---
【#9715】 Host1 host type

Select the type of the host computer.
0: UNIX/PC automatic judgment
1: UNIX
2: PC (DOS)
(Note) When "0" is set, the settings for the following parameters will be invalid.
- #9716 Wrd pos: name
- #9717 Wrd pos: size
- #9718 Wrd pos: Dir
- #9719 Wrd pos: cmnt
- #9720 Wrd num: cmnt
【#9716】 Host 1 Wrd pos: name

Set the file name display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the ftp command "dir"
is executed.
(Note) One word designates a character string divided by one or more spaces.
---Setting range---
0 to 100
0: Default value
206
【#9717】 Host 1 Wrd pos: size

Set the size display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the ftp command "dir" is
executed.
---Setting range---
0 to 100
0: Default value
【#9718】 Host 1 Wrd pos: Dir

Set the <DIR> display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the ftp command "dir" is
executed.
---Setting range---
0 to 100
0: Default value
【#9719】 Host 1 Wrd pos: cmnt

Set the comment (date, time, etc.) display position (nth word from left) of the list displayed when the
ftp command "dir" is executed.
---Setting range---
0 to 100
0: Default value
【#9720】 Host 1 Wrd num: cmnt

Set the number of words to be displayed as a comment.
---Setting range---
0 to 100
0: Default value
【#9721】 Host 1 no total siz

Set whether to display the total number of characters registered in the machining programs of host1
when displaying the file list.
If there are many files in the directory to be referred to, the list can be updated quickly by setting "1".
0: Display
1: Not display

<Setting example>
---Setting range---

---Setting range---
207
MITSUBISHI CNC

---Setting range---

The directory released to the client (NC unit) with the host computer's server is handled as the root
---Setting range---

1: UNIX
2: PC (DOS)

is executed.
---Setting range---
0 to 100
0: Default value

executed.
---Setting range---
0 to 100
0: Default value

executed.
---Setting range---
0 to 100
0: Default value
208

---Setting range---
0 to 100
0: Default value

---Setting range---
0 to 100
0: Default value

0: Display
1: Not display

<Setting example>
---Setting range---

---Setting range---

---Setting range---

---Setting range---
209
MITSUBISHI CNC

1: UNIX
2: PC (DOS)

is executed.
---Setting range---
0 to 100
0: Default value

executed.
---Setting range---
0 to 100
0: Default value

executed.
---Setting range---
0 to 100
0: Default value

---Setting range---
0 to 100
0: Default value

---Setting range---
0 to 100
0: Default value
210

0: Display
1: Not display

<Setting example>
---Setting range---

---Setting range---

---Setting range---

---Setting range---

1: UNIX
2: PC (DOS)

is executed.
---Setting range---
0 to 100
0: Default value
211
MITSUBISHI CNC

executed.
---Setting range---
0 to 100
0: Default value

executed.
---Setting range---
0 to 100
0: Default value

---Setting range---
0 to 100
0: Default value

---Setting range---
0 to 100
0: Default value

0: Display
1: Not display
212
【#10501 - 10530(PR)】 Monitr main menu 1 to 30

Set the menu Nos. to display the menu on Monitor screen's main menu using menu customization
function.
The menu position of each parameter and the menu when "0" is set are as follows.
#10501: First from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Search)
#10502: Second from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Research)
#10503: Third from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Edit)
#10504: Fourth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Trace)
#10505: Fifth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Check)
#10506: Sixth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Cnt exp)
#10507: Seventh from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Offset)
#10508: Eighth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Coord)
#10509: Ninth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Cnt set)
#10510: Tenth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: MST)
#10511: First from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Modal)
#10512: Second from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Tree)
#10513: Third from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Time)
#10514: Fourth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Com var)
#10515: Fifth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Loc var)
#10516: Sixth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: P corr)
#10517: Seventh from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: PLC SW)
#10518: Eighth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: G92 set)
#10519: Ninth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Col stp)
#10520: Tenth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: LD MTR)
#10521: First from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Sp-stby)
#10522: Second from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: TipDisp)
#10523: Third from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: All sp)
#10524: Fourth from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: MST)
#10525: Fifth from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)
#10526: Sixth from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)
#10527: Seventh from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)
#10528: Eighth from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)
#10529: Ninth from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)
#10530: Tenth from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)
-- Menu No. --
-1: Not display
0: Default
1: Search
2: Research
3: Edit
4: Trace
5: Check
6: Cnt exp
7: Offset
8: Coord
9: Cnt set
10: MST
11: Modal
12: Tree
13: Time
14: Com var
15: Loc var
16: P corr
17: PLC SW
18: G92 set
19: Col stp
20: LD MTR
21: Sp-stby
22: TipDisp
23: All sp
24: MST
(Note) If the menu No. for "Not display" is set for the main menu, that menu will not be displayed.
213
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#10551 - 10580(PR)】 Setup main menu 1 to 30

Set the menu Nos. to display the menu on Setup screen's main menu using menu customization
function.
#10551: First from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: T-ofs)
#10552: Second from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: T-meas)
#10553: Third from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: T-reg)
#10554: Fourth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: T-life)
#10555: Fifth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Coord)
#10556: Sixth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: W-meas)
#10557: Seventh from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: User)
#10558: Eighth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: MDI)
#10559: Ninth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Cnt set)
#10560: Tenth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: MST)
#10561: First from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: T-list)
#10562: Second from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Pallet)
#10563: Third from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Not display)
#10564: Fourth from left in the page 2 (when "0" is set: Not display)
#10571: First from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)
#10572: Second from left in the page 3 (when "0" is set: Not display)
-- Menu No. --
-1: Not display
0: Default
1: T-ofs
2: T-meas
3: T-reg
4: T-life
5: Coord
6: W-meas
7: User
8: MDI
9: Cnt set
10: MST
11: T-list
12: Pallet
214
【#10601 - 10630(PR)】 Edit main menu 1 to 30

Set the menu Nos. to display the menu on Edit screen's main menu using menu customization
function.
#10601: First from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Edit)
#10602: Second from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: Check)
#10603: Third from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: NAVI)
#10605: Fifth from left in the page 1 (when "0" is set: I/O)
-- Menu No. --
-1: Not display
0: Default
1: Edit
2: Check
3: NAVI
5: I/O
【#10801】 Notice tel num 1

Set the call-back telephone No. used for one-touch call and operator notification.
Begin with the No. from an area code for domestic call.
Begin with a communication company No. for international call.
Hyphens "-" can be used as a delimiting character.
---Setting range---
Within 28 characters
【#10802】 Comment 1
Set a comment, such as a party's name, for the notification party telephone No.1.
---Setting range---
Within 20 alphanumerical characters
(excluding spaces)
215
MITSUBISHI CNC

---Setting range---
【#10804】 Comment 2
---Setting range---
(excluding spaces)

---Setting range---
【#10806】 Comment 3
---Setting range---
(excluding spaces)
【#10807】 Password
Set the password for sharing of machining data.
---Setting range---
4 characters (one-byte alphanumeric characters, without space)
【#10808】 Customer number

Set the user No. for sharing of machining data.
---Setting range---
Within 8 characters (one-byte alphanumeric characters, without space)
【#10812】 Anshin-net valid

Select whether to enable the Anshin-net function.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#10813】 MTBnet enable

Select whether to enable the machine tool builder network system.
0: Disable
1: Enable
Standard setting: 0
(Note) Values other than "0" and "1" are invalid.
216
【#10814】 OP-notice condition

Select the condition of an NC for delivering an operator notification.
0: When the "automatic operation is starting" signal turns off. (Notifies the alarm if an alarm occurs,
and if not, notifies the completion of machining.)
1: If the designated "#10971 Complete condition" changes into "#10972 Complete CND num", or
the "automatic operation is starting" signal turns off due to an alarm.(Notifies the alarm if an
alarm occurs at the change of device condition, and if not, notifies the completion of machining.)
2: When the "automatic operation is starting" signal turns off due to an alarm.
【#10815】 OP-notice mode

Select whether to cancel the mode after delivering an operator notification.
0: Cancel
1: Not cancel. Cancel the mode by screen operation.
【#19001】 Syn.tap(,S)cancel
0: Retain the spindle speed (,S) in synchronous tap return
1: Cancel the spindle speed (,S) in synchronous tap return with G80
The same value as "#1223 aux07/bit6" will be reflected. When either setting changes, the other will
change accordingly.
【#19002】 Zero-point mark

Select the position for displaying the zero point mark in the graphic trace and 2D check.
0: Machine coordinates zero point (same as conventional method)
1: Workpiece coordinate zero point
The same value as "#1231 set03/bit4" will be reflected. When either setting changes, the other will
change accordingly.
【#19003】 PRG coord rot type

Select the start point of the initial travel command after program coordinate rotation command.
0: Calculate the end position using the current position on the local coordinate system before
rotating, without rotating the start point in accordance with the coordinates rotation.
1: Calculate the end position, assuming that the start point rotates in accordance with the
coordinates rotation.
【#19004】 Tap feedrate limit

Set the upper limit of the cutting feed rate in synchronous tapping.
---Setting range---
0 to 1000(mm/rev)
(Note)Setting "0" disables this parameter.

When the commanded cutting feed rate in synchronous tapping exceeds this setting, a
program error (P184) will occur.
【#19005】 manual Fcmd2 clamp

Set a clamp speed coefficient (%) for manual speed command 2.
The feed rate is clamped at the command feed rate or rapid traverse rate for automatic operation,
which was multiplied by this parameter's value.
(Note)This setting is valid only for manual speed command 2.
---Setting range---
0 to 1000 (%)
0: 100% (Default value)
【#19006(PR)】 EOR Disable

Set whether to handle an EOR(%) in machining program as the end of program in automatic
operation, graphic check, program transfer to NC memory, program editing, and buffer correction.
Tape operation, Computer Link B, and serial input/output are not included.
0: An EOR(%) is handled as the end of machining program.
1: An EOR(%) is not handled as the end of machining program. The program will be read to the
end of file.
217
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#19008】 PRM coord rot type

Select the start point of the initial travel command after parameter coordinate rotation.
0: Calculate the end position, assuming that the start point rotates in accordance with the
coordinates rotation.
1: Calculate the end position using the current position on the local coordinate system before
rotating, without rotating the start point in accordance with the coordinates rotation.
【#19401】 G33.n chamfer spd

Not used.
【#19405】 Rotary ax drawing

Specify this parameter to draw a path of C axis (rotary axis) according to its rotation in the graphic
trace and 2D graphic trace.
When "#1013 axname" is set to "C", the axis is handled as a rotary axis.
By setting this parameter to "C", a rotation path around the Z axis on actual workpiece can be
expressed.
When the Graphic check rotary axis drawing option or Graphic trace rotary axis drawing option is
disabled, this parameter is ignored.
C：Enable this function
0：Disable this function
（Setting is cleared when "0" is set）
【#19406】 Hob retract ON at alarm

Select whether to enable the retract at an alarm during hobbing.
0：Disable
1：Enable
【#19407】 Hob retract acceleration deceleration OFF

Select whether to disable the acceleration/deceleration of a retract.
0：Enable
1：Disable
【#19417】 Hole dec check 2

This is enabled when #1253 set25 bit2 is 1.
The operation at the hole bottom and the hole drilling stop position is as below.
0: Perform no deceleration check.
1: Perform command deceleration check.
2: Perform in-position check.
<Target fixed cycles>
Machining center: G81, G82, G83, G73
Lathe : G83, G87, G83.2
【#19425】 ManualB Std R1

Set a radius used as standard for the rotary axis speed.
When the setting value of #19425 is larger than that of "#19427 ManualB Std R2", #19425 setting
will be used as surface speed control standard radius 2: #19427 setting will be used as surface
speed control standard radius 1.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#19426】 ManualB Std F1

This sets the rotary axis speed for surface speed control standard radius 1 (ManualB Std R1).
When the setting value of #19426 is larger than that of "#19428 ManualB Std F2", #19426 setting will
be used as surface speed control standard speed 2: #19427 setting will be used as surface speed
control standard speed 1.
---Setting range---
1 to 1000000 (°/min)
218
【#19427】 ManualB Std R2

Set a radius used as standard for the rotary axis speed.
When the same value is set as "#19425 ManualB Std R1", the surface speed control standard speed
1 (ManualB Std F1) will be selected as the rotary axis speed if the radius is less than that value. The
surface speed control standard speed 2 (ManualB Std F2) is selected if larger than the set value.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#19428】 ManualB Std F2

Set the rotary axis speed for surface speed control standard radius 2 (ManualB Std R2).
---Setting range---
1 to 1000000 (°/min)
219
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1.2 Base Specifications Parameters

【#1001(PR)】 SYS_ON System validation setup

Select the existence of PLC axes and part systems.
0: Not exist
1: Exist
【#1002(PR)】 axisno Number of axes

Set the number of control axes and PLC axes.
A total of 16 axes can be set.
Control axis: 0 to 8
PLC axis: 0 to 6
When set to "0", the number of control axes in the part system will be "0". Do not set the number of
control axes of the first part system to "0".
【#1003(PR)】 iunit Input setup unit

Select the input setting value for each part system and the PLC axis.
Increments in parameters will follow this selection.
B : 1 μm
C : 0.1 μm
D : 0.01 μm (10nm)
E : 0.001 μm (1nm)
【#1004(PR)】 ctrl_unit Control unit

Select the control increment for each part system and PLC axis.
Select the increment for the NC internal position data, communication data between the NC and
drive unit, and the servo travel data. Although the standard value is "D", set the optimum value
according to the series and specification.
B : 1 μm
C : 0.1 μm
D : 0.01 μm (10nm)
E : 0.001 μm (1nm)
【#1005(PR)】 plcunit PLC unit

Select the PLC interface setting and display increment.
The PLC interface setting and display increment will follow this specification. Note that the PLC axis
will follow “#1003 iunit”.
B : 1 μm
C : 0.1 μm
D : 0.01 μm (10nm)
E : 0.001 μm (1nm)
【#1006(PR)】 mcmpunit Machine error compensation unit

Select the machine error compensation setting and display increment.
The parameters related to machine error compensation (backlash, pitch error compensation, etc.)
and PLC interface (external machine coordinate system compensation) will follow this selection.
B : 1 μm
C : 0.1 μm
D : 0.01 μm (10nm)
E : 0.001 μm (1nm)
220
【#1007(PR)】 System type select System type select

Select the NC system type.
0: Machining center system (M system)
1: Lathe system (L system)
(Note 1) If the setting value is out of range, M system will be selected.

(Note 2) This parameter is valid only for M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series. (M700/M700VW series
doesn't support this parameter.)
【#1010(PR)】 srvunit Output unit (servo)

Select the output increment to servo. Although the standard value is "D", set the optimum value
according to the series and specification.
B : 1 μm
C : 0.1 μm
D : 0.01 μm (10nm)
E : 0.001 μm (1nm)
【#1013(PR)】 axname Axis name

Set each axis' name with an alphabetic character.
Use the characters X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B or C.
(Note 1) Do not set the same name twice in one part system.
The same name which is used in another part system can be set.
(Note 2) The PLC name does not need to be set. (Numbers 1 to 6 are shown as the axis names.)
---Setting range---
X,Y,Z,U,V,W,A,B,C
【#1014(PR)】 incax Increment command axis name

Set the axis name when commanding an incremental value for the axis travel amount.
(Note 1) Set an alphabet that is different from that of “#1013 axname”.
(Note 2) Setting is not required if absolute/incremental specification with axis names is not
performed (“#1076 Abslnc” = “0”).
---Setting range---
X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, H
【#1015(PR)】 cunit Program command unit

Set the minimum increment of program travel command.
cunit Travel amount for travel command 1
0: Follow “#1003 iunit”
1: 0.0001 mm (0.1μm)
10: 0.001 mm (1μm)
100: 0.01 mm (10μm)
1000: 0.1 mm (100μm)
10000: 1.0 mm
If there is a decimal point in travel command, the decimal point position will be handled as 1mm
regardless of this setting.
【#1017(PR)】 rot Rotational axis

Select whether the axis is a rotary axis or linear axis.
When rotary axis is set, the axis will be controlled with the rotary axis's coordinate system. Set the
rotary axis type with "#8213 Rotation axis type".
0: Linear axis
1: Rotary axis
【#1018(PR)】 ccw Motor CCW

Select the direction of the motor rotation to the command direction.
0: Clockwise (looking from motor shaft) with the forward rotation command
1: Counterclockwise (looking from motor shaft) with the forward rotation command
221
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1019(PR)】 dia Diameter specification axis

Select the command method of program travel amount.
When the travel amount is commanded with the diameter dimensions, the travel distance will be
5mm when the command is 10mm of travel distance.
The travel amount per pulse will also be halved during manual pulse feed.
If diameter is selected, tool length, the wear compensation amount, and the workpiece coordinate
offset will be displayed in diameter value. Other parameters concerning length will always be
displayed in radius value.
0: Command with travel amount
1: Command with diameter dimension
【#1020(PR)】 sp_ax Spindle Interpolation

Select "1" when using the spindle for the contour control of NC axis (C-axis).
0: Servo axis is used for contour control.
1: Spindle is used for contour control.
【#1021(PR)】 mcp_no Drive unit I/F channel No. (servo)

Using a 4-digit number, set the drive unit interface channel No. and which axis in that channel is to
be used when connecting a servo drive unit.
Axis No.
Not used㧔Set to "0"㧕
Drive unit interface channel No.
【#1022(PR)】 axname2 2nd axis name

Set the name of the axis displayed on the screen with two characters. (X1, Z2, etc.)
Always use an alphabetic character (A to Z) for the first character.
---Setting range---
A to Z and 1 to 9 (Two digits)
(Setting will be cleared when “0” is set)
【#1023(PR)】 crsadr Command address during mixed control (cross axis control)
Set the axis name for issuing a command to this axis during mixed control (cross axis control).
---Setting range---
X,Y,Z,U,V,W,A,B,C
【#1024(PR)】 crsinc Incremental command address during mixed control (cross axis
control)
Set the axis name for issuing an incremental command to this axis during mixed control (cross axis
control).
---Setting range---
X,Y,Z,U,V,W,A,B,C,H
【#1025】 l_plane Initial plane selection

Select the plane to be selected when the power is turned ON or reset.
1: X-Y plane (G17 command state)
2: Z-X plane (G18 command state)
3: Y-Z plane (G19 command state)
222
【#1026】 base_I Base axis I

Set the names of the basic axes that compose the plane.
Set the axis name set in "#1013 axname".
If all three items ("base_I", "base_J" and "base_K") do not need to be set, such as for 2-axis
specifications, input "0", and the parameter will be blank.
Normally, when X, Y and Z are specified respectively for base_l, _J, _K, the following relation will be
established:
G17: X-Y
G18: Z-X
G19: Y-Z
Specify the desired axis name to set an axis address other than above.
---Setting range---
Axis names such as X, Y or Z
【#1027】 base_J Base axis J

established:
G17: X-Y
G18: Z-X
G19: Y-Z
---Setting range---
【#1028】 base_K Base axis K

established:
G17: X-Y
G18: Z-X
G19: Y-Z
---Setting range---
【#1029】 aux_I Flat axis I

Set the axis name when there is an axis parallel to "#1026 base_I".
---Setting range---
【#1030】 aux_J Flat axis J

Set the axis name when there is an axis parallel to "#1027 base_J".
---Setting range---
【#1031】 aux_K Flat axis K

Set the axis name when there is an axis parallel to "#1028 base_K".
---Setting range---
223
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1037(PR)】 cmdtyp Command type

Set the G code list and compensation type for programs.
1 : List1(for M) Type I (one compensation amount for one compensation No.)
2 : List1(for M) Type II (shape and wear compensation amounts for one comp. No.)
3 : List2(for L) Type III (shape and wear compensation amounts for one comp. No.)
4 : List3(for L) Ditto
5 : List4(for special L) Ditto
9 : List8(for M) M2 form at type Type I
(one compensation amount for one compensation No.)
10 : List8(for M) M2 form at type Type II
(shape and wear compensation amounts for one compensation No.)
There are some items in the specifications that can be used or cannot be used according to the
value set in this parameter.
The file structure may also change depending on the compensation data type.
(Note) When this parameter is changed, the file system will be changed after the power is turned
ON.
So always execute format.
The new format will be enabled after turning the power ON again.
Setting order
(1) cmdtyp changeover -> (2) Turn power ON again -> (3) Format -> (4) Turn power ON again
【#1038】 plcsel Ladder selection

【#1039(PR)】 spinno Number of spindles

Select the number of spindles.
0: No spindle
1 to 6: One to six spindles
【#1040(PR)】 M_inch Constant input (inch)

Select the unit system for setting and display regarding machine parameter and PLC interface's
position, length and speed.
0: Metric system
1: Inch system
【#1041(PR)】 l_inch Initial state (inch)

Select the unit system for the program travel amount when the power is turned ON or reset and for
position display.
0: Metric system
1: Inch system
(Note) The units of the following data are converted by "#1041 I_inch".
- Command unit at power ON and reset (Inch/metric command mode)
But under the following conditions, the unit will follow G20/G21 command modal even at
reset.
When reset modal is retained ("#1151 rstint"="0")
When G code group 06 reset modal is retained ("#1210 RstGmd/bit5" ON)
- Unit system for position display (counter, user parameter, tool, work offset)
- User parameter I/O unit
- Parameter unit of user parameters concerning length and speed
- Arc error parameter (#1084 RadErr)
【#1042(PR)】 pcinch PLC axis command (inch)

Select the unit system for the commands to the PLC axis.
0: Metric system
1: Inch system
224
【#1043】 lang Select language displayed

Select the display language.
0: English (Standard)
1: Japanese (Standard)
11: German (Option)
12: French (Option)
13: Italian (Option)
14: Spanish (Option)
15: Traditional Chinese (Option)
16: Korean (Option)
17: Portuguese (Option)
18: Dutch (Option)
19: Swedish (Option)
20: Hungarian (Option)
21: Polish (Option)
22: Simplified Chinese (Option)
23: Russian (Option)
24: Turkish (Option)
25: Czech (Option)
(Note) A language which can be displayed is different according to each series.
【#1044(PR)】 auxno MR-J2-CT Connections

Set the number of MR-J2-CTs connected.
(Note) The number of MR-J2-CTs possible to connect and setting range are different according to
the model.
Check the specifications of each series.
【#1050(PR)】 MemPrg
【#1051(PR)】 MemTol Tool compensation memory common for part systems

0: Tool compensation memory separate for part systems
1: Tool compensation memory common for part systems
【#1052(PR)】 MemVal No. of common variables shared in part system designation

0: Common variables common for part systems (number fixed)
#100 - : Per part system
#500 - : Common for part systems
1: Common variables common for part systems (number designation)
#100 - : Designate with V1comN
#500 - : Designate with V0comN
(Note) When this parameter is changed, the file system will be changed after the power is turned
ON.
So always execute format.
The new format will be enabled after turning the power ON again.
Setting order
(1) MemVal changeover -> (2) Turn power ON again -> (3) Format -> (4) Turn power ON again
【#1061(PR)】 intabs Manual ABS updating

Select whether to update the absolute position data during automatic handle interrupt.
This parameter is enabled only when "#1145 l_abs" is set to “1”.
0: Do not update (coordinate system shifted the amount of the interruption)
1: Update (same coordinates as when interrupt did not occur will be applied)
225
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1062】 T_cmp Tool compensation function

Select whether the tool length compensation and wear compensation are enabled during T
command execution.
0 : Tool length compensation enable Wear compensation enable
1 : Tool length compensation enable Wear compensation disable
2 : Tool length compensation disable Wear compensation enable
3 : Tool length compensation disable Wear compensation disable
【#1063】 mandog Manual dog-type

Select the manual reference position return method for the second return (after the coordinate
system is established) and later.
The initial reference position return after the power ON is performed with dog-type return, and the
coordinate system will be established.
(This setting is not required when the absolute position detection is used.)
0: High speed return
1: Dog-type
【#1064(PR)】 svof Error correction

Select whether to correct the error when the servo is OFF.
0: Not correct the error
The command value will not change during servo OFF, and the movement amount during servo
OFF will be handled as droop. When the servo is turned ON the next time, the axis will move to
the command position where it used to be when the servo was turned OFF.
1: Correct the error
The command value and the current position will follow the feedback position. When the servo is
turned ON the next time, the axis will not move.
During servo READY OFF, the operation will be always the same as of "Correct the error". (The
current position will follow the position of the axis.)
【#1068(PR)】 slavno Secondary axis number

Set the axis number of the secondary axis in synchronous control.
The axis number is an NC number excluding the spindle and PLC axis.
Two or more secondary axes cannot be set for one primary axis.
This parameter cannot be set for a secondary axis.
When using the multi-part system, the relation of the primary axis and secondary axis cannot extend
over part systems.
0: No secondary axis
1 to 16: First to sixteenth axis
【#1069】 no_dsp Axis with no counter display

Select whether to display the axis counter or not.
This setting is enabled on the counter display screen (relative position counter, etc.).
0: Display
1: Not display
【#1070】 axoff Axis removal

Select whether to enable or disable axis removal control.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#1072】 chop_ax Chopping axis

Select the chopping axis.
0: Non-chopping axis
1: Chopping axis
【#1073】 I_Absm Initial absolute setting

Select the mode (absolute or incremental) at turning ON the power or reset.
0: Incremental setting
1: Absolute setting
226
【#1074】 l_Sync Initial synchronous feed

Select the feedrate mode at turning ON the power or reset.
0: Asynchronous feed (feed per minute)
1: Synchronous feed (feed per revolution)
【#1075】 I_G00 Initial G00

Select the linear command mode at turning ON the power or reset.
0: Linear interpolation (G01 command state)
1: Positioning (G00 command state)
【#1076】 Abslnc ABS/INC address (for L system only)

Select the command method for the absolute and incremental commands.
0: Use G command for the absolute and incremental commands.
1: Use axis name for the absolute and incremental commands.
(The axis name in "#1013 axname" will be the absolute command, "#1014 incax" will be the
incremental command.)
When "1" is selected, using two axis names, one each for the absolute and incremental commands,
allows to issue the absolute and incremental commands appropriately to an axis.
【#1077】 radius Incremental command for diameter specification axis

Select whether the incremental command of the diameter specification axis (“#1019 dia” is set to “1”)
uses the diameter value or radius value.
0: Diameter value
1: Radius value
【#1078】 Decpt2 Decimal point type 2

Select the increment of position commands that do not have a decimal point.
0: Minimum input command unit (follows "#1015 cunit")
1: 1mm (or 1inch) unit (For the dwell time, 1s unit is used.)
【#1079】 F1digt Validate F1 digit

Select the F command method.
0: Direct numerical command (command feedrate during feed per minute or rotation)
1: 1-digit code command (feedrate set with “#1185 spd_F1” to “#1189 spd_F5”)
【#1080】 Dril_Z Specify boring axis (for M system only)

Select a fixed cycle hole drilling axis.
0: Use an axis vertical to the selected plane as hole drilling axis.
1: Use the Z axis as the hole drilling axis regardless of the selected plane.
【#1081】 Gmac_P Give priority to G code parameter

Select the G code priority relationship during the macro call with G command.
0: Priority is on G code used in the system
1: Priority is on registered G code for call
【#1082】 Geomet Geometric

Select the type of geometric to use.
0: Not use
1: Use only geometric I
2: Use geometric I and IB
With geometric, specific address codes are used for exclusive meanings. Thus, if A or C is used for
the axis name or 2nd miscellaneous command code, the A used for the axis name may function as
the geometric's angle designation. Pay special attention to axis names, etc., when using this
function.
227
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1084】 RadErr Arc error

Set the tolerable error range when the end point deviates from the center coordinate in the circular
command.
---Setting range---
0 to 1.000 (mm)
【#1085】 G00Drn G00 dry run

Select whether to apply dry run (feed at manual setting speed instead of command feedrate) to the
G00 command.
0: Not apply to G00. (move at rapid traverse rate)
1: Apply to G00. (move at manual setting speed)
【#1086】 G0lntp G00 non-interpolation

Select the G00 travel path type.
0: Move linearly toward the end point. (interpolation type)
1: Move to the end point of each axis at the rapid traverse feedrate for each axis. (non-
interpolation)
(Note) If this parameter is set to "1", neither of the following functions will be available: rapid traverse
constant inclination acceleration/deceleration and rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step
acceleration/deceleration.
【#1087】 G96_G0 Constant surface speed control by rapid traverse feed command
Select how to handle the surface speed for the G00 command when using the constant surface
speed control function.
0: Calculate the surface speed constantly even during G00 movement
1: Calculate the surface speed at the block end point in the G00 command
【#1088】 G30SL Disable G30 soft limit

Select how to handle the soft limit during G30 (2nd reference position return).
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#1091】 Mpoint Ignore middle point

Select how to handle the middle point during G28 and G30 reference position return.
0: Pass the middle point designated in the program and move to the reference position.
1: Ignore the middle point designated in the program and move straight to the reference position.
【#1092】 Tchg _A Replace tools for additional axis

Select the movement of the additional axis at the tool change position return command.
0: The additional axis will not move
1: After the standard axis returns, the additional axis will also return to the tool change position
【#1093】 Wmvfin Synchronization between part systems method

Select the timing of synchronization between part systems when using the multi-part system.
When the travel command is found in the synchronization command (!, M) block:
0: Synchronize before executing travel command
1: Synchronize after executing travel command
【#1094】 Tl_SBK Select life count for single block (for L system only)
Select whether to count the data units to be used for single block operation when using the tool life
management II function (L system).
0: Not count
1: Count
【#1095】 T0tfof TF output (for L system only)

Select how to handle TF for T00 command.
0: TF will be output
1: TF wont be output
228
【#1096(PR)】 T_Ltyp Tool life management type

Select the tool life management type.
1: Life management l
In this type, how long and how many times the program commanded tool is used are
accumulated to monitor the usage state.
2: Life management ll
This method is the same as tool life management I, but with the spare tool selection function.
A spare tool is selected from a group of tool commands commanded in the program.
Tool compensation (tool length compensation and tool radius compensation) is carried out for
the selected tool.
3: Life management lll (for M system only)
The usage time or frequency of use which is designated by the program is accumulated, and the
tool usage state is monitored.
It is not managed by the group number.
(Note) When "3" is set for the L system, the Life management l is selected.
【#1097】 Tldigt Tool wear compensation number 1-digit command

Select the number of digits of the tool wear compensation No. in the T command.
0: The 2 high-order digits are the tool No., and the 2 low-order digits are the wear compensation
No.
1: The 3 high-order digits are the tool No., and the 1 low-order digit is the wear compensation No.
This parameter will be fixed to “0” when tool life management II is selected.
【#1098】 Tlno. Tool length offset number

Select the number of digits of the tool length compensation No. in the T command.
0: The 2 or 3 high-order digits are the tool No.
The 2 or 1 low-order digits are the tool length compensation and wear compensation Nos.
1: The 2 or 3 high-order digits are the tool No. and tool length compensation Nos.
The 2 or 1 low-order digits are the wear compensation No.
【#1099】 Treset Cancel tool compensation amount

Select how to handle the tool compensation vector when resetting the system.
0: Clear the tool length and wear compensation vectors when resetting
1: Hold the tool length and wear compensation vectors when resetting
When the values are cleared, the compensation will not be applied. So the axis will be shifted by the
compensation amount in the next compensation operation.
When the values are kept, the compensation will be applied, so the axis will shift the differential
amount of the compensation amount in the next compensation operation.
【#1100】 Tmove Tool compensation

Select when to perform tool length compensation and wear compensation.
0: Compensate when T command is executed.
1: Superimpose and compensate with the travel command in the block where the T command is
located. If there is no travel command in the same block, compensation will be executed after
the travel command is superimposed in the next travel command block.
2: Compensate the wear amount when the T command is executed. Superimpose and
compensate the tool length compensation amount with the travel command in the same block.
If there is no travel command in the same block, compensation will be executed after the travel
command is superimposed in the next travel command block.
【#1101】 Tabsmv Tool compensation method

Select the type of travel command when “#1100 Tmove” is set to “1” or “2”.
0: Compensate regardless of the travel command type
1: Compensate only at the travel command in the absolute command
【#1102】 tlm Manual tool length measuring system (for L system only)
Select the measurement method for manual tool measurement l.
0: Align tool with basic point
1: Input measurement results
(Note) Interpreted as “0” when other than “0” or “1” is set.
229
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1103】 T_Life Validate life management

Select whether to use the tool life management.
0: Not use
1: Use
【#1104】 T_Com2 Tool command method 2

Select how to handle the tool command in the program when "#1103 T_Life" is set to "1".
0: Handle the command as group No.
1: Handle the command as tool No.
(Note) In the case of the tool life management III, the program tool command will be handled as the
tool No. regardless of the setting.
【#1105】 T_Sel2 Tool selection method 2

Select the tool selection method when "#1103 T_Life" is set to "1".
0: Select in order of registered No. from the tools used in the same group.
1: Select the tool with the longest remaining life from the tools used or unused in the same group.
【#1106】 Tcount Life management (for L system only)

Select the input method when address N is omitted in inputting the data (G10 L3 command) for tool
life management function II.
0: Time specified input
1: Number of times specified input
【#1107】 Tllfsc Split life management display screen (for L system only)
Set the number of groups to be displayed on the tool life management II (L system) screen.
0: Displayed group count 1, maximum number of registered tools: 16
【#1108】 TlrectM Life management re-count M code (for L system only)

Set the M code for tool life management II (L system) re-count.
---Setting range---
0 to 99
【#1109】 subs_M Validate alternate M code

Select the user macro interrupt with the substitute M code.
0: Disable alternate M code
1: Enable alternate M code
【#1110】 M96_M M96 alternate M code

Set an M code to replace M96 when “#1109 subs_M” is set to “1”.
---Setting range---
3 to 97 (excluding 30)
【#1111】 M97_M M97 alternate M code

Specify an M code to replace M97 when #1109 subs_M is set to 1.
---Setting range---
3 to 97 (excluding 30)
【#1112(PR)】 S_TRG Validate status trigger method

Select the enable conditions for the user macro interrupt signal (UIT).
0: Enable when interrupt signal (UIT) turns ON
1: Enable when interrupt signal (UIT) is ON
【#1113(PR)】 INT_2 Validate interrupt method type 2

Select the performance after user macro interrupt signal (UIT) input.
0: Execute interrupt program without waiting for block being executed to end
1: Execute interrupt program after completing block being executed
230
【#1114】 mcrint Macro argument initialization

Select whether to clear statements other than specified arguments by macro call.
Also select whether to clear local variables by power-ON and resetting.
0: Clear the non-specified arguments by macro call.
1: Hold non-specified arguments by macro call
2: Hold non-specified arguments by macro call, and clear local variables by power-ON and
resetting
【#1115】 thwait Waiting for thread cutting

Set the queue number during screw thread cutting when chamfering is disabled.
---Setting range---
0 to 99 (Approx. 4 ms)
Standard setting value: 4
【#1116】 G30SLM Invalidate soft limit (manual operation)

Enable this function when disabling the soft limit check function at the second to fourth reference
position return.
0: Enable soft limit function
1: Disable soft limit function
【#1117(PR)】 H_sens
Select the handle response mode during handle feed.
0: Standard
1: High-speed
【#1118】 mirr_A Select how to set up the length of tools on cutter tables (opposed tables)
(for L system only)
Select one of the following two methods:
- Set the current length of tools on each facing turret.
- Set a value, assuming that the tools on each facing turret are in the same direction as that of those
on the base turret.
0: Current length of the tools on each facing turret
1: Value, assuming that the tools on each facing turret are in the same direction as that of those on
the base turret
【#1119】 Tmiron Select the mirror image of each facing turret with T command (for L system
only)
Select whether to enable the mirror image of each facing turret with the T command.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#1120(PR)】 TofVal Change macro variable

Select whether to change the macro variable (tool offset) numbers for shape compensation and
wear compensation.
0: Not change (Conventional specification)
1: Change the shape and wear compensation variable numbers each for X, Z, and R
【#1121】 edlk_c Edit lock C

Select the edit lock for program Nos. 9000 to 9999 in memory.
0: Editing possible
1: Editing prohibited. The file cannot be opened.
(Note) If “#1122” is set to “1” or “2”, “1” will be set in “#1121” when the power is turned ON.
231
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1122(PR)】 pglk_c Program display lock C

Select whether to prohibit the program display and search for program Nos. 9000 to 9999 in
memory.
0: Program display and search is possible
1: Program display is impossible. Search is possible.
2: Program display and search is impossible
(Note) If “#1122” is set to “1” or “2”, “1” will be set in “#1121” when the power is turned ON.
【#1123】 origin Origin set prohibit

Select whether to use the origin set function.
0: Use
1: Not use
【#1124】 ofsfix Fix tool compensation No.

Select how to handle the compensation No. when the input key is pressed on the tool compensation
screen.
0: Increment the compensation No. by 1 (Same as general parameters)
1: # compensation No. does not change
When setting in sequence, “0” is handier. When changing and setting repeatedly while adjusting one
compensation value, “1” is handier
【#1125】 real_f Actual feedrate display

Select the feedrate display on the monitor screen.
0: Command speed
1: Actual travel feedrate
【#1126】 PB_G90 Playback G90

Select the method to command the playback travel amount in the playback editing.
0: Incremental value
1: Absolute value
【#1127】 DPRINT DPRINT alignment

Select the alignment for printing out with the DPRINT function.
0: No alignment, output s printed with left justification
1: Align the minimum digit and output
【#1128】 RstVCI Clear variables by resetting

Select how to handle the common variables when resetting.
0: Common variables won't change after resetting.
1: The following common variables will be cleared by resetting:
#100 to #149 when 100 sets of variables are provided.
#100 to #199 when 200 sets or more of variables are provided.
【#1129】 PwrVCl Clear variables by power-ON

Select how to handle the common variables when the power is turned ON.
0: The common variables are in the same state as before turning the power OFF.
1: The following common variables will be cleared when the power is turned ON:
#100 to #149 when 100 sets of variables are provided.
#100 to #199 when 200 sets or more of variables are provided.
【#1130】 set_t Display selected tool number

Select the tool command value display on the POSITION screen.
0: Display T-modal value of program command
1: Display Tool No. sent from PLC
232
【#1132】 brightness
Select the brightness of display unit.
1: High brightness (in bright state)
0: Medium brightness
-1: Low brightness (in dim state)
(Note) This setting is valid only for M700VW/M700VS/M70V/M70/E70 Series.
Set this to "0" for M700 series display as it has no brightness control function.
【#1133】 ofsmem
【#1134】 LCDneg
【#1135】 unt_nm Unit name

Set the unit name.
Set with 4 or less characters consisting of both alphabets and numbers.
If "0" is set, the unit name won't be displayed.
---Setting range---
4 or less characters consisting of both alphabets and numbers
【#1136】 optype
【#1137】 Cntsel
【#1138】 Pnosel
【#1139】 edtype
【#1140】 Mn100 M code number

Set the first number of M code that corresponds to the setup Nos. from 100 to 199.
---Setting range-
0 to 99999999

---Setting range---
0 to 99999999

---Setting range---
0 to 99999999

---Setting range---
0 to 99999999
233
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1144】 mdlkof MDI setup lock

Select whether to enable MDI setting in non-MDI mode.
0: Disable MDI setting
1: Enable MDI setting
【#1145】 I_abs Manual ABS parameter

Select how to handle the absolute position data during automatic handle interrupt.
0: Absolute position data will be renewed if manual ABS switch is ON. If it is OFF, data won't be
renewed.
1: Follow the "intabs" state when "#1061 intabs" is enabled
【#1146】 Sclamp Spindle rotation speed clamp function

Select how to handle the spindle rotation speed clamp function with the G92S command.
0: G92S command is handled as a clamp command only in the G96 state (during constant surface
speed control).
G92S will be handled as normal S command in G97 state (constant surface speed OFF).
1: The S command in the same block as G92 is constantly handled as a clamp command
【#1147】 smin_V Minimum spindle rotation speed clamp type

Specify the type of spindle min. rotation speed clamp value.
0: Rotation speed setting
1: Output voltage coefficient setting
Set “#3023 smini” according to this type setting.
【#1148】 I_G611 Initial high precision

Set the high accuracy control mode for the modal state when the power is turned ON.
0: G64 (cutting mode) at power ON
1: G61.1 (high-accuracy control mode) at power ON
(Note) When the option of high-accuracy control in 2 part systems is enabled, it will be enabled in
both systems.
【#1149】 cireft Arc deceleration speed change

Select whether to decelerate at the arc entrance or exit.
0: Not decelerate
1: Decelerate
【#1151】 rstint Reset initial

Select whether to initialize (power ON state) the modals by resetting.
0: Not initialize modal state
1: Initialize modal state
【#1153】 FixbDc Hole bottom deceleration check

Select whether to perform a deceleration check or in-position check at the hole bottom in a hole
drilling cycle. This parameter is enabled only for a hole drilling cycle in which no dwell command can
be issued at the hole bottom.
0: Perform no deceleration check and in-position check
1: Perform deceleration check
2: Perform in-position check
【#1154(PR)】 pdoor
【#1155】 DOOR_m
---Setting range---
100
234
【#1156】 DOOR_s
---Setting range---
100
【#1157】 F0atrn
【#1158】 F0atno
【#1163(PR)】 No rio RIO connection detection invalid

Select whether to enable or disable RIO connection detection.
0: Enable
1: Disable
If your I/O consists of only cards such as CC-LINK, setting this parameter to “1” will avoid the RIO
communication cutoff alarm.
【#1164(PR)】 ATS Automatic tuning function

Select whether to enable or disable the automatic tuning function.
0: Disable
1: Enable
(Note) Enable this parameter when using MS Configurator.
【#1166】 fixpro Fixed cycle editing

Select a type of program dealt on the edit/program list/data in/out screen, general program, fixed
cycle, or machine tool builder macro program.
0: General programs can be edited, etc.
1: Fixed cycles can be edited, etc.
Password No.: The machine tool builder macro programs can be edited, etc.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999999
【#1167】 e2rom
【#1168】 test Simulation test

Select the test mode for the control unit.
In the test mode, test is performed with a hypothetical reference position return complete even
though the real reference position return hasn't been completed. This is limited to test operation of
the control unit itself, and must not be used when the machine is connected.
0: Normal operation mode
1: Test mode
【#1169】 part system name Part system name

Set the name of each part system.
This must be set only when using multi-part system.
This name will be displayed on the screen only when the part systems must be identified.
Use a max. of four alphabetic characters or numerals.
---Setting range---
A max. of four alphabetic characters or numerals.
【#1170】 M2name Second miscellaneous code

Set this address code when using the 2nd miscellaneous command. Set an address with A, B or C
that is not used for "#1013 axname" or "#1014 incax".
---Setting range---
A, B, C
235
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1171】 taprov Tap return override

Set the tap return override value for the synchronous tapping.
When "0" is set, it will be regarded as 100%.
---Setting range---
0 to 100 (%)
【#1172】 tapovr Tap return override

Set the override value when leaving the tap end point in the synchronous tapping cycle.
When "0" is set, 100 % is applied for the operation.
---Setting range---
0 to 999 (%)
【#1173】 dwlskp G04 skip condition

Set the skip signal for ending the G04 (dwell) command.
PLC interface input signal
Skip3 Skip2 Skip1
0: - - -
1: - - *
2: - * -
3: - * *
4: * - -
5: * - *
6: * * -
7: * * *
(* : Enable - : Disable)
【#1174】 skip_F G31 skip speed

Set the feedrate when there is no F command in the program at G31 (skip) command.
---Setting range---
1 to 999999 (mm/min)
【#1175】 skip1 G31.1 skip condition

Designate the skip signal in multi-step skip G31.1.
The setting method is same as "#1173".
【#1176】 skip1f G31.2 skip speed

Set the skip feedrate in multi-step skip G31.1.
---Setting range---
1 to 999999 (mm/min)

Set the skip signal in multi-step skip G31.2.

---Setting range---
1 to 999999 (mm/min)

Set the skip signal in multi-step skip G31.3
236

---Setting range---
1 to 999999 (mm/min)
【#1181】 G96_ax Constant surface speed axis

Select the axis to be targeted for constant surface speed control.
0: Program setting will be disabled, and the axis will always be fixed to the 1st axis
1: 1st axis
2: 2nd axis
3: 3rd axis
:
8: 8th axis
However, when set to other than “0”, the priority will be on the program setting.
【#1182】 thr_F Thread cutting speed

Set the screw cut up speed when not using chamfering in the thread cutting cycle.
0: Cutting feed clamp feedrate
1 to 60000 mm/min: Setting feedrate
---Setting range---
0 to 60000 (mm/min)
【#1183】 clmp_M M code for clamp

Set the M code for C axis clamp in hole drilling cycle.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999999
【#1184】 clmp_D Dwelling time after outputting M code for unclamp

Set the dwell time after outputting the M code for C axis unclamp in hole drilling cycle.
---Setting range---
0.000 to 99999.999 (s)
【#1185】 spd_F1 F1 digit feedrate F1

Set the feedrate for the F command in the F 1-digit command ("#1079 F1digit" is set to "1").
Feedrate when F1 is issued (mm/min)
When "#1246 set08/bit6" is set to "1" and F 1-digit feed is commanded, the feedrate can be
increased/decreased by operating the manual handle.
---Setting range---
0 to 1000000 (mm/min)

---Setting range---
0 to 1000000 (mm/min)

---Setting range---
0 to 1000000 (mm/min)
237
MITSUBISHI CNC

---Setting range---
0 to 1000000 (mm/min)

---Setting range---
0 to 1000000 (mm/min)
【#1190(PR)】 s_xcnt Validate inclined axis control (for L system only)

Select whether to enable or disable inclined axis control.
0: Disable inclined axis control
1: Enable inclined axis control
【#1191(PR)】 s_angl Inclination angle (for L system only)

Set the inclination angle (θ).
(Note) When set to "0", the angle determined by three-side setting will be applied.
---Setting range---
-80.000 to 80.000 (°)
【#1192(PR)】 s_zrmv Compensation at reference position return (for L system only)

Select whether to perform compensation for the base axis corresponding to the inclined axis at
reference position return.
0: Perform compensation
1: Not perform compensation
【#1193】 inpos Deceleration check method 1/ Validate in-position check

The definitions are changed with the setting of "#1306 InpsTyp Deceleration check specification
type".
<When Deceleration check method 1 is selected>
Select the deceleration check method for G0.
0: Command deceleration check
<When Deceleration check method 2 is selected>
Select the deceleration confirmation method for the positioning or cutting command.
0: G0, G1+G9 Command deceleration check
1: G0, G1+G9 In-position check
【#1194】 H_acdc Time constant 0 for handle feed

Select the time constant for manual handle feed.
0: Use time constant for G01
1: Time constant 0 (step)
【#1195】 Mmac Macro call for M command

Select whether to enable or disable M command macro call of user macro.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#1196】 Smac Macro call for S command

Select whether to enable or disable S command macro call of user macro.
0: Disable
1: Enable
238
【#1197】 Tmac Macro call for T command

Select whether to enable or disable T command macro call of user macro.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#1198】 M2mac Macro call with 2nd miscellaneous code

Select whether to enable or disable 2nd miscellaneous command macro call of user macro.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#1199】 Sselect Select initial spindle control

Select the initial condition of spindle control after power is turned ON.
0: 1st spindle control mode (G43.1)
1: Selected spindle control mode (G44.1)
2: All spindle simultaneously control mode (G47.1)
(Note) Spindle No. when G44.1 is commanded is selected with “#1534 SnG44.1”.
【#1200(PR)】 G0_acc Validate acceleration and deceleration with inclination angle constant
G0
Select the acceleration and deceleration type when a rapid traverse command is issued.
0: Acceleration and deceleration with constant time (conventional type)
1: Acceleration and deceleration with a constant angle of inclination
(Note) When rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step acceleration/deceleration is valid, this
parameter will be invalid.
【#1201(PR)】 G1_acc Validate acceleration and deceleration with inclination constant G1

Select the acceleration and deceleration type when a linear interpolation command is issued.
0: Acceleration and deceleration with constant time (conventional type)
1: Acceleration and deceleration with a constant angle of inclination
【#1202】 mirofs Distance between facing turrets (for L system only)

Set the distance between tools (edges) (between facing turrets).
---Setting range---
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#1203】 TmirS1 Select turrets as facing turrets with T command (for L system only)
Select the turrets, which correspond to the tool Nos. 1 to 32, as facing turrets for T code mirror
image.
---Setting range---
0 to FFFFFFFF
【#1204】 TmirS2 Select turrets as facing turrets with T command (for L system only)
Select the turrets, which correspond to the tool Nos. 33 to 64, as facing turrets for T code mirror
image.
---Setting range---
0 to FFFFFFFF
【#1205】 G0bdcc Acceleration and deceleration before G0 interpolation

0: Post-interpolation acceleration/deceleration is applied to G00.
1: Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration is applied to G00 even in the high accuracy control
mode.
2: Rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step acceleration/deceleration is enabled.
(Note) Set "0" for the 2nd part system and the following.
When the option of high-accuracy control option in 2 part systems is enabled, "1" can be set
for the 2nd part system.
239
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1206】 G1bF Maximum speed

Set a cutting feedrate when applying pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration.
When high-accuracy control time constant expansion is valid, set the maximum of cutting feed clamp
speed of each axis.
---Setting range---
1 to 999999 (mm/min)
【#1207】 G1btL Time constant

Set a cutting feed time constant when applying pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration.
When set to "0", the time constant will be clamped at 1ms.
Speed
G1bF
Time
G1btL
---Setting range---
Without high-accuracy control time constant expansion: 0 to 5000 (ms)
With high-accuracy control time constant expansion: 0 to 30000 (ms)
Cutting feed Acc Cutting feed acceleration

Displays cutting feed acceleration.
【#1208】 RCK Arc radius error compensation factor

Set a coefficient for arc radius error compensation.
An arc radius error compensation amount can be increased or decreased between -60.0 and
+20.0%.
---Setting range---
-60.0 to +20.0 (%)
【#1209】 cirdcc Arc deceleration speed

Set the deceleration speed at the arc entrance or exit.
---Setting range---
1 to 999999 (mm/min)
240
【#1210】 RstGmd Modal G code reset

Select whether to initialize G code group modals and H and D codes, which corresponds to bits as
follows, when the system is reset.
0: Initialize.
1: Not initialize.
<Description of bits for M system>
1F 1E 1D 1C 1B 1A 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
0 0 0 0 0 0 * * 0 0 0 0 * * * *
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 * 0 * * 0 * 0 * * * * 0 * * *
bit 1F: (Not used)
bit 1E: (Not used)
bit 1D: (Not used)
bit 1C: (Not used)
bit 1B: (Not used)
bit 1A: (Not used)
bit 19: Spindle clamp rotation speed initialization
bit 18: H, D codes initialization
bit 17: (Not used)
bit 16: (Not used)
bit 15: (Not used)
bit 14: (Not used)
bit 13: Group 20 2nd spindle control modal initialization
bit 12: Group 19 G command mirror modal initialization
bit 11: Group 18 Polar coordinate command modal initialization
bit 10: Group 17 Constant surface speed control command modal initialization
bit F: (Not used)
bit E: Group 15 Normal line control modal initialization
bit D: (Not used)
bit C: Group 13 Cutting modal initialization
bit B: Group 12 Workpiece coordinate system modal initialization
bit A: (Not used)
bit 9: Group 10 Fixed cycle return command modal initialization
bit 8: (Not used)
bit 7: Group 8 Length compensation modal initialization
bit 6: Group 7 Radius compensation modal initialization
241
MITSUBISHI CNC
bit 5: Group 6 Inch/metric modal initialization
bit 4: Group 5 Feed G modal initialization
bit 3: (Not used)
bit 2: Group 3 Absolute/incremental command modal initialization
bit 1: Group 2 Plane selection modal initialization
bit 0: Group 1 Move G modal initialization
The H code indicates the tool length offset number, and the D code indicates the tool radius
compensation number.
When bit 18 is set to ON, the H and D codes and group 8 G modal are retained.
When bit 7 is set to ON, the H code and group 8 G modal are retained.
<Description of bits for L system>

1F 1E 1D 1C 1B 1A 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
0 0 0 0 0 0 * 0 0 0 0 0 * 0 * *
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 * 0 * * 0 * 0 0 * * * * * * *
bit 1F: (Not used)
bit 1E: (Not used)
bit 1D: (Not used)
bit 1C: (Not used)
bit 1B: (Not used)
bit 1A: (Not used)
bit 19: Spindle clamp rotation speed initialization
bit 18: (Not used)
bit 17: (Not used)
bit 16: (Not used)
bit 15: (Not used)
bit 14: (Not used)
bit 13: Group 20 2nd spindle control modal initialization
bit 12: (Not used)
bit 11: Group 18 Balance cut initialization
bit 10: Group 17 Constant surface speed control command modal initialization
bit F: (Not used)
bit E: Group 15 Facing turret mirror image initialization
bit D: (Not used)
bit C: Group 13 Cutting modal initialization
242
bit B: Group 12 Workpiece coordinate system modal initialization
bit A: (Not used)
bit 9: Group 10 Fixed cycle return command modal initialization
bit 8: (Not used)
bit 7: (Not used)
bit 6: Group 7 Nose R compensation modal initialization
bit 5: Group 6 Inch/metric modal initialization
bit 4: Group 5 Feed G modal initialization
bit 3: Group 4 Barrier check modal initialization
bit 2: Group 3 Absolute/incremental command modal initialization
bit 1: Group 2 Plane selection modal initialization
bit 0: Group 1 Move G modal initialization
【#1213(PR)】 proaxy Side 1 of inclination angle (for L system only)

Set the length within the orthogonal coordinate of the inclined axis, a side of the triangle formed with
the inclination angle.
---Setting range---
-9999.999 to 9999.999
【#1214(PR)】 macaxy Side 2 of inclination angle (for L system only)

Set the actual length of the base axis corresponding to the inclined axis, a side of the triangle formed
with the inclination angle.
---Setting range---
-9999.999 to 9999.999
【#1215(PR)】 macaxx Side 3 of inclination angle (for L system only)

Set the actual length of the inclined axis, a side of the triangle formed with the inclination angle.
---Setting range---
-9999.999 to 9999.999
【#1216】 extdcc External deceleration level

Set the upper limit value of the feedrate when the external deceleration signals are enabled.
---Setting range---
1 to 999999 (mm/min)
【#1217】 aux01
243
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1218】 aux02
bit3: Parameter input/output format

Select the parameter input/output format.
0: Type I
1: Type II (related to "#1218 aux02/bit5")
bit4: External workpiece coordinate offset tool number selection
Select the R register that contains the tool number used for automatic calculation when measuring
the coordinate offset of an external workpiece.
0: Follow the setting of "#1130 set_t".
1: Use the tool number indicated by user PLC.
bit5: Parameter I/O II spindle specification address
Select the spindle specification address of parameter I/O type II.
0: C
1: T
This parameter is also applied to the spindle specification address for input and verification.
(Note) This parameter is valid only for parameter I/O type II (when "#1218 aux02/bit3" is set to "1").
bit6: Set No. valid when program input

Select which program No. is applied when inputting programs in "#1 MAIN PROGRAM" on Data I/O
screen.
0: The No. in the input data
1: The No. set in the data setting area
bit7: Input by program overwrite
(1) Select the operation when the program to be input in "#1 MAIN PROGRAM" on Data I/O screen,
has already been registered.
0: An operation error (E65) occurs.
1: Input by overwrite.
(2) Select the operation in the high-speed program server mode, when the name of the file to be
transmitted with (IC -> host) transmission already exists in the host.
0: Prohibit overwrite
1: Enable overwrite
244
【#1219】 aux03
bit1: Stop high-speed PC monitoring function

Set "1" to disable the function that triggers the emergency stop when the PC high-speed processing
time is extended.
Disable the monitoring function only as a temporary measure.
bit5: Dog-type intermediate point
Select whether to move to the intermediate point during automatic dog-type reference position
return.
0: Not move.
1: Move.
bit7: Time constant setting changeover for soft acceleration/deceleration
0: Accelerating time is G0tL(G1tL).
When the G00 pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration and the soft acceleration/deceleration
are used together, the inclination of soft acceleration/deceleration will be steeper by setting a
time to the soft acceleration/deceleration 2nd step time constant (#2005 G0t1).
Consequently, the acceleration for G28/G30 will be larger than that for G00.
(1) Total accelerating time is "G0tL".
(2) The time for curve part is "G0t1".
(3) The time for linear part is obtained by "G0tL-(2 x G0t1)".
Speed
㨠
G0tL㧙G0tl
G0tL
Acceleration
㨠
G0tl G0tl
1: Accelerating time is obtained by G0tL+G0t1 (G1tL+G1t1).

When the G00 pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration and the soft acceleration/deceleration
are used together, you can attain the G28/G30 acceleration that is equal to G00, by setting the
same value to G00 soft acceleration/deceleration filter (#1569 SfiltG0) as well as to the soft
acceleration/deceleration 2nd step time constant (#2005 G0t1).
(1) Total accelerating time is obtained by "G0tL+G0t1".
(2) The time for curve part is "G0t1".
(3) The time for linear part is obtained by "G0tL-G0t1".
Speed
㨠
G0tL
G0tL㧗G0t1
Acceleration
㨠
G0t1 G0t1
245
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1220】 aux04 (for L system only)
bit 0: Tool life check timing selection

Select the criterion to judge the tool life end when the use count is incremented in tool life
management II.
0: Determine the tool life end when the incremented use count has exceeded the life count.
(Default)
(Use count > life count)
1: Determine the tool life end when the incremented use count has reached the life count.
(Use count ≧ life count)
【#1221】 aux05
bit0: Workpiece coordinate/ Absolute coordinate display switching

Select the coordinate to display when workpiece coordinate position counter is selected for the
Monitor screen counter display.
0: Workpiece coordinate
1: Absolute coordinate
【#1222】 aux06
bit4: Minimum cut-in amount selection

Select the minimum cut-in amount command value for the compound thread cutting cycle (G76
command).
0: The minimum cut-in amount (Q) will be "0".
1: The minimum cut-in amount (Q) will be set in the the last command value (it is retained even
after the NC power has been turned off).
bit5: Fixed cycle for compound lathe command format check selection
Select the operation when the 1st block of the fixed cycle for compound lathe is omitted while the
conventional format is selected ("#1265 ext01/bit0" is set to "0").
0: Program error (P33) will occur.
1: Parameter setting value will be used.
bit7: Reference position return deceleration check method
Select the deceleration check method to be used during automatic reference position return.
1: Commanded deceleration check
246
【#1223】 aux07
bit1: Deceleration check method 2

Select the deceleration check method in G1+G9.
0: Command deceleration check in G1+G9
1: In-position check in G1+G9
The deceleration check is not performed for the commands except G1+G9.
When "#1306 InpsTyp deceleration check specification type" is set to "1" (Deceleration check
specification type 2), this parameter will be invalid.
bit2: Synchronous tap R-point in-position check
Select whether to enable the synchronous tap I-point -> R-point in-position check.
0: Disable
1: Enable
(Note) This parameter is valid only when "1" (Enable in-position check) is set for "#1223 aux07/bit3
Synchronous tap in-position check improvement".
bit3: Synchronous tap in-position check improvement

Select whether to enable the synchronous tap in-position check improvement.
0: Disable
1: Enable
Related parameters:
#1223/bit2 Synchronous tap R-point in-position check
#1223/bit4 Synchronous tap hole bottom in-position check
#1223/bit5 Synchronous tap R-point in-position check 2
bit4: Synchronous tap hole bottom in-position check
Select whether to enable the synchronous tap hole bottom in-position check.
0: Disable
1: Enable
bit5: Synchronous tap R-point in-position check 2

Select whether to enable the synchronous tap R-point in-position check.
0: Disable
1: Enable
bit6: Cancel synchronous tap (, S) return

0: Retain the spindle speed (, S) in synchronous tap return
1: Cancel the spindle speed (, S) in synchronous tap return with G80
bit7: Synchronous tap method
Select the synchronous tapping method.
0: Synchronous tapping with multi-step acceleration and rapid return
1: Conventional type synchronous tapping
【#1224】 aux08
bit0: Sampling data output

Select whether to enable the sampling data output.
0: Disable
1: Enable
247
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1225】 aux09
bit7: Enable/disable spindle rotation speed clamp

Select whether to enable the spindle rotation speed clamp by the G92 S or Q command for the
spindle command rotation speed (R7000) set with the user ladder.
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#1226】 aux10
bit0: Tool compensation data for external workpiece coordinate offset measurement
Select the tool compensation data to be used for external workpiece coordinate offset measurement.
0: Tool length data and tool nose wear data
1: Tool length data
bit1: Optional block skip type
Select whether to enable the optional block skip in the middle of a block.
0: Enable only at the beginning of a block.
1: Enable in the middle of a block, as well as at the beginning of the block.
bit2: Single block stop timing
Select the timing at which the single block signal is activated.
0: When the signal goes ON while automatic operation is starting, the block will stop after finished.
1: When the signal is ON at the end of the block, the block will stop.
bit3: C-axis reference position return type
Select the C-axis reference position return type.
0: Basic position return is performed by the G28 reference position return command or by
activating the manual reference position return. The basic point dog is used.
1: When the first C-axis command is issued after the C-axis mode is entered in automatic mode,
reference position return is performed before the execution of the block. The reference position
return is also performed by the G28 reference position return command or by activating the
manual reference position return. The Z phase of the encoder is used.
bit4: S command during constant surface speed
Select whether to output a strobe signal when the S command is issued in constant surface speed
mode.
0: Not output any strobe signal in constant surface speed mode.
1: Output strobe signals in constant surface speed mode.
bit5: Arbitrary allocation of dog signal
Select whether to enable the arbitrary allocation parameter for the origin dog and H/W OT.
0: Disable (Fixed device is used.)
1: Enable (Device is specified by the parameter.)
248
【#1227】 aux11
bit0: Select PLC signal or spindle feedrate attained

Set up this option when disabling the cutting start interlock by spindle feedrate attained.
0: Cutting start interlock by PLC signal
1: Cutting start interlock by spindle feedrate attained
bit1: Select H or D code
Set up this option to validate the data that is set up on the tool life management screen when issuing
the H99 or D99 command.
0: The H and D codes validate the data that is set up on the management setup screen.
1: Validates the data that is set up on the management setup screen when issuing the H99 or D99
command.
bit2: Measures against tool setter chattering
Select a condition where a relieving operation completes after measurement with tools.
0: Sensor signals have stopped for 500 ms or longer.
1: 100 μm or longer has passed after sensor signals stopped.
bit5: Spindle rotation speed clamp
Specify whether to clamp the rotation speed in constant surface speed mode when the spindle
rotation clamp command is issued.
0: Clamps the rotation regardless of the constant surface speed mode.
1: Clamps the rotation only in constant surface speed mode.
bit7: Switch the range of tool life data to be input
Set up the range of tool life data to be input or compared.
0: Inputs or compares all of the data output.
1: Inputs or compares part of the data output
1) Tool life management I data to be input or compared tool number (D), lifetime (E), life count (F),
and auxiliary data (B).
2) Tool life management II data to be input or compared Group number (G), method (M), life (E/F),
tool number (D), and compensation number (H)
【#1228】 aux12
bit1: Switch "offset and parameter" screen

Select to switch the "offset and parameter" screen to the parameter screen.
0: Display the "offset and parameter" screen.
1: Display the "parameter" screen.
bit2: Switch data protection in data transmission mode
Select the range of data protection in data transmission mode.
0: Enable the protection for both send and receive data.
1: Enable the protection for receive data only.
bit4: Select operation error or stop code
Select operation error or stop code to provide for both block start and cutting start interlocks.
0: Operation error
1: Stop code
bit5: Select constant surface speed coordinates
Select the constant surface speed coordinate.
0: Workpiece coordinate
1: Absolute value coordinate
bit6: Switch relative values displayed
Select whether to preset the relative coordinates with workpiece coordinate preset (G92.1) or
counter preset (G92).
0: Preset the relative coordinates.
1: Not preset the relative coordinates.
bit7: Protection with manual value command
Select whether to protect a manual value command.
0: Not protect. (Conventional specification)
1: Protect.
249
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1229】 set01
bit0: Subprogram interrupt

Select the type of the user macro interrupt.
0: Macro type user macro interrupt
1: Sub-program type user macro interrupt
bit1: Accurate thread cutting E
Select what the address E specifies in inch screw cutting.
0: Number of threads per inch
1: Precision lead
bit2: Radius compensation type B (for M system only)
command is operated during radius compensation.
block.
bit2: Nose R compensation type B (for L system only)
commands are operated during nose R or radius compensation.
block.
bit3: Initial constant surface speed
Select the initial state after the power-ON.
0: Constant surface speed control cancel mode
1: Constant surface speed control mode
bit4: Synchronous tap
Select the operation when ",R" is omitted in G74/G84 tapping cycle.
0: Asynchronous tap
1: Synchronous tap
bit5: Start point alarm
Select the operation when the operation start point cannot be found while executing the next block of
G117.
0: Enables the auxiliary function after the block has been executed.
1: Outputs the program error (P33).
bit6: Grid display selection
Select the grid display type on the servo monitor screen during the dog type reference position
return.
0: Distance between dog OFF and basic point (including a grid mask amount)
1: A value given by reducing a grid mask amount from the distance between dog OFF and basic
point
【#1230】 set02
bit7: Macro interface input/output for each part system

Select the specification of the macro interface input/output.
0: Shared by all part systems.
1: Used independently by the part systems.
250
【#1231】 set03
bit0: Graphic check compatibility parameter

Select whether to return the data to the pre-starting data after having checked a machining program
that rewrites the common variables, workpiece offsets and tool offsets.
0: Return the data.
1: Not return the data.
bit1: Switch graphic trace coordinates
Select whether to use machine coordinate value or tool position coordinate value (position being
machined, obtained by subtracting the tool compensation amount from machine coordinate values)
for drawing with trace display.
0: Machine coordinate value (conventional method)
1: Tool position coordinate value
bit2: Switch graphic check trace
Select the coordinates to draw at program check: both machine coordinate value (tool center path)
and tool position coordinate value (program path) simultaneously, or only the coordinates selected
with "#1231 set03/bit1 (Switch graphic trace coordinates)".
0: Both machine coordinates and tool position coordinates (conventional method)
1: Only coordinates designated with switch graphic coordinates
bit4: Switch zero point mark display position
Select the position for displaying the basic point mark in the graphic trace and 2D check.
0: Machine coordinate basic point (same as conventional method)
1: Workpiece coordinate basic point
bit5: Switch graphic check counter display
Select the type of counter displayed on the Graphic Check screen with the combination of "#1231
set03/bit1".
If the drawing coordinate system is other than "all workpiece coordinates", the counter displayed is
workpiece coordinate position counter or tool position (workpiece coordinate) regardless of this
setting.
0: (When "#1231 set03/bit1" is set to "0") Machine position counter
(When "#1231 set03/bit1" is set to "1") Tool position (workpiece coordinate) counter
1: (When "#1231 set03/bit1" is set to "0") Workpiece coordinate counter
(When "#1231 set03/bit1" is set to "1") Tool position (workpiece coordinate) counter
【#1232】 set04
bit0: Exclude acceleration/deceleration in load monitor

Select whether or not to exclude acceleration/deceleration when detecting the load in load
monitoring.
0: Acceleration/Deceleration is included
1: Acceleration/Deceleration is excluded
(Note) When "Exclude acceleration/deceleration in load monitor" ("#1232 set04/bit0") is enabled,
"Spindle function 8" ("#13228 SP228/bit2") needs to be set to "1" (load display, high-cycle
motor output effective value).
bit5: Actual load selection

Load fluctuation due to speed change is excluded from the actual load.
0: Disable
1: Enable
(Note) When "Actual load selection" ("#1232 set04/bit5") is enabled, "Spindle function 8" ("#13228
SP228/bit2") needs to be set to "1" (load display, high-cycle motor output effective value).
【#1233】 set05
bit1 : Spindle clamp selection

Select whether to enable/disable the spindle override for the spindle speed clamp command (G92
S?).
0：Disable
1：Enable
251
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1234】 set06
bit3: Interlock when tap retract enabled

Select whether to enable automatic/manual interlock for the part system with "Tap retract enable"
signal ON.
0: Interlock all the axes
1: Disable the interlock
【#1235】 set07
bit0: Helical interpolation speed 2

0: Select normal speed designation also for 3rd axis
1: Select arc plane element speed designation
bit2: Fixed type chopping compensation valid only at start
When the fixed type compensation value is selected, the method can be changed to the
compensation value sequential update type after the first four cycles.
0: Disable the method changeover
1: Enable the method changeover
bit4: Selection condition of synchronous tapping gear step
Select the parameters that determine the gear step for synchronous tapping.
0: #3005 through #3008 (smax1 to 4) when "#1223 aux07/bit7" is "0".
Or #3013 through #3016 (stap1 to 4) when "#1223 aux07/bit7" is "1".
1: Always #3013 through #3016 (stap1 to 4)
【#1236】 set08
bit0: Manual rotary axis feedrate unit

Select the unit of manual rotary axis feedrate.
0: Fixed to [°/min]
1: Same speed as before (When inch command, the speed is the command speed divided by
25.4.)
bit1: Spindle speed detection
Select the pulse input source of actual spindle rotation speed (R6506/R6507) when the spindle
encoder serial connection is selected ("#3025 enc-on" is set to "2").
0: Serial input
1: Encoder input connector
bit2: Current limit droop cancel invalid
Select whether to cancel the position droop when the current limit changeover signal is canceled.
0: Cancel the droop.
1: Not cancel the droop.
bit3: Rotary axis command speed scale
Select to multiply the rotary axis command speed by 10 times.
0: Invalid
1: During initial inching, the rotary axis command speed is multiplied by 10. In other words, if
"F100" is commanded, the speed will be the same as when 1000°/min is commanded.
The rotary axis speed display unit will be 10°/min.
【#1237(PR)】 set09
252
【#1238(PR)】 set10
bit0: Switch G36 function

Select the function, the automatic tool length measurement or arc thread cutting (CCW), to be
applied to G36 when the G code system 6 or 7 is selected.
0: Automatic tool length measurement
1: Arc thread cutting (CCW)
bit6: Switch absolute position detection alarm
Select the output destination of the absolute position detection alarm.
0: NC alarm 4 (AL4)
1: NC alarm 5 (AL5)
(Note) The absolute position detection alarm is listed in the alarm history regardless of this
parameter setting.
bit7: Switch operation alarm

Select whether to enable the NC alarm 5 (AL5) signal output.
0: Disable NC alarm 5 (AL5) (default)
All operation alarms will be output to NC alarm 4 (AL4).
All operation alarms will be recorded in the alarm history.
1: Enable NC alarm 5 (AL5)
The following operation alarms will be output to NC alarm 5 (AL5), not to NC alarm 4 (AL4).
The operation alarms output to NC alarm 5 (AL5) will not be recorded in the alarm history.
- External interlock axis found (M01 0004)
- Cutting override zero (M01 0102)
- External feedrate zero (M01 0103)
- Block start interlock (M01 0109)
- Cutting block start interlock (M01 0100)
- Cutting interlock for spindle-spindle polygon (G51.2) (M01 1033)
【#1239(PR)】 set11
bit0: Coil switching method

Select the coil switching method.
0: Via PLC (Y189F).
1: NC internal processing. (Y189F is invalid.)
bit1: Handle I/F selection
Select the handle connection destination.
0: Use the handle connected to the encoder communication connector.
1: Use the remote I/O unit as a priority.
When HN341/HN342/HN351/HN391/HN392 is mounted, the handle connected to the operation

panel I/O unit will be used regardless of this parameter setting.
bit3: Polygon machining mode at reset
Select whether to cancel the polygon machining mode when reset is applied.
0: Not cancel.
1: Cancel.
bit4: Invalidate G51.1 phase command
Select whether to enable the phase control with the spindle-spindle polygon function.
0: Always enable. (When R is not commanded, it will be handled as R0.)
1: Enable only at the R command.
bit5: Door interlock spindle speed clamp valid
Select whether to enable the spindle clamp speed changeover by the PLC signal.
0: Disable
1: Enable
253
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1240(PR)】 set12
bit0: Handle input pulse

Select the handle input pulse.
0: MITSUBISHI CNC standard handle pulse (25 pulse/rev)
1: Handle 400 pulse (100 pulse/rev)
bit4: Optical communication automatic channel detection invalid
Select whether to enable the optical communication automatic channel detection.
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#1241(PR)】 set13
bit0 : No G-CODE COMB. Error

Select the operation for when an illegal combination of modal and unmodal G codes are
commanded in a same block.
0：The program error (P45) will occur.
1：A program error can be avoided but the modal G code will be ignored.
bit1: Interference check at starting up radius compensation (for M system only)
0: In a start-up block, an interference check is not carried out.
1: An error occurs even at a start-up block if an interference occurs.
The error occurs even when the interference avoidance is set to ON (#8102="1"). However, an
interference check is not carried out when it is set to OFF (#8103="1").
【#1242】 set14
【#1243】 set15
【#1244】 set16
【#1245】 set17
bit7: Synchronous tap spindle rotation direction type

Select whether the spindle's rotation direction is determined by the synchronous tapping axis' travel
direction.
0: The spindle's rotation direction is determined by the synchronous tapping axis' travel direction.
When the travel direction is negative, the spindle rotates forward.
When the travel direction is positive, the spindle rotates in reverse.
1: The spindle always rotates forward regardless of the synchronous tapping axis' travel direction.
(Note)When a reverse tap is commanded, the spindle rotates in an opposite direction to that
mentioned above.
254
【#1246(PR)】 set18
bit2: Switch coordinate systems for radius compensation

Select the coordinate system for radius compensation.
0: Type 1 (Conventional specification)
Perform radius compensation with reference to a position on the workpiece coordinate system.
1: Type 2
Perform radius compensation with reference to a position on the program coordinate system.
bit3: Change repetition final return position at M2L
Select the final return position after repetition, when in G99 modal and in M2 format with the label L.
0: Initial point
1: R point
bit4: T-lifeover signal output
Select the timing at which tool life over signal is output when using the M system tool life
management I/III.
0: Turn the signal ON when a selected tool has reached the lifetime.
1: Turn the signal ON when any of tools (in the case of the tool life management III, all the
registered tools) in a selected group has reached the lifetime.
bit5: Tool status update type
Select whether to update tool status automatically when lifetime/usage data is changed on the
screen in the M system tool life management I/II/III.
0: Not update.
1: Update.
(Note) When "1" is selected, tool status will be updated as follows.
- When usage data is "0", tool status will be "0".
- When usage data is smaller than lifetime data, tool status will be "1".
- When usage data is the same as or larger than lifetime data, tool status will be "2".
bit6 : Switch F 1-digit feedrate change method

Set whether to enable feedrate change with handle until power OFF, or change the parameters
#1185 to #1189 with change of speed.
0: Enabled until power OFF
1: Change #1185 spd_F1 to #1189 spd_F5
bit7: PLC axis random device assignment
Select whether to enable the origin dog and H/W OT random assignment for a PLC axis.
0: Disable (assigned to a fixed device)
1: Enable (assigned to the parameter set device)
【#1247】 set19
bit0 : Movement by tool length compensation command (for M system only)

Select whether or not to move the axis by the compensation amount when tool length compensation/
cancel is independently commanded.
0: Move
1: Not move
bit1: Thread cutting operation when manual speed command enabled
Select the thread cutting operation in manual speed command.
0: The axis travels at the handle feed rate, jog feed rate, or manual rapid traverse rate
1: The axis travels following the program command
【#1248】 set20
【#1249】 set21
【#1250】 set22
255
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1251】 set23
【#1252】 set24
【#1253】 set25
bit2: Acceleration/Deceleration mode change in hole drilling cycle

Change the acceleration/deceleration mode of hole drilling cycle.
0: The operation follows the parameter setting. The setting of #1153 is enabled.
1: A constant inclination acceleration/deceleration and an acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation are applied to the hole drilling cycle. The setting of #19417 is enabled.
【#1254】 set26
【#1255】 set27
【#1256】 set28
【#1257】 set29
【#1258(PR)】 set30
bit0: Skip I/F switch

Select A or B contact for the skip interface.
0: A contact (Skip operation starts at rising edge of a signal)
1: B contact (Skip operation starts at falling edge of a signal)
(Note) This parameter is not applied to PLC skip.
【#1259】 set31
bit0 : Enable normal life tool's data count (for M system only)
Select whether to enable or disable too use data counting when the tool
status is 2 (normal life tool).
0: Not count the use data of normal life tool.
1: Count the use data of normal life tool.
【#1260】 set32
【#1261】 set33
【#1262】 set34
【#1263】 set35
【#1264】 set36
256
【#1265(PR)】 ext01
bit0: Command format 1

Select the command format for the fixed cycle for compound lathe.
0: Conventional format
1: MITSUBISHI CNC special format (1 block command method)
Select the command format for the lathe fixed cycle.
1: MITSUBISHI CNC special format
Select the command format for the hole drilling fixed cycle.
1: MITSUBISHI CNC special format
【#1266(PR)】 ext02
【#1267(PR)】 ext03
bit0: G code type

Select the high-speed high-accuracy G code type.
0: Conventional format (G61.1)
1: MITSUBISHI special format (G08P1)
【#1268(PR)】 ext04
bit2 : Enable synchronous tapping per minute

Select whether to enable feed per minute with the F command of synchronous tapping cycle.
0: Disable (Command in pitch regardless of "G group 5" modal)
1: Enable (Follow "G group 5" modal)
【#1269(PR)】 ext05
257
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1270(PR)】 ext06
bit3: Finished shape judgement disable

Select to enable/disable the judgement of shape when the finished shape's Z axis (or X axis at G72
command) does not move monotonously. Program error (a shape change at pocket machining) can
be avoided when selected to disable.
0: Enable
1: Disable
bit4: Switch chamfering operation
Select the operation to be performed when the cycle start point is exceeded as a result of
chamfering in a thread cutting cycle.
0: Output a program error (P192).
1: Stop chamfering upon arrival at the cycle start point, and then move to the end point of the
thread cutting block at a rapid traverse rate.
bit5: Coordinate rotation angle without command (for L system only)
Select the operation when there is no rotation angle command R for the coordinate rotation.
0: Use the previously commanded value (modal value). If the command is the first issued
command, the rotation angle will be 0°.
1: Use the set value in "#8081 Gcode Rotat".
bit6: Switch continuous thread cutting Z phase wait operation
Select when to start the 2nd block thread cutting when there is a command with no movement (MST
command, etc.) between the thread cutting blocks.
0: Wait for the spindle's single rotation synchronization signal before starting the movement.
1: Start movement without waiting for the spindle's single rotation synchronization signal.
bit7: Handle C axis coordinate during cylindrical interpolation
Specify whether to keep the rotary axis coordinate as before the cylindrical interpolation start
command is issued during the cylindrical interpolation.
0: Not keep
1: Keep
258
【#1271(PR)】 ext07
bit0: Mirror image operation

Select the type of mirror image operation.
0: Type 1
- The program mirror image, external mirror image, and parameter mirror image are exclusive to
each other.
- An increment command moves the image to the position indicated by the travel amount with the
sign inverted.
1: Type 2
- Mirror image operation is enabled when the program mirror image (G51.1) command is issued or
when the external signal or parameter is ON.
- An increment command moves the image to the position determined by applying the mirror image
to the absolute program coordinates.
bit1: Address specifying fixed cycle repetition count (for M system only)
Select the address that specifies the fixed cycle repetition count.
0: Address L only (Default)
1: Addresses K and L
If addresses K and L are specified simultaneously, the data at address K will be used for operation.
bit2: F-command unit
Select the unit to be used when a thread cutting lead command does not contain decimal point.
0: Type 1 (conventional specifications)
F1 -> 1 mm/rev, 1 inch/rev
1: Type 2
F1 -> 0.01 mm/rev, 0.0001 inch/rev
bit3: G-code group for unidirectional positioning (for M system only)
Select the G-code group for unidirectional positioning.
0: Unmodal G code (group 00)
1: Modal G code (group 01)
Related parameter: "#8209 G60 Shift" (Set the last positioning direction and distance for each
axis applicable when the unidirectional positioning command is issued.)
bit4: Operation by independent G40 command
Select whether the radius compensation vector is canceled by the independent G40 command.
0: Type 1 (conventional specification) (Default)
The radius compensation vector will be canceled by the independent G40 command.
1: Type 2
The radius compensation vector won't be canceled by the independent G40 command: it will be
canceled by the next travel command for the radius compensation plane.
bit5: Cut start position (for L system only)
Select the position from where cutting begins in a fixed cycle for compound lathe.
0: Conventional specification (Default)
The cut start position will be determined by the final shaping program.
1: Extended specification
The cut start position will be determined from the cycle start point.
bit6: Nose R compensation (for L system only)
Select whether to apply nose R compensation for shapes in a rough cutting cycle.
The shape after nose R compensation in the final shaping program will be used as rough cutting
shape (when the nose R compensation for the final shaping program).
1: Extended specifications
The shape without nose R compensation in the final shaping program will be used as rough
cutting shape.
bit7: Cut amount (for L system only)
Select the operation to be performed when the program-specified cut amount exceeds the cut
amount of the final shaping program.
A program error will occur when the program-specified cut amount exceeds the cut amount of
the final shaping program.
Rough cutting will be performed by one cut when the program-specified cut amount exceeds the
cut amount of the final shaping program.
259
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1272(PR)】 ext08
bit0: Switch pocket machining operation

Select the pocket machining specification.
0: Conventional specification
Pocket machining will be selected with the H designation.
The pull direction when pocket machining is ON will be the Z direction.
Pocket machining will start only when both X and Z axes are specified in the first travel block
after the finished shape start block.
The pull direction when pocket machining is ON will be the X direction.
bit1: M function synchronous tap cycle
Specify whether to enable the M function synchronous tapping cycle.
0: Disable
1: Enable
bit2: Spiral/conical interpolation command format 2
Select the command format for spiral and conical interpolation.
0: Type 1 (conventional specification)
1: Type 2 (with the number of spiral rotation L designation and the increment designation)
bit3: Switch macro call function
Select whether to shift the argument to the subprogram if nests are overlapped when per block call
(G66.1) is commanded.
0: Shift
1: Not shift (Conventional specification)
bit4: Tap cycle selection
Select the tapping cycle.
0: Pecking tapping cycle
1: Deep hole tapping cycle
bit5: Deep hole tap cycle override selection
Select whether to enable override on the pulling operation during synchronized tapping with the
deep hole tapping cycle.
0: Disable
1: Enable
bit6: Switch corner chamfering/ corner R command format
Select the command format of the corner chamfering/corner R.
0: Command format I (conventional format)
Issue a command with comma (,C and ,R).
1: Command format II
In addition to command format I, addresses without comma can be used to command.
I/K or C can be used for corner chamfering, while R can be used for corner R.
bit7: Return position after macro interrupt in fixed cycle selection
Select the destination to return to after a macro interrupt in the fixed cycle.
0: Return to the block in the fixed cycle.
1: Return to the block next to the fixed cycle.
260
【#1273(PR)】 ext09
bit0: Switch ASIN calculation results range

Select the notation system for operation result of ASIN.
0: Do not switch minus figures to positive figures. (-90° to 90°)
1: Switch minus figures to positive figures. (270° to 90°)
bit1: Switch system variable unit
Select the unit for the system variable #3002 (time during automatic start).
0: 1 ms unit
1: 1 hour unit
bit2: Switch G71, G72, G73 cutting direction judgment
Select the cutting direction when the longitudinal rough cutting cycle (G71), face rough cutting cycle
(G72) or closed loop cutting cycle (G73) is commanded.
0: Conventional specification
Determined according to the finished shape program.
Determined according to the finishing allowance and cutting allowance commanded in the
program.
bit3: Facing turret mirror image coordinate value type
Select how to show the workpiece coordinate values of the axis for which the facing turret mirror
image is valid.
0: Movements in the workpiece coordinate system are in the same direction as those in the
workpiece machine coordinate system.
1: Movements in the workpiece coordinate system are in the opposite direction to those in the
workpiece machine coordinate system.
bit4: Facing turret mirror image valid axis selection
Select the axis for which the facing turret mirror image is valid.
0: Fixed to 1st axis.
1: Determined according to the plane selected when the facing turret mirror image is commanded.
【#1274(PR)】 ext10
bit4: Optional block skip operation changeover

Select the optional block skip operation.
0: Enable or disable optional block skipping in the middle of a block according to the setting of
"#1226 aux10/bit1".
1: Enable optional block skipping at the top and in the middle of a block. Note that a slash "/" on the
right-hand side of equation or that in an equation between [ ] is handled as division operator.
bit7: Word range check
Select whether to check that the operation expression of the word data in the program is enclosed in
brackets ( [ ] ) when the machine program is executed.
This check is also applied to the 08000 to 09999 and the machine tool builder macro program.
0: Not check
1: Check
【#1275(PR)】 ext11
【#1276(PR)】 ext12
261
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1277(PR)】 ext13
bit0: Tool life management II count type 2

Select how and when the mount or use count will be incremented in tool life management II. The
condition to output "tool group life over (TGLO)" signal will be changed accordingly.
0: Type 1 (Default)
Counts up when the spindle tool is used for cutting.
TGLO signal will be output when the last tool in selected group is judged as expired.
1: Type 2
Counts up by one for a tool used or mounted in a program at the time of resetting.
TGLO signal will be output when any of tool groups has reached its lifetime limit.
bit1: Tool life management II life prediction
Select whether to enable tool life prediction function in tool life management II.
0: Disable
1: Enable
bit2: Tool life management II life end signal timing
Select the timing at which tool life prediction signal is output in tool life management II.
0: Output only when the ["life value" - "used value"] matches the remaining life.
("life value" - "used value" = "remaining life")
1: Output when the ["life value" - "used value"] is less than the remaining life.
("life value" - "used value" ≦ "remaining life")
bit3: Tool life management II life end signal tool
Select the tool for which the tool life prediction signal is output in tool life management II.
0: Output the signal tool by tool.
1: Output the signal at the last tool in the group.
bit4: Tool life management II count changeover (For M system only)
Select the tool life count method and its timing.
0: Conforms to "ext13/bit0" setting.
1: When "ext13/bit0" is set to "0":
Counts up by one for a tool used or mounted in a program at the time of resetting.
When "ext13/bit0" is set to "1":
Follow the setting of "Method (Mthd)" on Tool life screen.
The output condition of "tool group life over" signal conforms to "ext13/bit0".
【#1278(PR)】 ext14
bit0: Program restart method selection

Select the program restart type.
0: Restart type A
1: Restart type B
bit1: Change miscellaneous command completion method
Select the complete signal and completion condition.
0: Normal method
Complete at the falling edge of M function finish 1 signal (FIN1) or rising edge of M function
finish 2 (FIN2).
1: High-speed method
Complete when High-speed M finish signal (MFIN1 to 4, SFIN1 to 6, TFIN1 to 4 or BFIN1 to 4)
reaches the same logical level as the strobe signal.
bit2: Change areas for stored stroke limit I
Enable/Disable change of the areas for stored stroke limit I.
0: Disable
1: Enable
262
【#1279(PR)】 ext15
bit0: Part system synchronization method

Select the part system synchronization method.
0: If one part system is not in the automatic operation, the synchronization command will be
ignored and the next block will be executed.
1: Operate according to the "waiting ignore" signal.
If the "waiting ignore" signal is set to "1", the synchronization command will be ignored. When
set to "0", synchronization will be applied.
bit1: Interrupt amount during machine lock
Select when to cancel the interruption amount during machine lock.
0: When resetting
1: During manual reference position return (not when resetting)
bit2: Selection of cutting start interlock target block
Select whether to enable the cutting start interlock for successive cutting blocks.
0: Enable
1: Disable
bit5: Cancel G92 shift distance
Select whether to clear the G92 (coordinate system setting) shift distance when the manual
reference position is reached.
0: Not clear
1: Clear
bit6: Enable single block stop at middle point
Set whether to enable/disable single block stop at the middle point of G28/G29/G30.
0: Disable single block stop
1: Enable single block stop
263
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1280(PR)】 ext16
bit0: I/F per axis during mixed control (cross axis control)
Select how to handle the following PLC interface for axes interchanged with the mixed control (cross
axis control).
- Mirror image
- Manual/automatic interlock
- Manual/automatic machine lock
0: Follows axis configuration before the mixed control (cross axis control).
1: Follows axis configuration after the mixed control (cross axis control).
(Example)
The device No. of automatic interlock (+) for X1 will be as follows when the mixed control (cross axis
control) is executed with the 1st axis (X1) in the 1st part system and 1st axis (X2) in the 2nd part
system.
When "0" is set: Y820 (interface for 1st axis in 1st part system)
When "1" is set: Y828 (interface for 1st axis in 2nd part system)
(Note) If the number of axes in the part system changes with the mixed control (cross axis control),
the interface of the target axis may change when this parameter is set to "1".
(Example)
When 1st part system's C axis is moved to 2nd part system with a 1st part system (X, Z, C, Y) and
2nd part system (X, Z) configuration:
When "1" is set: Y82A, Y7CA, Y8AA and later will be the interface for the C axis moved to the 2nd
part system. Y7C2, Y822, Y8A2 and later will be the interface of the Y axis in the 1st part system,
because the axes following the removed C axis (third place) are shifted up.
bit1: Mixed control (cross axis control) cancel with reset
Select whether to cancel the mixed control (cross axis control) when reset is applied.
0: Cancel.
1: Not cancel.
bit2: Interchange coordinate position display
Select whether to display interchanged (or moved) coordinate positions in the mixed control (cross
axis control).
This setting will be applied when the axes are moved, as well as when the axes are interchanged.
0: Display interchanged (or moved) coordinate positions.
1: Display coordinate positions without being interchanged (nor moved).
(Example)
When 1st part system's C axis is moved to 2nd part system with a 1st part system (X, Z, C, Y) and
2nd part system (X, Z) configuration:
1st part system: X, Z and Y coordinate positions are displayed.
2nd part system: X, Z and C coordinate positions are displayed.
bit3: Reset operation for synchronization/super-imposition control
Select whether to cancel synchronization/superimposition control when reset is applied.
0: Cancel.
1: Not cancel.
bit4: Mixed control (cross axis control) command method
Select how to command mixed control (cross axis control).
0: Use PLC interface signal for mixed control
1: Use G command for mixed control
bit5: Command method of control axis synchronization across part systems
Select how to command the control axis synchronization across part systems.
0: Use PLC I/F.
1: Use G command.
bit6: Interchange machine position display
Select whether to display interchanged (or moved) machine positions in the mixed control (cross
axis control).
This setting will be followed not only when the axes are interchanged but also when the axes are
moved.
(Note 1) This parameter is enabled when "#1280 ext16/bit2 (Interchange coordinate position
display)" is "0".
0: Display interchanged (or moved) machine positions.
1: Display machine positions without being interchanged (nor moved).
264
bit7: Control axis superimposition command method

Select how to command control axis superimposition.
0: Use G command for control axis superimposition.
1: Use PLC interface signal for control axis superimposition.
【#1281(PR)】 ext17
bit0: Switch manual high-speed reference position return in synchronous control

Select the movement of synchronized axes in manual high-speed reference position return.
0: Primary and secondary axes start the return synchronizing. Even when one axis stops at its
reference position, the other axis continues moving until it reaches its reference position.
1: Primary and secondary axes start the return synchronizing, and when the primary axis stops at
the reference position, the secondary also stops. Thus, the relative position of the primary and
secondary is kept.
bit3: Synchronous control operation setting
Select whether or not the positioning of secondary axis automatically aligns with that of primary axis
when the axis subject to synchronous control is changed from servo OFF to servo ON.
0: The positioning does not automatically align.
1: The positioning automatically aligns.
bit5: High-speed synchronous tapping valid
Select whether to enable the high-speed synchronous tapping.
0: Disable
1: Enable
bit6 : Compensation method for external machine coordinate system/ball screw

thermal expansion during synchronization
Select the method of how to compensate the secondary axis when compensating
external machine coordinate system or ball screw thermal expansion during synchronization control.
The setting of this parameter will be validated when you select synchronous operation method by the
synchronization control operation method signal.
0: Primary axis and secondary axis are independently compensated.
1: Primary axis' compensation amount is applied to secondary axis.
bit7: Switch automatic high-speed reference position return in synchronous control
Select the movement of synchronized axes in automatic high-speed reference position return.
0: Primary and secondary axes start the return synchronizing, and when the primary axis stops at
the reference position, the secondary also stops. Thus, the relative position of the primary and
secondary is kept.
1: Primary and secondary axes start the return synchronizing. Even when one axis stops at its
reference position, the other axis continues moving until it reaches its reference position.
【#1282(PR)】 ext18
bit1: Condition of the reference position reached signal in synchronous control

This parameter switches only conditions of a primary axis's reference position return reached signal
in synchronous operation. A secondary axis's signal is output when the secondary axis reaches the
reference position coordinate.
0: A primary axis's reference position reached signal is output only when both of the primary and
secondary axes reach the reference position coordinate by a reference position return.
1: A primary axis's reference position reached signal is output when the primary axis reaches the
reference position coordinate.
bit2: Measurement basic point for tool length measurement I (for L system only)
Select how to specify the measurement base point coordinate for manual tool length measurement I.
0: Specify the coordinate of "#2015 tlml-" as the measurement basic point (default).
1: Specify the workpiece coordinate system offset (modal) as the measurement basic point.
bit5: Automatic correction of synchronization offset at power ON
The secondary axis position is automatically corrected so that the synchronization offset before
having turned the power OFF the last time can be restored at power ON.
(Note1) This parameter is enabled when the parameter "#1281 ext17/bit3 (Synchronous control
operation setting)" is set to "1".
0: Disable
1: Enable
265
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1283(PR)】 ext19
【#1284(PR)】 ext20
bit0: Spindle speed clamp check

Select whether to check the spindle speed clamp under the constant surface speed control.
0: Check the spindle speed clamp.
1: Not check the spindle speed clamp.
(Note) This parameter is enabled when the parameter "#1146 Sclamp" is set to "1".
【#1285(PR)】 ext21
bit0: Multi-part system program management

Select whether to use multi-part system program management.
0: Not use
1: Use
(Note) When this parameter's value is changed, the power must be turned OFF and ON, and the
system formatted. Two or more part systems from [1] to [4] need to be set to "1" in "#1001
SYS_ON". Otherwise this parameter will be disabled even though set to "1".
bit1: Program search type switch

Select how to search a program to operate.
0: Operation search is performed in the selected part system.
1: Operation search is performed for all part systems. (The program No. will be common to all part
systems.)
bit2: Multi-part system program generation and operation
Select whether to perform the following processes for all the part systems or for each part system
separately in multi-part system program management: newly create, delete or rename the machining
programs in NC memory (including MDI program and machine tool builder macro program) or
transfer, compare, merge the programs between NC memory and other device.
0: Perform these processes for the programs in all part systems. If no subprogram contents are
found by the subprogram call during automatic operation, the program will be searched for from
$1.
1: Perform these processes for the programs in the selected part system.
【#1286(PR)】 ext22
bit2: O No. for program input No.

Select the operation when the same program No. is input during data input.
0: The O No. is handled as a character string data.
1: The O No. is handled as a program No. Whether to overwrite the program or cause an error is
decided by "#1218 bit7 Input by program overwrite".
bit3: No O No. at machining program input
Select whether to enable the machining program input even if there is no program No. (O No.).
The program No. is fixed to 01 in this case.
0: Disable
1: Enable
bit5: Selection of multi-part system program input/output method
Select whether to perform the transfer from NC memory to other device for all the part systems or for
each part system separately in multi-part system program management.
0: Output the designated programs for all the part systems.
1: Output the programs of only the selected part system.
266
【#1287(PR)】 ext23
bit1: Inclined surface coordinate display (for M system only)

0: Display the position which includes tool length offset.
1: Display the position on the program which excludes tool length offset.
bit2: Inclined surface coordinate display (for M system only)
0: Display the position which includes tool radius compensation.
1: Display the position on the program which excludes tool radius compensation.
bit4: Relative coordinate display
(M system)
(L system)
0: Display the position which includes tool shape compensation.
1: Display the position on the program which excludes tool shape compensation.
bit5: Relative coordinate display
(M system)
(L system)
0: Display the position which includes nose R compensation.
1: Display the position on the program which excludes nose R compensation.
bit6: Absolute coordinate display
Select how coordinate values are displayed when absolute coordinate display is selected ("#1221
aux05/bit0"="1").
(M system)
(L system)
0: Display the position which includes tool shape compensation.
1: Display the position on the program which excludes tool shape compensation.
bit7: Absolute coordinate display
Select how coordinate values are displayed when absolute coordinate display is selected ("#1221
aux05/bit0"="1").
(M system)
(L system)
0: Display the position which includes nose R compensation.
1: Display the position on the program which excludes nose R compensation.
【#1288(PR)】 ext24
bit0: MDI program clear

Select whether to clear the MDI programs when MDI operation ends, the power is turned ON again,
reset is input, or emergency stop is canceled.
0: Not clear.
1: Clear (save only % programs).
【#1289(PR)】 ext25
bit0: Tool radius compensation switch corner judgment method (Nose R comp.)
Select the criterion to execute the outer rounding at the small corner in tool radius compensation.
(L system)
0: The corner angle is 0°; linear-linear; G02-G03/G03-G02; the radius is the same. (Conventional
method)
1: The corner angle is 1° or smaller; linear-linear; G02-G03/G03-G02; the radius is almost the
same. (Method for rounding minute corner angle)
(M system)
0: The corner angle is 1° or smaller; linear-linear; G02-G03/G03-G02. (Conventional method)
1: The corner angle is 1° or smaller; linear-linear; G02-G03/G03-G02; the radius is almost the
same. (Method for rounding minute corner angle)
267
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1290(PR)】 ext26
【#1291(PR)】 ext27
【#1292(PR)】 ext28
【#1293(PR)】 ext29
【#1294(PR)】 ext30
【#1295(PR)】 ext31
【#1296(PR)】 ext32
【#1297(PR)】 ext33
【#1298(PR)】 ext34
【#1299(PR)】 ext35
【#1300(PR)】 ext36
bit0: Multiple spindle control II

Select multiple spindle control I or II.
0: Multiple spindle control I (L system only)
1: Multiple spindle control II (select from ladder)
bit7: Spindle synchronization command method
Select the spindle synchronization command method.
0: Spindle synchronization with PLC I/F
1: Spindle synchronization with machining program
【#1301】 nrfchk Near reference position check method

Select the method to judge the "near reference position".
0: Conventional method
1: Command machine position is used.
2: Feedback position is used.
【#1302】 AutoRP Automatic return by program restart

Select the method to move to the restart position when restarting the program.
0: Move the system manually to the restart position and then restart the program.
1: The system automatically moves to the restart position at the first activation after the program
restarts.
268
【#1303(PR)】 V1comN No. of #100 address part system common variables

Set the number of common variables, common for part systems, starting from address #100.
This is valid only when "#1052 MemVal" is set to "1".
---Setting range---
0 to 100
【#1304(PR)】 V0comN No. of #500 address part system common variables

Set the number of common variables, common for part systems, starting from address #500.
This is valid only when "#1052 MemVal" is set to "1".
---Setting range---
0 to 500
【#1306】 InpsTyp Deceleration check specification type

Select the parameter specification type for the G0 or G1 deceleration check.
G0 is specified with "#1193 inpos", and G1+G9 with "#1223 aux07/bit1".
G0 or G1+G9 is specified with "#1193 inpos".
【#1309(PR)】 GType Switch command format

Select which is used to command the reverse tap.
0: G84.1/G88.1
1: D command with the value changed to negative
【#1310】 WtMmin Minimum value for synchronization M code

Set the minimum value for the M code. When "0" is set, the synchronization M code will be invalid.
---Setting range---
0, 100 to 99999999
【#1311】 WtMmax Maximum value for synchronization M code

Set the maximum value for the M code. When "0" is set, the synchronization M code will be invalid.
---Setting range---
0, 100 to 99999999
【#1312】 T_base Tool life management standard number

Set the standard No. for the tool life management.
When the value specified by the T code command exceeds the set value in this parameter, the set
value will be subtracted from the command value, which will be used as tool group No. for tool life
management.
When the value specified by the T code command is equal to or less than the set value, the T code
will be handled as a normal T code and not subjected to tool life management.
When "0" is set in this parameter, the T code command will always specify a group No. (Valid for M-
system tool life management II.)
---Setting range---
0 to 9999
【#1313】 TapDw1 Synchronous tap hole bottom wait time

Set the hole bottom wait time for synchronous tapping.
When P address is specified, the greater value will be used as the hole bottom wait time. When an
in-position check is performed at the hole bottom, the wait time will be provided after the completion
of the in-position check.
(Note) This parameter is valid only when "1" is set in "#1223 aux07/bit3" (synchronous tap in-position
check improvement) and "#1223 aux07/bit4" (synchronous tap hole bottom in-position check).
---Setting range---
0 to 999 (ms)
269
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1314】 TapInp Synchronous tap in-position check width (tap axis)

Set the hole bottom in-position check width for synchronous tapping.
(Note) This parameter is valid only when "1" is set in "#1223 aux07/bit3" (synchronous tap in-position
check improvement) and "#1223 aux07/bit4" (synchronous tap hole bottom in-position check).
---Setting range---
0.000 to 99.999
【#1316(PR)】 CrossCom Reference of common variables common for part systems

Select whether to use the common variables from #100100 to #800199.
0: Not use
1: Use
This parameter is valid only when the number of variable sets is set to 600 or more.
When this parameter is set to "1", variables from #100100 to #100110 will not be available as the
system variables for PLC data read function, and the setting of "#1052 MemVal" will be invalid.
【#1324(PR)】 Chop_R Chopping compensation value fixing method

Set the head No. of the R register used as the compensation amount save area during fixed
compensation amount method.
When the first number is an odd number, the operation message "Setting error" appears.
When the value overlaps with the chopping control data area, the operation message "Setting error"
appears.
---Setting range---
8300 to 9782
(Only the even number)
(Within backup area)
【#1326】 PLC Const Ext. Num PLC constant extension number

Set the number of PLC constant extension points.
---Setting range---
0 to 750
【#1327】 3D ATC type Tool change method specification

Select the tool change method for determining the tool to draw solids.
With 3D drawing, the tool will be changed by the method designated with this parameter, and then
the image will be drawn.
0: With one standby tool
1: With two standby tools
2: With no standby tool
【#1328】 TLM type Tool measurement standard positions election

Select the tool measurement method.
0: Use the machine position at TLM switch ON as 0.
1: Use the machine basic point as standard.
【#1329】 Emgcnt Emergency stop contactor shut-off time

Set the time taken for the drive section's main power to be shut-off when the confirmation of all the
axes' stop failed after the emergency stop state.
The contactor shut-off signal is output as soon as all the axes are confirmed stopped if the
confirmation is done prior to the set time.
When there is no safety observation option or "0" is set, the shut-off time will be 30(s).
---Setting range---
0 to 60 (s)
【#1330(PR)】 MC_dp1 Contactor weld detection device 1

When safety observation is executed, set the remote I/O device to input the contactor's auxiliary b
contact signal used for the contactor weld detection.
If "0" is set, weld detection will not be executed.
---Setting range---
0000 to 02FF (HEX)
270

---Setting range---
0000 to 02FF (HEX)
【#1332(PR)】 F-bus init delay Fieldbus communication error invalid time

Tuning the power ON, start the communication, and then set the time where Fieldbus
communication error is not detected.
Set this in 0.1 second increment.
---Setting range---
0 to 255 (0.1s)
Standard: 0
【#1333】 LMC restrain Lost motion compensation restraint in handle mode

Select whether to restrain the lost motion compensation in handle mode.
0: Restrain
1: Not restrain
【#1334】 DI/DO refresh cycl DI/DO refresh cycle

Select the DI/DO refresh cycle.
0: Standard mode
1: High-speed mode 1
2: High-speed mode 2
(Note 1) This setting is valid only for M700VW/M700VS/M700/M70V/E70 Series and M70 (typeA).
"Standard mode" is applied to M70 (typeB) regardless of this parameter.
(Note 2) The speed may not be high if number of ladder steps is excessive.
(Note 3) If high-speed mode is selected, the fine segment processing performance may degrade.
【#1335】 man_smg Manual feed acceleration/deceleration selection

Select the acceleration/deceleration mode in jog feed, incremental feed and manual reference
position return (when rapid traverse signal OFF).
0: Acceleration/Deceleration for rapid traverse
1: Acceleration/Deceleration for cutting feed
【#1336(PR)】 #400_Valtype #400 address variable type

Select whether the #400-level variables are used as machine tool builder macro variables or as
common variables.
0: #400 to #449 are not available; #450 to #499 are used as machine tool builder macro variables.
1: #400 to #499 are used as common variables
(Note) 700 sets or more of common variables are required for using #400 to #499 as common
variables. If this parameter is set to "1" while the number of common variables is set to less
than 700, this parameter setting will be regarded as "0".
【#1338(PR)】 rev data save trg Trigger switching to save arbitrary reverse run data
Select the condition to start/stop saving reverse run data.
0: Start when the reverse run control mode signal is turned ON. Stop when turned OFF.
1: Start when the reverse run control mode signal is ON and macro interrupt is valid (M96/ION).
Stop when the reverse run control mode signal is OFF or macro interruption is finished (M97/
IOF) (compatible with M500M).

---Setting range---
000 to 02FF (HEX)
271
MITSUBISHI CNC

---Setting range---
000 to 02FF (HEX)
【#1341(PR)】 ssc_rio Safety observation remote I/O connection

Assign the safety observation function's door switch input device and contactor shutoff output device
to the remote I/O.
Select whether to enable or disable the assignment.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#1342】 AlmDly Alarm display delay time

Set a time between when an operation alarm occurs and when the alarm display and signal turn ON.
When set to "0", the alarm display and signal will turn ON immediately after the alarm occurrence.
When set to "-1", the alarm display and signal will not turn ON after the alarm
occurrence.
Target alarms:
M01 External interlock axis found 0004
M01 Internal interlock axis found 0005
M01 Sensor signal illegal ON 0019
M01 No operation mode 0101
---Setting range---
-1 to 30000 (ms)
【#1349(PR)】 DOOR_1 Door 1 switch input device

Set a remote I/O device to input the door sensor signal to detect Door 1's status in safety
observation.
When "0" is set, the door is always detected to be open.
Thus, "X0" cannot be used as Door 1 switch input device.
---Setting range---
0000 to 02FF (HEX)
【#1350(PR)】 DOOR_2 Door 2 switch input device

Set a remote I/O device to input the door sensor signal to detect Door 2's status in safety
observation.
When "0" is set, the door is always detected to be open.
Thus, "X0" cannot be used as Door 2 switch input device.
---Setting range---
0000 to 02FF (HEX)
【#1353(PR)】 MC_ct1 Contactor shutoff output 1 device

Set a device of an output remote I/O device to control contactor in safety observation.
When set to "0", contactor shutoff output is disabled.
Thus, "Y0" cannot be used as contactor shutoff output device.
---Setting range---
0000 to 02FF (HEX)
【#1357(PR)】 mchkt1 Contactor operation check allowed time 1

Set a period of time until emergency stop is issued when a contactor does not operate even though
contactor shutoff output 1 is output.
If the vertical axis drop prevention function is used, set a value bigger than the vertical axis drop
prevention time (SV048 EMGrt).
When "0" is set, the contactor operation check will be disabled.
---Setting range---
0 to 30000 (ms)
272
【#1361(PR)】 aux_acc Auxiliary axis acceleration/deceleration type

Select the acceleration/deceleration type of auxiliary axis in PLC axis indexing.
0: Acceleration/deceleration with constant time
1: Acceleration/deceleration with a constant angle of inclination
【#1365】 manualFtype Manual speed command type

Select the manual speed command type.
0: Manual speed command
The axis travels at the handle/jog feed rate.
Reverse run is performed for each part system independently of the other ones.
1: Manual speed command 2
In a multi-part system configuration, the axis travels at the handle/jog feed rate multiplied by the
ratio of each part system's program command speeds.
When the block start point is reached in reverse run in any of the part systems, the axes in the
other part systems stop simultaneously.
【#1366】 skipExTyp Multi-system simultaneous skip command

Select the operation when G31 is commanded in more than one part system.
(Note) When set to "1", the skip coordinate position will always be "0" whether G31 is commanded in
a single part system or in one part system of a multi-part system.
Set to "0" when using G31 command for measurement etc.
0: Carry out G31 command in one part system, while the G31 is kept in an interlocked state in the
other systems.
1: Carry out G31 command simultaneously in more than one part system.
Note that the skip coordinate is not read and so the skip coordinate value will be 0.
【#1367】 G1AccOVRMax Max. override value for cutting feed constant inclination acc./dec.
Set the maximum override value to be applied to the cutting feed that is in constant inclination
When the setting of this parameter is between 0 and 99, the override value is handled as 100% even
though the specified cutting feed override is over 100%.
---Setting range---
0 to 300(%)
【#1401】 M_mode M command operation selection

Select the M command operation.
(Note) Register M codes in the special operation registration M codes (#1411 to #1418).
0: Not wait for the completion of registered M codes,
but wait for the completion of the other M codes
1: Wait for the completion of registered M codes,
but not wait for the completion of the other M code
【#1402】 S_mode S command completion method selection

Select the S command completion method.
0: Wait for the complete signal from PLC
1: Not wait for the complete signal from PLC
【#1403】 T_mode T command completion method selection

Select the T command completion method.
【#1404】 M2_mode 2nd miscellaneous command completion method selection

Select the 2nd miscellaneous command completion method.
273
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1411】 M_wait[M031-000] Special operation registration M code

Register an M code that needs special operation.
Each bit of the setting value corresponds to the M code number.
(Example) To register M05, set 00000020 in #1411.
(Note) Note that the registered M code operation varies according to M_mode (#1401).
---Setting range---
0 to FFFFFFFF (hexadecimal)

Register an M code (32 to 63) that needs special operation.
---Setting range---

---Setting range---

---Setting range---

---Setting range---

---Setting range---

---Setting range---
274

---Setting range---
【#1493(PR)】 ref_syn Synchronization at zero point initialization

0: Primary axis and second axis determine their zero points individually.
1: The zero points of both primary and secondary axes are determined by initializing the primary
axis' zero point.
The secondary axis moves in perfect synchronization with the primary axis.
Set this to "1" for speed/current command synchronization control.
【#1494(PR)】 dsp_ax_change Axis order of counter display

Set this in order to change the axis order of counter display.
The axes will be displayed in ascending order of the setting values "1" to "8".
However, axis whose setting is "0" will be displayed after axes whose settings are between "1" and
"8" are displayed.
(Note 1) When the same value is set for more than one axis, axis that is displayed on the left side on
the parameter screen will be first displayed.
(Note 2) When both of the mixed control (cross axis control) and interchange coordinate position
display ("1280 ext16/bit2" OFF) are valid, and when there are two or more valid part systems,
this parameter will be ignored.
---Setting range---
1 to 8: Axes are displayed in ascending order.
Other than 1 to 8: Axes are displayed after the display of the axes with setting value "1" to "8".
【#1495(PR)】 grf_ax_direction Axis travel direction in 2D graphic

Select the axis travel direction in the 2D graphic drawing (trace, check).
If set to 1, the positive/negative directions are reversed.
---Setting range---
0/1
【#1501】 polyax Rotational tool axis number (for L system only)

Set the number of the rotational tool axis used for polygon machining (G51.2). Set "0" when not
using polygon machining (spindle-servo axis), or when using spindle-spindle polygon machining. A
value exceeding the base specification parameter "#1002 axisno" cannot be specified.
This parameter is valid when the G code system is 6 or 7 (7 or 8 is set in base specification
parameter "#1037 cmdtyp").
【#1502】 G0Ipfg G1 -> G0 deceleration check

Select whether to perform a deceleration check when the travel direction is changed from G1 to G0.
0: Not perform
1: Perform
【#1503】 G1Ipfg G1 -> G1 deceleration check

Select whether to perform a deceleration check when the travel direction is changed from G1 to G1.
0: Not perform
1: Perform
【#1505】 ckref2 Second reference position return check

Select whether the check is carried out at the specified position in manual second reference position
return mode upon completion of spindle orientation or at second reference position return interlock
signal.
0: Upon completion of spindle orientation
1: At second reference position return interlock signal
275
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1506】 F1_FM Upper limit of F1-digit feedrate

Set the maximum value up to which the F 1-digit feedrate can be changed.
---Setting range---
0 to 1000000 (mm/min)
【#1507】 F1_K F 1-digit feedrate change constant

Set the constant that determines the speed change rate per manual handle graduation in F 1-digit
feedrate change mode.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767
【#1510】 DOOR_H Shorten door interlock II axis stop time

Select whether to shorten the time during which the axis is stopped when the door is opened.
0 : Use the conventional axis stop time.
1 : Shorten the axis stop time.
(Note) When the door interlock II signal is input via a ladder, the conventional axis stop time will be
used.
【#1511】 DOORPm Signal input device 1 for door interlock II: for each part system
Set the fixed device number (X??) for door interlock II signal input for each part system.
A device number from X01 to XFF can be specified.(Except X100.)
Device number "000" is invalid.
Set device number "100" when using no fixed device number for door interlock II signal input.
Related parameter: "#1154 pdoor (Door interlock II for each part system) "
---Setting range---
000 to 2FF (hexadecimal)
【#1512】 DOORPs Signal input device 2 for door interlock II: for each part system
Set the fixed device number (X??) for door interlock II signal input for each part system.
(Set the same value as that of #1155.)
Related parameter: "#1154 pdoor (Door interlock II for each part system)"
---Setting range---
000 to 2FF (hexadecimal)
【#1513】 stapM M code for synchronous tap selection

Set the M code for the synchronous tapping selection.
Select the synchronous tapping mode using the miscellaneous function code of the value set in this
parameter. The M function command can be issued immediately before the tap command or in the
same block. This function is valid only when "1" is set in "#1272 ext08/bit1 (Enable/disable M-
function synchronous tap cycle)".
(Note) Do not use M00, 01 02, 30, 98, and 99.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999999
【#1514】 expLinax Exponential function interpolation linear axis

Set the axis name for the linear axis used in exponential function interpolation.
---Setting range---
A to Z
【#1515】 expRotax Exponential function interpolation rotary axis

Set the axis name for the rotary axis used in exponential function interpolation.
---Setting range---
A to Z
276
【#1516】 mill_ax Milling axis name

Set the name of the rotary axis used in milling interpolation. Only one rotary axis can be set.
When there is no E command in issuing the G12.1 command, this parameter will be followed.
---Setting range---
A to Z
【#1517】 mill_C Milling interpolation hypothetical axis name

Select the hypothetical axis command name for milling interpolation.
When there is no D command in issuing the milling interpolation command, this parameter will be
followed.
0: Y axis command
1: Command rotary axis name.
【#1518】 polm Spindle-spindle polygon Workpiece spindle No.

Set the workpiece axis No. used in spindle-spindle polygon machining.
(Note) The 1st spindle will be selected when "0" is set.
【#1519】 pols Spindle-spindle polygonTool spndle No.

Set the number of the rotary tool spindle used in spindle-spindle polygon machining.
(Note) The 2nd spindle will be selected when "0" is set.
【#1520(PR)】 Tchg34 Additional axis tool compensation operation (for L system only)
Select axis to carry out the additional axis' tool compensation function.
0: 3rd axis.
1: 4th axis.
【#1521】 C_min Minimum turning angle

Set the minimum turning angle of the normal line control axis at the block joint during normal line
control.
---Setting range---
0.000 to 360.000 (°) (Input setting increment applies)
【#1522(PR)】 C_axis Normal line control axis

Set the number of the axis for normal line control.
Set a rotary axis No.
0: Normal line control disabled
1 to 8: Axis No. (number of control axes)
【#1523】 C_feed Normal line control axis turning speed

Set the turning speed of the normal line control axis at the block joint during normal line control.
Set a value that does not exceed the normal line control axis' clamp speed ("#2002 clamp").
This is valid with normal line control type I.
---Setting range---
0 to 1000000 (°/min)
【#1524】 C_type Normal line control type

Select the normal line control type.
0: Normal line control type I
1: Normal line control type II
【#1533】 millPax Pole coordinate linear axis name

Set the linear axis name used for pole coordinate interpolation.
---Setting range---
Axis name such as X, Y or Z
277
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1534】 SnG44.1 Spindle No. for G44.1 command

Set the selected spindle No. for the G44.1 command.
The setting range differs according to the model.
If a spindle that does not exist is set, the 2nd spindle will be used. Note that if there is only one
spindle, the 1st spindle will be used.
0: 2nd spindle
1: 1st spindle
2: 2nd spindle
3: 3rd spindle
4: 4th spindle
5: 5th spindle
6: 6th spindle
【#1535】 C_leng Minimum turning movement amount

Set the minimum turning movement amount of the normal line control axis at the block joint during
normal line control.
---Setting range---
0.000 to 99999.999 (mm) (Input setting increment applies)
【#1537】 crsax[1] Mixed control (cross axis control) axis

Set the axis to be interchanged during the mixed control (cross axis control).
Using two digits, set the name of the axis to be interchanged with the axis in the part system where
the mixed control (cross axis control) request signal is input, or the name of the axis to be shifted to
that part system.
---Setting range---
Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9
(Setting will be cleared when "0" is set)
【#1538】 crsax[2]
that part system.
---Setting range---
【#1539】 crsax[3]
that part system.
---Setting range---
【#1540】 crsax[4]
that part system.
---Setting range---
278
【#1541】 crsax[5]
that part system.
---Setting range---
【#1542】 crsax[6]
that part system.
---Setting range---
【#1543】 crsax[7]
that part system.
---Setting range---
【#1544】 crsax[8]
that part system.
---Setting range---
【#1561】 3Dcdc Switch workpiece coordinate display during 3D coordinate conversion

Select the workpiece coordinate display during 3D coordinate conversion.
1: G68 program coordinate system
(Note) The special display unit's absolute coordinates also follow this parameter setting.
【#1562】 3Dremc Switch remaining command display during 3D coordinate conversion

Select the remaining command display during 3D coordinate conversion.
【#1563】 3Dcdrc Switch coordinate reading during 3D coordinate conversion

Select the coordinate system of the workpiece/skip coordinate read value in the 3D coordinate
conversion modal.
1: Workpiece (local) coordinate system
279
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1564】 3Dspd Hole drilling speed during 3D coordinate conversion

Select the rapid traverse rate for the hole drilling cycle during 3D coordinate conversion.
0: The cutting feed clamp speed is used.
Other than 0: The set speed is used.
Note that if the rapid traverse rate is exceeded, the speed will be clamped at the rapid traverse rate.
---Setting range---
0 to 1000000mm/min
【#1565】 helgear Helical machining base axis

Set the base axis for helix angle calculation in helical machining. When no setting, Z axis will be
used.
---Setting range---
Axis name such as X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, and C
【#1566】 3DSelctDrillaxMode Switch drill axis's mode from rapid traverse during 3D
coordinate conversion
Select the rapid traverse mode in non-drilling blocks among a drilling cycle to the cutting feed mode
during 3-dimensional coordinate conversion.
0: Rapid traverse mode. The speed follows the setting of "#2001 rapid".
1: Cutting feed mode. The speed follows the setting of "#1564 3Dspd".
【#1568】 SfiltG1 G01 soft acceleration/deceleration filter

Set the filter time constant for smoothly changing the acceleration rate for the cutting feed
acceleration/deceleration in pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration.
---Setting range---
0 to 200 (ms)
Notch frequency Hz
Displays the notch frequency(Hz) for the S-pattern filter set in "#1568 SfiltG1 (G01 soft acceleration/
deceleration filter)"
【#1569】 SfiltG0 G00 soft acceleration/deceleration filter

Set the filter time constant for smoothly changing the acceleration rate for the rapid traverse
acceleration/deceleration in pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration.
---Setting range---
0 to 200 (ms)
【#1570】 Sfilt2 Soft acceleration/deceleration filter 2

Set the filter time constant for smoothly changing the acceleration rate in pre-interpolation
This will be disabled when "0" or "1" is set.
---Setting range---
0 to 26 (ms)
Notch frequency Hz
Displays the notch frequency(Hz) for the S-pattern filter set in "#1570 Sfilt2 (Soft acceleration/
deceleration filter 2)".
【#1571】 SSSdis SSS control adjustment coefficient fixed value selection

Fix the shape recognition range for SSS control.
280
【#1572】 Cirorp Arc command overlap

This eliminates speed fluctuations at the joint of the arc and straight line and arc and arc.
Set as a bit unit.
0: Do not overlap the arc command blocks
1: Overlap the arc command blocks
bit0 : Arc command during high-speed high-accuracy control II
bit1 : Arc command during high-speed machining mode II
bit2 : Arc command during high-accuracy control (G61.1)
bit3 : Arc command during cutting mode (G64)

The line command block and arc command block won't be overlapped during G61.2 modal
regardless of this setting.
(Note) This parameter is invalid during SSS control.
【#1573】 Ret1 Return type 1

Select the axis to be moved later after tool return.
This is referred to with the movement path (transit point #1 -> interrupt point).
Up to eight axes can be specified by expressing one axis with one bit.
bit0 : Transit point #1 1st axis
bit1 : Transit point #1 2nd axis
bit2 : Transit point #1 3rd axis
bit3 : Transit point #1 4th axis
---Setting range---
00000000 to 11111111 (Binary)
【#1574】 Ret2 Return type 2

Select the axis to be moved later after tool return.
This is referred to with the movement path (return start point -> transit point #2).
Up to eight axes can be specified by expressing one axis with one bit.
bit0 : Transit point #2 1st axis
bit1 : Transit point #2 2nd axis
bit2 : Transit point #2 3rd axis
---Setting range---
00000000 to 11111111 (Binary)
281
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#1590】 Animate ax direct Machine status animated display axis direction(+/-)
<bit0>
0: 1st axis + direction is set to the right direction.
1: 1st axis + direction is set to the left direction.
<bit1>
0: 2nd axis + direction is set to the rear direction.
1: 2nd axis + direction is set to the front direction.
<bit2>
0: 3rd axis + direction is set to the top direction.
1: 3rd axis + direction is set to the bottom direction.
【#1591】 Animate ax-1 Machine status animated display axis name (1st axis)
Set the name of the 1st axis displayed with the machine status animation. When the axis name is not
specified, the current 1st axis name ("#1013 axname") will be used.
---Setting range---
Axis name such as X, Y, Z
【#1592】 Animate ax-2 Machine status animated display axis name (2nd axis)
Set the name of the 2nd axis displayed with the machine status animation. When the axis name is
not specified, the current 2nd axis name ("#1013 axname") will be used.
---Setting range---
【#1593】 Animate ax-3 Machine status animated display axis name (3rd axis)
Set the name of the 3rd axis displayed with the machine status animation. When the axis name is
not specified, the current 3rd axis name ("#1013 axname") will be used.
---Setting range---
【#1901(PR)】 station addr

【#1902(PR)】 Din size

【#1903(PR)】 Dout size

【#1904(PR)】 data length

【#1905(PR)】 baud rate

【#1906(PR)】 stop bit

【#1907(PR)】 parity check

【#1908(PR)】 even parity

282
【#1909(PR)】 Tout (ini)

【#1910(PR)】 Tout (run)

【#1911(PR)】 clock select

【#1925】 EtherNet Start of service

Start or stop the Ethernet communication function.
0: Stop
1: Start
【#1926(PR)】 Global IP address IP address

Set the main CPU's IP address.
Set the NC IP address seen from an external source.
【#1927(PR)】 Global Subnet mask Subnet mask

Set the subnet mask for the IP address.
【#1928(PR)】 Global Gateway Gateway

Set the IP address for the gateway.
【#1929】 Port number Port No.

Set the port No. for the service function.
---Setting range---
1 to 9999
(Set 2000 when not connected to the Ethernet.)
【#1930(PR)】 Host address Host address

Set the host's IP address.
【#1931(PR)】 Host number Host No.

Set the host's port No.
---Setting range---
1 to 9999
【#1934(PR)】 Local IP address

Set the HMI side CPU's IP address.
(Note) This parameter is valid only for M700/M700VW Series.
【#1935(PR)】 Local Subnet mask

Set the HMI side CPU's subnet mask.
(Note) This parameter is valid only for M700/M700VW Series.
【#11001(PR)】 APC type APC screen display type selection

Set the type of screen displayed with the pallet program registration screen.
0: Standard pallet registration screen
1: Pallet 4-page registration screen
【#11002(PR)】 Valid pallet num Number of pallets setting

Set the number of pallets validated on the pallet program registration screen.
---Setting range---
2 to 12 (Interpreted as 2 when 0 is set.)
283
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#11003(PR)】 APLC valid APLC valid

Temporarily disable APLC.
Normally set "1".
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#11004(PR)】 PLCauto-run enable PLC automatic startup valid

Select starting condition of the built-in PLC.
0: Start PLC after NC screen startup
1: Start PLC at NC startup
(Note) When standard NC screen is not used, set "1".
【#11005(PR)】 PC IP address IP address setting

Set the IP address for the display unit or PC in which machining programs are stored.
Set the IP address for the display unit on which the automatic power OFF will be executed.
When the 3D machine interference check function is enabled, set the IP address of the display unit
that is used for the 3D machine interference check (for M700VW only).
(Note 1) When “0.0.0.0” is input, “192.168.100.2” is automatically set.
(Note 2) This parameter is valid only for M700VW/M700 Series.
PC Subnet
Set the subnet mask for the display unit or PC in which machining programs are stored.
PC Gateway
Set the gateway for the display unit or PC in which machining programs are stored.
【#11006】 PC Port number Port No. setting

Set the port No. for the display unit or PC in which machining programs are stored.
(Note 1) When "0" is input, "55555" is automatically set.
(Note 2) When changing the parameter, set the same value in "PD_Control_Port" in the PC side
environment setting file.
---Setting range---
0 to 65535
【#11007】 PC Timeout Communication timeout time setting

Set the NC side communication timeout time.
(Note 1) When "0" is input, "120" is automatically set.
(Note 2) When the value greater than "300" is set, a setting error occurs.
(Note 3) When changing the parameter, set the same value in "PD_Time_out" in the PC side
environment setting file.
---Setting range---
0 to 300 (s)
【#11009(PR)】 M2 label O M2 label O

Select the program number label when using the M2 format.
0: Label L
1: Label O
【#11010(PR)】 Software keyboard Software keyboard

Select with touch panel whether to use software keyboard.
0: Do not use
1: Use
2: Use (Note1)
(Note1) Software keyboard automatically appears on a specific screen. (For M700VS/M70V/M70
Series only).
284
【#11011】 Handy TERM. PW. Handy terminal password

Set the password used for the handy terminal customized downloading.
Blank (when "0" is set) and "0000" are regarded as no password.
Not the password of a new customizing file but the password of the customizing file downloaded to
the last handy terminal is set.
Set blank or "0000" when initially downloading.
---Setting range---
0000 to 9999
【#11012(PR)】 16 axes for 1ch Connecting 16 axes for 1ch

Select the maximum number of axes (sum of the NC axis, spindle, and PLC axis) connected to the
drive unit interface (channel 1) when not using the extension unit (FCU7-EX891+HN552)
0: Up to 8 axes can be connected to channel 1.
1: Up to 16 axes can be connected to channel 1. This parameter is disabled when the extension
unit is connected. It is possible to connect only up to eight axes or less per channel.
【#11013】 3D_MChk Invalidate 3D machine interference check

Select whether to enable the 3D machine interference check function.
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#11014】 Chk_len1 1st-step interference check distance

Set the 1st-step check distance when in 3D machine interference check mode.
The standard value is "30.000".
---Setting range---
0.000 to 99999.999(mm)
【#11015】 Chk_len2 2nd-step interference check distance

Set the 2nd-step check distance when in 3D machine interference check mode.
The standard value is "5.000".
---Setting range---
0.000 to 99999.999(mm)
【#11016】 Expand_Rate Shape expansion rate

Set the model shape expansion rate to be used for 3D machine interference check. This parameter
is used for expanding a model shape to be used for 3D machine interference check. The
interference check is performed using a shape expanded by the amount of [Check length (mm) x
Shape expansion rate (%)].
---Setting range---
0 to 300(%)
【#11017】 T-ofs set at run

Select whether to enable the tool compensation amount setting and life value setting during
automatic operation and operation pause.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#11018】 M password hold

Select whether to enable the "Machine user" password holding.When this is set to "1", the "Machine
user" password will be held.
0: Disable
1: Enable
285
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#11019】 2-system display 2-part system simultaneous display

Select whether to validate 2-part system simultaneous display on operation screen.
0: Display one part system on operation screen
1: Display two part systems simultaneously on operation screen
2: Display two part systems simultaneously (Display type 2) on operation screen
(Note 1) Unless you set "1" in two or more of "#1001 SYS_ON [1] to [4]", two-part system
simultaneous display will fail regardless of this parameter.
【#11021】 PLC mesg disp type Format of PLC alarm and operator message
Select the format of PLC alarms and operator messages to be displayed on the bottom right of the
screen.
0: Display up to the first 40 characters.
1: If text is longer than 40 characters, divide it into two and display separately. (Classification No.
is displayed together)
【#11022】 SRAM Output Type SRAM output type

Set the SRAM output type.
(Note) In M700 Series, the conventional SRAM output type is set regardless of the setting of this
parameter.
0: The latest SRAM output type is set.
(Not compatible with F3 and versions older than F3.)
1: The conventional SRAM output type is set.
(Compatible with F3 and versions older than F3.)
【#11023】 G33.n Drn G33.n dryrun

Not used.
【#11024】 G33.n fhd G33.n feed hold

Not used.
【#11028】 Tolerance Arc Cent Tolerable correction value of arc center error
Set the tolerable correction value for the calculated coordinate value error of R-specified circular
center.
When a difference between "a line between the start and end points" and "commanded radius x 2" is
the tolerance or smaller, the error is corrected so that the middle of a line between the start and end
points will be the arc center.
When [Setting value < 0] : 0 (Not correct)

When [Setting value = 0] : 2 x minimum setting increment
When [Setting value > 0] : Setting value
---Setting range---
-1 to 0.100(mm)
【#11029】 Arc to G1 no Cent Change command from arc to linear when no arc center
designation
Select the operation when arc center or radius designation is omitted from arc command.
0: Program error
1: Change into linear command
【#11030】 Man tap sync cancl Synchronization cancel in manual synchronous tapping
Select whether the tapping axis in manual synchronous tapping synchronizes with the spindle.
0: Synchronize with the spindle
1: Not synchronize with the spindle
286
【#11031(PR)】 Cursor pos search Cursor position search

Select the cursor position searching method.
0: Disable
1: Pressing the INPUT key in [Monitr] - [Edit] menu starts the operation search for the block with
the cursor.
2: Turning ON/OFF the "Edit/Search" signal in [Monitr] - [Edit] menu starts the operation search for
the block with the cursor.
3: Turning ON/OFF the "Edit/Search" signal in [Monitr] - [Edit] menu starts the operation search for
the block with the cursor. Pressing the reset key shows the top of the program on the [Edit/
Search] window.
【#11032(PR)】 Menu sel para lkof Validate menu selection parameter setting
Select whether to enable the setting of the "menu selection parameters" (#10501 to #10530, #10551
to #10580, and #10601 to #10630), with which the order of main menus on Monitor, Setup and Edit
screens can be rearranged. And also select who is allowed to do this setting.
0: Disable
1: Enable (machine tool builder password is required)
2: Enable (users are allowed to set)
【#11033(PR)】 skipB_no_sens Unconnected sensor selection when skip is set to contact B

Select the contact of the sensor which you wish to set as unconnected, when the skip signal is set to
contact B.
Set "1" for the contact to be unconnected.
bit0: Skip input 1
bit1: Skip input 2
bit2: Skip input 3
bit3: Skip input 4
bit4: Skip input 5
bit5: Skip input 6
bit6: Skip input 7
bit7: Skip input 8
(Note 1)This parameter is enabled when "#1258 set30/bit0" is set to "1".
(Note 2)This parameter is independent of PLC skip.
---Setting range---
00000000 to 11111111 (Binary)
【#11034】 G12AddrCheckType Command address type to check in circular cutting

Select the type of command address to check in circular cutting.
0: Regard command addresses other than D, F, I as illegal.
1: Regard the command address H as illegal. And commands other than D,F,I and M,S,T,B are
disabled.
【#11035】 Sys. change limit Part system switching restriction

This restricts switching the part systems displayed on screen.
0: Not restrict
1: Disable the part system switching by pressing [$<->$] key on touch panel.
2: Disable the part system switching by display switch signals(Y730 to Y733).
【#11036】 meas dir judge Non-sensitive band for manual measurement direction judgment
(for M system only)
Set the non-sensitive band to be used for judging the manual measurement direction. If the feedback
position fluctuates widely at the axis stop, set the fluctuation width or larger value in this set the
parameter.
When set to "0", the band will be 1 (µm).
---Setting range---
0 to 1000 (µm)
0: 1 (µm)
287
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#11037】 R-Navi Index Type R-Navi machining surface indexing type

Select the machining surface indexing type in the R-Navi function.
0: Indexing type 1 (Only rotary axes move to perform indexing)
1: Indexing type 2 (Indexing is performed with the tool center point fixed to the position seen from
the workpiece)
【#11038】 T disp typ T display (tool command value) type (For L system only)
Select the T display (tool command value) type on the monitor screen between displaying tool No.
only or displaying tool No. and compensation No. (L system only)
0: Display tool No. only
1: Display the tool command value (the combined value consisting of the tool No. and
compensation No.) last commanded by the program. Even in a manual value command, the
program's tool command value is displayed.
【#11039】 Cusr pos srch type Cursor position search type

Set the availability of the cursor position search during single block stop when #11031 Cursor pos
search=1 to 3.
0: Disable cursor position search during single block stop.
1: Enable cursor position search during single block stop.
Sub-program is displayed when selecting menus [Monitr]-[Edit] while single block stop is carried out
during sub-program with this parameter set to 1.
【#11050(PR)】 T-ofs digit type Tool compensation digit type

Change the setting range for a tool compensation amount, tool management, and tool shape setting
of tool compensation types I and II of M system.
This change is also reflected in the tool compensation screen and tool measurement screen.
0: Set with a 3-digit integer
1: Set with a 4-digit integer
【#11051】 Direct Socket OFF Direct Socket communication I/F OFF

Select ON/OFF of the Direct Socket communication I/F.
0: ON (Default)
1: OFF
(Note) When the Direct Socket communication I/F is ON, applications that uses "#1926 Global IP
address" such as MS Configurator and GX Developer cannot be used.
【#11052】 LOG Sort Order Log data sorting order

Select in which order to sort the operation log files (all logs) to be output.
0: Sort the data in chronologically ascending order separately for each log type.
1: Sort the data in chronologically ascending order for all the log types.
If the times and dates logged are identical, the files are output in the order of key, alarm, PLC
signal and AC power error logs.
【#11101-11130(PR)】 Monitr menu(MTB)1-30 Monitor main menu (MTB) 1 to 30

Designate the destination menu Nos. to move monitor screen's main menus.
-1 : Menu not displayed
0 : No change
1 to 30: Destination menu Nos.
【#11151-11180(PR)】 Setup menu(MTB) 1-30 Setup main menu (MTB) 1 to 30

Designate the destination menu Nos. to move setup screen's main menus.
0 : No change
【#11201-11230(PR)】 Edit menu(MTB) 1-30 Edit main menu (MTB) 1 to 30

Designate the destination menu Nos. to move edit screen's main menus.
0 : No change
288
【#12001】 ManualB RectanA xH Manual feed rate B constant surface control intersecting
part system axis name (horizontal)
Set the part system axis name ("#1013 axname") for the two axes that intersect with the rotary axis
direction. When one of the two axes is blank, a constant speed will be applied without using constant
surface speed control.
---Setting range---
Axis addresses such as X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, and C
【#12002】 ManualB RectanA xV Manual feed rate B constant surface control intersecting
part system axis name (vertical)
Set the part system axis name ("#1013 axname") for the two axes that intersect with the rotary axis
direction. When one of the two axes is blank, a constant speed will be applied without using constant
surface speed control.
---Setting range---
Axis addresses such as X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, and C
【#12003】 ManualB RotCent erH Manual feed rate B constant surface control rotation center
machine position (horizontal)
Set the machine coordinate position (horizontal axis) at the center of the rotary axis.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#12004】 ManualB RotCent erV Manual feed rate B constant surface control rotation center
machine position (vertical)
Set the machine coordinate position (vertical axis) at the center of the rotary axis.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#12005(PR)】 Mfig Number of M

Set the number of M that can be specified within the same block.
---Setting range---
1 to 4
【#12006(PR)】 Mbin M binary

Data type 0 BCD
Data type 1 Unsigned binary
Data type -1 Singed binary
<For unsigned binary>

The absolute value "1" is output for "-1".
<For singed binary>
"-1" is output as "0xFFFFFFFF".
---Setting range---
Data type
(-1,0,1)
【#12007(PR)】 Sfig Number of S

Set the number of spindles.
(Note 1) The setting range differs according to the model.
(Note 2) Sfig is set in the range of 1 to 6. However, the number of outputs by Sfig cannot be
controlled. Thus, only one S command is output regardless of the Sfig setting value.
---Setting range---
1 to 6
289
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#12008(PR)】 Sbin S binary

Data type 0 BCD

<For singed binary>
(Note 1) Sbin can be set with "-1", "0" and "1", but the S command cannot be BCD output.
If BCD (0) is selected for Sbin, it will be handled as a singed binary (-1).
---Setting range---
Data type
(-1,0,1)
【#12009(PR)】 Tfig Number of T

Set the number of T that can be specified within the same block.
---Setting range---
1 to 4
【#12010(PR)】 Tbin T binary

Data type 0 BCD

<For singed binary>
---Setting range---
Data type
(-1,0,1)
【#12011(PR)】 Bfig Number of B

Set the number of T that can be specified within the same block.
---Setting range---
1 to 4
【#12012(PR)】 Bbin B binary

Data type 0 BCD
Data type-1 Singed binary

<For singed binary>

---Setting range---
Data type
(-1,0,1)
【#12013】 G33.n rot G33.n rotary axis name

Select the axis to use as C axis with its axis name.
---Setting range---
A to Z
【#12014】 G33.n ovr G33.n override

Not used.
290
Appendix 1.3 Axis Specifications Parameters

【#2001】 rapid Rapid traverse rate

Set the rapid traverse feedrate for each axis.
(Note) The maximum value to be set depends on the machine specifications.
---Setting range---
1 to 1000000 (mm/min)
【#2002】 clamp Cutting feedrate for clamp function

Set the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis.
Even if the feedrate in G01 exceeds this value, the clamp will be applied at this feedrate.
---Setting range---
1 to 1000000 (mm/min)
291
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2003(PR)】 smgst Acceleration and deceleration modes

Set acceleration and deceleration control modes.
Set value is in hexadecimal.
HEX 4 3 2 1
bit F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OT2 OT1 C3 C2 C1 L R3 R2 R1 LR
Stroke end stop types Cutting feed Rapid traverse

acceleration acceleration
/deceleration type /deceleration type
HEX-1 Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration type

0(bit3,2,1,0 = 0000) : Step
1(bit3,2,1,0 = 0001) : Linear acceleration/deceleration
2(bit3,2,1,0 = 0010) : Prim ary delay
8(bit3,2,1,0 = 1000) : Exponential acceleration and linear deceleration
F(bit3,2,1,0 = 1111) : Soft acceleration/deceleration
(Note) R1 > R3 when both R1 and R3 contain 1.
HEX-2 Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration type

0(bit7,6,5,4 = 0000) : Step
1(bit7,6,5,4 = 0001) : Linear acceleration/deceleration
2(bit7,6,5,4 = 0010) : Prim ary delay
8(bit7,6,5,4 = 1000) : Exponential acceleration and linear deceleration
F(bit7,6,5,4 = 1111) : Soft acceleration/deceleration
HEX-3 Stroke end stop types
0(bit9,8 = 00) : Linear deceleration (Decelerates at G0t1)
1(bit9,8 = 01) : Linear deceleration (Decelerates at 2×G0t1)
2(bit9,8 = 10) : Position loop step stop
3(bit9,8 = 11) : Position loop step stop
Speed
2 x G0t1 (OT1=1,OT2=0)
G0t1
G0t1 (OT1=OT2=0)
Stroke end signal
(Note) OT1(bit8) is valid under the following conditions (valid for dog type zero point return):
- Stop type: Linear deceleration
- Acceleration/Deceleration mode: Exponential acceleration and Linear deceleration
HEX-4
292
【#2004】 G0tL G0 time constant (linear)

Set a linear control time constant for rapid traverse acceleration and deceleration.
The time constant will be enabled when LR (rapid traverse feed with linear acceleration/deceleration)
or F (soft acceleration/deceleration) is selected in "#2003 smgst Acceleration and deceleration
modes".
Speed
Time
G0tL G0tL
---Setting range---
1 to 4000 (ms)
【#2005】 G0t1 G0 time constant(primary delay) / Second-step time constant for soft
acceleration/deceleration
Set a primary-delay time constant for rapid traverse acceleration and deceleration.
The time constant will be enabled when R1 (rapid traverse feed with primary delay) or R3
(exponential acceleration and linear deceleration) is selected in "#2003 smgst Acceleration and
deceleration modes".
When the soft acceleration/deceleration is selected, the second-step time constant will be used.
<Rapid traverse feed with primary delay>
Speed
Time
G0t1 G0t1
<Rapid traverse feed with exponential acceleration and linear deceleration>
Speed
Time
G0t1 2 x G0t1
<Soft acceleration/deceleration>
- When "#1219 aux03/bit7" is set to "0"
Speed
Time
G0t1 G0t1
G0t1 G0t1
G0tL G0tL
(Note) The time constant setting for the soft acceleration/deceleration can be changed by the setting
of "#1219 aux03/bit7"
---Setting range---
1 to 5000 (ms)
【#2006】 G0t2
293
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2007】 G1tL G1 time constant (linear)

Set a linear control time constant for cutting acceleration and deceleration.
The time constant will be enabled when LC (cutting feed with linear acceleration/deceleration) or F
(soft acceleration/deceleration) is selected in "#2003 smgst Acceleration or deceleration modes".
Speed
Time
G1tL G1tL
---Setting range---
1 to 4000 (ms)
【#2008】 G1t1 G1 time constant (primary delay)/Second-step time constant for soft
Set the primary delay time constant for cutting acceleration and deceleration.
The time constant will be enabled when C1 (cutting feed with the primary delay) or C3 (cutting feed
with exponential acceleration and linear deceleration) is selected in "#2003 smgst acceleration/
deceleration modes".
When the soft acceleration or deceleration is selected, the second-step time constant will be used.
<Cutting feed with primary delay>
Speed
Time
G1t1 G1t1
<Cutting feed with exponential acceleration and linear deceleration>
Speed
Time
G1t1 2 x G1t1
<Soft acceleration/deceleration>
Speed
Time
G1t1 G1t1 G1t1 G1t1
G1tL G1tL
---Setting range---
1 to 5000 (ms)
【#2009】 G1t2
294
【#2010】 fwd_g Feed forward gain

Set a feed forward gain for pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration.
The larger the set value, the smaller the theoretical control error will be. However, if a machine
vibration occurs, set the smaller value.
---Setting range---
0 to 200 (%)
【#2011】 G0back G0 backlash

Set up the backlash compensation amount when the direction is reversed with the movement
command in rapid traverse feed mode or in manual mode.
---Setting range---
-9999999 to 9999999
【#2012】 G1back G1 backlash

Set up the backlash compensation amount when the direction is reversed with the movement
command in cutting mode.
---Setting range---
-9999999 to 9999999
【#2013】 OT - Soft limit I -

Set a soft limit area with reference to the zero point of the basic machine coordinate. Set the
coordinate in the negative direction for the movable area of stored stroke limit 1. The coordinate in
the positive direction is set in "#2014 OT+".
To narrow the available range in actual use, use the parameters "#8204 OT-" and "#8205 OT+".
When the same value (other than "0") is set in this parameter and "#2014 OT+", this function will be
disabled.
Basic machine coordinate OT+ (Z)
OT-(X) OT+ (X)
OT-(Z)
Movable area
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
295
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2014】 OT + Soft limit I +

Set a soft limit area with reference to the zero point of the basic machine coordinate. Set the
coordinate in the positive direction for the movable area of stored stroke limit 1. The coordinate in the
negative direction is set in "#2013 OT-".
To narrow the available range in actual use, use the parameters "#8204 OT-" and"#8205 OT+".
When the same value (other than "0") is set in this parameter and "#2013 OT-", this function will be
disabled.
Basic machine coordinate OT+ (Z)
OT-(X) OT+ (X)
OT-(Z)
Movable area
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#2015】 tlml- Negative direction sensor of tool setter

Set a sensor position in the negative direction when using the tool setter.
(Note) In the case of the basic axis and inclined axis of the inclined axis specifications, set the
position on the orthogonal coordinate.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#2016】 tlml+ Positive direction sensor of tool setter or TLM standard length
Set the sensor position in the positive direction when using the tool setter.
When the TLM is used, set the distance from a tool change point (reference position) to the
measurement basic point (surface) in order to measure the tool length.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#2017】 tap_g Axis servo gain

Set the position loop gain for special operations (synchronized tapping, interpolation with spindle C
axis, etc.).
Set the value in 0.25 increments.
---Setting range---
0.25 to 200.00 (rad/s)
【#2018(PR)】 no_srv Operation with no servo control

Select when performing test operation without connecting the drive unit and motor.
0: Normal operation
1: Test operation
When "1" is set, the operation will be possible even if drive units and motor are not connected,
because the drive system alarm will be ignored.
This parameter is used for test operation during start up: Do not use during normal operation. If "1" is
set during normal operation, errors will not be detected even if they occur.
【#2019】 revnum Return steps

Set the steps required for reference position return for each axis.
0: Not execute reference position return.
1 to max. number of NC axes: Steps required for reference position return
296
【#2020】 o_chkp Spindle orientation completion check during second reference position
return
Set the distance from the second reference position to the position for checking that the spindle
orientation has completed during second reference position return.
When the set value is "0", the above check will be omitted.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#2021】 out_f Maximum speed outside soft limit range (For L system only)
Set the maximum speed outside the soft limit range.
---Setting range---
0 to 1000000 (mm/min)
【#2022】 G30SLX Validate soft limit (automatic and manual)

Select whether to disable a soft limit check during the second to the fourth reference position return
in both automatic and manual operation modes.
0: Enable
1: Disable
【#2023】 ozfmin Set up ATC speed lower limit

Set the minimum speed outside the soft limit range during the second to the fourth reference position
return.
---Setting range---
0 to 1000000 (mm/min)
【#2024】 synerr Allowable error

Set the maximum synchronization error, allowable at the synchronization error check, for the primary
axis.
When “0” is set, the error check will not be carried out.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#2025】 G28rap G28 rapid traverse rate

Set a rapid traverse rate for the dog type reference position return command.
This is not used for the distance-coded reference position detection.
---Setting range---
1 to 1000000 (mm/min)
【#2026】 G28crp G28 approach speed

Set the approach speed to the reference position.
(Note) The G28 approach speed unit is (10°/min) only when using the Z-phase type encoder (#1226
aux10/bit3=1) for the spindle/C-axis reference position return type. The same unit is used for
both the micrometric and sub-micrometric specifications.
---Setting range---
1 to 60000 (mm/min)
297
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2027】 G28sft Reference position shift distance

Set the distance from the electrical zero-point detection position to the reference position.
(Note 1) When "#1240 set12/bit2" is ON, a magnification (C: 10-fold, D: 100-fold and E: 1000-fold)
corresponding to the input setting unit ("#1003 iunit") will be applied to the setting value.
(Note 2) The sign of setting value is will be following: the direction of "#2030 dir (-) Reference
position direction (-)" is plus, and the opposite direction is minus.
(Note 3) When set value is set to minus, the axis moves to electrical zero-point detection position at
first and then moves in opposite direction.
---Setting range---
-99.999 to +99.999 (mm)
【#2028】 grmask Grid mask amount

Set the distance where the grid point will be ignored when near-point dog OFF signals are close to
that grid point during reference position return.
Axis speed
Position
(Detector F/B)
Grid Electrical zero point
Near-point dog
Grid mask setup distance
The grid mask is valid for one grid.

---Setting range---
0.000 to 99.999 (mm)
【#2029】 grspc Grid interval

Grid space (#2029 grspc)
Set the distance between grids.
Normally, the ball screw pitch value (#2218 PIT) or the movement amount per motor rotation is set
as the grid space. To make the grid space smaller, set a divisor of the grid space.
<Calculation method for movement amount per motor rotation>
(1) When linear feed mechanism is a ball screw:
The movement amount per motor rotation = the motor side gear ration / the machine side gear
ratio x the ball screw pitch
(2) When linear feed mechanism is a rack and pinion:
The movement amount per motor rotation = the motor side gear ration / the machine side gear
ratio x number of pinion gear teeth x the rack pitch
(3) For the rotary axis:
The movement angle per motor rotation = the motor side gear ration / the machine side gear ratio
x 360
---Setting range---
0.000 to 999.999 (mm)
298
【#2030(PR)】 dir (-) Reference position direction (-)

Select which side of the near-point dog the reference position is established.
For a rotary axis, select a direction that heads to the zero point from the intermediate point during
automatic zero point return.
0: Positive direction
1: Negative direction
Directions in which reference position is established as viewed from the near-point dog
- direction + direction
Grid Reference position
Near-point dog
- direction + direction
Reference position Grid
Near-point dog
【#2031】 noref Axis without reference position

Select whether the reference position is provided for the axis.
0: Reference position is provided. (Normal controlled axis)
1: No reference position is provided.
When "1" is set, reference position return is not required before automatic operation starts.
【#2032】 nochk Whether reference position return is completed not checked

Select whether to check the reference position return completion.
0: Check the reference position return completion.
1: Not check the reference position return completion.
When "1" is set, the absolute and incremental commands can be executed even if dog type (or Z
phase pulse system) reference position return is not completed.
Note that this setting is available for a rotary axis only.
【#2033】 zp_no Z phase pulse system reference position return spindle encoder No.
Set the spindle encoder No. to be used when the reference position return is performed with the Z
phase pulse of the spindle encoder.
0: Dog type
1 to 6: Spindle No.
*The setting range differs according to the model.
---Setting range---
0 to 6
【#2034】 rfpofs Distance-coded reference position detection offset

Set the offset value from the position for the initial reference position setting to the machine's actual
basic point in reference position return in the distance-coded reference position detection.
Input the value of the machine value counter that is displayed immediately after the reference
position is established.
When the power is turned ON and this parameter is set to "0", the manual reference position return
is regarded as initial reference position setting.
If this parameter is set to "0", automatic operation won't be available.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
299
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2035】 srchmax Distance-coded reference position detection scan distance

Set the maximum distance for scanning the reference marks when the reference position is not
established in the distance-coded reference position detection.
For the scan distance, set the distance that fully covers the number of reference marks as you wish
to detect.
(Example) When adding about 10% of additional coverage:
Scan distance = Base reference mark interval [mm] * 2 * 1.1
---Setting range---
0.000 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#2036】 slv_adjust Reference position adjustment value

Set the distance from the first grid point after leaving the near point dog on the secondary axis to the
position where the reference position is actually established in dog-type reference position return in
synchronous control. (Reference position shift amount is not included.)
The adjustment value will be automatically set in the secondary axis's parameter according to the
reference position adjustment complete signal from PLC.
Fine adjustment is also available from the parameter screen.
In the distance-coded reference position detection, the reference position adjustment value will be
invalid.
Master axis start position

G28sft
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Master axis
Near-point dog
Slave axis
Reference position
Slave axis start position (6) (7) adjustment
completion signal
Grid G28sft ON
Reference position adjustment amount
Basic machine coordinate system zero point
(Note 1) This parameter is enabled when the synchronization at zero point initialization ("#1493
ref_syn" = "1" of the primary axis) is applied.
(Note 2) This parameter can be set when one of the following settings is applied.
- Relative position detection ("#2049 type" = "0")
- Dog-type absolute position detection ("#2049 type" = "3")
- Simple absolute position ("#2049 type" = "9")
(Note 3) Set "0" when using the speed/current command synchronization control.
(Note 4) A setting unit of this parameter is [mm]. It is not influenced by the content of the following
parameters setting.
- "#1003 iunit"
- "#1004 ctrl_unit"
- "#1005 plcunit"
- "#1040 M_inch"
- "#1041 I_inch"
- "#1240 set12/bit2" (Zero point shift amount magnification)
(Note 5) The number of the significant digits after decimal point follows "#1004 ctrl_unit"
(Note 6) A change of this parameter requires reference position return. When the automatic
operation starts without reference position return, an alarm will occur.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999.999999 (mm)
300
【#2037】 G53ofs Reference position #1

Set the position of the first reference position from the zero point of the basic machine coordinate.
Reference position #1
(#2037 G53ofs)
(#2038 #2_rfp)
(#2039 #3_rfp)
(#2040 #4_rfp)
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#2038】 #2_rfp Reference position #2

Set the position of the second reference position from the zero point of the basic machine
coordinate.
(#2037 G53ofs)
(#2038 #2_rfp)
(#2039 #3_rfp)
(#2040 #4_rfp)
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
301
MITSUBISHI CNC

Set the position of the third reference position from the zero point of the basic machine coordinate.
(#2037 G53ofs)
(#2038 #2_rfp)
(#2039 #3_rfp)
(#2040 #4_rfp)
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

Set the position of the fourth reference position from the zero point of the basic machine coordinate.
(#2037 G53ofs)
(#2038 #2_rfp)
(#2039 #3_rfp)
(#2040 #4_rfp)
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#2049(PR)】 type Absolute position detection method

Select the absolute position zero point alignment method.
0: Not absolute position detection
1: Stopper method (push against mechanical stopper)
2: Marked point alignment method I (The grid point is the reference position.)
3: Dog-type (align with dog and near point detection switch)
4: Marked point alignment method II (The position with which the mark was aligned is the reference
position.)
9: Simple absolute position (Not absolute position detection, but the position when the power is
turned off is registered.)
【#2050】 absdir Basic point of Z direction

Select the direction of the grid point immediately before the machine basic position (basic point of
detector) in the marked point alignment.
0: Positive direction
1: Negative direction
302
【#2051】 check Check

Set the tolerable range of travel distance (deviation distance) while the power is turned OFF.
If the difference of the positions when the power is turned OFF and when turned ON again is larger
than this value, an alarm will be output.
Set "0" to omit the check.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#2054】 clpush Current limit (%)

Set the current limit value during the stopper operation in the dogless-type absolute position
detection.
The setting value is the ratio of the current limit value to the rated current value.
---Setting range---
0 to 100 (%)
【#2055】 pushf Push speed

Set the feedrate for the automatic initial setting during stopper method.
---Setting range---
1 to 999 (mm/min)
【#2056】 aproch Approach

Set the approach distance of the stopper when deciding the absolute position basic point with the
stopper method.
After using stopper once, the tool returns with this distance, and then use stopper again.
---Setting range---
0 to 999.999 (mm)
【#2057】 nrefp Near zero point +

Set the positive direction width where the near reference position signal is output.
When set to "0", the width will be equivalent to the grid width setting.
(Note) When "#1240 set12/bit2" is ON, a magnification (C: 10-fold, D: 100-fold, E:1000-fold)
corresponding to the input setting increment ("#1003 iunit") will be applied to the setting value.
---Setting range---
0 to 999.999 (mm)
(Input setting increment applied)
【#2058】 nrefn Near zero point -

Set the negative direction width where the near reference position signal is output.
When set to "0", the width will be equivalent to the grid width setting.
(Note) When "#1240 set12/bit2" is ON, a magnification (C: 10-fold, D: 100-fold, E:1000-fold)
corresponding to the input setting increment ("#1003 iunit") will be applied to the setting value.
---Setting range---
0 to 999.999 (mm)
(Input setting increment applied)
【#2059】 zerbas Select zero point parameter and basic point

Select which is to be the zero point coordinate position during absolute position initial setting.
0: Position where the axis was stopped.
1: Grid point just before stopper.
【#2061】 OT_1B- Soft limit IB-

Set the coordinate of the lower limit of the area where the stored stroke limit IB is inhibited.
Set a value from zero point in the basic machine coordinate system.
If the same value (non-zero) with the same sign as that of "#2062 OT_IB+" is set, the stored stroke
limit IB function will be disabled.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
303
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2062】 OT_1B+ Soft limit IB+

Set the coordinate of the upper limit of the area where the stored stroke limit IB is inhibited.
Set a value from zero point in the basic machine coordinate system.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#2063】 OT_1B type Soft limit IB type

Select the type that applies the settings of "#2062 OT_IB+" and "#2061 OT_IB-" in stored stroke limit
I.
0: Soft limit IB
1: The settings are invalid
2: Soft limit IC
3: Soft limit is checked for the inclined axis control axis with the program coordinate system.
(Note) This is valid only for inclined axis' base axis and inclined axis.
【#2068】 G0fwdg G00 feed forward gain

Set a feed forward gain for G00 pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration.
The larger the setting value, the shorter the positioning time during in-position checking.
If a machine vibration occurs, set the smaller value.
---Setting range---
0 to 200 (%)
【#2069】 Rcoeff Axis arc radius error correction coefficient

Set the percentage to increase or decrease the arc radius error correction amount for each axis.
---Setting range---
-100.0 to +100.0 (%)
【#2070(PR)】 div_RT Rotational axis division count

Set the number of divisions of one turn of the rotary axis under control.
(Example)
When "36" is set, one turn is supposed to be 36.000.
(Note 1) When "0" is set, the normal rotary axis (360.000 degrees for one turn) is assumed.
(Note 2) If this parameter is changed when the absolute position detection specification is used,
absolute position data will be lost. Initialization must be performed again.
---Setting range---
0 to 999
【#2071】 s_axis Inclined axis selection (for L system only)

Select whether the axis is to be under the inclined-axis control or to be the base axis corresponding
to the inclined axis.
0: Not to be under the inclined-axis control
1: Inclined axis
2: Base axis corresponding to inclined axis
(Note) Each of "1" and "2" values must be set for only one axis. If either value is set for two or more
axes, inclined-axis control does not work.
【#2072】 rslimt Restart limit

Set the most minus (-) side position where restart search is possible.
If the machine is positioned on the more minus (-) side than the set value in T-command restart
mode, restart search in type 3 will be disabled.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
304
【#2073】 zrn_dog Origin dog Random assignment device

Under the standard specifications, the origin dog signal is assigned to a fixed device. Set the input
device in this parameter when it is desired to assign the origin dog signal to a position other than the
fixed device.
(Note1) This parameter is enabled in the following conditions.

NC axis: When "#1226 aux10/bit5" is set to "1".
PLC axis: When "#1246 set18/bit7" is set to "1".
(Note 2) When this parameter is valid, do not set the existing device number. If the existing device
number is set, an emergency stop will occur. However, no device number check will be
performed for an axis to which the "near-point dog ignored" signal is input.
---Setting range---
0000 to 02FF (HEX)
【#2074】 H/W_OT+ H/W OT+ Random assignment device

Under the standard specifications, the OT (+) signal is assigned to a fixed device. Set the input
device in this parameter when it is desired to assign the OT (+) signal to a position other than the
fixed device.

performed for an axis to which the "OT ignored" signal is input.
---Setting range---
0000 to 02FF (HEX)
【#2075】 H/W_OT- H/W OT- Random assignment device

Under the standard specifications, the OT (-) signal is assigned to a fixed device. Set the input
device in this parameter when it is desired to assign the OT (-) signal to a position other than the
fixed device.

performed for an axis to which the "OT ignored" signal is input.
---Setting range---
0000 to 02FF (HEX)
【#2076】 index_x Index table indexing axis

Select whether the axis is a normal axis or an index table indexing axis.
0: Normal axis
1: Index table indexing axis
(Note) This parameter is valid only for the NC axis. The parameter is invalid if set for the PLC axis.
【#2077】 G0inps G0 in-position width

Between SV024 and this parameter, the parameter with a larger value will be applied.
When "0" is set, this parameter will be invalid: only SV024 will be available.
---Setting range---
0.000 to 99.999 (mm)
305
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2078】 G1inps G1 in-position width

Between SV024 and this parameter, the parameter with a larger value will be applied.
When "0" is set, this parameter will be invalid: only SV024 will be available.
---Setting range---
0.000 to 99.999 (mm)
【#2079(PR)】 chcomp Chopping compensation coefficient

Set the coefficient to be applied to the compensation amount for the insufficient amount caused by
servo delay during chopping.
---Setting range---
0 to 10 (standard value: 8)
【#2080】 chwid Bottom dead center position width

Set the tolerance between the commanded stroke and actual stroke.
Compensation will be applied during chopping so that the result of [command width - maximum
stroke of top or bottom dead point/ 2] will be within this tolerance.
---Setting range---
0 to 10.000 (mm)
【#2081】 chclsp Maximum chopping speed

Set the clamp speed in chopping operation.
When "0" is set, the clamp speed will be determined by "#2002 clamp".
---Setting range---
0 to 60000 (mm/min)
【#2082】 a_rstax Restart position return order

Set the No. for each axis in order from the 1st automatically returning axis to the restart position.
When "0" is set, the axis will not return.
Note that when "0" is set for all axes, all of the axes will return simultaneously.
---Setting range---
0 to 8
【#2084】 G60_ax Unidirectional positioning operation selection

Select how to operate the unidirectional positioning when the positioning command (G00) is issued.
0: Carry out unidirectional positioning according to the command and modal.
1: Carry out unidirectional positioning regardless of the command and modal.
Set "1" for the axis to carry out the unidirectional positioning at every positioning command,
regardless of whether the unidirectional positioning command and modal are issued.
<Related parameters>
"#8209 G60 SHIFT" and "#2076 index_x"
【#2087】 syncnt Synchronization/super-imposition control setting for each axis

Set the polarity of synchronous axis with respect to basic axis to the bit corresponding to each axis.
0: Polarity with respect to basic axis is positive
1: Polarity with respect to basic axis is negative
---Setting range---
【#2088】 bsax_sy Reference axis for synchronous control

Set the basic axis for synchronous control with the 2nd axis name (axname2).A numerical character
cannot be set as the 1st character.
---Setting range---
Axis name
306
【#2089】 bsax_pl Superimposition control base axis

Set the base axis of superimposition control using the 2nd axis name (axname2).
A numerical character cannot be set as the 1st character.
(Note) This parameter is enabled only when "#1280 ext16/bit7 Control axis superimposition
command method" is set to "1".
---Setting range---
A to Z and 1 to 9 (Two digits)
【#2090】 plrapid Rapid traverse rate for super-imposition control

Set the rapid traverse rate for superimposition control.
(Equivalent to "#2001 rapid Rapid traverse rate".)
---Setting range---
1 to 1000000 (mm/min)
【#2091】 plclamp Cutting feed clamp speed for super-imposition control

Set the cutting feed clamp speed for superimposition control.
(Equivalent to "#2002 clamp Cutting feed clamp speed".)
---Setting range---
1 to 1000000 (mm/min)
【#2092】 plG0tL G0 time constant for superimposition control (linear)

Set the G0 time constant (linear) for superimposition control.
(Equivalent to "#2004 G0tL G0 time constant (linear)".)
---Setting range---
1 to 4000 (ms)
【#2093】 plG0t1 G0 time constant for superimposition control (primary delay)

Set the G0 time constant (primary delay) for superimposition control.
(Equivalent to "#2005 G0t1 G0 time constant (primary delay".)
---Setting range---
1 to 5000 (ms)
【#2094】 plG1tL G1 time constant for superimposition control (linear)

Set the G1 time constant (linear) for superimposition control.
(Equivalent to "#2007 G1tL G1 time constant (linear)".)
---Setting range---
1 to 4000 (ms)
【#2095】 plG1t1 G1 time constant for superimposition control (primary delay)

Set the G1 time constant (primary delay) for superimposition control.
(Equivalent to "#2008 G1t1 G1 time constant (primary delay)".)
---Setting range---
1 to 5000 (ms)
【#2096】 crncsp Minimum corner deceleration speed

Set the minimum clamp speed for corner deceleration in the high-accuracy control mode. Normally
set "0".
(Note) This parameter is invalid during SSS control.
---Setting range---
0 to 1000000 (mm/min)
307
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2097】 tlml2- Sub side tool setter - direction sensor

Set the sensor position (on sub side) in the (-) direction when using the tool setter on the sub spindle
side.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#2098】 tlml2+ Sub side tool setter + direction sensor

Set the sensor position (on sub side) in (+) direction when using the tool setter on the sub spindle
side.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#2102】 skip_tL Skip time constant linear

Set a linear control time constant for variable speed skip acceleration and deceleration, or for an
occasion where a skip command issues acceleration/deceleration time constant enabled (R1).
The time constant will be enabled when LC (cutting feed with linear acceleration and deceleration) or
"F" (soft acceleration/deceleration) is selected in "#2003 smgst Acceleration and deceleration
modes".
When set to "0", the time constant set by "#2008 G1t1" is used.
---Setting range---
0 to 4000 (ms)
【#2103】 skip_t1 Skip time constant primary delay / Second-step time constant for soft
Set a primary-delay time constant for variable speed skip acceleration and deceleration, or for an
occasion where a skip command issues acceleration/deceleration time constant enabled (R1).
The time constant will be enabled when C1 (cutting feed with primary delay) or C3 (exponential
acceleration and linear deceleration) is selected in "#2003 smgst Acceleration and deceleration
modes". When the soft acceleration/deceleration is selected, the second-step time constant will be
used.
When set to "0", the time constant set by "#2008 G1t1" is used.
---Setting range---
0 to 5000 (ms)
【#2106】 Index unit Indexing unit

Set the indexing unit to which the rotary axis can be positioned.
---Setting range---
0 to 360 (°)
【#2109】 Rapid (H-precision) Rapid traverse rate for high-accuracy control mode
Set the rapid traverse rate for each axis in the high-accuracy control mode. "#2001 rapid" will be
used when "0" is set.
---Setting range---
0 to 1000000 (mm/min)
【#2110】 Clamp (H-precision) Cutting feed clamp speed for high-accuracy control mode
Set the cutting feed maximum speed for each axis in the high-accuracy control mode. "#2002 clamp"
will be used when "0" is set.
---Setting range---
0 to 1000000 (mm/min)
308
【#2111】 Blf valid Quadrant protrusion compensation valid

Set whether to enable the quadrant protrusion compensation.
0: Disable
1: Enable
If either of "#2112 Blf motor inertia", "#2115 Blf motor stl trq" or "#2113 Blf visc friction" is set to "0",
quadrant protrusion compensation will not work even if this parameter is set to "1".
【#2112】 Blf motor inertia Motor inertia

Set the motor inertia for quadrant protrusion compensation.
Refer to the servo manual and input the value appropriate for the motor.
---Setting range---
1 to 32000 (10-6kgm2)
【#2113】 Blf visc friction Viscous friction

Set the viscous friction for quadrant protrusion compensation.
After setting the other parameters to the appropriate values, monitor the machine end and gradually
adjust the value.
If this parameter setting is small, a recess will form on the inner side of the circle, and if large, a
protrusion will form on the outer side of the circle. When the value is appropriate, a spike-shaped
quadrant protrusion will form based on normal step-shaped backlash.
---Setting range---
1 to 32767 (1/16 Nm/(rad/s))
【#2114】 Blf fwdg Compensation FF gain

Set the feed forward gain for quadrant protrusion compensation.
After setting the other parameters to the appropriate values, monitor the machine end and gradually
adjust the value.
If this parameter setting is small, a large quadrant protrusion will form, and if large, a recess will form
on the inner side of the circle.
---Setting range---
0 to 1000 (%)
【#2115】 Blf motor stl trq Motor stall torque

Set the motor rated current for quadrant protrusion compensation.
Refer to the servo manual and input the value appropriate for the motor.
---Setting range---
1 to 16000 (1/256 Nm)
【#2118(PR) 】 SscDrSel Speed monitor Door selection

Select which door group of the speed monitoring the spindle belongs to.
0000: Door 1 group.
0001: Door 1 group.
0002: Door 2 group.
0003: Door 1 and 2 group.
The speed monitoring will not be executed when "#2313 SV113 SSF8/BitF" is OFF regardless of this
parameter.
The selected door group must be set when setting the synchronous control.
The spindle/C axis control enables the door selection in "#3071 SscDrSelSp" for the corresponding
spindle.
【#2121】 vbacklash valid Variable backlash valid/continuous or Variable backlash II valid

Select whether the variable backlash is to be disabled/enabled/continuous, or variable backlash II
enabled.
0: Disable
1: Enable
2: Continuous
3: Enable variable backlash II
("#2011 G0back" and "#2012 G1back" will not work unless "0: Disable" is selected. )
309
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2122】 G0vback+ Variable G0 backlash +

Set the compensation amount for the range of each position during rapid traverse.
(+: B1, =: B2, -: B3 on the compensation amount table)
---Setting range---
-99999999 to 99999999 (Interpolation unit)
【#2123】 G0vback= Variable G0 backlash =

---Setting range---
【#2124】 G0vback- Variable G0 backlash -

---Setting range---
【#2125】 G1vback+ Variable G1 backlash +

Set the compensation amount for the range of each position during cutting feed.
(+: A1, =: A2, -: A3 on the compensation amount table)
---Setting range---
-99999999 to 99999999(Interpolation unit)
【#2126】 G1vback= Variable G1 backlash =

---Setting range---
【#2127】 G1vback- Variable G1 backlash -

---Setting range---
【#2128】 G1vback feed1 G1 variable backlash compensation amount changeover speed 1

Set the speed range during cutting feed.
(The speed less than 1 is the low speed, and the speed exceeding 2 is the high speed.)
Note that the speed range is identified in the order of low, high and medium speed. Consider
whether the set value should be larger or smaller than other values.
---Setting range---
0 to 480000 (mm/min)
【#2129】 G1vback feed2 G1 variable backlash compensation amount changeover speed 2

Set the range of the speed during cutting feed.
(The speed less than 1 is the low speed, and the speed exceeding 2 is the high speed.)
Note that the speed range is identified in the order of low, high and medium speed. Consider
whether the set value should be larger or smaller than other values.
---Setting range---
0 to 480000 (mm/min)
310
【#2130】 G1vback dist1 G1 variable backlash compensation amount changeover distance 1

Set the range of the distance during cutting feed.
(The distance less than 1 is the small distance, and the distance exceeding 2 is the large distance.)
Note that the distance range is identified in the order of small, large and medium. Consider whether
the set value should be larger or smaller than other values.
---Setting range---
0 to 999999.999999 (mm)
【#2131】 G1vback dist2 G1 variable backlash compensation amount changeover distance 2

Set the range of the distance during cutting feed.
(The distance less than 1 is the small distance, and the distance exceeding 2 is the large distance.)
Note that the distance range is identified in the order of small, large and medium. Consider whether
the set value should be larger or smaller than other values.
---Setting range---
0 to 999999.999999 (mm)
【#2132】 vback pos1 Variable backlash compensation amount changeover end point
position 1
Set the range of the center of the end point position.
(The range less than position 1 is the - range, and the range exceeding position 2 is the + range.)
The end point position range is determined in the order of -, + , and center. Consider whether the set
value should be larger or smaller than other values.
(Note 1) If continuous variable backlash is set with "#2121 vbacklash valid", position 1 will be set as
the position - point and position 2 will be set as the position + point.
(Note 2) When the size relation of the compensation amount changeover speed and distance 1 and
2 is not appropriate while the variable backlash compensation is valid, the followings will be
applied:If the backlash speed and distance are smaller than the compensation amount
changeover speed and distance 1, both the speed and distance will be small; if larger than the
compensation amount changeover speed and distance 2, both the speed and distance will be
large.
---Setting range---
-999999.999999 to 999999.999999 (mm)
【#2133】 vback pos2 Variable backlash compensation amount changeover end point
position 2
Set the range of the center of the end point position.
(The range less than position 1 is the - range, and the range exceeding position 2 is the + range.)
The end point position range is determined in the order of -, + , and center. Consider whether the set
value should be larger or smaller than other values.
(Note 1) If continuous variable backlash is set with "#2121 vbacklash valid", position 1 will be set as
the position - point and position 2 will be set as the position + point.
(Note 2) When the size relation of the compensation amount changeover speed and distance 1 and
2 is not appropriate while the variable backlash compensation is valid, the followings will be
applied:If the backlash speed and distance are smaller than the compensation amount
changeover speed and distance 1, both the speed and distance will be small; if larger than the
large.
---Setting range---
-999999.999999 to 999999.999999 (mm)
【#2134】 vback arc K Variable backlash arc compensation coefficient

Set the arc compensation coefficient.
---Setting range---
0 to 300 (%)
311
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2135】 vback feed refpt Variable backlash reference position selection (speed)
Select the speed range to be used as the reference position.
0: Low speed
1: Medium speed
2: High speed
【#2136】 vback pos refpt Variable backlash reference position selection (end point position)
Select the end point range to be used as the reference position.
0: Position + range
1: Position center range
2: Position - range
【#2137】 vback dir refpt Variable backlash reference position selection (entry direction)
Select the entry direction to be used as the reference position.
0: Entry direction +
1: Entry direction -
【#2138】 vback pos center Continuous variable backlash position center point
Set the position center point. (This is used only when continuous variable backlash is set with "#2121
vbacklash valid".) Set a value between "#2132 vback pos1" and "#2133 vbackpos2" for the position
center point.
(Note ) When the size relation of the compensation amount changeover speed and distance 1 and 2
is not appropriate while the variable backlash compensation is valid, the followings will be
applied:
If the backlash speed and distance are smaller than the compensation amount changeover
speed and distance 1, both the speed and distance will be small; if larger than the
large.
---Setting range---
-999999.999999 to 999999.999999 (mm)
【#2139】 omrff_off OMR-FF invalid

Select whether to enable or temporarily disable the OMR-FF control when OMR-FF is valid.
0: Enable
1: Temporarily disable
When "1" is selected while OMR-FF is valid, OMR-FF can be temporarily disabled and conventional
feed forward control can be applied instead.
【#2140(PR)】 Ssc Svof Filter Speed monitor Error detection time during servo OFF
Set the error detection time of command speed monitoring and feedback speed monitoring during
servo OFF.
An alarm will occur if the time, for which the speed has been exceeding the safe speed or safe
rotation speed, exceeds the error detection time set in this parameter.
If "0" is set, it will be handled as 200 (ms).
---Setting range---
0 to 9999 (ms)
312
【#2141】 chtL Chopping first-step time constant for soft acceleration and deceleration
Set the first-step time constant for the chopping axis when soft acceleration/deceleration is applied.
Note that, however, there may be cases where actual time constant is shorter than the set time
constant, because the time constant is automatically calculated according to the feedrate so that the
acceleration rate during acceleration/deceleration (clamp speed/chopping time constant) will be
constant.
When "0" is set, "#2007 G1tL" will be valid.
Speed[mm/min]
chclsp
Time[ms]
cht1
chtL
---Setting range---
0 to 4000 (ms)
【#2142】 cht1 Chopping second-step time constant for soft acceleration and deceleration
Set the second-step time constant for the chopping axis when soft acceleration/deceleration is
applied.
Note that, however, there may be cases where actual time constant is shorter than the set time
constant, because the time constant is automatically calculated so that the ratio between first-step
and second-step time constant will be constant.
When "0" is set, "#2008 G1t1" will be valid.
---Setting range---
0 to 4000 (ms)
【#2143】 polar Control axis relative polarity

Set "0" for the basic axis, and set the polarity of the superimposing axis relative to the basic axis.
0: Relative to basic axis, polarity is positive
1: Relative to basic axis, polarity is negative
Z2(superimposing axis)
polar=1
＋
X2
X1
＋
Z1(Basic axis )
polar=0
313
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2144】 baseps Base machine coordinate zero point relative distance

Set each axis's position of the base machine coordinate zero point when an arbitrary point M on the
machine is regarded as a base point.
Unify the directions of all part systems' machine zero point positions with the direction of the machine
coordinate system of the 1st part system.
If the 1st part system doesn't have a parallel axis, determine the direction arbitrarily.
Example: System1(X1, Z1), System2(X2, Z2)
System2
base machine
X2 coordinate
baseps zero point
System1
base machine
coordinate
X1 zero point
baseps
M Z1 baseps
Z2 baseps
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#2146】 Blf_L1 Reference distance for position-dependent increasing-type backlash

compensation 1
Set the distance for specifying the compensation change rate in position-dependent increasing-type
backlash compensation.
Blf_E1
Blf_E2
Blf_L2 Blf_L1
When "#2148 Blf_E1" is set to "0", the position-dependent increasing-type backlash compensation
function will be disabled.
---Setting range---
0.000 to 99999.999 (mm)
314
【#2147】 Blf_L2 Reference distance for position-dependent increasing-type backlash

compensation 2
Set the distance for specifying the compensation change rate in position-dependent increasing-type
backlash compensation.
Blf_E1
Blf_E2
Blf_L2 Blf_L1
---Setting range---
0.000 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#2148】 Blf_E1 Reference amount of position-dependent increasing-type backlash

compensation 1
Set the compensation amount for specifying the compensation change rate in position-dependent
increasing-type backlash compensation.
Blf_E1
Blf_E2
Blf_L2 Blf_L1
---Setting range---
0 to 9999999 (Machine error compensation unit)
【#2149】 Blf_E2 Reference amount of position-dependent increasing-type backlash

compensation 2
Set the compensation amount for specifying the compensation change rate in position-dependent
increasing-type backlash compensation.
Blf_E1
Blf_E2
Blf_L2 Blf_L1
---Setting range---
0 to 9999999 (Machine error compensation unit)
315
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2150】 Rot_len Farthest distance from rotary axis center

Set the farthest distance of the rotating part from the rotation center for executing the 3D machine
interference check.
When "0" is set, this distance will conform to the rotary axis' specification speed.
---Setting range---
0.000 to 99999.999(mm)
【#2151】 rated_spd Rated speed

Set the maximum speed which can be driven with the motor's maximum torque.
(Note 1) This parameter's setting value must be smaller than "#2001 rapid Rapid traverse". If bigger,
constant inclination acceleration/deceleration will be applied.
(Note 2) If rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step acceleration/deceleration is valid, and also if
this parameter is set to "0", constant inclination acceleration/deceleration will be applied.
Torque Speed
rapid
rated_spd
Speed G0t_rated Time

rated_spd rapid
---Setting range---
0 to 1000000(mm/min)
【#2152】 acc_rate Acceleration rate in proportion to the maximum acceleration rate

Set the rate in proportion to the maximum acceleration rate in rapid traverse.
(Note) If this parameter is set to "0" or "100", constant inclination acceleration/deceleration will be
applied.
Acceleration
amax
acc_rate = amin 100
amax
amin
Speed
rated_spd rapid
---Setting range---
0 to 100(%)
【#2153】 G0t_rated G0 time constant up to rated speed (multi-step acceleration/deceleration)

Set the acceleration rate up to the rated speed of rapid traverse constant inclination multi-step
(Note) If this parameter is set to "0", constant inclination acceleration/deceleration will be applied.
---Setting range---
0 to 4000(ms)
(G0t_rapid) G0 time constant up to rapid traverse speed (multi-step acc./dec.)

Set the acceleration time until the rapid traverse speed of rapid traverse constant inclination multi-
step acceleration/deceleration is applied.
(Note) Set the acceleration time when a pertinent axis is operated independently.
316
【#2155】 hob_fwd_g Feed forward gain for hobbing machining

Set the feed forward gain when controlling as workpiece axis of tool spindle synchronization II
(hobbing).
---Setting range---
0 to 200 (%)
【#2169】 Man meas rtrn dir Return direction in manual measurement

Select the direction of return operation in manual measurement.
0: Opposite to the contact direction
1: Fixed to the + direction
2: Fixed to the - direction
【#2170】 Lmc1QR Lost motion compensation gain 1 for high-speed retract

Set the lost motion compensation gain in drilling cycle at high-speed retract (CW: - to + direction,
CCW: + to - direction).
Set "-1" when drilling cycle at high-speed retract is not performed.
When set to 0, the performance will follow the setting of "#2171 Lmc2QR (Lost motion compensation
gain 2 for high-speed retract)".
---Setting range---
-1, 0 to 200(%)
【#2171】 Lmc2QR Lost motion compensation gain 2 for high-speed retract

Set the lost motion compensation gain in drilling cycle at high-speed retract (CW: - to + direction,
CCW: + to - direction).
Set "-1" when drilling cycle at high-speed retract is not performed.
When set to "0", the performance will follow the setting of "#2170 Lmc1QR (Lost motion
compensation gain 1 for high-speed retract)".
---Setting range---
-1, 0 to 200(%)
【#2172】 LmcdQR Lost motion compensation timing for high-speed retract

Set the timing of the lost motion compensation in drilling cycle at high-speed retract.
When set to "0", the performance will follow the setting of "#2239 SV039 LMCD (Lost motion
compensation timing)".
---Setting range---
0 to 2000 (ms)
【#2173】 LmckQR Lost motion compensation 3 spring constant for high-speed retract
Set the machine system's spring constant when using lost motion compensation type 3 in drilling
cycle with high-speed retract.
When set to "0", the performance will follow the setting of "#2285 SV085 LMCk (Lost motion
compensation 3 spring constant)".
---Setting range---
0 to 32767(0.01%/μm)
【#2174】 LmccQR Lost motion compensation 3 viscous coefficient for high-speed retract
Set the machine system's viscous coefficient when using lost motion compensation type 3 in drilling
cycle at high-speed retract.
When set to "0", the performance will follow the setting of "#2286 SV086 LMCc (Lost motion
compensation 3 viscous coefficient)".
---Setting range---
0 to 32767(0.01%/μm)
【#2175】 Special Ax Radius Special diametral axis radius

Set the radius of the special diametral axis.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
317
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2176】 Special Ax Clamp Special diametral axis clamp speed

Set a clamp speed for the special diametral axis control.
---Setting range---
0 to 1000000 (°/min)
(Note)For "#2001 rapid" and "#2002 clamp", set speeds on a machining line.
When the value in "#2176 Special Ax Clamp" is smaller than that in "#2001 rapid", "Special Ax
Clamp" value will be applied to the clamp speed.
【#2177】 ManualFeedBtL Time constant for manual feed rate B

Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant for manual feed rate B.
(Note)When set to "0", this parameter will not be used: conventional acceleration/deceleration will be
performed.
---Setting range---
0 to 40000 (ms)
【#2180(PR)】 S_DIN Speed observation input door No.

Set the door signal input in the drive unit.
Use this parameter only when the axis with a door signal belongs to several door groups.
The correspondence between the door signals and bits are as follows.
bit0 : Door1 signal
bit1 : Door2 signal
If the axis does not receive any door signal, set to "0".
An error (Y20 0027) will occur in the following cases.
- Several bits are enabled.
- Any bit other than those set in "#2118 S_DSl" is enabled.
---Setting range---
0000 to 0002 (HEX)
【#2190(PR)】 OT_Rreg Designate R register for stored stroke limit I

Set the head R register No. to be used for setting/checking stored stroke limit I.
Eight consecutive R registers from the R register No. set here will be the area for stored stroke limit I.
Changing the areas for stored stroke limit I will be disabled if an R register that is not in the user area
is set.
In addition, make sure to set an even number for the head R register No. Changing the areas for
stored stroke limit I will be disabled if an odd number is set.
---Setting range---
0 to 29892
318
【#2195】 hob_tL Hobbing workpiece axis time constant

Set the constant inclination acceleration/deceleration time constant of the hobbing workpiece axis
when issuing a hobbing command while the hobbing spindle is rotating. Hobbing workpiece axis time
constant is the constant inclination acceleration/deceleration time constant with respect to #2002
Cutting feed rate for clamp function. If the setting value of hobbing workpiece axis time constant is
out of setting range, set the maximum value in the setting range.
---Setting range---
1 to 4000 (ms)
Rotation speed
#2002 clamp
Hob axis’ command speed
Hob axis
Wk axis’ command speed
Wk axis
hob_tL hob_tL
【#2198】 G0tMin Minimum time constant for rapid traverse constant inclination acc./dec.
Acceleration/Deceleration is carried out so that the
acceleration/deceleration time will not become longer than this parameter's setting when the
acceleration/deceleration type of rapid traverse command is constant inclination.
Set a value smaller than "#2004 G0tL".
This parameter is enabled when "#1200 G0_acc" is constant inclination type.
This parameter is enabled only during fixed cycle if "#1253 set25 bit2" (Acceleration/Deceleration
mode change in hole drilling cycle) is enabled even if "#1200 G0_acc" is constant inclination type.
This parameter is disabled if 0 or a value larger than "#2004 G0tL" is set.
---Setting range---
0 to 40000 (ms)
【#2199】 G1tMin Minimum time constant for cutting feed constant inclination acc./dec.
Acceleration/Deceleration is carried out so that the acceleration/deceleration time will not become
longer than this parameter's setting when the acceleration/deceleration type of linear interpolation
command is constant inclination.
Set a value smaller than "#2007 G1tL".
This parameter is enabled when "#1201 G1_acc" is constant inclination type.
This parameter is enabled only during fixed cycle if "#1253 set25 bit2" (Acceleration/Deceleration
mode change in hole drilling cycle) is enabled even if "#1200 G0_acc" is constant inclination type.
This parameter is disabled if 0 or a value larger than "#2007 G1tL" is set.
---Setting range---
0 to 40000 (ms)
【#2561】 VBL2 VG1 Variable backlash comp II Changeover speed 1

Set the changeover speed at speed normalization.
Set a value smaller than that in "#2562 VBL2 VG0".
Normally, the "#2561 VBL2 VG1" value corresponds to the cutting feedrate, the "#2562 VBL2 VG0"
value to the rapid traverse rate.
---Setting range---
1 to 1000000 (mm/min)
319
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2562】 VBL2 VG0 Variable backlash comp II Changeover speed 2

Set the changeover speed at speed normalization.
Set a value greater than that in "#2561 VBL2 VG1".
Normally, the "#2561 VBL2 VG1" value corresponds to the cutting feedrate, the "#2562 VBL2 VG0"
value to the rapid traverse rate.
---Setting range---
1 to 1000000 (mm/min)
【#2563】 VBL2 P1 Variable backlash comp II Stroke position 1

Set the most plus (+) side stroke position among the three.
Set the parameters VBL2 P1 to P3 to be "VBL2 P1 > VBL2 P2 > VBL2 P3".
Normally, divide the axis's stroke by four, and set a dividing position (except for the both ends) to be
a stroke position.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

Set the middle stroke position among the three.
a stroke position.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

Set the most minus (-) side stroke position among the three.
a stroke position.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#2566】 VBL2 BL11 Variable backlash comp II Comp data at changeover spd 1 and stroke
pos 1
Set the compensation data (backlash amount) at changeover speed 1 and stroke position 1.
Calculate the current compensation data according to the current speed and position.
---Setting range---
-99999999 to 99999999 (Machine error compensation unit)
pos 2
---Setting range---
pos 3
---Setting range---
320
pos 1
---Setting range---
pos 2
---Setting range---
pos 3
---Setting range---
【#2572】 VBL2 FloatTC Variable backlash comp II Time constant in calculating float amt
Set the time constant in calculating the float amount. Set a value greater than the calculation cycle.
---Setting range---
0 to 10000 (ms)
【#2573】 VBL2 LMMul Variable backlash comp II Multiplier in calculating lost motion amt
Set the multiplier in calculating the lost motion compensation amount, before multiplied by 10-3.
When "1000" is set, the multiplier is "1".
---Setting range---
0 to 1000
【#2574】 VBL2 VBound Variable backlash comp II Speed boundary value

Set the speed boundary value in calculating the lost motion compensation amount.
---Setting range---
1 to 1000000 (mm/min)
【#2575】 VBL2 CompMag Variable backlash comp II Compensation magnification

Set the compensation magnification in calculating the lost motion compensation amount. When "0" is
set, the magnification is 100%.
---Setting range---
0 to 300 (%)
【#2576】 VBL2 CompMul Variable backlash comp II Multiplier in calculating compensation

amount
Set the multiplier in applying the lost motion compensation magnification, before multiplied by 10-3.
When "1000" is set, the multiplier is "1".
---Setting range---
0 to 1000
321
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2577】 VBL2 BLE Variable backlash comp II Gradually increase amount

Set the value to subtract from the lost motion compensation amount at reversing the axis travel
direction.
---Setting range---
【#2578】 VBL2 BLL Variable backlash comp II Gradually increase travel distance
Set the travel distance to return to the lost motion compensation amount from the reverse point of
the axis travel direction.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#2579】 BLAT_feed
Not used. set "0".
【#2581】 BLAT_pos
Not used. set "0".
【#2582】 BLAT_syn
Not used. set "0".
【#2598】 G0tL_2 G0 time constant 2 (linear)

Set a linear control time constant for rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration to be applied when the
G0 time constant switchover request signal is ON.
This time constant is enabled when LR (rapid traverse feed with linear acceleration/deceleration) or
F (soft acceleration/deceleration) is selected in "#2003 smgst (Acceleration and deceleration
modes)".
If #2598 is 0, the time constant set in "#2004 G0tL (G0 time constant)" will be used.
---Setting range---
0 to 4000(ms)
【#2599】 G0t1_2 G0 time constant 2 (primary delay)/2nd-step time constant for soft acc/dec
Set a primary-delay time constant for rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration to be applied when the
G0 time constant switchover request signal is ON.
This time constant is enabled when R1 (rapid traverse feed with primary delay) or R3 (exponential
acceleration and linear deceleration) is selected in "#2003 smgst (Acceleration and deceleration
modes)".
If soft acceleration/deceleration is selected, the second-step time constant will be used.
If #2599 is set to 0, the time constant set in "#2005 G0t1 (G0 time constant (primary delay)/2nd-step
time constant for soft acc/dec)" will be used.
---Setting range---
0 to 5000(ms)
322
Appendix 1.4 Servo Parameters

【#2201(PR)】 SV001 PC1 Motor side gear ratio

Set the gear ratio in the motor side when there is the gear between the servo motor's shaft and
machine (ball screw, etc.).
For the rotary axis, set the total deceleration (acceleration) ratio.
Even if the gear ratio is within the setting range, the electronic gears may overflow and an initial
parameter error (servo alarm 37) may occur.
For linear servo system

Set to "1".
---Setting range---
1 to 32767
【#2202(PR)】 SV002 PC2 Machine side gear ratio

Set the gear ratio in the machine side when there is the gear between the servo motor's shaft and
machine (ball screw, etc.).
For the rotary axis, set the total deceleration (acceleration) ratio.
Even if the gear ratio is within the setting range, the electronic gears may overflow and an initial
parameter error (servo alarm 37) may occur.
For linear servo system

Set to "1".
---Setting range---
1 to 32767
【#2203】 SV003 PGN1 Position loop gain 1

Set the position loop gain. The standard setting is "33".
The higher the setting value is, the more accurately the command can be followed, and the shorter
the settling time in positioning gets, however, note that a bigger shock will be applied to the machine
during acceleration/deceleration.
When using the SHG control, also set SV004 (PGN2) and SV057 (SHGC).
When using the OMR-FF control, set the servo rigidity against quadrant projection or cutting load,
etc. For the tracking ability to the command, set by SV106(PGM).
---Setting range---
1 to 200 (rad/s)
【#2204】 SV004 PGN2 Position loop gain 2

When performing the SHG control, set the value of "SV003 x 8/3" to "SV004".
When not using the SHG control, set to "0".
When using the OMR-FF control, set to "0".
Related parameters: SV003, SV057
---Setting range---
0 to 999 (rad/s)
323
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2205】 SV005 VGN1 Speed loop gain 1

Set the speed loop gain.
The higher the setting value is, the more accurate the control will be, however, vibration tends to
occur.
If vibration occurs, adjust by lowering by 20 to 30%.
The value should be determined to the 70 to 80% of the value at which the vibration stops.
The value differs depending on servo motors.
Aim at the standard value determined by the servo motor type and load inertia ratio to adjust.
---Setting range---
1 to 30000
【#2206】 SV006 VGN2 Speed loop gain 2

Set the speed loop gain at the motor limitation speed VLMT (maximum rotation speed x 1.15) with
"VCS(SV029: Speed at the change of speed loop gain)".
Use this to suppress noise at high speed rotation during rapid traverse, etc. Then, the speed loop
gain decreases at faster speed than the setting value of VCS. When not using, set to "0".
Gain
VGN1
VGN2
Speed
VCS VLMT
(Overspeed detection speed)
---Setting range---
-1000 to 30000
【#2207】 SV007 VIL Speed loop delay compensation

Set this when the limit cycle occurs in the full-closed loop, or overshooting occurs in positioning. The
speed loop delay compensation method can be selected with SV027/bit1,0.
Normally, use "Changeover type 2". Changeover type 2 controls the occurrence of overshooting by
lowering the speed loop lead compensation after the position droop gets 0.
When setting this parameter, make sure to set the torque offset (SV032).
---Setting range---
0 to 32767
【#2208】 SV008 VIA Speed loop lead compensation

Set the gain of the speed loop integral control.
Standard setting: 1364
Standard setting in the SHG control: 1900
Adjust the value by increasing/decreasing this by about 100 at a time.
Raise this value to improve contour tracking accuracy in high-speed cutting.
Lower this value when the position droop does not stabilize (when the vibration of 10 to 20Hz
occurs).
---Setting range---
1 to 9999
【#2209】 SV009 IQA Current loop q axis lead compensation

Set the fixed value of each motor.
Set the standard value for each motor described in the standard parameter list.
---Setting range---
1 to 20480
324
【#2210】 SV010 IDA Current loop d axis lead compensation

---Setting range---
1 to 20480
【#2211】 SV011 IQG Current loop q axis gain

---Setting range---
1 to 8192
【#2212】 SV012 IDG Current loop d axis gain

---Setting range---
1 to 8192
【#2213】 SV013 ILMT Current limit value

Set the current (torque) limit value in a normal operation.
This is a limit value in forward run and reverse run (for linear motors:forward and reverse direction).
When the standard setting value is "800", the maximum torque is determined by the specification of
the motor.
Set this parameter as a proportion (%) to the stall current.
---Setting range---
0 - 999 (Stall current %)
【#2214】 SV014 ILMTsp Current limit value in special control

Set the current (torque) limit value in a special operation (absolute position initial setting, stopper
control and etc.).
This is a limit value in forward and reverse directions.
Set to "800" when not using.
Set this parameter as a proportion (%) to the stall current.
---Setting range---
0 - 999 (Stall current %)
However, when SV084/bitB=1, the setting range is from 0 to 32767 (Stall current 0.01%).
【#2215】 SV015 FFC Acceleration rate feed forward gain

When a relative error in synchronous control is too large, set this parameter to the axis that is
delaying.
The standard setting is "0". The standard setting in the SHG control is "50".
To adjust a relative error in acceleration/deceleration, increase the value by 50 at a time.
---Setting range---
0 to 999 (%)
325
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2216】 SV016 LMC1 Lost motion compensation 1

Set this parameter when the protrusion (that occurs due to the non-sensitive band by friction, torsion,
backlash, etc.) at quadrant change is too large. This sets the compensation torque at quadrant
change (when an axis feed direction is reversed) by the proportion (%) to the stall torque. Whether to
enable the lost motion compensation and the method can be set with other parameters.
Type 2: When SV027/bit9, 8=10 (Compatible with obsolete type)

Set the type 2 method compensation torque. The standard setting is double the friction torque.
Related parameters: SV027/bit9,8, SV033/bitF, SV039, SV040, SV041, SV082/bit2
Type 3: When SV082/bit1=1

Set the compensation torque equivalent of dynamic friction amount of the type 3 method
compensation amount. The standard setting is double the dynamic friction torque.
Related parameters: SV041, SV082/bit2,1, SV085, SV086
To vary compensation amount according to the direction.

When SV041 (LMC2) is "0", compensate with the value of SV016 (LMC1) in both +/-directions.
If you wish to change the compensation amount depending on the command direction, set this
and SV041 (LMC2).
(SV016: + direction, SV041: - direction. However, the directions may be opposite depending on
other settings.)
When "-1" is set, the compensation will not be performed in the direction of the command.
---Setting range---
-1 to 200 (Stall current %)
Note that when SV082/bit2 is "1", the setting range is between -1 and 20000 (Stall current 0.01%).
326
【#2217(PR)】 SV017 SPEC1 Servo specification 1

Select the servo specifications.
A function is allocated to each bit.
Set this in hexadecimal format.
mdir
dfbx
vfb
sdir
abs
mp
drvup
spm
bit F-C : spm Motor series selection

0: Not used
1: 200V HF, HP motor (Standard)
2: Not used
3: 400V HF-H, HP-H motor (Standard)
6: 200V LM-F linear motor
7: 200V direct-drive motor
8: 400V LM-F linear motor
9: 400V direct-drive motor
bit B :
bit A : drvup Combined drive unit:
- For MDS-DM2/D2-V3 Series
0: Normal setting (Combined drive unit: normal)
1: Combined drive unit: one upgrade
bit 9 :
bit 8 : mp MPI scale pole number setting
0: 360 poles 1: 720 poles
bit 7 : abs Position control
These parameters are set automatically by the NC system.
0: Incremental 1: Absolute position control
bit 6-5 :
bit 4 : sdir Sub side detector feedback
Set the machine side detector's installation polarity.
0: Forward polarity 1: Reverse polarity
bit 3 : vfb Speed feedback filter
0: Stop 1: Start (2250Hz)
bit 2 : seqh Ready on sequence
0: Normal 1: High-speed
bit 1 : dfbx Dual feedback control
Control the position FB signal in full closed control by the combination of a motor side detector and
machine side detector.
0: Stop 1: Start

bit 0 : mdir Machine side detector feedback (for Linear/direct-drive motor)
Set the detector installation polarity in the linear servo and direct-drive motor control.
327
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2218(PR)】 SV018 PIT Ball screw pitch/Magnetic pole pitch

For servo motor:
Set the ball screw pitch. For the rotary axis, set to "360".
For direct-drive motor

Set to "360".
For linear motor

Set the ball screw pitch. (For LM-F series, set to "48")
---Setting range---
For general motor: 1 to 32767 (mm/rev)
- For linear motor 1 to 32767 (mm)
【#2219(PR)】 SV019 RNG1 Sub side detector resolution

For semi-closed loop control
Set the same value as SV020.
For full-closed loop control

Set the number of pulses per ball screw pitch.

Set the same value as SV020.
For 1000 pulse unit resolution detector, set the number of pulses in SV019 in increments of 1000
pulse (kp).
In this case, make sure to set "0" to SV117.
For high-accuracy binary resolution detector, set the number of pulses to four bite data of SV117
(high-order) and SV019 (low-order) in pulse (p) unit.
SV117 = number of pulses / 65536 (when =0, set "-1" to SV117)
SV019 = the remainder of number of "pulses / 65536"
When the NC is C70 and "SV019 > 32767", set "the reminder of above - 65536 (negative number)"
to "SV019".
---Setting range---
When SV117 = 0, the setting range is from 0 to 32767 (kp)
When SV117 ≠ 0
For M700V, M70V, M70, E70: 0 to 65535 (p)
For C70: -32768 to 32767 (p)
【#2220(PR)】 SV020 RNG2 Main side detector resolution

Set the number of pulses per revolution of the motor side detector.
OSA18 (-A48) (260,000 p/rev) ----------- SV020 = 260
OSA105 (-A51) (1,000,000 p/rev) ------- SV020 = 1000
OSA166 (-A74N) (16,000,000 p/rev) ----- SV020 = 16000
For linear motor

Set the number of pulses of the detector per magnetic pole pitch with SV118.

For 1000 pulse unit resolution detector, set the number of pulses to SV020 in increments of 1000
pulse(kp).
In this case, make sure to set SV118 to "0". For high-accuracy binary resolution detector, set the
number of pulses to four bite data of SV118 (high-order) and SV020 (low-order) in pulse(p) unit.
SV118 = number of pulses / 65536 (when =0, set "-1" to SV118)
SV019 = the remainder of "number of pulses / 65536"
When the NC is C70 and "SV020 > 32767", set "the reminder of above - 65536 (negative number)"
to "SV020".
---Setting range---
When SV118 = 0, the setting range is from 0 to 32767 (kp)
When SV118 ≠ 0
For M700V, M70V, M70, E70: 0 to 65535 (p)
For C70: -32768 to 32767 (p)
328
【#2221】 SV021 OLT Overload detection time constant

Normally, set to "60". (For machine tool builder adjustment.)
Related parameters: SV022
---Setting range---
1 to 999 (s)
【#2222】 SV022 OLL Overload detection level

Set the "Overload 1" (Alarm 50) current detection level as percentage to the stall current.
Normally set this parameter to "150". (For machine tool builder adjustment.)
---Setting range---
110 to 500 (Stall current %)
【#2223】 SV023 OD1 Excessive error detection width during servo ON

Set the excessive error detection width in servo ON.
When set to "0", the excessive error alarm detection will be ignored, so do not set to "0".
<Standard setting value>
OD1=OD2= (Rapid traverse rate [mm/min]) / (60×PGN1) / 2 [mm]
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (mm)
However, when SV084/bitC=1, the setting range is from 0 to 32767 (μm).
【#2224】 SV024 INP In-position detection width

Set the positioning accuracy required for the machine.
The lower the setting is, the higher the positioning accuracy will be. However the cycle time (settling
time) becomes longer.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (μm)
329
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2225(PR)】 SV025 MTYP Motor/Detector type

Set the position detector type, speed detector type and motor type.
The setting value is a four-digit hex (HEX).
HEX- 4 3 2 1
mtyp
ent
pen
bit F-C : pen(HEX-4) Position detector

Semi-closed loop control by general motor
pen=2
Full-closed loop control by general motor

- Ball screw end detector (OSA105ET2A, OSA166ET2NA)
pen=6
- For serial signal output rotary scale (including MDS-B-HR)
pen=6
- For rectangular wave signal output scale
pen=8
- For serial signal output linear scale (including MDS-B-HR and MPI scale)
pen=A
- For speed command synchronization control
Primary axis pen=A
Secondary axis pen=D
For linear motor

pen=A

pen=2
bit B-8 : ent(HEX-3) Speed detector
For general motor: ent=2
For linear motor: ent=A
For direct-drive motor: ent=2
330
bit 7-0 : mtyp(HEX-2,1) Motor type

Set the motor type. Set this with SV017/bitF-C.
For SV017/bitF-C = 1 (200V standard motor series)

HF75 : 01h HP54 : 11h HF-KP13 : E9h (Note 3)
HF105 : 02h HP104 : 12h HF-KP23 : EAh
HF54 : 03h HP154 : 13h HF-KP43 : EBh
HF104 : 04h HP224 : 1Bh HF-KP73 : ECh
HF154 : 05h, 0Fh (Note 1) HP204 : 14h
HF224 : 06h HP354 : 15h
HF204 : 07h HP454 : 16h
HF354 : 08h HP704 : 17h
HF123 : 24h HP903 : 18h
HF223 : 26h, 2Dh (Note 2) HP1103 : 19h
HF303 : 28h
HF453 : 09h
HF703 : 0Ah
HF903 : 0Bh
HF142 : 25h
HF302 : 27h, 2Eh (Note 2)
(Note 1) When MDS-D2-V3 is connected

(Note 2) When MDS-D2-V3 M/S axis is connected
(Note 3) MDS-DJ-V1/V2 only
For SV017/bitF-C = 3 (400V standard motor series)

HF-H75 : 01h, HP-H54 : 11h
HF-H105 : 02h, HP-H104 : 12h
HF-H54 : 03h, HP-H154 : 13h
HF-H104 : 04h, HP-H204 : 14h
HF-H154 : 05h, HP-H354 : 15h
HP-H454 : 16h
HF-H204 : 07h, HP-H704 : 17h
HF-H354 : 08h, HP-H903 : 18h
HF-H453 : 09h, HP-H1103: 19h
HF-H703 : 0Ah
HF-H903 : 0Bh, HP-H224 : 1Bh
HC-H1502: B9h
For linear motor and direct-drive motor, follow the settings stated in respective materials.
【#2226】 SV026 OD2 Excessive error detection width during servo OFF
Set the excessive error detection width during servo OFF.
When set to "0", the excessive error alarm detection will be ignored, so do not set to "0".
<Standard setting value>
OD1=OD2= (Rapid traverse rate [mm/min]) / (60×PGN1) / 2 [mm]
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (mm)
331
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2227】 SV027 SSF1 Servo function 1

Select the servo functions.
A function is assigned to each bit.
bit F :
bit E : zrn2
Set to "1". (Fixed)
bit D :
bit C :
bit B-A : ovs Overshooting compensation
Set this if overshooting occurs during positioning.
bitB,A=
00: Compensation stop
01: Setting prohibited
11: Type 3
Set the compensation amount in SV031(OVS1) and SV042(OVS2).
Related parameters: SV031, SV042, SV034/bitF-C

bit 9-8 : lmc Lost motion compensation type
Set this parameter when the protrusion at quadrant change is too large.
Type 2 has an obsolete type compatible control.
bit9,8=
10: Type 2
Set the compensation amount in SV016(LMC1) and SV041(LMC2).
(Note) When "SV082/bit1=1", the lost motion compensation type 3 will be selected regardless of this
setting.
bit 7 :
bit 6 :
bit 5-4 : vfct Jitter compensation pulse number
Suppress vibration by machine backlash when axis stops.
bit5,4=
00: Disable
01: 1 pulse
10: 2 pulse
11: 3 pulses
bit 3 :
bit 2 :
332
bit 1-0 : vcnt Speed loop delay compensation changeover type selection
Normally, use "Changeover type 2".
bit1,0=
00: Disable
01: Changeover type 1
10: Changeover type 2
【#2228(PR)】 SV028 MSFT Magnetic pole shift amount (for linear/direct-drive motor)
Set this parameter to adjust the motor magnetic pole position and detector's installation phase when
using linear motors or direct-drive motors.
During the DC excitation of the initial setup (SV034/bit4=1), set the same value displayed in "AFLT
gain" on the NC monitor screen.
Related parameters: SV034/bit4, SV061, SV062, SV063
For general motor:

---Setting range---
-18000 to 18000 (Mechanical angle 0.01°)
【#2229】 SV029 VCS Speed at the change of speed loop gain

Noise at high speed rotation including rapid traverse can be reduced by lowering the speed loop gain
at high speeds.
Set the speed at which the speed loop gain changes. Use this with SV006 (VGN2).
When not using, set to "0".
---Setting range---
0 to 9999 (r/min)
【#2230】 SV030 IVC Voltage non-sensitive band compensation

When 100% is set, the voltage reduction amount equivalent to the logical non-energization in the
PWM control will be compensated.
When "0" is set, 100% compensation will be performed.
Adjust in increments of 10% from the default value of 100%.
If increased too much, vibration or vibration noise may be generated.
---Setting range---
0 to 255 (%)
【#2231】 SV031 OVS1 Overshooting compensation 1

This compensates the motor torque when overshooting occurs during positioning. This is valid only
when the overshooting compensation (SV027/bitB,A) is selected.
Type 3 SV027/bitB,A=11
Set the compensation amount based on the motor stall current. Observing positioning droop
waveform, increase in increments of 1% and find the value where overshooting does not occur.
To vary compensation amount depending on the direction.

When SV042 (OVS2) is "0", change the SV031 (OVS1) value in both of the +/- directions to
compensate.
To vary the compensation amount depending on the command direction, set this and SV042
(OVS2).
(SV031: + direction, SV042: - direction. However, the directions may be opposite depending on
other settings.)
When "-1" is set, the compensation will not be performed in the direction of the command.
Related parameters: SV027/bitB,A, SV034/bitF-C, SV042, SV082/bit2
---Setting range---
Note that the range will be "-1 - 10000" (Stall current 0.01%) when SV082/bit2 is "1".
333
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2232】 SV032 TOF Torque offset

Set the unbalance torque on vertical axis and inclined axis.
When the vertical axis pull up function is enabled, the pull up compensation direction is determined
by this parameter's sign. When set to "0", the vertical axis pull up will not be executed.
This can be used for speed loop delay compensation and collision detection function.
To use load inertia estimation function (drive monitor display), set this parameter, friction torque
(SV045) and load inertia display enabling flag(SV035/bitF).
Related parameters: SV007, SV033/bitE, SV059
---Setting range---
334

nfd1
fhz3
nfd2
rps
zup
lmc2a
bit F : lmc2a Lost motion compensation 2 timing

0: Normal 1: Change
bit E : zup Vertical axis pull up function
0: Stop 1: Enable

bit D : rps Safely limited speed setting increment
Change the setting units of the specified speed signal output speed (SV073) and safely limited
speed (SV238).
0: mm/min 1: 100mm/min

bit C-8 :
bit 7-5 : nfd2 Depth of Notch filter 2
Set the depth of Notch filter 2 (SV046).
bit7,6,5=
000: - ∞
001: -18.1[dB]
010: -12.0[dB]
011: -8.5[dB]
100: -6.0[dB]
101: -4.1[dB]
110: -2.5[dB]
111: -1.2[dB]
bit 4 : fhz3 Notch filter 3
0: Stop 1: Start (1,125Hz)
bit3,2,1=
000: - ∞
001: -18.1[dB]
010: -12.0[dB]
011: -8.5[dB]
100: -6.0[dB]
101: -4.1[dB]
110: -2.5[dB]
111: -1.2[dB]
bit 0 :
335
MITSUBISHI CNC

has2
mohn
dcd
linN
ovsn
bit F-C: ovsn Overshooting compensation type 3 Non-sensitive band

Set the non-sensitive band of the model position droop overshooting amount in increments of 2μm.
In the feed forward control, set the non-sensitive band of the model position droop and ignore the
overshooting of the model.
0 : 0 μm, 1: 2 μm, 2: 4μm,---, E : 28 μm, F: 30μm
bit B-8 : linN The number of parallel connections when using linear motors (for linear)
Set to"2" to perform 1 amplifier 2 motor control by linear servo.
bit 7-5 :
bit 4 : dcd (linear/direct-drive motor)
0: Normal setting 1: DC excitation mode
Related parameters: SV061, SV062, SV063

bit 3 :
bit 2 : mohn Thermistor temperature detection (linear/direct-drive motor)
0: Normal setting 1: Disable
bit 1 : has HAS control
This stabilizes the speed overshooting by torque saturation phenomenon.
0: Normal setting 1: Enable
Related parameters: SV084/bitF

bit 0 :
336

ckab
cltq
cl2n
clG1
clt
bit F : clt Inertia ratio display

0: Setting for normal use
1: Display the total inertia ratio estimated at acceleration/deceleration at the inertia ratio on the
servo monitor screen
To display it on the screen, set an imbalance torque and friction torque to both SV032 and SV045
and repeat acceleration/deceleration operations for several times.
bit E-C: clG1 G1 Collision detection level
Set the collision detection level in the collision detection method 1 during cutting feed (G1) in
multiples of that of rapid traverse (G0). When set to "0", detection of collision detection method 1
during cutting feed will be ignored.
G1 Collision detection level = G0 collision detection level (SV060) × clG1
bit B : cl2n Collision detection method 2
0: Enable 1: Disable
bit A :
bit 9-8 : cltq Retract torque in collision detection
Set the retract torque in collision detection using the ratio of motor's maximum torque.
bit9,8=
00: 100%
01: 90%
10: 80%(Standard)
11: 70%
bit 7 : ckab No signal detection 2
Set this to use rectangular wave output linear scale.
This enables the detection of No signal 2 (alarm 21).
0: Disable 1: Enable
bit 6-0 :
337
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2236(PR)】 SV036 PTYP Power supply type/ Regenerative resistor type
MDS-D2/DH2 Series: Power supply type

When connecting a power supply unit, set a code for each power supply unit.
ptyp
rtyp
amp
bit F-C : amp

Set the power backup function to be used.
No function used : 0
Deceleration and stop function at power failure : 8
bit B-8 : rtyp
bit 7-0 : ptyp External emergency stop setting
When the emergency stop input signal of the power supply unit is "disabled"
Power supply unit is not connected : 00
MDS-D2-CV-37 / MDS-DH2-CV-37 : 04
MDS-D2-CV-75 / MDS-DH2-CV-75 : 08
MDS-D2-CV-110 / MDS-DH2-CV-110 : 11
MDS-D2-CV-185 / MDS-DH2-CV-185 : 19
MDS-D2-CV-300 / MDS-DH2-CV-300 : 30
MDS-D2-CV-370 / MDS-DH2-CV-370 : 37
MDS-D2-CV-450 / MDS-DH2-CV-450 : 45
MDS-D2-CV-550 / MDS-DH2-CV-550 : 55
MDS-DH2-CV-750 : 75
When the emergency stop input signal of the power supply unit is "enabled"
(Note) Set the power supply rotary switch to "4".
MDS-D2-CV-37 / MDS-DH2-CV-37 : 44
MDS-D2-CV-75 / MDS-DH2-CV-75 : 48
MDS-D2-CV-110 / MDS-DH2-CV-110 : 51
MDS-D2-CV-185 / MDS-DH2-CV-185 : 59
MDS-D2-CV-300 / MDS-DH2-CV-300 : 70
MDS-D2-CV-370 / MDS-DH2-CV-370 : 77
MDS-D2-CV-450 / MDS-DH2-CV-450 : 85
MDS-D2-CV-550 / MDS-DH2-CV-550 : 95
MDS-DH2-CV-750 : B5
MDS-DM2-SPV Series
External emergency stop power supply type is set by spindle parameter (SP032).
338
MDS-DJ-V1/V2 Series: Regenerative resistor type

Set the regenerative resistor type.
0 0 0 0
emgx
rtyp
amp
bit F-8 : amp(bit F-C) / rtyp(bit B-8)

Resistor built-in drive unit : 10
Setting prohibited : 11
MR-RB032 : 12
MR-RB12 or GZG200W39OHMK : 13
MR-RB32 or GZG200W120OHMK 3 units connected in parallel : 14
Setting prohibited : 19-1F
Setting prohibited : 20-23

FCUA-RB22 : 24
FCUA-RB37 : 25
FCUA-RB55 : 26
FCUA-RB75/2 : 27
Setting prohibited : 28
R-UNIT2 : 29
Setting prohibited : 2A-2C
FCUA-RB75/2 2 units connected in parallel : 2D
FCUA-RB55 2 units connected in parallel : 2E
Setting prohibited : 2F
bit 7-4 : emgx External emergency stop function
Set the external emergency stop function.
bit 3-0 :
【#2237】 SV037 JL Load inertia scale

Set the motor axis conversion total load inertia including motor itself in proportion to the motor
inertia.
SV037(JL)=(Jm+Jl)/Jm×100
Jm: Motor inertia
Jl: Motor axis conversion load inertia
For linear motor, set the gross mass of the moving sections in kg unit.
<<Drive monitor load inertia ratio display>>

Set SV035/bitF=1 and imbalance torque and friction torque to both SV032 and SV045, and then
repeat acceleration/deceleration for several times.
---Setting range---
For general motor: 0 to 5000 (%)
For linear motor 0 to 5000 (kg)
【#2238】 SV038 FHz1 Notch filter frequency 1

Set the vibration frequency to suppress when machine vibration occurs.
(Normally, do not set 80 or less.)
Related parameters: SV033/bit3-1, SV115
---Setting range---
0 to 2250 (Hz)
339
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2239】 SV039 LMCD Lost motion compensation timing

Set this when the timing of lost motion compensation type 2 does not match.
Adjust increments of 10 at a time.
---Setting range---
0 to 2000 (ms)
【#2240】 SV040 LMCT Lost motion compensation non-sensitive band

Set the non-sensitive band of the lost motion compensation in the feed forward control.
When "0" is set, 2μm is the actual value to be set. Adjust increments of 1μm.
---Setting range---
0 to 255 (μm)
【#2241】 SV041 LMC2 Lost motion compensation 2

Set this with SV016 (LMC1) only when you wish to vary the lost motion compensation amount
depending on the command directions.
Normally, set to "0".
---Setting range---
【#2242】 SV042 OVS2 Overshooting compensation 2

Set this with SV031 (OVS1) only when you wish to vary the overshooting compensation amount
depending on the command directions.
---Setting range---
【#2243】 SV043 OBS1 Disturbance observer filter frequency
Set the disturbance observer filter band.

Normally, set to "100". Setting values of 49 or less is equal to "0" setting.
To use the disturbance observer, also set SV037 (JL) and SV044 (OBS2).
When disturbance observer related parameters are changed, lost motion compensation needs to be
readjusted.
---Setting range---
0 to 1000 (rad/s)
【#2244】 SV044 OBS2 Disturbance observer gain

Set the disturbance observer gain. The standard setting is "100 to 300".
To use the disturbance observer, also set SV037 (JL) and SV043 (OBS1).
When disturbance observer related parameters are changed, lost motion compensation needs to be
readjusted.
---Setting range---
0 to 500 (%)
【#2245】 SV045 TRUB Friction torque

Set the frictional torque when using the collision detection function.
To use load inertia estimation function (drive monitor display), set this parameter, imbalance torque
(SV032) and load inertia display enabling flag (SV035/bitF).
---Setting range---
340

---Setting range---
0 to 2250 (Hz)
【#2247】 SV047 EC Inductive voltage compensation gain

Set the inductive voltage compensation gain. Standard setting value is "100".
If the current FB peak exceeds the current command peak, lower the gain.
---Setting range---
0 to 200 (%)
【#2248】 SV048 EMGrt Vertical axis drop prevention time

Input the time required to prevent the vertical axis from dropping by delaying READY OFF until the
brake works at an emergency stop.
Increase in increments of 100ms at a time, find and set the value where the axis does not drop.
When using a motor with a break of HF(-H) Series or HP(-H) Series, set to "200ms" as a standard.
When the pull up function is enabled (SV033/bitE=1), the pull up is established during the drop
prevention time.
Related parameters: SV033/bitE, SV055, SV056
---Setting range---
0 to 20000 (ms)
【#2249】 SV049 PGN1sp Position loop gain 1 in spindle synchronous control

Set the position loop gain during spindle synchronization control (synchronous tapping and
synchronization control with spindle C-axis).
Set the same value as that of the position loop gain for spindle synchronous tapping control.
When performing the SHG control, set this parameter with SV050 (PGN2sp) and SV058 (SHGCsp).
When changing the value, change the value of "#2017 tap_g Axis servo gain".
---Setting range---
1 to 200 (rad/s)
【#2250】 SV050 PGN2sp Position loop gain 2 in spindle synchronous control

When using SHG control during spindle synchronous control (synchronous tapping and
synchronization control with spindle C-axis), set this parameter with SV049 (PGN1sp) and SV058
(SHGCsp).
Make sure to set the value 8/3 times that of SV049.
---Setting range---
0 to 999 (rad/s)
【#2251】 SV051 DFBT Dual feedback control time constant

Set the control time constant in dual feed back.
When "0" is set, it operates at 1ms.
The higher the time constant is, the closer it gets to the semi-closed control, so the limit of the
position loop gain will be raised.
For linear servo/direct-drive motor system

Related parameters: SV017/bit1, SV052
---Setting range---
0 to 9999 (ms)
341
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2252】 SV052 DFBN Dual feedback control non-sensitive band

Set the non-sensitive band in the dual feedback control.

Related parameters: SV017/bit1, SV052
---Setting range---
0 to 9999 (μm)
【#2253】 SV053 OD3 Excessive error detection width in special control

Set the excessive error detection width when servo ON in a special control (initial absolute position
setting, stopper control and etc.).
When "0" is set, excessive error detection will not be performed when servo ON during a special
control.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (mm)
【#2254】 SV054 ORE Overrun detection width in closed loop control

Set the overrun detection width in the full-closed loop control.
When the gap between the motor side detector and the linear scale (machine side detector) exceeds
the value set by this parameter, it will be judged as overrun and "Alarm 43" will be detected.
When "-1" is set, if the differential velocity between the motor side detector and the machine side
detector exceeds the 30% of the maximum motor speed, it will be judged as overrun and "Alarm 43"
will be detected.
When "0" is set, overrun will be detected with a 2mm width.

---Setting range---
-1 to 32767 (mm)
However, when SV084/bitD=1, the setting range is from -1 to 32767 (μm).
【#2255】 SV055 EMGx Max. gate off delay time after emergency stop
Set the time required between an emergency stop and forced READY OFF.
Set the maximum value "+ 100ms" of the SV056 setting value of the servo drive unit electrified by the
same power supply unit.
When executing the vertical axis drop prevention, the gate off will be delayed for the length of time
set at SV048 even when SV055's is smaller than that of SV048.
---Setting range---
0 to 20000 (ms)
【#2256】 SV056 EMGt Deceleration time constant at emergency stop

Set the time constant used for the deceleration control at emergency stop.
Set the time required to stop from rapid traverse rate (rapid).
The standard setting value is EMGt≤G0tL×0.9.
However, note that the standard setting value differs from the above-mentioned value when the
setting value of "#2003:smgst Acceleration and deceleration modes bit 3-0:Rapid traverse
acceleration/deceleration type" is 8 or F. Refer to Instruction Manual of the drive unit (section
"Deceleration Control") for details.
---Setting range---
0 to 20000 (ms)
342
【#2257】 SV057 SHGC SHG control gain

When performing the SHG control, set to SV003(PGN1)×6.
---Setting range---
0 to 1200 (rad/s)
【#2258】 SV058 SHGCsp SHG control gain in spindle synchronous control

When using SHG control during spindle synchronization control (synchronous tapping and
synchronous control with spindle C-axis), set this parameter with SV049 (PGN1sp) and SV050
(PGN2sp).
Make sure to set the value 6 times that of SV049.
---Setting range---
0 to 1200 (rad/s)
【#2259】 SV059 TCNV Collision detection torque estimated gain

Set the torque estimated gain when using the collision detection function.
The standard setting value is the same as the load inertia ratio (SV037 setting value) including motor
inertia.
Set to "0" when not using the collision detection function.
Related parameters: SV032, SV035/bitF-8, SV037, SV045, SV060
<<Drive monitor load inertia ratio display>>

Set SV035/bitF=1 and imbalance torque and friction torque to both SV032 and SV045, and then
repeat acceleration/deceleration for several times.
---Setting range---
For general motor: 0 to 5000 (%)
For linear motor: 0 to 5000 (kg)
【#2260】 SV060 TLMT Collision detection level

When using the collision detection function, set the collision detection level at the G0 feeding.
When "0" is set, none of the collision detection function will work.
Related parameters: SV032, SV035/bitF-8, SV037, SV045, SV059
---Setting range---
【#2261】 SV061 DA1NO D/A output ch1 data No. / Initial DC excitation level
Input the data number you wish to output to the D/A output channel 1.
When using the 2-axis drive unit, set "-1" to the axis that the data will not be output.
When the DC excitation is running (SV034/bit4=1):

Use this when the DC excitation is running (SV034/bit4=1) to adjust the initial magnetic pole
position (when measuring the magnetic pole shift amount) for linear motor and direct-drive motor.
Set the initial excitation level in DC excitation control.
Set 10% as standard.
---Setting range---
-1 to 127
When the DC excitation is running (SV034/bit4=1): 0 to 100 (Stall current %)
343
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2262】 SV062 DA2NO D/A output ch2 data No. / Final DC excitation level
Input the data number you wish to output to the D/A output channel 2.

Set the final excitation level in DC excitation control.
Set 10% as standard.
When the magnetic pole shift amount measurement value is unsteady, adjust the value in
increments of 5%.
---Setting range---
-1 to 127
When the DC excitation is running (SV034/bit4=1): 0 to 100 (Stall current %)
【#2263】 SV063 DA1MPY D/A output ch1 output scale / Initial DC excitation time
Set output scale of the D/A output channel 1 in increment of 1/100.
When "0" is set, the magnification is the same as when "100" is set.

Set the initial excitation time in DC excitation control.
Set 1000ms as standard.
When the magnetic pole shift amount measurement value is unsteady, adjust the value in
increments of 500ms.
---Setting range---
-32768 to 32767 (1/100-fold)
When the DC excitation is running (SV034/bit4=1): 0 to 10000 (ms)
【#2264】 SV064 DA2MPY D/A output ch2 output scale

Set output scale of the D/A output channel 2 in increment of 1/100.
When "0" is set, the magnification is the same as when "100" is set.
---Setting range---
-32768 to 32767 (1/100-fold)
【#2265】 SV065 TLC Machine end compensation gain

The shape of the machine end is compensated by compensating the spring effect from the machine
end to the motor end.
Set the machine end compensation gain. Measure the error amount by roundness measurement
and estimate the setting value by the following formula.
Compensation amount (μm) = Command speed F(mm/min)2 * SV065 / (Radius R(mm) * SV003 *
16,200,000)
---Setting range---
-30000 to 30000 (Acceleration ratio 0.1%)
【#2266-2272】 SV066 - SV072

This parameter is set automatically by the NC system.
【#2273(PR)】 SV073 FEEDout Specified speed output speed

Set the specified speed.
Also set SV082/bit9,8 to output digital signal.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (r/min)
However, when SV033/bitD=1, the setting range is from 0 to 32767 (100mm/min).
(Only for MDS-D2/DH2 and MDS-DM2)
344
【#2274-2280】 SV074 - SV080

This parameter is set automatically by the NC system.
【#2281(PR)】 SV081 SPEC2 Servo specification 2

absc
szchk
npg
bit F-A :
bit 9 : npg Earth fault detection
0: Disable 1: Enable (standard)
Set "0" and it is constantly "Enable" for MDS-DJ-V1/V2 Series.
bit 8 :
bit 7 : szchk Distance-coded reference scale reference mark
0: Check at 4 points (standard) 1: Check at 3 points
bit 6-4 :
bit 3 : absc Distance-coded reference scale
bit 2-0 :
345
MITSUBISHI CNC

lmc3
ccu
dos2
dos3
dis
bit F-C : dis Digital signal input selection

0: No signal
1: SLS (Safely Limited Speed) function door state signal
2: Battery box voltage drop warning (It is not available for MDS-DJ-V1/V2 Series.)
3 to F: Setting prohibited
bit B-A : dos3 Digital signal output 3 selection
bitB,A=
00: Disable
10: Contactor control signal output (For MDS-DJ-V1/V2)
bit 9-8 : dos2 Digital signal output 2 selection
bit9,8=
00: Disable
01: Specified speed output
bit 7-3 :
bit 2 : ccu Lost motion overshoot compensation compensation amount setting

increment
0: Stall current % 1: Stall current 0.01%

bit 1 : lmc3 Lost motion compensation type 3
Set this when protrusion at a quadrant change is too big.
0: Stop 1: Start
Related parameters: SV016, SV041, SV085, SV086

bit 0 :
346

nfd4
nfd5
bit F-8 :
bit7,6,5=
000: - ∞
001: -18.1[dB]
010: -12.0[dB]
011: -8.5[dB]
100: -6.0[dB]
101: -4.1[dB]
110: -2.5[dB]
111: -1.2[dB]
bit 4 :
bit3,2,1=
000: - ∞
001: -18.1[dB]
010: -12.0[dB]
011: -8.5[dB]
100: -6.0[dB]
101: -4.1[dB]
110: -2.5[dB]
111: -1.2[dB]
bit 0 :
347
MITSUBISHI CNC

irms
ilm2u
odu
oru
h2c
bit F : h2c HAS control cancel amount

0: 1/4 (standard) 1: 1/2
Related parameters: SV034/bit1

bit E :
bit D : oru Overrun detection width unit
0: mm (normal setting) 1: μm
bit C : odu Excessive error detection width unit
0: mm (normal setting) 1: μm
bit B : ilm2u Current limit value (SV014) in special control setting unit
0: Stall current % (normal setting) 1: Stall current 0.01%
bit A-1 :
bit 0 : irms Motor current display
0: Motor q axis current display (normal) 1: Motor effective current display
【#2285】 SV085 LMCk Lost motion compensation 3 spring constant

Set the machine system's spring constant when selecting lost motion compensation type 3.
Related parameters: SV016, SV041, SV082/bit2,1, SV086
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (0.01%/μm)
【#2286】 SV086 LMCc Lost motion compensation 3 viscous coefficient

Set the machine system's viscous coefficient when selecting lost motion compensation type 3.
Related parameters: SV016, SV041, SV082/bit2,1, SV086
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (0.01%•s/mm)

---Setting range---
0 to 2250 (Hz)
348

---Setting range---
0 to 2250 (Hz)
【#2289】 SV089
【#2290】 SV090
【#2291】 SV091 LMC4G Lost motion compensation 4 gain

Use this with LMC compensation type 3. As the delay in path tracking is monitored and
compensated, the delay in path tracking will be minimized even if machine friction amount changes
by aging. Use the lost motion compensation amount (SV016) * 5 (10% of the dynamic friction torque)
as the target. The higher the setting value is, the more accurate the quadrant change be; however,
the more likely vibrations occur.
---Setting range---
0 to 20000 (Stall current 0.01%)
【#2292】 SV092
【#2293】 SV093
【#2294】 SV094 MPV Magnetic pole position error detection speed

The magnetic pole position detection function monitors the command speed and motor speed at the
position command stop and detects the magnetic pole position error alarm (3E) if any. Set the error
detection level for the command speed and motor speed at the position command stop.
Be aware when setting the parameter as the setting units for general motors and linear motors are
different.
<<For general motor>>

When the command speed error detection level is set to "0", the magnetic pole position error (3E) is
detected at 10r/min.
Set "10" as standard.
This detects the magnetic pole position error (3E) when the motor rotation speed is 100r/min and
more.
<<For linear motor>>

When the command motor speed level is set to "0", the magnetic pole position error (3E) is detected
at 1mm/s.
Set "10" as standard.
This detects the magnetic pole position error (3E) when the motor speed is 10mm/s and more.
---Setting range---
0 to 31999

Ten-thousands digit, Thousands digit ----------- Command speed error detection level (10r/min)
Hundreds digit, Tens digit, Ones digit ----------- Motor speed error detection level (10r/min)

Ten-thousands digit, Thousands digit ----------- Command speed error detection speed level (1mm/
s)
Hundreds digit, Tens digit, Ones digit ----------- Motor speed error detection level (1mm/s)
349
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2295】 SV095 ZUPD Vertical axis pull up distance

Set this parameter to adjust the pull up distance when the vertical axis pull up function is enabled.
When the pull up function is enabled and this parameter is set to "0", for a rotary motor, 8/1000 of a
rotation at the motor end is internally set as the pull up distance, and for a linear motor, 80[μm] is
set.
Related parameters:
SV032 : The pull up direction is determined. When "0" is set, pull up control is not executed.
SV033/bitE : Start-up of the pull up function
SV048 : Set the drop prevention time. When "0" is set, pull up control is not executed.
---Setting range---
0 to 2000 (μm)
【#2296】 SV096
【#2297】 SV097
【#2298】 SV098
【#2299】 SV099
【#2300】 SV100
【#2301】 SV101 TMA1 OMR-FF movement averaging filter time constant 1

Set the movement averaging filter time constant in OMR-FF control.
The standard setting is "88".
Set to "0" when not using OMR-FF control.
---Setting range---
0 to 711 (0.01ms)
【#2302】 SV102 TMA2 OMR-FF movement averaging filter time constant 2

---Setting range---
0 to 711 (0.01ms)
【#2303】 SV103
【#2304】 SV104 FFR0 OMR-FF inner rounding compensation gain for G0

Set the inner rounding compensation amount (drive side feed forward gain) in OMR-FF control.
When a shape tracking error is too large in OMR-FF control, adjust it by setting this parameter.
The higher the setting value is, the less the shape tracking error will be, however, overshooting
during acceleration/deceleration will increase.
Lower the value when vibration occurs during the G0 acceleration/deceleration.
---Setting range---
0 to 20000 (0.01%)
350
【#2305】 SV105 FFR1 OMR-FF inner rounding compensation gain for G1

---Setting range---
0 to 20000 (0.01%)
【#2306】 SV106 PGM OMR-FF scale model gain

Set the scale model gain (position response) in OMR-FF control.
Set the same value as SV003(PGN1).
Increase the setting value to perform a high-speed machining such as a fine arc or to improve the
path error.
Lower the value when vibration occurs during acceleration/deceleration.
---Setting range---
0 to 300 (rad/s)
【#2307】 SV107
【#2308】 SV108
【#2309】 SV109
【#2310】 SV110
【#2311】 SV111
【#2312】 SV112 IFF OMR-FF current feed forward gain

Set the current feed forward rate in OMR-FF control.
Setting value of 0 is equal to "10000(100%)" setting.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (0.01%)
351
MITSUBISHI CNC

omrffon
sto
ssc
bit F : ssc SLS (Safely Limited Speed) function

0: Stop 1: Start
bit E-9 :
bit 8 : sto Dedicated wiring STO function
Set this parameter to use dedicated wiring STO function.
0: Dedicated wiring STO function unused 1: Dedicated wiring STO function used
bit 7-1 :
bit 0 : omrffon OMR-FF control enabled

cse
nohis
bit F-9 :
bit 8 : nohis History of communication error alarm between NC and DRV (34, 36, 38, 39)
bit 7 : cse Command speed monitoring function
0: Normal setting 1: Enable
bit 6-0 :
352

esn
dfhz
dsn
ade1
ade2
ade4
ade5
dsl
are
bit F : are Notch filter5 all frequencies adapted

When enabled, Notch filter5 all frequencies adaptive range is not limited regardless of SV115/bit4,5
setting.
bit E-C: dsl Notch filter frequency display
Switch the "AFLT frequency" display on drive monitor screen to check every notch filter frequency.
When the selected notch filter is not used, "0" is displayed.
bitE,D,C=
000 : Estimated resonance frequency (Normal display)
001 : Notch filter 1 frequency
011 : Notch filter 3 frequency (always displays 1125Hz)
Other settings: setting prohibited
bit B : ade5 Notch filter 5 / Adaptive follow-up function
bit A : ade4 Notch filter 4 / Adaptive follow-up function
bit 9 : ade2 Notch filter 2 / Adaptive follow-up function
bit 8 : ade1 Notch filter 1 / Adaptive follow-up function
bit 7-6 : dsn Estimated resonance frequency display holding time
Set the estimated resonance frequency display holding time to the "AFLT frequency" display on
drive monitor screen.
bit7,6=
00: 4 [s]
01: 8 [s]
10: 12 [s]
11: 16 [s]
bit 5-4 : dfhz Notch filter frequency range
Set the adaptive range of the notch filter frequency. When the adaptive follow-up function is enabled
and if the estimated resonance frequency exists in the set range, the notch filter will be adapted.
Normally set this parameter to "00".
bit5,4=
00: -10 to 10 [%]
01: -20 to 20 [%]
10: -30 to 30 [%]
11: -40 to 40 [%]
353
MITSUBISHI CNC
bit 3-0 : esn Sensitivity of estimated resonance frequency

Set the sensitivity of the estimated resonance frequency. Smaller setting value enables to detect
smaller vibration component, however, adaptive movement will be repeated frequently. Normally set
this parameter to "0".
0 : Normal setting (same sensitivity as A) 1 : Sensitivity high to F : Sensitivity low

【#2317(PR)】 SV117 RNG1ex Expansion sub side detector resolution

For high-accuracy binary resolution detector, set the number of pulses to four bite data of SV117
(high-order) and SV019 (low-order) by pulse(p).
When SV117=0, the setting unit of SV019 is (kp).
Refer to SV019 for details.
---Setting range---
-1 to 32767
【#2318(PR)】 SV118 RNG2ex Expansion main side detector resolution

When using high-accuracy binary resolution detector, set the number of pulses to four bite data of
SV118 (high-order) and SV020 (low-order) by pulse(p).
When SV118=0, the setting unit of SV020 is (kp).
Refer to SV020 for details.
---Setting range---
-1 to 32767
【#2319】 SV119
【#2320】 SV120
【#2321】 SV121
【#2322】 SV122
【#2323】 SV123
【#2324】 SV124
【#2325】 SV125
【#2326】 SV126
【#2327】 SV127
354
【#2328】 SV128
【#2329】 SV129 Kwf Synchronous control feed forward filter frequency

Set the acceleration rate feed forward filter frequency in high-speed synchronous tapping control.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (rad/s)
【#2330(PR)】 SV130 RPITS Base reference mark interval

Set the base reference mark intervals of distance-coded reference scale. When the distance-coded
reference scale is not used, set to "0".
The interval of basic reference mark (SV130) and auxiliary interval (SV131) must be in the specified
relationship. Other settings cause the initial parameter error (alarm 37).
Following is the specified relationship.
The quotient of (SV130×1000) / SV131 must be 4 or more and leaves no remainder.
Related parameters: SV081/bit7,3, SV131, SV134 to SV137
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (mm)
【#2331(PR)】 SV131 DPITS Auxiliary reference mark interval

Set the auxiliary interval of reference mark in the distance-coded reference scale. When the
distance-coded reference scale is not used, set to "0".
The interval of basic reference mark (SV130) and auxiliary interval (SV131) must be in the specified
relationship. Other settings cause the initial parameter error (alarm 37).
Following is the specified relationship.
The quotient of (SV130×1000) / SV131 must be 4 or more and leaves no remainder.
Related parameters: SV081/bit7,3, SV130, SV134 to SV137
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (μm)
【#2332】 SV132
【#2333】 SV133
【#2334】 SV134 RRn0 Distance-coded reference check / revolution counter

Set this parameter to operate distance-coded reference check when using distance-coded reference
scale.
During the distance-coded reference check initial setup (SV137:RAER=-1), set the following items
on the NC drive monitor screen after the distance-coded reference check initial setup warning A3
turns OFF.
SV134=Rn, SV135=Pn, SV136=MPOS
When reference point is set, the warning A3 turns OFF.

To enable the distance-coded reference check function, SV081/bit3=1setting and a battery option
are needed.
Related parameters: SV081/bit3,7, SV130, SV131, SV134 to SV137
---Setting range---
-32768 to 32767
355
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#2335】 SV135 RPn0H Distance-coded reference check /position within one rotation High
scale.
turns OFF.

are needed.
---Setting range---
-32768 to 32767
【#2336】 SV136 RPn0L Distance-coded reference check / position within one rotation Low
scale.
turns OFF.

are needed.
---Setting range---
-32768 to 32767
【#2337】 SV137 RAER Distance-coded reference check allowable width

For the distance-coded reference check function when using distance-coded reference scale, set the
allowable gap from the reference point position data calculated by the main side detector. When the
gap exceeds the allowable range, reference point created by distance-code is judged as wrong and
detects alarm 42.
The standard setting value is "basic reference mark interval (SV130) / 4".
SV137=0 setting carries out the same operation as the standard setting value.
SV137=-1 setting enables the distance-coded reference initial set up mode and displays setting
values of SV134 to SV136 on NC drive monitor.
are needed.
When SV137=32767, the distance-coded reference check function is disabled.
---Setting range---
-1 to 32767 (mm)
【#2338-2397】 SV138 - SV197

【#2398】 SV198 NSE No signal 2 special detection width

Set the special detection width for the no signal 2 (alarm 21).
This detects no signal 2 (alarm 21) when machine side feedback is not invoked even if the motor
side detector feedback exceeds this setting in the rectangular wave signal output linear scale.
When "0" is set, the detection will be performed with a 15μm width.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (μm)
356
【#2399-2437】 SV199 - SV237

【#2438】 SV238 SSCFEED Safely limited speed

Set the machine's safely limited speed for the SLS (Safely Limited Speed) function.
Set this parameter within the following setting ranges.
For linear axis: 2000mm/min or less
For rotary axis: 18000°/min (50r/min) or less
Related parameters: SV033/bitD, SV113/bitF, SV239
---Setting range---
0 to 18000 (mm/min) or (°/min)
However, when SV033/bitD=1, the setting range is from -32768 to 32767 (100 mm/min) or (100°/
min).
【#2439】 SV239 SSCRPM Safely limited motor speed

Set the motor's safely limited speed for the SLS (Safely Limited Speed) function.
Set a value to hold the following relationship.
Be aware when setting the parameter as the setting units for general motors and linear motors are
different.

SV239=(SV238/SV018) x (SV002/SV001)
Only when the product is 0, set to "1".

SV239=SV238/60
---Setting range---
For general motor:0 to 32767 (r/min)
For linear motor: 0 to 32767 (mm/s)
【#2440-2443】 SV240 - SV243

【#2444(PR)】 SV244 DUNIT Communication interpolation unit for communication among

drive units
Set the communication interpolation unit among drive units in high-speed synchronous tapping
control.
When set to "0", it will be regarded as 20 (0.05μm) is set.
---Setting range---
0 to 2000 (1/μm)
【#2445-2456】 SV245 - SV256

357
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1.5 Spindle Parameters

【#3001】 slimt 1 Limit rotation speed (Gear: 00)

Set the spindle rotation speed for maximum motor speed when gear 00 is selected.
Set the spindle rotation speed for the S analog output=10V during analog spindle control.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (r/min)

---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (r/min)

---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (r/min)

---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (r/min)
【#3005】 smax 1 Maximum rotation speed (Gear: 00)

Set the maximum spindle rotation speed which is actually commanded when gear 00 is selected.
Set this as smax1(#3005)<= slimit1(#3001).
By comparing the S command value and the values of gear 1 - 4, a spindle gear shift command will
be output automatically.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (r/min)

---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (r/min)

---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (r/min)
358

---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (r/min)
【#3009】 ssift 1 Shift rotation speed (Gear: 00)

Set the spindle speed for gear shifting with gear 00.
(Note) Setting too large value may cause a gear nick when changing gears.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (r/min)

---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (r/min)

---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (r/min)

---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (r/min)
【#3013】 stap 1 Synchronous tapping 1st step rotation speed (Gear: 00)
Set the speed which switches from 1st step to 2nd step in synchronous tapping multi-step
acceleration/deceleration control when gear 00 is selected.
The inclination of linear acceleration/deceleration control for 1st step is determined by the ratio of
stap1(#3013) to stapt1(#3017).
When the inclination is not set after 2nd step or it is higher than that of 1st step, the acceleration/
deceleration control is executed with the same inclination as the 1st step for the rotation speed of
stap1 or higher.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (r/min)
stap2(#3014) to stapt2(#3018).
stap2 or higher.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (r/min)
359
MITSUBISHI CNC
stap3(#3015) to stapt3(#3019).
stap3 or higher.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (r/min)
stap4(#3016) to stapt4(#3020).
stap4 or higher.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (r/min)
【#3017】 stapt 1 Synchronous tapping 1st step acceleration/deceleration time constant

(Gear: 00)
Set the time constant for synchronous tapping 1st step linear acceleration/deceleration control when
gear 00 is selected. (linear acceleration/deceleration pattern)
---Setting range---
1 to 5000 (ms)

(Gear: 01)
---Setting range---
1 to 5000 (ms)

(Gear: 10)
---Setting range---
1 to 5000 (ms)

(Gear: 11)
---Setting range---
1 to 5000 (ms)
【#3021】
360
【#3022】 sgear Encoder gear ratio

Set the deceleration rate of the detector to the spindle when inputting ABZ pulse output detector
feedback to NC during analog spindle control.
0: 1/1
1: 1/2
2: 1/4
3: 1/8
---Setting range---
0 to 3
【#3023】 smini Minimum rotation speed

Set the minimum spindle speed.
If an S command below this setting is issued, the spindle will rotate at the minimum speed set by this
parameter.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (r/min)
【#3024(PR)】 sout Spindle connection

Select the connection method with a spindle drive unit.
0: No unit to connect
1: Optical digital communication (Mitsubishi spindle drive unit)
2 - 5: S-analog (Analog spindle drive unit)
---Setting range---
0 to 5
【#3025(PR)】 enc-on Spindle encoder

Set the connection specifications of a spindle's detector.
0: Without detector feedback when using analog spindle and connecting to NC
1: With detector feedback when using analog spindle and connecting to NC
2: Mitsubishi spindle drive unit
---Setting range---
0 to 2
【#3026】 cs_ori Selection of winding in orientation mode

Select the coil control in orientation mode for the spindle motor which performs coil changeover.
0: Perform coil changeover based on the command from NC. (depending on the setting of
parameter #1239/bit0)
1: Use the coil L
【#3027】 cs_syn Selection of winding in spindle synchronization control mode

Select the coil control in spindle synchronization control mode for the spindle motor which performs
coil changeover.
0: Perform coil changeover based on the command from NC. (depending on the setting of
parameter #1239/bit0)
1: Use the coil H
【#3028】 sprcmm Tap cycle M command selection

Set the M codes for the spindle forward run/reverse run commands during tapping cycle.
High-order 3 digits: Set the M code for spindle forward run command.
Low-order 3 digits: Set the M code for spindle reverse run command.
When "0" is set, it is handled assuming that "3004" is set (the M code for spindle forward run
command is "3" and the M code for spindle reverse run command is "4").
---Setting range---
0 to 999999
361
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#3029】 tapsel Asynchronous tap gear selection

Select the speed which is compared with S command at gear selection when using asynchronous
tapping control with the spindle which performs gear changeover.
0: Synchronous tapping 1st step rotation speed (stap)--- Multi-step acceleration/deceleration is not
used.
1: Maximum speed (smax)--- Multi-step acceleration/deceleration is used.
This parameter is enabled only when "#1272 ext08/bit1 is 1".
【#3030】
【#3031(PR)】 smcp_no Drive unit I/F channel No. (spindle)

Set the interface channel No. of CNC control unit to which the spindle is connected and the axis No.
within each channel.
Set this parameter in 4-digit (hexadecimal) format.
Rotary switch settings
Axis No.= 1 2 3
Channel No.=1
Spindle
HEX- 4 3 2 1 CNC Channel No.=2 drive
0 control unit
unit
Axis No. Axis No.= 1 2 n
Interface channel
No. Channel No.=m
HEX-4 : Drive unit interface channel No.

HEX-3 : Not used. Set to "0".
HEX-2, 1 : Axis No.
For an analog spindle, set to "0000".
---Setting range---
0000, 1001 to 1010, 2001 to 2010
- For MDS-DM2-SPV2/SPV3 Series

These drive units have no rotary switches for axis No. selection.
The spindle axis No. is fixed to 1st axis, so set "01" as the number of axes. (last 2 digits).
【#3032】
【#3035(PR)】 spunit Output unit

Select the data unit for communication with the spindle drive unit.
This selection is applied to the data communicated between the NC and spindle drive unit as well as
the spindle movement data. Although the standard setting is B (0.001deg), set the same value as
"#1004 ctrl_unit" when using Spindle/C axis control.
B: 0.001deg (1μm)
C: 0.0001deg (0.1μm)
D: 0.00001deg (10nm)
E: 0.000001deg (1nm)
362
【#3037】 taps21 Synchronous tapping 2nd step rotation speed (Gear: 00)
Set the speed which switches from 2nd step to 3rd step in synchronous tapping multi-step
The inclination of linear acceleration/deceleration control for 2nd step is determined by the ratio of
taps21(#3037) to tapt21(#3041).
When the inclination is not set for 3rd step or it is higher than that of 2nd step, the acceleration/
deceleration control is executed with the same inclination as the 2nd step for the rotation speed of
taps21 or higher.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (r/min)
taps22(#3038) to tapt22(#3042).
taps22 or higher.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (r/min)
taps23(#3039) to tapt23(#3043).
taps23 or higher.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (r/min)
taps24(#3040) to tapt24(#3044).
taps24 or higher.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (r/min)
【#3041】 tapt21 Synchronous tapping 2nd step acceleration/deceleration time constant

(Gear: 00)
Set the time constant for synchronous tapping 2nd step linear acceleration/deceleration control
when gear 00 is selected.
---Setting range---
1 to 5000 (ms)
【#3042】 tapt22 Synchronous tapping 2nd step acceleration/deceleration time constant 2

(Gear: 01)
---Setting range---
1 to 5000 (ms)
363
MITSUBISHI CNC

(Gear: 10)
---Setting range---
1 to 5000 (ms)

(Gear: 11)
---Setting range---
1 to 5000 (ms)
【#3045】 tapt31 Synchronous tapping 3rd step acceleration/deceleration time constant

(Gear: 00)
Set the time constant for synchronous tapping 3rd step linear acceleration/deceleration control when
gear 00 is selected.
The inclination of linear acceleration/deceleration control for 3rd step is determined by the ratio of
slimit1(#3001) to tapt31(#3045).
---Setting range---
1 to 5000 (ms)

(Gear: 01)
slimit2(#3002) to tapt32(#3046).
---Setting range---
1 to 5000 (ms)

(Gear: 10)
slimit3(#3003) to tapt33(#3047).
---Setting range---
1 to 5000 (ms)

(Gear: 11)
slimit4(#3004) to tapt34(#3048).
---Setting range---
1 to 5000 (ms)
364
【#3049】 spt Spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant

Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant under spindle synchronization control.
The inclination of acceleration/deceleration control is determined by the ratio to limit rotation speed
(slimit). Set the same value for the reference axis and synchronous axis.
The time constant for 2nd step or subsequent steps is the magnification setting on the basis of this
setting value.
---Setting range---
0 to 9999 (ms)
【#3050】 sprlv Spindle synchronization rotation speed attainment level

Set the level of speed difference between the basic and synchronous spindles during spindle
synchronization control. Setting of the synchronous spindle side is enabled. When the difference
becomes below the setting level, the spindle speed synchronization complete signal will turn ON.
---Setting range---
0 to 4095 (pulse) (1 pulse = 0.088°)
【#3051】 spplv Spindle phase synchronization attainment level

Set the level of phase difference between the basic and synchronous spindles during spindle
synchronization. Setting of the synchronous spindle side is validated. When the difference becomes
below the setting level, the spindle phase synchronization complete signal will go ON.
---Setting range---
0 to 4095 (pulse) (1 pulse = 0.088°)
【#3052】 spplr Spindle motor spindle relative polarity

Set the polarity to match the rotation direction between the spindles which perform synchronization
control under spindle synchronization control.
0: Positive polarity (Spindle CW rotation at motor CW rotation)
1: Negative polarity (Spindle CCW rotation at motor CW rotation)
---Setting range---
0000/0001 (HEX)
【#3053】 sppst Spindle encoder Z -phase position

Set the deviation amount from the spindle's basic point to the spindle detector's Z phase.
Obtain the deviation amount, considering a clockwise direction as positive when viewed from the
spindle's front side.
---Setting range---
0 to 359999 (1/1000°)
【#3054】 sptc1 Spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover

speed 1
Set the speed which switches from 1st step to 2nd step in spindle synchronization multi-step
acceleration/deceleration control. Set the same value for the reference axis and synchronous axis.
Set the value of limit rotation speed (slimit) or higher not to carry out a step shift.
---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (r/min)

speed 2
Set the speed which switches from 2nd step to 3rd step in spindle synchronization multi-step
---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (r/min)
365
MITSUBISHI CNC

speed 3
Set the speed which switches from 3rd step to 4th step in spindle synchronization multi-step
---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (r/min)

speed 4
Set the speed which switches from 4th step to 5th step in spindle synchronization multi-step
---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (r/min)

speed 5
---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (r/min)

speed 6
---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (r/min)

speed 7
---Setting range---
0 to 99999 (r/min)
【#3061】 spdiv1 Time constant magnification for changeover speed 1

Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used at the speed of changeover speed 1
(sptc1) and higher in spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration control. Set this as
a magnification in relation to the spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant
(spt).
---Setting range---
0 to 127

(spt).
---Setting range---
0 to 127
366

(spt).
---Setting range---
0 to 127

(spt).
---Setting range---
0 to 127

(spt).
---Setting range---
0 to 127

(spt).
---Setting range---
0 to 127

(spt).
---Setting range---
0 to 127
【#3068】 symtm1 Phase synchronization start confirmation time

Set the time to confirm that synchronization is attained before spindle phase synchronization control
is started.
When "0" is set, the time will be 500ms. When "100" or less is set, the time will be 100ms.
---Setting range---
0 to 9999 (ms)
【#3069】 symtm2 Phase synchronization end confirmation time

Set a period of waiting time for spindle phase synchronization control's completion as a time in which
the speed stays within the attainment range.
When "0" is set, the time will be 500ms. When "100" or less is set, the time will be 100ms.
---Setting range---
0 to 9999 (ms)
367
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#3070】 syprt Phase synchronization alignment speed

Set the amount of speed fluctuation of synchronous spindle during spindle phase synchronization
control. Set this as a proportion to commanded speed.
When "0" is set, the amount will be 5%.
---Setting range---
0 to 100 (%)
【#3071(PR)】 SscDrSelSp Speed monitor Door selection

Select which door group of the speed monitoring a spindle belongs to.
0000: Belong to the door 1 group.
0003: Belong to the door 1 and 2 groups.
(Note) Speed monitoring function is validated when "SP229/bitF=1".
---Setting range---
0000 to 0003 (HEX)
【#3072(PR)】 Ssc Svof Filter Sp Speed monitor Error detection time during servo OFF
Set the error detection time for when an error of command speed monitoring or feedback speed
monitoring is detected during servo OFF.
The alarm will occur if actual speed exceeds safe speed or safe rotation speed for a period of time
longer than this setting.
When "0" is set, the detection time will be 200 (ms).
(Note) Speed monitoring function is validated when "SP229/bitF=1".
---Setting range---
0 to 9999 (ms)
【#3074】 GBsp Guide bushing spindle synchronization control

Set the reference spindle and G/B spindle.
1:Reference spindle
2:Guide bushing spindle
0:Other
【#3101】 sp_t 1 Acceleration/deceleration time constant with S command (Gear: 00)

Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant with S command (speed operation mode) when gear
00 is selected. Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time up to limit rotation speed (slimit1). Set
the short time constant that the motor torque at acceleration is always saturated, however, when an
abnormal noise or V-belt slip occurs, increase the time constant.
---Setting range---
0 to 30000 (ms)

---Setting range---
0 to 30000 (ms)

---Setting range---
0 to 30000 (ms)
368

---Setting range---
0 to 30000 (ms)
【#3105】 sut Speed reach range

Set the speed deviation rate with respect to the commanded speed, at which the speed reach signal
will be output.
It will be 15% when set to "0".
If the speed deviation is smaller than 45r/min, it will be set as 45r/min.
---Setting range---
0 to 100 (%)
369
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#3106】 zrn_typ Zero point return specifications

Select the zero point return specification.
Functions are allocated to each bit.
Z phase detection direction

Orientation direction
Synchronous tapping zero point return/Deceleration stop designation
Synchronous tapping zero point return direction
Synchronous tapping command polarity
Spindle/C axis zero point return/Deceleration stop designation
Spindle/C axis zero point return direction
Interpolation mode selection in orientation
Spindle zero point proximity switch detection
bit F : Spindle zero point detection with contactless switch

0: Normal 1: Enable spindle zero point detection using proximity switch
bit E : Control mode selection in orientation
Select non-interpolation mode when vibration occurs since the gain is high during the orientation.
0: Interpolation mode (Use the interpolation mode gain "SP002".)
1: Non-interpolation mode (Use the non-interpolation mode gain "SP001")
bit D-B :
bit A-9 : Spindle/C axis zero point return direction
bitA,9=
00: Short-cut
01: Forward run
10: Reverse run
bit 8 : Designate zero point return
0: Compatible operation with our conventional series (Automatically return to zero point
simultaneously with C-axis changeover)
1: Standard setting
bit 7 : Synchronous tapping command polarity
0: Forward direction
1: Reverse direction (The standard setting when spindle and motor are directly coupled)
bit 6-5 : Synchronous tapping zero point return direction
bit 6,5=
00: Short-cut
01: Forward run
10: Reverse run
bit 4 : Designate zero point return
0: Automatically return to zero point before synchronous tapping is started (tapping phase
alignment)
1: Not return to zero point and immediately synchronous tapping is started
bit 3 :
bit 2-1 : Orientation direction
bit 2,1=
00: Short-cut
01: Forward run
10: Reverse run
bit 0 : Z phase detection direction
0: Forward direction 1: Reverse direction
370
【#3107】 ori_spd Orientation command speed

Set the spindle speed during orientation command.
When the spindle is not running or running to the different direction with the orientation, the
orientation is carried out with this speed after a stop. When the spindle is running to the same
direction with the orientation, this parameter does not have a meaning because it decelerates
directly and the orientation is carried out.
---Setting range---
1 to 99999 (r/min)
【#3108】 ori_sft Position shift amount for orientation

The orientation stop position can be moved by this parameter setting although normally the position
is Z -phase position.
During multi-point orientation control, the stop position is determined by the total value of this
parameter and the position data for multi-point orientation of PLC input.
---Setting range---
-35999 to 35999 (0.01°)
【#3109】 zdetspd Z phase detection speed

For the first S command after power is turned ON, the spindle rotates at the speed of setting value
for this parameter until Z phase is detected twice.
When "#3106/bitF = 1" (Spindle zero point proximity switch detection enabled), also proximity switch
is detected.
(Note) When spindle zero point proximity switch detection is enabled, the rotation direction of the
orientation/zero point return (synchronous tapping, spindle/C axis) will follow Z phase detection
direction. And the speed will follow Z phase detection speed.
---Setting range---
1 to 99999 (r/min)
【#3110】 tap_spd Synchronous tapping zero point return speed

Set the zero point return speed during synchronous tapping control.
---Setting range---
1 to 99999 (r/min)
【#3111】 tap_sft Synchronous tapping zero point return shift amount

Set the zero point return shift amount during synchronous tapping control. Zero point angle shifts
from Z phase according to the setting angle.
---Setting range---
0 to 35999 (0.01°)
【#3112】 cax_spd Spindle C axis zero point return speed

Set the zero point return speed during spindle C axis control.
---Setting range---
1 to 99999 (r/min)
【#3113】 cax_sft Spindle C axis zero point return shift amount

Set the spindle C axis zero point return shift amount. Zero point angle shifts from Z phase according
to the setting angle.
---Setting range---
0 to 359999 (0.001°)
371
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#3114】 cax_para_chg Spindle/C axis parameter switch

Parameter switches when switching the detector system between normal spindle control and C axis
control, such as using spindle side detector only for C axis control in spindle drive system. It is
validated with replacing a certain servo parameter of the corresponding servo axis to a spindle
parameter.
0: Not switch
1: Switch
---Setting range---
0/1 (Standard: 0)
【#3115】 sp2_t1 Time constant in orientation/interpolation mode automatic reference

position return (Gear: 00)
Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for zero point return control (#3106/bit4,8)
which is automatically started at the time of switching orientation control, C axis control and
synchronous tapping control when gear 00 is selected. The inclination is determined by the ratio to
limit rotation speed (slimit1). Set the sufficiently large value compared to the acceleration/
deceleration time constant with S command (sp_t1) so that the output torque is not saturated. When
executing C axis zero point return manually, it depends on the axis specification parameter.
---Setting range---
0 to 30000 (ms)

---Setting range---
0 to 30000 (ms)

---Setting range---
0 to 30000 (ms)

---Setting range---
0 to 30000 (ms)
372
【#3120】 staptr Time constant reduction rate in high-speed synchronous tapping

When performing high-speed synchronous tapping control(#1281/bit5), set the reduction rate of the
time constant compared to the time constant in normal synchronous tapping.
(Setting "0"or "100" will be regarded as reduction rate zero, so the time constant won't be reduced.)
E.g.) When set to "10", time constant in high-speed synchronous tapping will be 90% of that in
normal synchronous tapping.
---Setting range---
0 to 100(%)
【#3121】 tret Turret indexing

Select the validity of turret indexing.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
【#3122】 GRC Turret side gear ratio

Set the number of teeth on the turret side when the gear selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5)
is set to 00. Set a value of GRC so that the ratio of GRC to the spindle side gear ratio (#13057
SP057) will be 1:N (an integer).
If GRC is set to "0", it will be regarded as "1".
---Setting range---
0 to 32767
【#3123】 tret_spd Turret indexing speed

Set the turret end indexing speed when in turret indexing.
When this parameter is set to 0, it follows the value set for Orientation command speed (#3107).
---Setting range---
0 to 32767(r/min)
【#3124】 tret_t Turret indexing time constant

Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant to reach Limit rotation speed (slimt1) at gear 00
when in turret indexing. Set this parameter to a larger value than time constant in orientation
(#3115).
---Setting range---
0 to 30000 (ms)
【#3125】 tret_inpos Turret indexing in-position width

Set the position error range in which the index positioning complete signal is output when in turret
indexing. When this parameter is set to 0, the value of In-position width (#13024 SP024) will be used
for this width.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767(1°/1000)
【#3126】 tret_fin_off Index positioning complete signal OFF time

Set the time to forcedly turn OFF the index positioning complete signal since the indexing start signal
turns ON. If this period of time has not passed yet, the index positioning complete signal will not turn
ON even at the completion of index positioning.
---Setting range---
0 to 10000 (ms)
373
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#3127】 SPECSP Spindle specification
bit0: Select the gear changeover method.

0: Gear change type 1 (Gear is changed when the spindle stop signal is ON and when a gear
recommended by NC and the one selected are different)
1: Gear change type 2 (Gear is changed when the spindle stop signal and spindle gear shift signal
is ON)
---Setting range---
0x0000 to 0xffff (hexadecimal)
【#3128】 ori_spec Orientation control specification
bit0: Orientation imposition advance output

Reduce the orientation time by detecting an in-position faster.
The in-position detection width is changed from SP024(#13024) to ori_inp2.
0: Invalid 1: Valid
---Setting range---
0x0000 to 0xffff (hexadecimal)
【#3129】 cax_spec Spindle/C axis control specification

【#3130】 syn_spec Spindle synchronization control specification
bit0: Tool spindle synchronization II (hobbing) automatic compensation selection

1: Compensate hobbing axis delay (advance) with workpiece axis.
0: No compensation.
【#3131】 tap_spec Synchronous tapping control specification

【#3132】 ori_inp2 2nd in-position width for orientation

Set the in-position width when imposition advance output control (#3128/bit0) is valid. Reduce the
orientation time by setting a bigger value than the value of conventional SP024 and detecting an in-
position faster.
Conventional SP024 is used for 2nd in-position signal detection width.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (1deg/1000)
【#3133】 spherr Hobbing axis delay (advance) allowable angle

Set the allowable angle between the commanded position and actual position of hobbing axis when
it is in tool spindle synchronization II (hobbing) mode (X18AE ON), and also when hobbing axis and
workpiece axis are synchronizing (X18A9 ON).
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (1deg/1000)
【#3134】 sphtc Primary delay time constant for hobbing axis automatic compensation
Set the primary delay time constant of hobbing axis automatic compensation primary delay filter
control in tool spindle synchronization II (hobbing).
When set to 0, primary delay filter control is invalid.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (ms)
【#3135】 sfwd_g Feed forward gain for hobbing axis

Set the feed forward gain for the hobbing axis in tool spindle synchronization II (hobbing) mode.
---Setting range---
0 to 200 (%)
374
【#3137】 stap_ax_off High-speed synchronous tapping unsupported axis

【#3138】 motor_type Spindle motor type

Set the spindle motor type. The set type will be displayed on the drive
monitor screen, and it will be also output to the system configuration data.
---Setting range---
Character string within 26 characters including A-Z, a-z, 0-9, "." (decimal point), "-" (hyphen), "/"
(slash)
(Cleared by inputting "0".)
【#3140(PR)】 S_DINSp Speed observation input door No.

Set the door signal input in the drive unit.
Use this parameter only when the axis with a door signal belongs to several door groups.
The correspondence between the door signals and bits are as follows.
bit0 : Door1 signal
bit1 : Door2 signal
If the axis does not receive any door signal, set to "0".
An error (Y20 0027) will occur in the following cases.
- Several bits are enabled.
- Any bit other than those set in "#3071 S_DSlSp" is enabled.
---Setting range---
0000 to 0002 (HEX)
【#13001】 SP001 PGV Position loop gain non-interpolation mode

Set the position loop gain for "Non-interpolation" control mode.
When the setting value increases, the command tracking ability will enhance and the positioning
settling time can be shorter. However, the impact on the machine during acceleration/deceleration
will increase.
Use the selection command, the control mode "bit 2, 1, 0 = 000" in control input 4.
(Note) The control mode is commanded by NC.
---Setting range---
1 to 200 (1/s)
【#13002】 SP002 PGN Position loop gain interpolation mode

Set the position loop gain for "interpolation" control mode.
will increase.
Use the selection command, the control mode "bit 2, 1, 0 = 010 or 100" in control input 4.
When carrying out the SHG control, set SP035/bitC to "1".
---Setting range---
1 to 200 (1/s)
【#13003】 SP003 PGS Position loop gain spindle synchronization

Set the position loop gain for "spindle synchronization" control mode.
will increase.
Use the selection command, the control mode "bit 2, 1, 0 = 001" in control input 4.
When carrying out the SHG control, set SP036/bit4 to "1".
---Setting range---
1 to 200 (1/s)
【#13004】 SP004
375
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#13005】 SP005 VGN1 Speed loop gain 1

Set the speed loop gain.
Set this according to the load inertia size.
The higher setting value will increase the accuracy of control, however, vibration tends to occur.
If vibration occurs, adjust by lowering by 20 to 30%.
The final value should be 70 to 80% of the value at which the vibration stops.
---Setting range---
1 to 9999
【#13006】 SP006 VIA1 Speed loop lead compensation 1

Set the speed loop integral control gain.
The standard setting is "1900". Adjust the value by increasing/decreasing the value by about 100.
Raise this value to improve the contour tracking accuracy in high-speed cutting.
Lower this value when the position droop does not stabilize (when the vibration of 10 to 20Hz
occurs).
---Setting range---
1 to 9999
【#13007】 SP007 VIL1 Speed loop delay compensation 1

Set this parameter when the limit cycle occurs in the full-closed loop or overshooting occurs in
positioning.
When setting this parameter, make sure to set the torque offset "SP050(TOF)".
---Setting range---
0 to 32767
【#13008】 SP008 VGN2 Speed loop gain 2

Normally SP005(VGN1) is used.
By setting "SP035/bit1, SP035/bit9 or SP036/bit1=1", gain 2 can be used according to the
application.
Gain 2 can also be used by setting "Speed gain set 2 changeover request (control input 5/ bitC) = 1".
Refer to SP005(VGN1) for adjustment procedures.
---Setting range---
1 to 9999
【#13009】 SP009 VIA2 Speed loop lead compensation 2

Normally SP006(VIA1) is used.
application.
Refer to SP006(VIA1) for adjustment procedures.
---Setting range---
1 to 9999
【#13010】 SP010 VIL2 Speed loop delay compensation 2

Normally SP007(VIL1) is used.
application.
Refer to SP007(VIL1) for adjustment procedures.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767
【#13011】 SP011
【#13012】 SP012
376
【#13013】 SP013
【#13014】 SP014 PY1 Minimum excitation rate 1

Set the minimum value for the variable excitation rate. The standard setting is "50".
Set to "0" when using an IPM spindle motor.
If noise including gear noise is loud, select a small value. However, a larger setting value is more
effective for impact response.
(Note) When setting a value at "50 or more", check if there is no problem with gear noise, motor
excitation noise, vibration during low-speed rotation or vibration when the servo is locked during
orientation stop, etc.
When setting a value at "less than 50", check if there is no problem with the impact load response or
rigidity during servo lock.
---Setting range---
0 to 100 (%)
【#13015】 SP015 PY2 Minimum excitation rate 2

Normally, SP014(PY1) is used.
By setting "SP035/bit2, SP035/bitA or SP036/bit2=1", the excitation rate 2 can be used according to
the application.
The excitation rate 2 can also be used by setting "the minimum excitation rate 2 changeover request
(control input 5/ bitB) = 1". Refer to SP014(PY1) for adjustment procedures.
---Setting range---
0 to 100 (%)
【#13016】 SP016 DDT Phase alignment deceleration rate

Set the single-rotation position alignment deceleration rate for orientation stopping, phase alignment
while rotating and switching from non-interpolation mode to spindle synchronization mode while
rotating.
When the load inertia is larger, the setting value should be smaller.
When the setting value is larger, the orientation in-position and single-rotation position alignment
complete faster, but the impact applied on the machine will increase.
To change the deceleration rate only during rotation command (command F Δ T ≠ 0), set this
parameter together with SP070 (KDDT).
---Setting range---
1 to 32767 (0.1(r/min)/ms)
377
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#13017(PR)】 SP017 SPEC1 Spindle specification 1

Select the spindle specification.
fdir2
dfbx
seqh
vfb
fdir
msr
bit F-C : msr Motor series selection

0: 200V specification IM spindle motor
1: 200V specification IPM spindle motor
2: 400V specification IM spindle motor
3: 400V specification IPM spindle motor
4: 200V specification Tool spindle motor
bit B-5 :
bit 4 : fdir Position feedback
Set the machine side detector's installation polarity.
bit 3 : vfb Speed feedback filter
0: Disable 1: Enable (2250Hz)
bit 2 : seqh READY ON sequence
0: Normal 1: High-speed
bit 1 : dfbx Dual feedback control
Control the position FB signal in full closed control by the combination of a motor side detector and
machine side detector.
0: Stop 1: Start
Related parameters: SP051, SP052

bit 0 : fdir2 Speed feedback polarity
Set the motor side detector's installation polarity by a built-in motor.
378
【#13018(PR)】 SP018 SPEC2 Spindle specification 2

oplp
mkch
spsu
mpg
bit F-A :
bit 9 : mpg Earth fault detection
0: Disable 1: Enable (standard)
Set "0" and it is constantly "Enable" for MDS-DJ-SP Series.
bit 8 : spsu Command speed limit value
0: 33,750 r/min 1: 135,000 r/min
bit 7-6 :
bit 5 : mkch Coil switch function
bit 4-2 :
bit 1 : oplp Open loop control
This allows the operation in which no detector feedback signals are used.
It is used when adjusting the detector, etc.
bit 0 :
【#13019(PR)】 SP019 RNG1 Sub side detector resolution

[For semi-closed loop]
Set the same value as SP020 (RNG2). (Refer to the explanation of SP020.)
[For full-closed loop]

Set the number of pulses per revolution of the machine side detector.
When using ABZ pulse output detector (OSE-1024-3-15-68), set this combined with
SP097(RNG1ex).
SP019 = 4096
SP097 = -1
---Setting range---
When SP097=0, the setting range is from 0 to 32767 (kp)
When SP097 ≠ 0
For M700V, M70V, M70, E70: 0 to 65535 (p)
For C70: -32768 to 32767 (p)
379
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#13020(PR)】 SP020 RNG2 Main side detector resolution

When using the detector interface unit MDS-B-HR, use this with SP098(RNG2ex).
Detector
TS5691(128 teeth): SP020 = 2000
TS5691(180 teeth): SP020 = 2880
TS5691(256 teeth): SP020 = 4000
TS5691(384 teeth): SP020 = 6000
TS5691(512 teeth): SP020 = 8000
TS5690( 64 teeth): SP020 = 2000

TS5690( 90 teeth): SP020 = 2880
TS5690(128 teeth): SP020 = 4000
TS5690(192 teeth): SP020 = 6000
TS5690(256 teeth): SP020 = 8000
TS5690(384 teeth): SP020 =12000
ERM280(1200 teeth): SP020 = 4800

ERM280(2048 teeth): SP020 = 8000
MPCI : SP020 = 7200

MBE205: SP020 = 2000
Tool spindle motor

OSA18(-A48): SP020 = 260
---Setting range---
When SP098=0, the setting range is from 0 to 32767 (kp)
When SP098 ≠ 0
For M700V,M70V,M70,E70: 0 to 65535 (p)
For C70: -32768 to 32767 (p)
【#13021(PR)】 SP021 OLT Overload detection time constant

Set the detection time constant of Overload 1 (Alarm 50). (For machine tool builder adjustment)
---Setting range---
1 to 15300 (s)
【#13022】 SP022 OLL Overload detection level

Set the current detection level of "Overload 1" (Alarm 50) as a percentage against the motor short-
time rated output current. (For machine tool builder adjustment)
---Setting range---
1 to 200 (Short-time rated %)
【#13023】 SP023 OD1 Excessive error detection width (interpolation mode - spindle
synchronization)
Set the excessive error detection width for the interpolation mode and spindle synchronization.
When set to "0", the excessive error detection will be ignored, so do not set to "0".
---Setting range---
1 to 32767 (°)
380
【#13024】 SP024 INP In-position width

Set the positioning accuracy required to the machine.
Lower setting value increases the positioning accuracy, but makes the cycle time (settling time)
longer.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (1°/1000)
【#13025】 SP025 INP2 2nd in-position width

Use this when detecting an in-position different from normal in-position width such as advancing the
in-position signal. The adjustment procedure is the same as SP024 (INP).
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (1°/1000)
【#13026(PR)】 SP026 TSP Maximum motor speed

Set the maximum motor speed.
If the motor speed exceeds the set maximum speed, an overspeed alarm will occur.
---Setting range---
1 to 32767 (r/min)
【#13027】 SP027 ZSP Motor zero speed

Set the motor speed for detecting zero speed.
If the motor speed drops below the set speed, the zero speed signal turns ON.
---Setting range---
1 to 1000 (r/min)
【#13028】 SP028 SDTS Speed detection set value

Set the motor speed for detecting the speed.
If the motor speed drops below the set speed, the speed detection signal turns ON.
The standard setting is 10% of the maximum motor speed.
---Setting range---
10 to 32767 (r/min)
【#13029】 SP029 SDTR Speed detection reset width

Set the hysteresis width in which the speed detection changes from ON to OFF.
If the setting value is small, the speed detection will chatter easily.
---Setting range---
10 to 1000 (r/min)
【#13030】 SP030 SDT2 2nd speed detection setting value

Set the specified speed of the specified speed output.
When carrying out digital output of the specified speed output, set SP229/bitC to "1".
It is not available for MDS-DJ-SP Series.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (r/min)
【#13031(PR)】 SP031 MTYP Motor type

Set the control system of the spindle drive unit.
2200: Semi closed loop control
4200: Full closed loop control by using spindle side ABZ pulse output detector
6200: Full closed loop control by using spindle side serial output detector
381
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#13032(PR)】 SP032 PTYP Power supply type/ Regenerative resistor type
MDS-D2/DH2 Series: Power supply type

When connecting a power supply unit, set a code for each power supply unit.
ptyp
rtyp
amp
bit F-C : amp

Set the power backup function to be used.
No function used : 0
Deceleration and stop function at power failure : 8
bit B-8 : rtyp
When the emergency stop input signal of the power supply unit is "disabled"
MDS-D2-CV-37 / MDS-DH2-CV-37 : 04
MDS-D2-CV-75 / MDS-DH2-CV-75 : 08
MDS-D2-CV-110 / MDS-DH2-CV-110 : 11
MDS-D2-CV-185 / MDS-DH2-CV-185 : 19
MDS-D2-CV-300 / MDS-DH2-CV-300 : 30
MDS-D2-CV-370 / MDS-DH2-CV-370 : 37
MDS-D2-CV-450 / MDS-DH2-CV-450 : 45
MDS-D2-CV-550 / MDS-DH2-CV-550 : 55
MDS-DH2-CV-750 : 75
When the emergency stop input signal of the power supply unit is "enabled"
(Note) Set the power supply rotary switch to "4".
MDS-D2-CV-37 / MDS-DH2-CV-37 : 44
MDS-D2-CV-75 / MDS-DH2-CV-75 : 48
MDS-D2-CV-110 / MDS-DH2-CV-110 : 51
MDS-D2-CV-185 / MDS-DH2-CV-185 : 59
MDS-D2-CV-300 / MDS-DH2-CV-300 : 70
MDS-D2-CV-370 / MDS-DH2-CV-370 : 77
MDS-D2-CV-450 / MDS-DH2-CV-450 : 85
MDS-D2-CV-550 / MDS-DH2-CV-550 : 95
MDS-DH2-CV-750 : B5
MDS-DM2-SPV Series: Power supply type

Set as follows for the spindle drive section of the MDS-DM2-SPV.
ptyp
rtyp
amp
bit F-C : amp

bit B-8 : rtyp
Normal : 19
External emergency stop function: 59
382
MDS-DJ-SP Series: Regenerative resistor type

Set the regenerative resistor type.
0 0 0 0
emgx
rtyp
amp
bit F-8 : amp(bit F-C) / rtyp(bit B-8)

MR-RB12 or GZG200W39OHMK : 13
Setting prohibited : 17-1F
FCUA-RB22 : 24
FCUA-RB37 : 25
FCUA-RB55 : 26
FCUA-RB75/2 1 unit : 27
R-UNIT1 : 28
R-UNIT2 : 29
R-UNIT3 : 2A
R-UNIT4 : 2B
R-UNIT5 : 2C
FCUA-RB75/2 2 units connected in parallel: 2D
FCUA-RB55/2 2 units connected in parallel: 2E
Setting prohibited : 2F
bit 7-4 : emgx External emergency stop function
Set the external emergency stop function.
bit 3-0 :
383
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#13033】 SP033 SFNC1 Spindle function 1

vfct
bit F-C :
bit B-A : ovs Overshoot compensation
Set this parameter when overshooting occurs during positioning.
bitB,A=
11: Compensation type 3
Set the compensation amount in SP043(OVS1) and SP042(OVS2).

bit 9-8 : lmc Lost motion compensation type2
Set this parameter when the protrusion at quadrant change is too large.
bit9,8=
10: Compensation type 2
bit 7 : lmc2a Lost motion compensation 2 timing
0: Normal 1: Change
bit 6 :
bit 5-4 : vfct Jitter compensation pulse number
Suppress vibration by machine backlash when axis stops.
bit5,4=
00: Disable
01: 1 pulse
10: 2 pulse
11: 3 pulses
bit 3-0 :
384

Select the spindle function.
fhz3
bit F-D : nfd5 Depth of Notch filter 5

Set the depth of Notch filter 5 (SP088).
bit F,E,D=
000: - ∞
001: -18.1[dB]
010: -12.0[dB]
011: -8.5[dB]
100: -6.0[dB]
101: -4.1[dB]
110: -2.5[dB]
111: -1.2[dB]
bit C :
bit B-9 : nfd4 Depth of Notch filter 4
bit B,A,9=
000: - ∞
001: -18.1[dB]
010: -12.0[dB]
011: -8.5[dB]
100: -6.0[dB]
101: -4.1[dB]
110: -2.5[dB]
111: -1.2[dB]
bit 8 : pwm Current control
0: Standard current control 1: High frequency current control
bit7,6,5=
000: - ∞
001: -18.1[dB]
010: -12.0[dB]
011: -8.5[dB]
100: -6.0[dB]
101: -4.1[dB]
110: -2.5[dB]
111: -1.2[dB]
bit 4 : fhz3 Notch filter 3
0: Stop 1: Start (1125Hz)
385
MITSUBISHI CNC

bit3,2,1=
000: - ∞
001: -18.1[dB]
010: -12.0[dB]
011: -8.5[dB]
100: -6.0[dB]
101: -4.1[dB]
110: -2.5[dB]
111: -1.2[dB]
bit 0 :
【#13035(PR)】 SP035 SFNC3 Spindle function 3

bit F-D :
bit C : shgn SHG control in interpolation mode
0: Stop 1: Start
bit B :
bit A : pyn Excitation rate selection in interpolation mode
0: Select Excitation rate 1 1: Select Excitation rate 2
bit 9 : vgn Speed loop gain set selection in interpolation mode
0: Select Set 1 1: Select Set 2
bit 8-3 :
bit 2 : pyin Excitation rate selection in non-interpolation mode
The excitation rate after the in-position can be selected.
bit 1 : vgin Speed loop gain set selection in non-interpolation mode
The speed loop gain set after the in-position can be selected.
0: Select Set 1 1: Select Set 2
bit 0 :
386
【#13036(PR)】 SP036 SFNC4 Spindle function 4

bit F-8 :
bit 7 : mksl Coil selection in spindle synchronization mode
0: Select the coil commanded during synchronization 1: Select high-speed coil
bit 6-5 :
bit 4 : shgs SHG control in spindle synchronization mode
0: Stop 1: Start
bit 3 :
bit 2 : pys Excitation rate selection in spindle synchronization mode
bit 1 : vgs Speed loop gain set selection in spindle synchronization mode
0: Select Set 1 (SP005,SP006,SP007) 1: Select Set 2 (SP008,SP009,SP010)
bit 0 :
【#13037】 SP037 JL Load inertia scale

Set the motor axis conversion total load inertia including motor itself in proportion to the motor
inertia.
SV037(JL)=(Jm+Jl)/Jm×100
Jm: Motor inertia
Jl: Motor axis conversion load inertia
---Setting range---
0 to 5000 (%)
【#13038】 SP038 FHz1 Notch filter frequency 1

(Enabled at 50 or more.)
Related parameters: SP034/bit3-1
---Setting range---
0 to 2250 (Hz)
【#13039】 SP039 LMCD Lost motion compensation timing

Set this parameter when the lost motion compensation type2 timing does not match.
Adjust by increasing the value by 10 at a time.
---Setting range---
0 to 2000 (ms)
387
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#13040】 SP040 LMCT Lost motion compensation non-sensitive band

Set the non-sensitive band of the lost motion compensation in the feed forward control.
When "0" is set, 2°/1000 is set. Adjust by increasing the value by 1°/1000 at a time.
---Setting range---
-32768 to 32767 (1°/1000)
【#13041】 SP041 LMC2 Lost motion compensation 2

Set this parameter with SP048(LMC1) only to vary the lost motion compensation amount depending
on the command directions.
---Setting range---
-1 to 200 (Short-time rated %)
Note that when SP227/bit2 is "1", the range will be -1 to 20000 (Short-time rated 0.01%).
【#13042】 SP042 OVS2 Overshooting compensation 2

Set this parameter with SP043(OVS1) only to vary the lost motion compensation amount depending
on the command directions.
---Setting range---
【#13043】 SP043 OVS1 Overshooting compensation 1

Set this parameter when overshooting occurs during positioning. This compensates the motor torque
during positioning.
This is valid only when the overshooting compensation SP033 (SFNC1/ovs) is selected.
[Type 3 "When SP033/ bitB,A=11"]

Use this when performing overshoot compensation in the feed forward control during arc cutting
mode.
Set the compensation amount based on the motor short-time rated current.
Increase the value in increments of 1% to find the value where overshooting ceases.
[To vary compensation amount depending on the direction]

When SV042 (OVS2) is "0", change the SP043 (OVS1) value in both +/- directions to compensate.
To change the compensation amount depending on the command direction, set this with SP042
(OVS2).
(SP043: + direction, SP042: - direction, However, the directions may be opposite depending on
other settings. )
When "-1" is set, the compensation will not be performed in the command direction.
---Setting range---
【#13044】 SP044 OBS2 Disturbance observer gain

Set the disturbance observer gain. The standard setting is "100".
To use the disturbance observer, also set SP037(JL), SP045(OBS1) and SP226/ bitE.
---Setting range---
0 to 500 (%)
【#13045】 SP045 OBS1 Disturbance observer filter frequency

Set the disturbance observer filter band.
To use the disturbance observer, also set SP037(JL), SP044(OBS2) and SP226/ bitE.
---Setting range---
0 to 1000 (rad/s)
388

Related parameters: SP034/bit7-5
---Setting range---
0 to 2250 (Hz)
【#13047】 SP047 EC Inductive voltage compensation gain

Set the inductive voltage compensation gain. Normally, set to "100".
Lower the gain when the current FB peak exceeds the current command peak.
---Setting range---
0 to 200 (%)
【#13048】 SP048 LMC1 Lost motion compensation 1

Set this parameter when the protrusion (that occurs due to the non-sensitive band by friction, torsion,
backlash, etc.) at quadrant change is too large.
This sets the compensation torque at quadrant change (when an axis feed direction is reversed) by
Short-time rated %.
Whether to enable the lost motion compensation and the method can be set with other parameters.
[Type 2 "When SP033/bit9,8=10"]

Set the compensation amount based on the motor short-time rated current.
The standard setting is double of the friction torque. The compensation amount will be 0 when "0" is
set.
Related parameters: SP033/bit9-8, SP039, SP040, SP041, SP227/bit2
[To vary compensation amount depending on the direction]

When SP041 (LMC2) is "0", change SP048 (LMC1) value in both of +/- directions to compensate.
To vary the compensation amount depending on the command direction, set this with SP041
(LMC2).
(SP048: + direction, SP041: - direction, However, the directions may be opposite depending on
other settings. )
When "-1" is set, the compensation will not be performed in the command direction.
---Setting range---
【#13049】 SP049 FFC Acceleration rate feed forward gain

When a relative error in the synchronous control is too large, set this parameter to the axis that is
delaying.
The standard setting is "0". The standard setting in the SHG control is "50".
Adjust relative errors in acceleration/deceleration by increasing the value by 50.
---Setting range---
0 to 999 (%)
【#13050】 SP050 TOF Torque offset

Set the imbalance torque.
---Setting range---
389
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#13051】 SP051 DFBT Dual feed back control time constant

Set the control time constant in dual feed back.
When the function is valid, the standard setting is "100". When "0" is set, the value is 1 ms.
When the time constant is increased, the operation will get closer to the semi-closed control and the
limit of the position loop gain will be raised.
However, this cannot be used when the spindle slip occurs in machine configuration such as V-belt
drive.
Related parameters: SP017/bit1, SP052
---Setting range---
0 to 9999 (ms)
【#13052】 SP052 DFBN Dual feedback control non-sensitive band

Set the non-sensitive band in the dual feedback control.
Normally set to "0".
Related parameters: SP017/bit1, SP051
---Setting range---
0 to 9999 (1/1000°)
【#13053】 SP053 ODS Excessive error detection width (non-interpolation mode)

Set the excessive error detection width in non-interpolation mode.
Standard setting value: ODS = Maximum motor speed [r/min] × 6/PGV/2
When set to "0", the excessive error detection will not be performed.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (°)
【#13054】 SP054 ORE Overrun detection width in closed loop control

Set the overrun detection width in the full-closed loop control.
When the gap between the motor side detector and the machine side detector exceeds the set
value, it is judged as an overrun and "Alarm 43" is detected.
When "-1" is set, if the differential velocity between the motor side detector and the machine side
detector exceeds the 30% of the maximum motor speed, it will be judged as overrun and "Alarm 43"
will be detected.
When "0" is set, overrun will be detected with 2°.
In the full-closed loop control, normally set this parameter to "360". During V-belt drive, set to "-1".
---Setting range---
-1 to 32767 (°)
【#13055】 SP055 EMGx Max. gate off delay time after emergency stop
Set the time required to forcibly execute READY OFF after the emergency stop is input.
Normally set to "20000".
When "0" is set, READY OFF is forcibly executed with "7000ms".
When the set time is shorter than the time to decelerate and stop, the spindle will stop with the
dynamic brake after the set time is out.
Related parameters: SP056
---Setting range---
0 to 29900 (ms)
【#13056】 SP056 EMGt Deceleration time constant at emergency stop

Set the time constant used for the deceleration control at emergency stop. Set the time required to
stop from the maximum motor speed (TSP).
When "0" is set, the deceleration control is executed with "7000ms".
Related parameters: SP055
---Setting range---
0 to 29900 (ms)
390
【#13057(PR)】 SP057 GRA1 Spindle side gear ratio 1

Set the number of gear teeth on the spindle side when "the gear selection command (control input 4/
bit6, 5) "is set to "00".
---Setting range---
1 to 32767

bit6, 5) " is set to "01".
---Setting range---
1 to 32767

bit6, 5) " is set to "10".
---Setting range---
1 to 32767

bit6, 5) " is set to "11".
---Setting range---
1 to 32767
【#13061(PR)】 SP061 GRB1 Motor side gear ratio 1

Set the number of gear teeth on the motor side when "the gear selection command (control input 4/
bit6, 5) " is set to "00".
---Setting range---
1 to 32767

bit6, 5) " is set to "01".
---Setting range---
1 to 32767

bit6, 5)" is set to "10".
---Setting range---
1 to 32767

bit6, 5)" is set to "11".
---Setting range---
1 to 32767
【#13065】 SP065 TLM1 Torque limit 1

Set the torque limit value when "the torque limit (control input 1/bitA, 9, 8) " is set to "001".
---Setting range---
391
MITSUBISHI CNC

Set the torque limit value when "the torque limit (control input 1/bitA, 9, 8)" is set to "010".
---Setting range---

---Setting range---

---Setting range---
【#13069】 SP069 PCMP Phase alignment completion width

Set the single-rotation position alignment completion width for phase alignment and changing from
non-interpolation to spindle synchronization mode during rotation.
Set the rotation error that is required to the machine.
When the setting value decreases, the rotation error will decrease, but the cycle time (settling time)
will get longer. The standard setting is "875".
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (1°/1000)
【#13070】 SP070 KDDT Phase alignment deceleration rate scale

Set the scale for SP016 (DDT) to change the deceleration rate only during rotation command
(command F Δ T ≠ 0).
When the setting value increases, the single-rotation position alignment will be completed faster, but
the impact to the machine will also increase. When not using, set to "0".
---Setting range---
0 to 255 (1/16-fold)
【#13071】 SP071 DIQM Variable current limit during deceleration, lower limit value
Set this parameter to adjust the deceleration time by changing the current limit value during
deceleration depending on the motor speed.
As shown below, set the lower limit rate of the current limit in SP071 (DIQM), and use with SP072
(DIQN).
When DIQM is set to 100%, the standard current limit value in deceleration (TMLR) is applied.
100%
(TMLR)
DIQM
0 DIQN Motor speed
---Setting range---
0 to 999 (%)
392
【#13072】 SP072 DIQN Variable current limit during deceleration, break point speed
Set this parameter to adjust the deceleration time by changing the current limit value during
deceleration depending on the motor speed.
As shown below, set the lower limit rate of the current limit in SP071 (DIQM), and use with SP072
(DIQN).
When DIQM is set to 100%, the standard current limit value in deceleration (TMLR) is applied.
100%
(TMLR)
DIQM
0 DIQN Motor speed
---Setting range---
1 to 32767 (r/min)
【#13073】 SP073 VGVN Variable speed gain target value

If noise is bothersome during high speed rotation, it may be reduced by lowering the speed loop gain
at high speed.
Set this value to ensure the adequate response by suppressing noise and vibration at low speeds
and increasing the speed loop gain at high speeds for a high-speed spindle of machining center, etc.
As shown below, set the speed loop gain rate for the overspeed detection speed in SP073 (VGVN),
and use with SP074 (VGVS).
The overspeed detection speed (VLMT) is 115% of the maximum motor speed (TSP).
This function can be used when either Speed loop gain set 1 or Speed loop gain set 2 is selected.
Scale[%] Scale[%]
VGVN
(SP073)
>100
100 100
VGVN
(SP073)
<100
Motor speed Motor speed
[r/min] [r/min]
VGVS VLMT VGVS VLMT
(SP074) (SP026㬍1.15) (SP074) (SP026㬍1.15)
When lowering the speed loop gain at high speed When increasing the speed loop gain at high speed
---Setting range---
0 to 999 (%)
393
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#13074】 SP074 VGVS Variable speed gain change start speed

If noise is bothersome during high speed rotation, it may be reduced by lowering the speed loop gain
at high speed.
Set this value to ensure the adequate response by suppressing noise and vibration at low speeds
and increasing the speed loop gain at high speeds for a high-speed spindle of machining center, etc.
As shown below, set the speed loop gain rate for the overspeed detection speed in SP073 (VGVN),
and use with SP074 (VGVS).
The overspeed detection speed (VLMT) is 115% of the maximum motor speed (TSP).
This function can be used when either Speed loop gain set 1 or Speed loop gain set 2 is selected.
Scale[%] Scale[%]
VGVN
(SP073)
>100
100 100
VGVN
(SP073)
<100
Motor speed Motor speed
[r/min] [r/min]
VGVS VLMT VGVS VLMT
(SP074) (SP026㬍1.15) (SP074) (SP026㬍1.15)
When lowering the speed loop gain at high speed When increasing the speed loop gain at high speed
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (r/min)
【#13075】 SP075 DWSH Slip compensation scale during regeneration high-speed coil
Set the slip frequency scale during deceleration.
Normally, set to "0". (For machine tool builder adjustment)
---Setting range---
0 to 255 (1/16-fold)
【#13076】 SP076 DWSL Slip compensation scale during regeneration low-speed coil
Set the slip frequency scale at deceleration when using the low-speed coil.
Normally, set to "0". (For machine tool builder adjustment)
---Setting range---
0 to 255 (1/16-fold)
【#13077】 SP077 IQA Q axis current lead compensation

Set the current loop gain.
To use the coil switch function, set the current loop gain for when the high-speed coil is selected.
The setting value is determined by the motor's electrical characteristics so that the value is fixed to
each motor used.
Set the value given in the spindle parameter list. (For machine tool builder adjustment)
---Setting range---
1 to 20480
【#13078】 SP078 IDA D axis current lead compensation

each motor used.
---Setting range---
1 to 20480
394
【#13079】 SP079 IQG Q axis current gain

each motor used.
---Setting range---
1 to 8192
【#13080】 SP080 IDG D axis current gain

each motor used.
---Setting range---
1 to 8192
【#13081】 SP081 IQAL Q axis current lead compensation low-speed coil

When using coil switch function, set the current loop gain for when the low-speed coil is selected.
each motor used.
---Setting range---
1 to 20480
【#13082】 SP082 IDAL D axis current lead compensation low-speed coil

each motor used.
---Setting range---
1 to 20480
【#13083】 SP083 IQGL Q axis current gain low-speed coil

each motor used.
---Setting range---
1 to 8192
【#13084】 SP084 IDGL D axis current gain low-speed coil

each motor used.
---Setting range---
1 to 8192
【#13085】 SP085
【#13086】 SP086
395
MITSUBISHI CNC

Related parameters: SP034/bitB-9
---Setting range---
0 to 2250 (Hz)

Related parameters: SP034/bitF-D
---Setting range---
0 to 2250 (Hz)
【#13089】 SP089 TMKQ Spindle output stabilizing gain Q axis

Set the magnification of the torque current stabilizing gain. (For machine tool builder adjustment)
When set to "0", the torque current stabilization is disabled.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767
【#13090】 SP090 TMKD Spindle output stabilizing gain D axis

Set the magnification of the excitation current stabilizing gain. (For machine tool builder adjustment)
When set to "0", the excitation current stabilization is disabled.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767
【#13091】 SP091
【#13092】 SP092
【#13093】 SP093
【#13094】 SP094 MPV Magnetic pole error detection speed

In the magnetic pole position detection function, the command motor speed and motor speed during
the position command stop are monitored.
Set the command motor speed level and motor speed level during the position command stop in "r/
min" unit.
When the command motor speed level is set to "0", the magnetic pole position error is detected at
10r/min.
Set to "10" as a standard setting when the magnetic pole position error detection function is enabled.
This detects the magnetic pole position error when the motor speed is "100r/min".
Ten-thousands digit, Thousands digit ------------ Command motor speed level (10r/min)
Hundreds digit, Tens digit, Ones digit ----------- Motor speed level (10r/min)
---Setting range---
0 to 31999
396
【#13095】 SP095 VIAX Lead compensation scale during high-response acceleration/

deceleration
Set the magnification against delay/lead compensation (SP006) of the high-response acceleration/
deceleration (valid when SP226/ bitD is set to "1").
Normally, set to "0". Set this parameter to suppress overshooting when the speed is reached.
---Setting range---
0 to 10000 (0.01%)
【#13096】 SP096 SDW Speed slowdown allowable width

When the spindle slows down due to multiple cutting, set the processable speed as percentage
against the NC command speed.
When "0" is set, the magnification is the same as when "85" is set. When set to "-1", the allowable
width will be disabled.
---Setting range---
-1,0 to 100(%)
【#13097】 SP097 RNG1ex Extension sub side detector resolution

When setting the machine side detector resolution in pulse (p) unit, set the number of pulses to four
bite data of SP097 (high-order) and SP019 (low-order) in pulse (p) unit.
When SP097=0, the setting unit of SP019 is (kp).

Refer to SP019 for details.
Related parameters: SP019, SP020, SP098
---Setting range---
-1 to 32767
【#13098】 SP098 RNG2ex Extension main side detector resolution

When setting the motor side detector resolution in pulse (p) unit, set the number of pulses to four bite
data of SP098 (high-order) and SP020 (low-order) in pulse (p) unit.
When SP098=0, the setting unit of SP020 is (kp).

Refer to SP020 for details.
Related parameters: SP019, SP020, SP097
---Setting range---
-1 to 32767
【#13099】 SP099
【#13100】 SP100
【#13101】 SP101 TMA1 OMR-FF movement averaging filter time constant 1

---Setting range---
0 to 711 (0.01ms)
397
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#13102】 SP102 TMA2 OMR-FF movement averaging filter time constant 2

---Setting range---
0 to 711 (0.01ms)
【#13103】 SP103
【#13104】 SP104 FFR0 OMR-FF inner rounding compensation gain for G0

---Setting range---
0 to 20000 (0.01%)
【#13105】 SP105 FFR1 OMR-FF inner rounding compensation gain for G1

---Setting range---
0 to 20000 (0.01%)
【#13106】 SP106 PGM OMR-FF scale model gain

Set the scale model gain (position response) in OMR-FF control.
Set the same value as SP002(PGN).
Increase the setting value to perform a high-speed machining such as a fine arc or to improve the
path error.
Lower the value when vibration occurs during acceleration/deceleration.
---Setting range---
0 to 300 (rad/s)
【#13107】 SP107
【#13108】 SP108
【#13109】 SP109
【#13110】 SP110
398
【#13111】 SP111
【#13112】 SP112 IFF OMR-FF current feed forward gain

Set the current feed forward rate in OMR-FF control.
Setting value of 0 is equal to "10000(100%)" setting.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (0.01%)
【#13113】 SP113 OPLP Current command value for open loop

Set the current command value for when the open loop control is enabled.
When "0" is set, the state will be the same as when "50" is set.
The open loop control is enabled when "SP018/bit1" is set to "1".
---Setting range---
【#13114】 SP114 MKT Coil changeover gate cutoff timer

Set the time required to cut off the gate when turning OFF/ON the coil switch contactor.
The value should be longer than the coil switch contactor's OFF/ON time.
---Setting range---
0 to 3500 (ms)
【#13115】 SP115 MKT2 Coil changeover current limit timer

Set the time required to limit the current immediately after the coil switch contactor ON/OFF is
completed and the gate is turned ON.
---Setting range---
0 to 3500 (ms)
【#13116】 SP116 MKIL Coil changeover current limit value

Set the time required to limit the current immediately after the coil switch contactor ON/OFF is
completed and the gate is turned ON.
---Setting range---
【#13117】 SP117 SETM Excessive speed deviation timer

Set the time to detect the speed excessive error alarm.
Set the time required to the machine.
---Setting range---
0 to 60 (s)
【#13118(PR)】 SP118 MSFT Magnetic pole shift amount

Set the magnetic pole shift amount of IPM spindle motor.
During DC excitation of the initial setup: Set the same value displayed in the "AFLT gain" on the NC
monitor screen in SP225/bit4=1.
---Setting range---
-18000 to 18000 (electrical angle 0.01°)
399
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#13119】 SP119
【#13120】 SP120
【#13121】 SP121 MP Kpp Magnetic pole detection position loop gain

Set the position loop gain in the magnetic polar detection loop.
This is used in the initial magnetic polar detection when the IPM spindle motor is turned ON.
Set to "0" when using an IM spindle motor.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767
【#13122】 SP122 MP Kvp Magnetic pole detection speed loop gain

Set the speed loop gain in the magnetic polar detection loop.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767
【#13123】 SP123 MP Kvi Magnetic pole detection speed loop lead compensation
Set the speed loop lead compensation in the magnetic polar detection loop.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767
【#13124】 SP124 ILMTsp Magnetic pole detection current limit value

Set the current limit value for the magnetic polar detection loop.
---Setting range---
【#13125】 SP125 DA1NO D/A output ch1 data No. / Initial DC excitation level
Input the desired data number to D/A output channel.
When the DC excitation is running:

Use in the DC excitation function.
DC excitation: Set the initial excitation level when SP225/bit4=1.
---Setting range---
-32768 to 32767
【#13126】 SP126 DA2NO D/A output ch2 data No. / Final DC excitation level
Input the desired data number to D/A output channel.

DC excitation: Set the final excitation level when SP225/bit4=1.
---Setting range---
-32768 to 32767
400
【#13127】 SP127 DA1MPY D/A output ch1 output scale / Initial DC excitation time
Set the output scale in increments of 1/100.
When "0" is set, the scale is the same as when "100" is set.

DC excitation: Set the initial excitation time when SP225/bit4=1.
---Setting range---
-32768 to 32767 (1/100-fold)
【#13128】 SP128 DA2MPY D/A output ch2 output scale

Set the output scale in increments of 1/100.
When "0" is set, the scale is the same as when "100" is set.
---Setting range---
-32768 to 32767 (1/100-fold)
【#13129(PR)】 SP129
Set the unique constants for the spindle motor. (High-speed coil)
The setting value is determined by the motor's mechanical and electrical characteristics and
specifications, so normally set the value given in the spindle parameter list.
【#13130(PR)】 SP130
【#13131(PR)】 SP131
【#13132(PR)】 SP132
【#13133(PR)】 SP133
【#13134(PR)】 SP134
【#13135(PR)】 SP135
【#13136(PR)】 SP136
401
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#13137(PR)】 SP137
【#13138(PR)】 SP138
【#13139(PR)】 SP139
【#13140(PR)】 SP140
【#13141(PR)】 SP141
【#13142(PR)】 SP142
For IPM spindle motor
This parameter is used in initial magnetic pole detection of IPM spindle motor.
(1) Pulse application time: Set it in [μs] unit.(0 < application time < 350)
(2) Pulse application coil: To select a low-speed coil, add 1000 to the pulse application time.
(3) Polarity of estimated magnetic pole: When it is set to the reverse polarity, add "-" to the total of (1)
and (2).
E.g.: When performing 333μs pulse-applied magnetic pole estimation in a low-speed coil and
selecting the reverse polarity for the estimated polarity
SP142 = -(333+1000) = -1333
【#13143(PR)】 SP143
【#13144(PR)】 SP144
【#13145(PR)】 SP145
【#13146(PR)】 SP146
402
【#13147(PR)】 SP147
【#13148(PR)】 SP148
【#13149(PR)】 SP149
【#13150(PR)】 SP150
【#13151(PR)】 SP151
【#13152(PR)】 SP152
【#13153(PR)】 SP153
【#13154(PR)】 SP154
【#13155(PR)】 SP155
【#13156(PR)】 SP156
【#13157(PR)】 SP157
【#13158(PR)】 SP158
403
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#13159(PR)】 SP159
【#13160(PR)】 SP160
【#13161(PR)】 SP161
Set the unique constants for the spindle motor. (Low-speed coil)
【#13162(PR)】 SP162
【#13163(PR)】 SP163
【#13164(PR)】 SP164
【#13165(PR)】 SP165
【#13166(PR)】 SP166
【#13167(PR)】 SP167
【#13168(PR)】 SP168
【#13169(PR)】 SP169
【#13170(PR)】 SP170
404
【#13171(PR)】 SP171
【#13172(PR)】 SP172
【#13173(PR)】 SP173
【#13174(PR)】 SP174
【#13175(PR)】 SP175
【#13176(PR)】 SP176
【#13177(PR)】 SP177
【#13178(PR)】 SP178
【#13179(PR)】 SP179
【#13180(PR)】 SP180
【#13181(PR)】 SP181
【#13182(PR)】 SP182
405
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#13183(PR)】 SP183
【#13184(PR)】 SP184
【#13185(PR)】 SP185
【#13186(PR)】 SP186
【#13187(PR)】 SP187
【#13188(PR)】 SP188
【#13189(PR)】 SP189
【#13190(PR)】 SP190
【#13191(PR)】 SP191
【#13192(PR)】 SP192
【#13193】 SP193 LMR Change magnification for load meter standard output (High-speed
coil)
Set the standard output to be displayed as 100% in load meter using the short-time rated output
ratio.
To display the continuous rated output as 100%, set as follows.
Continuous rated output/Short-time rated output × 100
When "0" is set, normal display will be applied.
---Setting range---
0 to 100 (%)
406
【#13194】 SP194 LMN Base speed for load meter standard output (High-speed coil)
Set the base speed of the standard output to be displayed as 100% in load meter.
When "0" is set, the base speed of the short-time rated output will be applied.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (r/min)
【#13195】 SP195 LMRL Change magnification for load meter standard output (Low-speed
coil)
Set the standard output to be displayed as 100% in load meter using the short-time rated output
ratio.
To display the continuous rated output as 100%, set as follows.
Continuous rated output/Short-time rated output × 100
When "0" is set, normal display will be applied.
---Setting range---
0 to 100 (%)
【#13196】 SP196 LMNL Base speed for load meter standard output (Low-speed coil)
Set the base speed of the standard output to be displayed as 100% in load meter.
When "0" is set, the base speed of the short-time rated output will be applied.
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (r/min)
【#13197】 SP197
【#13198】 SP198
【#13199】 SP199
【#13200】 SP200
【#13201】 SP201
【#13202】 SP202
【#13203】 SP203
【#13204】 SP204
【#13205】 SP205
【#13206】 SP206
407
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#13207】 SP207
【#13208】 SP208
【#13209】 SP209
【#13210】 SP210
【#13211】 SP211
【#13212】 SP212
【#13213】 SP213
【#13214】 SP214
【#13215】 SP215
【#13216】 SP216
【#13217】 SP217
【#13218】 SP218
【#13219】 SP219
【#13220】 SP220
【#13221】 SP221
【#13222】 SP222
【#13223】 SP223
【#13224】 SP224
408

Select the spindle functions.
mohn
thtyp
dcd
ddir
thno
mken
ovsn
bit F-C : ovsn Overshooting compensation type 3 non-sensitive band

Set the non-sensitive band of the overshooting compensation type 3 in increments of 2°/1000.
In the feed forward control, set the non-sensitive band for the model position droop and ignore the
model overshooting. Set to "2°/1000" as a standard.
bit B-9 :
bit 8 : mken Coil switch allowance in deceleration control
This enables a coil changeover while decelerating after an emergency stop for a spindle motor with
coil changeover specification. A coil changeover may enable an excessive load inertia to stop within
the maximum delay time.
0: Normal (Disable) 1: Enable
bit 7-6 : thno
Select the thermistor characteristics.
When SP225/bit3=0 (N type) is selected
bit7,6=
00: For Mitsubishi spindle motor
When SP225/bit3=1 (P type) is selected
bit7,6=
00: KTY84-130 (Manufactured by Philips)
bit 5 : ddir Proximity switch signal enable edge
0: Falling edge 1: Rising edge
bit 4 : dcd DC excitation mode
0: Normal 1: Start
bit 3 : thtyp
Select the thermistor type.
0: Type N thermistor (Mitsubishi standard) 1: Type P thermistor
bit 2 : mohn Thermistor temperature detection
0: Normal 1: Disable (Except for TS5690/5691)
bit 1-0 :
409
MITSUBISHI CNC

pon
r2c
tqof
vup
obs
clt
bit F : clt Spindle monitor load inertia ratio

0: Normal 1: Display
bit E : obs Disturbance observer
0: Normal 1: Enable
bit D : vup High response acceleration / deceleration
This suppresses a temporal delay which occurs when the target speed is attained from acceleration
and when the spindle stops from deceleration.
0: Normal acceleration/deceleration 1: High response acceleration/deceleration Enable
bit C : tqof Spindle output stabilization during acceleration
0: Normal 1: Disable
bit B-9 :
bit 8 : r2c Temperature compensation adjustment indicator
0: Normal 1: Display
bit 7-6 :
bit 5 : pon IPM spindle pulse application magnetic pole estimation
0: Normal 1: Enable
bit 4-0 :
410

ccu
dos3
dis
bit F-C : dis Digital signal input selection

0: No signal
1: SLS (Safely Limited Speed) function door state signal
4: Proximity switch signal detection
Other settings: setting prohibited
bit B-A : dos3 Digital signal output 3 selection (MDS-DJ-SP)
bitB,A=
00: Disable
10: Contactor control signal output
bit 9-3 :
bit 2 : ccu Lost motion/overshoot compensation compensation amount setting unit
0: Short-time rated % 1: Short-time rated 0.01%
bit 1-0 :

411
MITSUBISHI CNC

omrffon
sto
sdt2
rps
ssc
bit F : ssc SLS (Safely Limited Speed) function

bit E :
bit D : rps Safely limited speed setting unit
0: Normal 1: 100°/min
bit C : sdt2 Specified speed output digital signal 2 output
0: Normal 1: Enable
bit B-9 :
bit 8 : sto Dedicated wiring STO function
Set this parameter to use dedicated wiring STO function.
0: Dedicated wiring STO function unused 1: Dedicated wiring STO function used
bit 7-1 :
bit 0 : omrffon OMR-FF control enabled
412

cse
nohis
pfdsr
bit F-C :
bit B : pfdsr
Set the spindle stop operation at a power failure when the deceleration and stop function at power
failure is enabled.
Normal (Coast to a stop at power failure) : 0
Deceleration and stop at power failure : 8
bit A-9 :
bit 8 : nohis History of communication error alarm between NC and DRV(34,36,38,39)
bit 7 : cse Spindle C axis command speed monitoring function
0: Normal setting (function disabled) 1: Function enabled
bit 6-0 :
【#13231】 SP231
【#13232】 SP232
【#13233】 SP233 IVC Voltage non-sensitive band compensation

When 100% is set, the voltage equivalent to the logical non-energized time will be compensated.
When "0" is set, 100% compensation will be performed.
Adjust in increments of 10% from the default value 100%.
If the value is too large, vibration or vibration noise may be generated.
---Setting range---
0 to 255 (%)
【#13234】 SP234
【#13235(PR)】 SP235 R2H Temperature compensation gain

Set the magnification in converting the thermistor temperature to the control compensation amount.
When "0" is set, the temperature compensation function is disabled.
When not using, or when using an IPM spindle motor, set to "0".
---Setting range---
0 to 400 (%)
413
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#13236(PR)】 SP236 WIH Temperature compensation time constant

Set the delay time constant from the thermistor temperature to the control compensation amount.
When "0" is set, the delay time constant is disabled.
When not using, or when using an IPM spindle motor, set to "0".
---Setting range---
0 to 150 (min)
【#13237(PR)】 SP237 TCF Torque command filter

Set the filter for the torque command.
The standard value is "500" when using the motor side detector TS5690 or TS5691.
---Setting range---
0 to 4500 (Hz)
【#13238】 SP238 SSCFEED Safely limited speed

Set the safely limited speed at the spindle end for the SLS (Safely Limited Speed) function.
---Setting range---
0 to 18000 (°/min)
However, when SP229/bitD is set to "1", the setting range is from -32768 to 32767 (100°/min).
【#13239】 SP239 SSCRPM Safely limited motor speed

Set the motor's safely limited speed for the SLS (Safely Limited Speed) function.
Set a value to hold the following relationship.
SP239=(SP238/360)×(SP057/SP061)
Related parameters: SP229/bitD, SP229/bitF, SP238
---Setting range---
0 to 32767 (r/min)
【#13240(PR)】 SP240
【#13241(PR)】 SP241
This is automatically set by the NC system.
【#13242(PR)】 SP242
【#13243(PR)】 SP243
【#13244(PR)】 SP244
【#13245(PR)】 SP245
【#13246(PR)】 SP246
414
【#13247(PR)】 SP247
【#13248(PR)】 SP248
【#13249(PR)】 SP249
【#13250(PR)】 SP250
【#13251(PR)】 SP251
【#13252(PR)】 SP252
【#13253(PR)】 SP253
【#13254(PR)】 SP254
【#13255(PR)】 SP255
【#13256(PR)】 SP256
415
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1.6 Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters

【#7900(PR)】 RCDAX_I Orthogonal coordinate horizontal axis name

Set the name of the horizontal axis in the orthogonal coordinate system.
---Setting range---
A,B,C,U,V,W,X,Y,Z
【#7901(PR)】 RCDAX_J Orthogonal coordinate vertical axis name

Set the name of the vertical axis in the orthogonal coordinate system.
---Setting range---
A,B,C,U,V,W,X,Y,Z
【#7902(PR)】 RCDAX_K Orthogonal coordinate height axis name

Set the name of the height axis in the orthogonal coordinate system.
---Setting range---
A,B,C,U,V,W,X,Y,Z
【#7903】 G92_CRD Origin zero set coordinate selection

Select the coordinate to preset when issuing an origin zero command (G92X_Y_Z_;).
0: Tool center coordinate
1: Holder center coordinate
【#7904】 NO_TIP Tool handle feed function selection

Select whether to enable the tool handle feed.
0: Enable (tool handle feed)
1: Disable (standard)
【#7905】 NO_ABS Selection of tool axis travel amount display at manual ABS switch ON/OFF
Select how to update the display of tool axis travel amount.
0: Update at ABS switch OFF
1: Update at every ON and OFF of ABS switch
【#7906】 PASSTYP Singular point passage type

Select the movement after passing a singular point.
0: Type 1
A/B axis rotation angle will be in the same sign direction as that when the tool center point
control started.
1: Type 2
C axis rotation amount on the singular point will be smaller.
【#7907】 CHK_ANG Near singular judgment angle

Set the angle for judging a position near the singular point.
When "0.000" is set, it will operate as 1.000(°).
---Setting range---
0.000 to 5.000 (°)
【#7908】 SLCT_PRG_COORD Programming coordinate system selection

Select the coordinate system for the programming coordinate.
0: Table coordinate system (coordinate system that rotates together with workpiece)
416
【#7909】 IJK_VEC_MR Posture vector mirror image selection

Select whether to enable the mirror image on the posture vector (IJK) when Type 2 is selected in
"#7906 PASSTYP".
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#7910】 SLCT_INT_MODE Interpolation method selection

Select the interpolation method.
0: Joint interpolation method
1: Single axis rotation interpolation method
【#7911】 SLCT_STANDARD_POS Rotary axis basic position selection

Select the basic position of the rotary axis.
0: Workpiece coordinate zero point
1: The position when the tool center point is commanded.
(Note) Even if the position is changed, it is not changed during tool center point control. It is changed
when next tool center point control will be commanded.
【#7912】 NO_MANUAL Selection of manual feed for 5-axis machining

Select whether to enable the manual feed for 5-axis machining.
0: Enable (manual feed for 5-axis machining)
1: Disable (standard manual feed)
【#7913】 MCHN_SPEED_CTRL Machine speed fluctuation suppression

Select whether to suppress the machine speed fluctuation due to rotary axis movement.
0: Not suppress
1: Suppress
(Note)This parameter is disabled when SSS control is enabled.
【#7914】 ROT_PREFILT Rotary axis prefilter time constant

Set the time constant for rotary axis prefilter.
Setting this parameter can smoothen the tool angle change (rotary axis' motion) under tool center
point control.
When set to "0", "Rotary axis prefiltering" will be disabled.
---Setting range---
0 to 200 (ms)
【#7915】 SLCT_SLOPE_CRD_MOD Rotary axis basic position in inclined surface machining

Set the basic position of rotary axis to establish the feature coordinate system when inclined surface
machining is commanded.
* The position will not change when inclined surface machining is running. It will change when the
next inclined surface machining is commanded.
0: At zero degree
1: At the start position
【#7920(PR)】 SLCT_T1 Rotary axis selection

Select in which axis direction to rotate the tool rotating type base-side rotary axis.
If the tool axis is inclined, use the second digit to set the axis direction in which the tool axis is
inclined.
0: Invalid
1: I axis rotation
2: J axis rotation
3: K axis rotation
(Note) 0 to 99 can be set from the screen, but if an invalid value is set, the operation error "M01 0127
Rot axis parameter error" will occur when the power supply is turned ON.
---Setting range---
0 to 3
12, 13, 21, 23, 31, 32
417
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#7921(PR)】 TIANGT1 Inclination angle

Set the inclination angle if the tool-rotation type base-side rotary axis is inclined. Set the angle
regarding CCW direction of the inclined plane as plus direction.
---Setting range---
-359.999 to 359.999 (°)
(Follow as "#1003 iunit Input setup unit".)
【#7922(PR)】 ROTAXT1 Rotary axis name

Set the name of the tool rotating type base-side rotary axis.
Set "0" when the axis has the mechanical axis specifications. (The setting is, however, invalid in the
tool center point control, R-Navi function.)
---Setting range---
0, A, B, C, U, V, W, X, Y, Z
【#7923】 DIR_T1 Rotation direction

Select the rotation direction of the tool rotating type base-side rotary axis.
0: CW
1: CCW
【#7924】 COFST1H Horizontal axis rotation center offset

Set the distance in the horizontal axis direction between the rotation centers of the tool-side rotary
axis and the base-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7925】 COFST1V Vertical axis rotation center offset

Set the distance in the vertical axis direction between the rotation centers of the tool-side rotary axis
and the base-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7926】 COFST1T Height axis rotation center offset

Set the distance in the height axis direction between the rotation centers of the tool-side rotary axis
and the base-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7927】 CERRT1H Horizontal axis rotation center error compensation amount

Set the error compensation amount in the horizontal axis direction of the tool rotating type base-side
rotary axis rotation center.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
(Follow as "#1006 mcmpunit Machine error compensation unit".)
【#7928】 CERRT1V Vertical axis rotation center error compensation amount

Set the error compensation amount in the vertical axis direction of the tool rotating type base-side
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
418
【#7930(PR)】 SLCT_T2 Rotary axis selection

Select in which axis direction to rotate the tool rotating type tool-side rotary axis.
inclined.
0: Invalid
1: I axis rotation
2: J axis rotation
3: K axis rotation
---Setting range---
0 to 3
12, 13, 21, 23, 31, 32
【#7931(PR)】 TIANGT2 Inclination angle

Set the inclination angle if the tool-rotation type tool-side rotary axis is inclined. Set the angle
---Setting range---
-359.999 to 359.999 (°)
【#7932(PR)】 ROTAXT2 Rotary axis name

Set the name of the tool rotating type tool-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---
0, A, B, C, U, V, W, X, Y, Z
【#7933】 DIR_T2 Rotation direction

Set the rotation direction of the tool rotating type tool-side rotary axis.
0: CW
1: CCW
【#7934】 COFST2H Horizontal axis rotation center offset

Set the distance in the horizontal axis direction between the spindle holder center and the rotation
center of the tool-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7935】 COFST2V Vertical axis rotation center offset

Set the distance in the vertical axis direction between the spindle holder center and the rotation
center of the tool-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7936】 COFST2T Height axis rotation center offset

Set the distance in the height axis direction between the spindle holder center and the rotation center
of the tool-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7937】 CERRT2H Horizontal axis rotation center error compensation amount

Set the error compensation amount in the horizontal axis direction of the tool rotating type tool-side
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
419
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#7938】 CERRT2V Vertical axis rotation center error compensation amount

Set the error compensation amount in the vertical axis direction of the tool rotating type tool-side
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7940(PR)】 SLCT_W1 Rotary axis selection

Select in which axis direction to rotate the table rotating type base-side rotary axis.
inclined.
0: Invalid
1: I axis rotation
2: J axis rotation
3: K axis rotation
---Setting range---
0 to 3
12, 13, 21, 23, 31, 32
【#7941(PR)】 TIANGW1 Inclination angle

Set the inclination angle if the table-rotation type base-side rotary axis is inclined. Set the angle
---Setting range---
-359.999 to 359.999 (°)
【#7942(PR)】 ROTAXW1 Rotary axis name

Set the name of the table rotating type base-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---
0, A, B, C, U, V, W, X, Y, Z
【#7943】 DIR_W1 Rotation direction

Set the rotation direction for the table rotating type base-side rotary axis.
0: CW
1: CCW
【#7944】 COFSW1H Horizontal axis rotation center offset

When all axes are at the machine basic point, set the distance in the horizontal axis direction from
the machine basic point to the rotation center of the base-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7945】 COFSW1V Vertical axis rotation center offset

When all axes are at the machine basic point, set the distance in the vertical axis direction from the
machine basic point to the rotation center of the base-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7946】 COFSW1T Height axis rotation center offset

When all axes are at the machine basic point, set the distance in the height axis direction from the
machine basic point to the rotation center of the base-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
420
【#7947】 CERRW1H Horizontal axis rotation center error compensation amount

Set the error compensation amount in the horizontal axis direction of the table rotating type base-
side rotary axis rotation center.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7948】 CERRW1V Vertical axis rotation center error compensation amount

Set the error compensation amount in the vertical axis direction of the table rotating type base-side
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7950(PR)】 SLCT_W2 Rotary axis selection

Set in which direction to rotate the table rotating type workpiece-side rotary axis.
inclined.
0: Invalid
1: I axis rotation
2: J axis rotation
3: K axis rotation
---Setting range---
0 to 3
12, 13, 21, 23, 31, 32
【#7951(PR)】 TIANGW2 Inclination angle

Set the inclination angle if the table rotating type workpiece-side rotary axis is inclined. Set the angle
regarding CCW direction of the inclined plane as minus direction.
---Setting range---
-359.999 to 359.999 (°)
【#7952(PR)】 ROTAXW2 Rotary axis name

Set the name of the table rotating type workpiece-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---
0, A, B, C, U, V, W, X, Y, Z
【#7953】 DIR_W2 Rotation direction

Set the rotation direction for the table rotating type workpiece-side rotary axis.
0: CW
1: CCW
【#7954】 COFSW2H Horizontal axis rotation center offset

When all axes are at the machine basic point, set the distance in the horizontal axis direction
between rotation centers of the base-side rotary axis and the workpiece-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
421
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#7955】 COFSW2V Vertical axis rotation center offset

When all axes are at the machine basic point, set the distance in the vertical axis direction between
rotation centers of the base-side rotary axis and the workpiece-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7956】 COFSW2T Height axis rotation center offset

When all axes are at the machine basic point, set the distance in the height axis direction between
rotation centers of the base-side rotary axis and the workpiece-side rotary axis.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7957】 CERRW2H Horizontal axis rotation center error compensation amount

Set the error compensation amount in the horizontal axis direction of the table rotating type
workpiece-side rotary axis rotation center.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7958】 CERRW2V Vertical axis rotation center error compensation amount

Set the error compensation amount in the vertical axis direction of the table rotating type workpiece-
side rotary axis rotation center.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
422
Appendix 1.7 Machine Error Compensation Parameters
Appendix 1.7 Machine Error Compensation Parameters

【#4000(PR)】 Pinc Machine error compensation increment method

Select the method to set the machine error compensation data.
0: Absolute amount method
1: Incremental amount method
【#4001+10(n-1)】 cmpax Basic axis <n-th axis>

Set a name of the basic axis for machine error compensation.
(1) For pitch error compensation, set the name of the axis to be compensated.
(2) For relative position compensation, set the name of the axis to be the basic axis.
Set "system No. + axis name" when using the multi-part system.
(Example) Z axis for 2nd part system: 2Z
When two or more same name exist, set "axis name + serial number".
The serial number is common to all systems.
(Example) If C axis of the 1st system has 2 axes, and another C axis in the 2nd system has 1 axis,
set the C axis of the 2nd system as "C3".
---Setting range---
Abbreviation as X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, etc.
【#4002+10(n-1)】 drcax Compensation axis <n-th axis>

Set a name of the compensation axis for machine error compensation.
(1) For pitch error compensation, set the same axis name as in "#4001 cmpax".
(2) For relative position compensation, set the name of the axis to be actually compensated.
Set "system No. + axis name" when using the multi-part system.
(Example) Z axis for 2nd part system: 2Z
When two or more same name exist, set "axis name + serial number".
The serial number is common to all systems.
(Example) If C axis of the 1st system has 2 axes, and another C axis in the 2nd system has 1 axis,
set the C axis of the 2nd system as "C3".
---Setting range---
Abbreviation as X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, etc.
【#4003+10(n-1)】 rdvno Division point number at reference position <n-th axis>

Set the compensation data No. corresponding to the reference position. As the reference position is
actually the base position, there is no compensation No. Therefore set the number that is
decremented by 1.
(Note) When two-way pitch error compensation is enabled, set compensation data No.
corresponding to reference point in shifting in plus direction.
---Setting range---
4101 to 5124
【#4004+10(n-1)】 mdvno Division point number at the most negative side <n-th axis>
Set the compensation data No. at the farthest end on the negative side.
(Note) When the axis moves in positive direction with two-way pitch error compensation enabled, set
compensation data No. of which locates on the nearest point to negative side. The
compensation point should be set with even number.
---Setting range---
4101 to 5124
423
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#4005+10(n-1)】 pdvno Division point number at the most positive side <n-th axis>
Set the compensation data No. at the farthest end on the positive side.
(Note) When the axis moves in negative direction with two-way pitch error compensation enabled,
set compensation data No. of which locates on the nearest point to positive side. The
compensation point should be set with even number.
---Setting range---
4101 to 5124
【#4006+10(n-1)】 sc Compensation scale factor <n-th axis>

Set the scale factor for the compensation amount.
---Setting range---
0 to 99
【#4007+10(n-1)】 spcdv Division interval <n-th axis>

Set the interval to divide the basic axis.
Each compensation data will be the compensation amount for each of these intervals.
---Setting range---
1 to 9999999 (control unit applied)
【#4008+10(n-1)】 twopc Two-way pitch error compensation <n-th axis>

Select whether to enable two-way pitch error compensation.
0: Disable
1: Enable
【#4009+10(n-1)】 refcmp Reference position compensation amount <n-th axis>

When two-way pitch error compensation is enabled, set the compensation amount of the reference
position when the axis moves to the position from the opposite direction of the zero point return.
---Setting range---
-32768 to 32767
(Note) The actual compensation amount will be the value obtained by multiplying the setting value
with the compensation scale.
【#4101 - 5124】
Set the compensation amount for each axis.
---Setting range---
-32768 to 32767
(Note) The actual compensation amount will be the value obtained by multiplying the setting value
with the compensation scale.
424
Appendix 1.8 PLC Constants

Some of the parameters may be fixed according to the usage purpose. Refer to "Appendix Contents of bit
selection parameters #6449 to #6496".
【#6401,6402 - 6495,6496】 R7800-Low,R7800-High - R7847-Low,R7847-High Bit selection

This is the bit type parameter used in the PLC program (ladder).
Even if the data is set in the R register that corresponds to the PLC side when this parameter is
displayed, the screen will not change. Enter a different screen once, and then select this screen
again.
Some of the parameters following #6449 may be fixed according to the usage purpose.
0 : OFF
1 : ON
【#6497,6498 - 6595,6596】 R7848-Low,R7848-High - R7897-Low,R7897-High Bit selection

expansion
This is the bit type parameter (expansion) used in the PLC program (ladder).
again.
0 : OFF
1 : ON
425
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#16000 - 16703】 T0 - T703 PLC timer <10ms/100ms>

Set the time for the timer used in the PLC program (ladder).
The 10ms timer and 100ms timer are identified by the command used.
(Note1) This setting value is valid when bit selection parameter "#6449/bit0" is set to "0".
(Note2) Setting the timer setting value from the setting and display unit
The timer T setting value can be set with the following two methods.
- Method to validate the setting value (Kn) programmed with the sequence program (fixed
timer)
- Method to validate the setting value set from the setting and display unit (variable timer)
(Note3) As described bellow, the setting method of timer T and No. of points can be set with the bit
selection parameters (#6454/bit0 to bit3).
- #6454/bit0=0, bit1=0, bit2=0, bit3=0
No. of points: 0
Range: None
Setting method: All fixed timers
- #6454/bit0=1, bit1=0, bit2=0, bit3=0
No. of points: 100
Range: #16000 to #16099
Setting method: Set above range with variable timers.
- #6454/bit0=0, bit1=1, bit2=0, bit3=0
No. of points:200
Range: #16000 to #16199
- #6454/bit0=1, bit1=1, bit2=0, bit3=0
No. of points: 300
Range: #16000 to #16299
- #6454/bit0=0, bit1=0, bit2=1, bit3=0
No. of points: 400
Range: #16000 to #16399
- #6454/bit0=1, bit1=0, bit2=1, bit3=0
No. of points: 500
Range: #16000 to #16499
- #6454/bit0=0, bit1=1, bit2=1, bit3=0
No. of points: 600
Range: #16000 to #16599
- #6454/bit0=1, bit1=1, bit2=1, bit3=0
No. of points: All points
Range: #16000 to #16703
Setting method: All variable timers
---Setting range---
0 to 32767( x 10ms or x 100ms)
426
【#17000 - 17063】 ST0 - ST63 PLC integrated timer <100ms INC.>

Set the time for the integrated timer used with the PLC program (ladder).
(Note2) Setting the timer setting value from the setting and display unit
The timer T setting value can be set with the following two methods.
integrated timer)
- Method to validate the setting value set from the setting and display unit (variable integrated
timer)
(Note3) As described bellow, the setting method of timer ST and No. of points can be set with the bit
selection parameters (#6453/bit5 to bit7).
- #6453/bit5=0, bit6=0, bit7=0
No. of points: 0
Range: None
Setting method: All fixed integrated timers
- #6453/bit5=1, bit6=0, bit7=0
No. of points: 20
Range: #17000 to #17019
Setting method: Set above range with variable integrated timer.
- #6453/bit5=0, bit6=1, bit7=0
No. of points: 40
Range: #17000 to #17039
Setting method: Set above range with variable integrated timer.
- #6453/bit5=1, bit6=1, bit7=0
Range: #17000 to #17063
Setting method: All variable integrated timers
---Setting range---
0 to 32767( x 100ms)
427
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#17200 - 17455】 C000 - C255 Counter

Set the time for the counter used with the PLC program (ladder).
(Note2) Setting the counter setting value from the setting and display unit
The counter C setting value can be set with the following two methods.
counter)
- Method to validate the setting value set from the setting and display unit (variable counter)
(Note3) As described bellow, the setting method of counter C and No. of points can be set with the
bit selection parameters (#6454/bit4 to bit7).
- #6454/bit4=0, bit5=0, bit6=0, bit7=0
No. of points: 0
Range: None
Setting method: All fixed counters
- #6454/bit4=1, bit5=0, bit6=0, bit7=0
No. of points: 40
Range: #17200 to #17239
Setting method: Set above range with variable counter.
- #6454/bit4=0, bit5=1, bit6=0, bit7=0
No. of points: 80
Range: #17200 to #17279
- #6454/bit4=1, bit5=1, bit6=0, bit7=0
No. of points: 120
Range: #17200 to #17319
- #6454/bit4=0, bit5=0, bit6=1, bit7=0
No. of points: 160
Range: #17200 to #17359
- #6454/bit4=1, bit5=0, bit6=1, bit7=0
No. of points: 200
Range: #17200 to #17399
- #6454/bit4=0, bit5=1, bit6=1, bit7=0
No. of points: 240
Range: #17200 to #17439
- #6454/bit4=1, bit5=1, bit6=1, bit7=0
Range: #17200 to #17455
Setting method: All variable counters
---Setting range---
0 to 32767
【#18001 - 18150】 R7500,7501 - R7798,7799 PLC constant (Base area)

Set the value to be set in the data type R register used in the PLC program (ladder).
displayed. The screen will not change.Enter a different screen once, and then select this screen
again.
---Setting range---
-99999999 to 99999999
【#18151-18900】 R8300,8301 - R9798,9799 PLC constant (Extension area)

Set the value to be set in the data type R register(R8300 to R9799) used in the PLC program
(ladder).
again.
#18151 to #18900 is used as the PLC constant extended area.
The area is valid for the number of PLC constant extension points ("#1326 PLC Const Ext. Num"
setting value), starting with #18151.
---Setting range---
-99999999 to 99999999
428
Appendix 1.9 Macro List

【#7001】 M[01] Code

Set the M code used for calling out the macro with the M command.
Select codes to be entered other than the codes basically required by the machine and M codes of
M0, M1, M2, M30, M96 through M99, and M198.
This is valid when "#1195 Mmac" is set to "1".
---Setting range---
0 to 9999
【#7002】 M[01] Type

Set the macro call out type.
0: Equivalent to M98 P △△△△ ;

1: Equivalent to G65 P △△△△ ;
3: Equivalent to G66.1 P △△△△ ;
Others: Equivalent to M98 P △△△△ ;
【#7003】 M[01] Program No.

Set the No. of the program or file name to be called out. The file name can contain up to 32
characters.
---Setting range---
Program name or file name (up to 32 characters)
【#7011】 M[02] Code

---Setting range---
0 to 9999
【#7012】 M[02] Type



characters.
---Setting range---
429
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#7021】 M[03] Code

---Setting range---
0 to 9999
【#7022】 M[03] Type



characters.
---Setting range---
【#7031】 M[04] Code

---Setting range---
0 to 9999
【#7032】 M[04] Type



characters.
---Setting range---
【#7041】 M[05] Code

---Setting range---
0 to 9999
430
【#7042】 M[05] Type



characters.
---Setting range---
【#7051】 M[06] Code

---Setting range---
0 to 9999
【#7052】 M[06] Type



characters.
---Setting range---
【#7061】 M[07] Code

---Setting range---
0 to 9999
【#7062】 M[07] Type


431
MITSUBISHI CNC

characters.
---Setting range---
【#7071】 M[08] Code

---Setting range---
0 to 9999
【#7072】 M[08] Type



characters.
---Setting range---
【#7081】 M[09] Code

---Setting range---
0 to 9999
【#7082】 M[09] Type



characters.
---Setting range---
432
【#7091】 M[10] Code

---Setting range---
0 to 9999
【#7092】 M[10] Type



characters.
---Setting range---
【#7102】 M2mac Type

Set the type for when calling out the macro with the 2nd miscellaneous command.
The macro will be called out with the "#1170 M2name" address command when "#1198 M2mac" is
set to “1”.

【#7103】 M2mac Program No.

Set the program No. for when calling out the macro with the 2nd miscellaneous command.
The macro will be called out with the "#1170 M2name" address command when "#1198 M2mac" is
set to “1”.
characters.
---Setting range---
【#7201】 G[01] Code

Set the G code to be used when calling the macro with a G command.
Do not set a G code used in the system.
G101 to G110 and G200 to G202 are user macro I codes. However, if a parameter is set for the G
code call code, the G code call will have the priority, and these cannot be used as the user macro I.
---Setting range---
1 to 999
【#7202】 G[01] Type


433
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#7203】 G[01] Program No.

characters.
---Setting range---
【#7211】 G[02] Code

---Setting range---
1 to 999
【#7212】 G[02] Type



characters.
---Setting range---
【#7221】 G[03] Code

---Setting range---
1 to 999
【#7222】 G[03] Type



characters.
---Setting range---
434
【#7231】 G[04] Code

---Setting range---
1 to 999
【#7232】 G[04] Type



characters.
---Setting range---
【#7241】 G[05] Code

---Setting range---
1 to 999
【#7242】 G[05] Type



characters.
---Setting range---
【#7251】 G[06] Code

---Setting range---
1 to 999
435
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#7252】 G[06] Type



characters.
---Setting range---
【#7261】 G[07] Code

---Setting range---
1 to 999
【#7262】 G[07] Type



characters.
---Setting range---
【#7271】 G[08] Code

---Setting range---
1 to 999
【#7272】 G[08] Type


436

characters.
---Setting range---
【#7281】 G[09] Code

---Setting range---
1 to 999
【#7282】 G[09] Type



characters.
---Setting range---
【#7291】 G[10] Code

---Setting range---
1 to 999
【#7292】 G[10] Type



characters.
---Setting range---
437
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#7302】 Smac Type

Set the type for when calling the macro with an S command.
This is valid when "#1196 Smac" is set to “1”.

【#7303】 Smac Program No.

Set the program No. for when calling the macro with an S command.
This is valid when "#1196 Smac" is set to “1”.
characters.
---Setting range---
【#7312】 Tmac Type

Set the type for when calling the macro with a T command.
This is valid when "#1197 Tmac" is set to “1”.

【#7313】 Tmac Program No.

Set the program No. for when calling the macro with a T command.
This is valid when "#1197 Tmac" is set to “1”.
characters.
---Setting range---
【#7401】 ASCII[01] Valid

The ASCII code macro parameters (#7402 to 7405) are validated.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
【#7402】 ASCII[01] Code

Set the ASCII code used to call macros with the ASCII code.
L system: A,B,D,F,H,I,J,K,M,Q,R,S,T
M system: A,B,F,H,I,K,M,Q,R,S,T
【#7403】 ASCII[01] Type

Set the macro call type.
0: M98
1: G65
2: G66
3: G66.1
【#7404】 ASCII[01] Program No.

Set the program No. called with macro call.
---Setting range---
438
【#7405】 ASCII[01] Variable

When the call type is "0", set the variable No. set after the ASCII code.
---Setting range---
100 to 149
【#7411】 ASCII[02] Valid

The ASCII code macro parameters (#7412 to 7415) are validated.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
【#7412】 ASCII[02] Code

Set the ASCII code used to call macros with the ASCII code.
L system: A,B,D,F,H,I,J,K,M,Q,R,S,T
M system: A,B,F,H,I,K,M,Q,R,S,T
【#7413】 ASCII[02] Type

Set the macro call type.
0: M98
1: G65
2: G66
3: G66.1
【#7414】 ASCII[02] Program No.

Set the program No. called with macro call.
---Setting range---
【#7415】 ASCII[02] Variable

When the call type is "0", set the variable No. set after the ASCII code.
---Setting range---
100 to 149
439
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1.10 Position Switches

【#7500】 Pcheck High-speed switching of position switch

Specify whether to perform position switch area checking at high speeds.
0: Do not perform position switch area checking at high speed (do it the same as before).
1: Perform position switch area checking at high speed.
【#7501】 PSW1 axis Axis name

Specify the name of the axis for which a position switch is provided.
---Setting range---
X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, or C axis address
【#7502】 PSW1 dog1 Imaginary dog position 1

When the machine enters the range between imaginary dog positions 1 and 2, a signal is output to
the PLC.
1st part system device: X1D00
2nd part system device: X1D20
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
【#7504】 PSW1 check Selection of area check method

When position switch area checking at high speed is selected, specify the mode of area checking,
i.e., whether to use the command type machine position or detector feedback position, for each
position switch.
0: Use the command type machine position as the machine position for position switch area
checking.
1: Use the detector feedback position as the machine position for position switch area checking.
(Note) This parameter is valid only when “1” set in "#7500 Pcheck".

---Setting range---

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
440

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

position switch point.
checking.

---Setting range---

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

checking.

---Setting range---
441
MITSUBISHI CNC

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

checking.

---Setting range---

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

checking.
442

---Setting range---

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

checking.

---Setting range---

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
443
MITSUBISHI CNC

checking.

---Setting range---

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

checking.

---Setting range---

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
444

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

checking.

---Setting range---

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

checking.

---Setting range---
445
MITSUBISHI CNC

the PLC.
1st part system device: X1D0A
2nd part system device: X1D2A
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

the PLC.
1st part system device: X1D0A
2nd part system device: X1D2A
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

checking.

---Setting range---

the PLC.
1st part system device: X1D0B
2nd part system device: X1D2B
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

the PLC.
1st part system device: X1D0B
2nd part system device: X1D2B
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

checking.
446

---Setting range---

the PLC.
1st part system device: X1D0C
2nd part system device: X1D2C
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

the PLC.
1st part system device: X1D0C
2nd part system device: X1D2C
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

checking.

---Setting range---

the PLC.
1st part system device: X1D0D
2nd part system device: X1D2D
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

the PLC.
1st part system device: X1D0D
2nd part system device: X1D2D
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
447
MITSUBISHI CNC

checking.

---Setting range---

the PLC.
1st part system device: X1D0E
2nd part system device: X1D2E
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

the PLC.
1st part system device: X1D0E
2nd part system device: X1D2E
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

checking.

---Setting range---

the PLC.
1st part system device: X1D0F
2nd part system device: X1D2F
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
448

the PLC.
1st part system device: X1D0F
2nd part system device: X1D2F
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

checking.

---Setting range---

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

checking.

---Setting range---
449
MITSUBISHI CNC

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

checking.

---Setting range---

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

checking.
450

---Setting range---

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

checking.

---Setting range---

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
451
MITSUBISHI CNC

checking.

---Setting range---

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

checking.

---Setting range---

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)
452

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

checking.

---Setting range---

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

the PLC.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

checking.
453
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1.11 Open Parameters

【#29001】 Open param 1

Set LONG data.
#29001 to #29896 are used as parameter range where C language modules can be used arbitrarily.
---Setting range---
-
【#29901】 Open param 2

Set DOUBLE data.
#29901 to #29996 are used as parameter range where C language modules can be used arbitrarily.
---Setting range---
-
454
Appendix 1.12 Device Open Parameters
Appendix 1.12 Device Open Parameters

【#40001-40100】 Device Open Parameters

<Data typ>
Set the data format (BYTE, WORD, DWORD, WORD(BIT)) of the assignment area.
0:WORD
1:DWORD
2:BYTE
3:WORD(BIT)
<Data no>
Set the number of data in the assignment area. The number to be designated varies depending on
the unit designated by the data format.
0 to 3000
(Depends on the device assignment and data format.)
<Disp typ>
Designate the status of data display format, display restrictions and input protection.
bit0: Cancellation of protection for input
Select whether to check the input protection for the data protection key 2 on the group details
screen.
(Note) The name of data protection key differs between machine tool builders. Refer to manuals
issued by each machine tool builder for details.
0: Check
1: Not check
bit1: Cancellation of restriction on display
Select whether to display the group details screen even when a machine tool builder password is not
entered.
0: Not display
1: Display
bit4: BCD format
Display the data of the group details screen in BCD format.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
bit5: BIT format
Display the data of the group details screen in BIT format.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
bit6: HEX format (Hexadecimal format)
Display the data of the group details screen in HEX format.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
bit7: Sign (Decimal format only)
Select whether to display the data of the group details screen in a decimal format with/without a sign.
0: With sign
1: Without sign
455
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1.13 SRAM Open Parameters

【#41001-41100】 SRAM Open Parameters

<Data typ>
Set the data type (CHAR, SHORT, LONG, DOUBLE) of the assignment area.
1: CHAR
2: SHORT
3: LONG
4: DOUBLE
<Data no>
Set the number of data in the assignment area. The number to be designated varies depending on
the unit and free area designated by the data format.
0 to 9999999
(Depends on the data format and free area)
<Disp typ>
Designate the status of data display format, display restrictions and input protection.
bit0: Cancellation of protection for input
Select whether to check the input protection on data protection key 2 on the group details screen.
(Note) The name of data protection key differs between machine tool builders. Refer to manuals
issued by each machine tool builder for details.
0: Check
1: Not check
bit1: Cancellation of restriction on display
Select whether to display the group details screen even when a machine tool builder password is not
entered.
0: Not display
1: Display
bit4: BCD format
Display the data of the group details screen in BCD format.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
bit5: BIT format
Display the data of the group details screen in BIT format.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
bit6: HEX format (Hexadecimal format)
Display the data of the group details screen in HEX format.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
bit7: Sign (Decimal format only)
Select whether to display the data of the group details screen in a decimal format with/without a sign.
0: With sign
1: Without sign
456
Appendix 1.14 CC-Link Parameters

【#24001+40(n-1)(PR)】 SLn station No. CC-Link station No.

Set the station No. of the CC-Link I/F unit.
"n" represents the expansion slot No.(n=1 to 3)
-1: Invalid
0: Master station
1 to 64: Slave station
---Master station---
Set a value within the setting range.
---Local/standby master station---
---Setting range---
-1 to 64
【#24002+40(n-1)(PR)】 SLn line-spd&Mode CC-Link transmission rate and mode

Select the transmission rate and operation mode of the CC-Link I/F unit.
<Online mode>
0 : 156Kbps
1 : 625Kbps
2 : 2.5Mbps
3 : 5Mbps
4 : 10M
<Circuit test mode>
5 : 156Kbps
6 : 625Kbps
7 : 2.5Mbps
8 : 5Mbps
9 : 10Mbps
<Hardware test mode>
10 : 156Kbps
11 : 625Kbps
12 : 2.5Mbps
13 : 5Mbps
14 : 10Mbps
(Note) Perform hardware test after removing the CC-Link cable.
---Setting range---
0 to 14
【#24003+40(n-1)(PR)】 SLn set fault sta Setting of data link faulty station
Select whether to clear or hold the data input from the data link faulty station.
0: Clear
1: Hold
(Note) Refer to "CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (SH(NA)-080394E-E)" for the
details of the functions.
Set to "0" or "1".
Set to "0" or "1".
457
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#24004+40(n-1)】 SLn PLC stop set Setting at PLC STOP

Set whether to refresh or compulsorily clear the slave stations at PLC STOP.
0: Refresh
1: Compulsorily clear
Set to "0" or "1".
Set to "0" or "1".
【#24005+40(n-1)(PR)】 SLn occ stations Number of occupied stations

Set the number of occupied local and standby master stations.
Set to "0".
Set to either of "1" to "4".
---Setting range---
0 to 4
【#24006+40(n-1)(PR)】 SLn extended cyc Extended cyclic setting

Set the magnification for the extended cyclic operation of the local station whose type corresponds
to Ver.2.
Set "1" for the local station whose type corresponds to Ver.1.
This function is out of specifications when the protocol version is Ver.1. The setting for the local
station is fixed to "1".
Set to "0".
Set to either of "1", "2", "4" or "8".
---Setting range---
0,1,2,4,8 (fold)
【#24007+40(n-1)】 SLn conn modules Number of connected modules

Set the total number of remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations, standby master
station and reserved stations connected to the master station.
Set to "0".
---Setting range---
0 to 64 (modules)
【#24008+40(n-1)】 SLn num of retries Number of retries

Set the number of retries for when a communication error occurs.
Set to either of "1" or "7".
Set to "0".
---Setting range---
0 to 7 (times)
458
【#24009+40(n-1)】 SLn auto ret mdls Number of automatic return modules

Set the total number of remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations and standby master
station that can be returned to system operation by a single link scan.
Set to either of "1" or "10".
Set to "0".
---Setting range---
0 to 10 (modules)
【#24010+40(n-1)(PR)】 SLn STBY master st Standby master station

Set the station No. of the standby master station.
Set "0" when no standby master station is provided.
Set "0" (fixed) for the local station.
Set "1" (fixed) for the standby station.
---Setting range---
0 to 64
【#24011+40(n-1)】 SLn ope at NC down Operation at NC down

Set the data link status for when the master station failure occurs.
0: Fixed to stop
Set to "0" (fixed).
Set to "0".
【#24012+40(n-1)】 SLn scan mode Scan mode

Select whether to synchronize the link scan with one ladder scan.
0: Fixed to synchronize
Set to "0" (fixed).
Set to "0".
【#24013+40(n-1)】 SLn delay time Delay time

Set the delay time.
0: (Fixed value)
Set to "0" (fixed).
Set to "0".
459
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#24014+40(n-1)】 SLn RX dev name Remote input (RX) refresh device name
Set the refresh device name of the remote input (RX) to be automatically refreshed.
(Example) X
Set "0" when no setting is required.
---Setting range---
0,X,M,L,B,D,W,R
【#24015+40(n-1)】 SLn RX dev No. Remote input (RX) refresh device No.
Set the refresh device No. of the remote input (RX) to be automatically refreshed.
(Note 1) When setting parameters in ALL.PRM with using the parameter input/output function, input
the device No. of decimal digit.
(Example) When setting "X400" for the remote input (RX) refresh device No., input as follows;
#24014+40(n-1): "X"
#24015+40(n-1): "1024"
(Note 2) When the refresh device name has been set, the refresh device No. will be "0".Confirm the
refresh device No. after changing the refresh device name.
When specifying a bit device, set the address in increments of 16 points.

The operation will not be guaranteed unless the address is set in increments of 16 points.
(Example) 1000
---Setting range---
X: 0 to 5FF
M: 0 to 10239
L: 0 to 511
B: 0 to 1FFF
D: 0 to 2047
W: 0 to 1FFF
R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899
【#24016+40(n-1)(PR)】 SLn RY dev name Remote output (RY) refresh device name
Set the refresh device name of the remote output (RY) to be automatically refreshed.
(Example) Y
---Setting range---
0,Y,M,L,B,D,W,R
460
【#24017+40(n-1)】 SLn RY dev No. Remote output (RY) refresh device No.
Set the refresh device No. of the remote output (RY) to be automatically refreshed.
#24014+40(n-1): "X" #24015+40(n-1): "1024"

(Example) 1000
---Setting range---
Y: 0 to 5FF
M: 0 to 10239
L: 0 to 511
B: 0 to 1FFF
D: 0 to 2047
W: 0 to 1FFF
R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899
【#24018+40(n-1)】 SLn RWr dev name Remote register (RWr) refresh device name
Set the refresh device name of the remote register (RWr) to be automatically refreshed.
(Example) W
---Setting range---
0,M,L,B,D,W,R
461
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#24019+40(n-1)】 SLn RWr dev No. Remote register (RWr) refresh device No.
Set the refresh device No. of the remote register (RWr) to be automatically refreshed.
#24014+40(n-1): "X" #24015+40(n-1): "1024"

(Example) 1FF0
---Setting range---
M: 0 to 10239
L: 0 to 511
B: 0 to 1FFF
D: 0 to 2047
W: 0 to 1FFF
R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899
【#24020+40(n-1)】 SLn RWw dev name Remote register (RWw) refresh device name
Set the refresh device name of the remote register (RWw) to be automatically refreshed.
(Example) W
---Setting range---
0,M,L,B,D,W,R
462
【#24021+40(n-1)】 SLn RWw dev No. Remote register (RWw) refresh device No.
Set the refresh device No. of the remote register (RWw) to be automatically refreshed.
#24014+40(n-1): "X" #24015+40(n-1): "1024"

(Example) 1FF0
---Setting range---
M: 0 to 10239
L: 0 to 511
B: 0 to 1FFF
D: 0 to 2047
W: 0 to 1FFF
R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899
【#24022+40(n-1)】 SLn SB dev name Special relay (SB) refresh device name
Set the refresh device name of the special relay (SB) to be automatically refreshed.
(Example) SB
---Setting range---
0,M,L,B,D,W,R,SB
463
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#24023+40(n-1)】 SLn SB dev No. Special relay (SB) refresh device No.
Set the refresh device No. of the special relay (SB) to be automatically refreshed.
#24014+40(n-1): "X" #24015+40(n-1): "1024"

(Example) 1F0
---Setting range---
M: 0 to 10239
L: 0 to 511
B: 0 to 1FFF
D: 0 to 2047
W: 0 to 1FFF
SB: 0 to 1FF
R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899
【#24024+40(n-1)】 SLn SW dev name Special relay (SW) refresh device name
Set the refresh device name of the special relay (SW) to be automatically refreshed.
(Example) SW
---Setting range---
0,M,L,B,D,W,R,SW
464
【#24025+40(n-1)】 SLn SW dev No. Special relay (SW) refresh device No.
Set the refresh device No. of the special relay (SW) to be automatically refreshed.
#24014+40(n-1): "X"
#24015+40(n-1): "1024"

(Example) 1F0
---Setting range---
M: 0 to 10239
L: 0 to 511
B: 0 to 1FFF
D: 0 to 2047
W: 0 to 1FFF
SW: 0 to 1FF
R: 8300 to 9799, 9800 to 9899
【#24026+40(n-1)(PR)】 SLn Protocol Ver Protocol version

Select the CC-Link version mode that has been set to the slide switch SW1-2 on the CC-Link unit
(HN566/HN567).
0: Ver.2
1: Ver.1
Ver.2 mode has been set to SW1-2 as default.
Set to "0" or "1".
Set to "0" or "1".
【#24121+15(m-1)】 CNm station type Station type

Set the type of the connected remote station, local station, intelligent device station and standby
master station.
0: No setting
1: Ver.1 remote I/O station
2: Ver.1 remote device station
3: Ver.1 intelligent device station
4: Ver.2 remote device station
5: Ver.2 intelligent device station
"m" means the m-th connected station in ascending order of station No. (m= 1 to 64)
Set to "0".
465
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#24122+15(m-1)】 CNm extended cyc Extended cyclic setting

Select the magnification for the extended cycling operation of the connected remote, local and
intelligent stations.
Set "1" when the protocol version is Ver.1.
"m" means the m-th connected station in ascending order of station No. (m=1 to 64)
Set to "0".
---Setting range---
0,1,2,4,8 (times)
【#24123+15(m-1)】 CNm occ stations Number of occupied stations

Set the number of the occupied stations by the connected remote, local and intelligent stations.
Set 1 for 8 points I/O and 16 points I/O.
Set to "0".
---Setting range---
0 to 4 (stations occupied)
【#24124+15(m-1)】 CNm station No. Station No.

Set the station No. of the connected remote, local and intelligent stations.
Set to "0".
---Setting range---
0 to 64
466
【#24125+15(m-1)】 CNm remote sta pt Remote station points

Select the number of points of the connected remote station.
The details of setting values differ with each protocol version and station type.
Protocol: Ver.2 (station type: Ver.1, remote I/O station)

0: 0 point (reserved station)
1: 8 points
2: 8 points + 8 points reserved
3: 16 points
4: 32 points
- Setting 0 is valid only for the reserved station. When 0 is set for the other stations, the number of
points will be 32.
- Set the value so that the total number of points of remote I/O stations connected in series will be
multiple of 16.
(Example 1) 2 units of 8 points I/O: Set "1" for each
(Example 2) 3 units of 8 points I/O: Set "1" for the first and the second I/O, "2" for the third.
Protocol: Ver.2 (station type: Ver.1 except remote I/O station)

0: 0 point (reserved station)
1 to 4: Automatically calculated
- 0 point is valid only for the reserved station. When 0 is set for the other stations, the number of
points will be automatically calculated.
- Unless 0 is set, the number of points will be automatically calculated with the number of occupied
stations and the setting value of the extended cycling.
Protocol: Ver.1 (for all station types)

0 to 4: Automatically calculated
- 0 cannot be set even for the reserved station.
- Automatically calculated with the setting value of the number of occupied stations.
Set a value corresponding to the protocol version and the station type.
Set to "0".
【#24126+15(m-1)】 CNm set rsvd sta Reserved station

Set the reserved/error invalid station.
0: No setting
1: Reserved station
2: Error invalid station
Set either of "0" to "2".
Set to "0".
【#24131+15(m-1)】 CNm send size Send buffer size

Set the allocation of the buffer memory size to the local station, standby master station and
intelligent device station when in transient transmission.
(Note) The total size of the send/receive buffers must be 4096 (words) or less.
Set to "0".
---Setting range---
0, 64 to 4096 (words)
467
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#24132+15(m-1)】 CNm receive size Receive buffer size

(Note) The total size of the send/receive buffers must be 4096 (words) or less.
Set to "0".
---Setting range---
0, 64 to 4096 (words)
【#24133+15(m-1)】 CNm auto bfr size Automatic update buffer size

Set to "0".
---Setting range---
0, 128 to 4096 (words)
468
Appendix 1.15 PLC Axis Indexing Parameters

【#12800(PR)】 chgauxno Auxiliary axis number

Set the axis No. to be controlled as auxiliary axis using auxiliary axis interface.
When "0" is set, the axis will not operate as auxiliary axis.
---Setting range---
M730/M750/M730VS/M750VS/M730VW/M750VW: 0 to 6
M720/M720VS/M720VW/M70 Series/M70V Series: 0 to 4
E70 Series: 0 to 1
【#12801(PR)】 aux_station Number of indexing stations

Set the number of stations.
For linear axis, this value is expressed by: number of divisions = number of stations -1.
Setting "0" or "1" sets the number of stations to 2.
---Setting range---
0 to 360
【#12802(PR)】 aux_Cont1 Control parameter 1

The bits that are not explained here must be set to "0".
Bit3:
0: Automatic reach signal isn't interlocked with the start signal.
1: Automatic reach signal is interlocked with the start signal.
Bit4:
0: Automatic reach signal is turned ON again.
1: Automatic reach signal isn't turned ON again.
Bit5:
0: Station No. Output within fixed position.
1: Station No. Constantly output.
bit9:
0: Rotation direction determined by operation control signal (DIR)
1: Rotation direction in the shortcut direction
bitE:
0: Rotation direction in operation control signal (DIR) or in the shortcut direction
1: Rotation direction in the arbitrary position command sign direction
bitF:
0: Stopper direction is in the positioning direction.
1: Stopper direction is in the sign direction of the stopper amount.
【#12803(PR)】 aux_Cont2 Control parameter 2

The bits that are not explained here must be set to "0".
bit4:
0: Uniform assignment
1: Arbitrary coordinate assignment
【#12804(PR)】 aux_tleng Linear axis stroke length

Set the movement stroke length for linear axes.
(Note 1)Setting "0.000" causes an MCP alarm at the power ON.
(Note 2)This parameter is meaningless at the arbitrary coordinate assignment or with the arbitrary
coordinate designation method.
---Setting range---
0.000 to 99999.999 (mm)
469
MITSUBISHI CNC
【#12805】 aux_ST.offset Station offset

Set the distance (offset) from the reference position to station 1.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999 (° or mm)
【#12810+10(n-1)】 aux_Aspeedn Operation parameter group n Automatic operation speed

Set the feedrate during automatic operation when "operation parameter group n" is selected.
"#12810 aux_Aspeed1" is regarded as the clamp value for the automatic operation speeds and
manual operation speeds of all operation groups.
A speed exceeding "aux_Aspeed1" cannot be commanded, even if it is set in a parameter.
(Note)Setting "0" causes an operation error at the "Operation start" signal's ON.
---Setting range---
0 to 100000 (°/min or mm/min)
【#12811+10(n-1)】 aux_Mspeedn Operation parameter group n Manual operation speed

Set the feedrate during manual operation or JOG operation when "operation parameter group n" is
selected.
(Note)Setting "0" causes an operation error at the "Operation start" signal's ON.
---Setting range---
0 to 100000 (°/min or mm/min)
【#12812+10(n-1)】 aux_timen.1 Operation parameter group n Acceleration/deceleration time

constant 1
Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time for "Operation parameter group 1 automatic operation
speed" (clamp speed) when "operation parameter group n" is selected.
When this is set with "Acceleration/deceleration time constant 2", S-pattern acceleration/
deceleration will be carried out. In this case, this parameter determines the acceleration/deceleration
time of the linear part.
When operating at a speed less than the clamp speed, if "#1361 aux_acc" is set to "0", the axis will
accelerate/decelerate with the time constant set in this parameter. If "#1361 aux_acc" is set to "1",
the axis will accelerate/decelerate at the constant inclination determined by this parameter and
"aux_Aspeed1".
Setting "0" cancels acceleration/deceleration: The axis will move with the time constant "0".
---Setting range---
0 to 4000 (ms)
【#12813+10(n-1)】 aux_timen.2 Operation parameter group n Acceleration/deceleration time

constant 2
Set the total time of the non-linear parts in the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration.
In the handle feed operation mode, this setting value is regarded as time constant for the linear
(Note)If this parameter is set to "0" while "#12818 aux_smgst1"is set to "F", an MCP alarm will occur.
---Setting range---
0 to 4000 (ms)
【#12814+10(n-1)】 aux_TLn Operation parameter group n Torque limit value

Set the motor output torque limit value when "operation parameter group n" is selected.
At the default value, the torque is limited at the maximum torque of the motor specifications. Set the
default value when torque limit is not especially required.
In the stopper positioning operation mode, this will be regarded as torque limit value when
positioning to the stopper starting coordinates.
---Setting range---
0 to 500 (%)
470
【#12815+10(n-1)】 aux_ODn Operation parameter group n Excessive error detection width

Set the excessive error detection width when "operation parameter group n" is selected.
The excessive error alarm (S03 0052) will be detected when the position droop becomes larger than
this setting value.
In the stopper positioning operation mode, this will be regarded as excessive error detection width
when positioning to the stopper starting coordinates. .
---Setting range---
0 to 32767( ° or mm)
【#12816+10(n-1)】 aux_justn Operation parameter group n Set position output width

Set the tolerable value at which "set position reached" (JST) or "automatic set position reached"
(JSTA) signal is output when "operation parameter group n" is selected.
"Set position reached" (JST) indicates that the machine position is at any station.
During automatic operation, "automatic set position reached" (JSTA) is also output under the same
condition.
These signals will turn OFF when the machine position moves away from the station over this value.
---Setting range---
0.000 to 99999.999( ° or mm)
【#12817+10(n-1)】 aux_nearn Operation parameter group n Near set position output width
Set the tolerable value at which "near set position" (NEAR) signal is output when "operation
parameter group n" is selected.
"Near set position" (NEAR) indicates that the machine position is near any station position.
This value is generally set wider than the set position output width. During operations, this is related
to the special commands when the station selection is set to "0".
---Setting range---
0.000 to 99999.999(° or mm)
【#12818+10(n-1)(PR)】 aux_smgstn Operation parameter group n Acceleration/Deceleration

type
Select the acceleration/deceleration type when "operation parameter group n" is selected.
0, 1: Linear acceleration/deceleration
F: S-pattern acceleration/deceleration
【#12850】 aux_stpos2 Station 2 coordinate

Set the station 2 coordinate value when arbitrary coordinate assignment is selected.
The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at "0.000" (machine coordinate zero point).
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)
471
MITSUBISHI CNC

---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

Set the coordinate of each station when arbitrary coordinate assignment is selected.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)
472

---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)
【#12870】 aux_PSWcheck PSW detection method

Select the criterion for the output of position switches 1 to 15.
bit0 to E correspond to position switches 1 to 15.
0: Judged by the machine position of the command system.
1: Judged by the machine FB position (actual position).
(Note) The bits that are not explained here must be set to "0".
【#12871】 aux_PSW1dog1 PSW1 area setting 1

Set "PSW1 area setting" 1 and 2 to specify the area where the position switch 1 will turn ON when
the machine is positioned.
Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (or vice versa) does not affect the position
switch operation.
For rotary axes, the output turns ON in the area excluding 0.000 degree.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)
473
MITSUBISHI CNC

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)
474

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)
475
MITSUBISHI CNC

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)
476

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)
477
MITSUBISHI CNC

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)

switch operation.
---Setting range---
-99999.999 to 99999.999(° or mm)
【#12910】 aux_push Stopper amount

Set the command stroke of the stopper operation in the stopper positioning.
---Setting range---
0.000 to 359.999(° or mm)
【#12911】 aux_pusht1 Stopper standby time

Set the standby time from the stopper starting coordinate positioning to the stopper operation start in
the stopper positioning.
---Setting range---
0 to 9999(ms)
478
【#12912】 aux_pusht2 Stopper torque release time

Set the time from the completion of the stopper operation to the changeover of the stopper torque in
the stopper positioning.
---Setting range---
0 to 9999(ms)
【#12913】 aux_pusht3 Set position signal output delay time

Set the time from the completion of the stopper operation to the output of the “automatic set position
reached” (JSTA), “set position reached” (JST) or “near set position” (NEAR) signal in the stopper
positioning.
---Setting range---
0 to 9999(ms)
479
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1.16 Screen Transition Chart

The menus for screens related to maintenance appear when the function key [MAINTE] is pressed.
The parameter menu appears when the menu key [Param] is pressed.
Process Control Axis Operation

Barrier data
parameters parameters parameters parameters
Computer Subprogram
I/O Ethernet storage
parameters parameters link User parameters
destination
parameters parameters
Base Base axis Base Axis Zero point

specifica- common specifica- return Machine parameters
system
tion tions parameters
Absolute Spindle
Servo specifica- Spindle
position
parameters tion parameters
parameters
parameters
Rotary axis PLC

configura- PLC PLC
PLC timer integrated
tion counter constants
timer
parameters
Error
Selecting compensa- Position
Error data Macro list
the PLC bit tion switches
parameters
Auxiliary
Open Open
axis
param 1 param 2
parameters
(Note) There are user parameter dedicated menus in the screens related to setup. The menu configuration differs
slightly from the above configuration. Refer to the Instruction Manual for details.
480
Appendix 1.17 Unit
Appendix 1.17 Unit

(1) Input setting unit and number of decimal digits
The number of digits in the decimal section of the parameters related to length is determined by the input setting
unit.
The input setting unit is set with parameter "#1003 iunit".
Number of digits
Input setting unit in decimal Example of setting range
section
B 3 0 to 999.999 (mm)
C 4 0 to 999.9999 (mm)
D 5 0 to 999.99999 (mm)
E 6 0 to 999.999999 (mm)
The setting ranges indicated in this manual use the input setting unit "B".
Appendix 1.18 Inputting the Machine Parameters

A password input is required to set the machine parameters.
Inputting the machine parameter password

(1) Press the function key [MAINTE].
The menu for the maintenance related screen will appear.
(2) Press the menu [Param].
The parameter menu will appear.
(3) Press the machine parameter selection menu.
(Example) Menu [Base sys param]
A message prompting input of the password will appear.
If the password has been input once after the power was turned ON, the cursor will appear at the machine
parameter screen.
(4) Enter the password and press the [INPUT] key. (Password: MPARA)
The cursor will appear at the machine parameter screen, and the machine parameters can be set.
(Note 1) Refer to the section of "Base Specifications Parameters" and the following for the details of the machine
parameters.
(Note 2) Always turn the power OFF after setting the machine parameters.
481
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1.19 Machine Error Compensation (Function Details)

Appendix 1.19.1 Outline
(1) Memorized pitch error compensation
According to the specified parameters, this method compensates an axis feed error caused by a ball screw pitch
error, etc.
With the reference position defined as the base, set the compensation amount in the division points obtained by
equally dividing the machine coordinates. (See Fig. 1.1)
The compensation amount can be set by either the absolute or incremental system. Select the desired method with
"#4000 Pinc".
Machine position between division points n and n+1 is smoothly compensated by the linear approximation of the
compensation amount.
Real machine
position Ideal machine
position
Real machine position for

which no compensation
has been made
Command machine
▲ ▲ ▲ position
Reference position Compensation

amount ▲ : Division point
Compensation between
amount division points
▲ ▲ ▲ Command machine position

ｎｎ＋1 ｎ＋2
Fig. 1.1 Relationship between the compensation amount and machine position
482
(2) Two-way pitch error compensation

Two different compensation amounts can be set for plus and minus movements respectively: compensation in each
direction is allowed. This method will reduce the difference between the path in the positive direction and that in the
negative direction.
With the reference position defined as the base, set the compensation amount in the division points obtained by
equally dividing the machine coordinates. (See Fig. 1.2)
The compensation amount can be set by either the absolute or incremental system. Select the desired method with
"#4000 Pinc".
Real machine position
Real machine position without

compensation in plus direction
Ideal machine position
: Division point
Real machine position without

compensation in minus direction
Command machine position
n n+1 n+2 n+3
Compensation amount
Compensation amount
between division points
in plus direction
Compensation amount
in minus direction
483
MITSUBISHI CNC
(3) Memorized relative position compensation

This method, according to the parameters specified in advance, compensates the relative position error between
two orthogonal axes caused by deflection of the moving stand.
For this, as shown in Fig. 1.3, specify the compensation amount in the compensation axis direction in the division
points obtained by equally dividing the machine coordinates of the base axis.
The base axis is one of the two orthogonal axes to which relative position compensation applies. This axis is used
as the criterion for relative-error measurement. The compensation axis is the coordinate axis that is orthogonal to
the base axis. The compensation is actually made for this coordinate axis.
Actual machine position

of compensation axis Actual machine position for
which no compensation
has been made
▲ : Division point
Command machine
▲ ▲ ▲ position along base axis
Reference position ｎｎ＋1 ｎ＋2
▼ ▼ ▼ Command machine position
Compensation amount
between division points
Compensation
amount
484
Appendix 1.19.2 Setting Compensation Data

There are two systems for setting the compensation data: absolute system and increment system.
"#4000 Pinc" 0: Absolute system
1: Incremental system
(1) Absolute system
In feeding from the reference position to each division point as in Fig. 2.1,
the difference between a commanded position and an actual machine position is multiplied by 2, and the result (in
unit of output) will be a compensation amount.
For example, when the machine is actually positioned at 99.990mm while commanded to +100mm,
the difference between 100000 and 99990 is multiplied by 2, then the result, 20 pulses, will be set as a
compensation amount at the +100mm position.
When the machine is actually positioned at -99.990mm while commanded to -100mm,
the difference between -100000 and -99990 is multiplied by 2, then the result, -20 pulses, will be set as a
compensation amount at the -100mm position.
- 100
Compensation
amount:
20 pulses - 99.990
+99.990 (10um) Compensation
amount:
-20 pulses
(-10um)
+100
Fig. 2.1
(2) Incremental system

In feeding from division n-1 to n when the machine is in the positive direction from the reference position, as shown
in Fig. 2.2,
"division interval - actual movement amount" is multiplied by 2, and the result (in unit of output) will be set as a
(3) In feeding from division n+1 to n when the machine is in the negative direction from the reference position, as
shown in Fig. 2.3,
"division interval + actual movement amount" is multiplied by 2, and the result (in unit of output) will be set as a
l
n n+1
n: Division point
compensation number
l: Division interval
n- 1 n
l
Fig. 2.2 Fig. 2.3
Unit : Unit of output
Range : -128 to 127
(Note) The unit of output is used as the unit of setting.

The actual unit of compensation pulses depends on the compensation
485
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1.19.3 Example in Using a Linear Axis as Base Axis

(1) When "mdvno" or "pdvno" exists at both ends of "rdvno"
Compensation amount
in incremental system (1) (3) ( - 3) ( - 2) (0) (3)
Error
#4101 #4102 #4103 3 #4104 #4105 #4106
-1 Base axis machine

coordinate
-2
-3
(3) ( - 2)
(0) ( - 2)
Compensation amount ( - 1) (1)
in absolute system
Division point number #4101 #4102 #4103 #4104 #4105 #4106 rdvno 4103
Specified machine position -300.000 -200.000 -100.000 100.000 200.000 300.000 mdvno 4101
Real machine position -299.999 -200.000 -100.003 100.002 200.002 299.999 pdvno 4106
Compensation Incremental 2 6 -6 -4 0 6
amount Absolute -2 0 6 -4 -4 2
The compensation beyond the setting range ("mdvno" to "pdvno") will be based on the compensation amount at
"mdvno" or "pdvno".
(2) When the range compensated is only the positive range
Compensation amount
in incremental system ( - 2) (1) (0) (3) (1)
Error 3 #4115
#4113 #4114 #4116 #4117
Base axis machine

-1 coordinate
-2
-3
( - 2)
( - 1)
Compensation amount
in absolute system ( - 1)
(2)
(3)
Division point number #4113 #4114 #4115 #4116 #4117 rdvno 4112
Compensation Incremental -4 2 0 6 2 mdvno 4113
amount Absolute -4 -2 -2 4 6 pdvno 4117
When the machine has been positioned beyond "pdvno", the compensation will be based on the compensation
amount at "pdvno". If the machine is positioned on the negative side in this case, no compensation will be executed.
486
(3) When the range compensated is only the negative range
Compensation amount ( - 1) (1) (3) (1) (0) ( - 3)

in incremental system
Error
#4125 #4126 #4127 #4128 #4129 #4130 3
Base axis
machine -1
coordinate
-2
-3
(3)
(3)
(2)
( - 1)
( - 2)
Compensation amount
in absolute system ( - 1)
Compensation Incremental -2 2 6 2 0 -6 mdvno 4125
amount Absolute -2 -4 -2 4 6 6 pdvno 4130
When the machine has been positioned beyond "mdvno", the compensation will be based on the compensation
amount at "mdvno".
(4) When compensation is executed in a range that contains no reference position
Compensation
amount in ( - 1) ( - 1) (3) (1)
Error incremental system
3 #4135 #4136 #4137 #4138 #4139 #4140
Base axis machine

-1 coordinate
-2
-3
( - 1)
Compensation
( - 2)
amount in
(1)
absolute system
(2)
Compensation Incremental -2 -2 6 2 mdvno 4136
amount Absolute -2 -4 2 4 pdvno 4140
In this case, the compensation is executed in the range from "mdvno" to "pdvno".
This setting rule is also applied when the compensation is executed in a range which contains negative machine
positions and no reference position.
487
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 1.19.4 Example in Using a Rotary Axis as Base Axis
Compensation amount
in incremental system ( - 2) (1) (0) (3) (1) ( - 3)
Error 3 #4123 #4124 #4125 #4126 #4127 #4128
1
360 deg
Base axis machine

-1 coordinate
-2
-3
( - 2)
( - 1)
Compensation amount ( - 1)
in absolute system
(2)
(3)
(0)
Compensation Incremental -4 2 0 6 2 -6 mdvno 4123
amount Absolute -4 -2 -2 4 6 0 pdvno 4128
The sum of the compensation amounts set out with the incremental system is always "0".
In the absolute system, the compensation amount at the terminal point (360 degrees) is always "0".
488
Appendix 1.20 Position Switch (Function Details)
Appendix 1.20 Position Switch (Function Details)

Appendix 1.20.1 Outline
Position switches (PSW) are used as alternatives for the dog switches provided on the machine axis. Imaginary dog
switches, with axis names and imaginary dog coordinates preset by parameters, output a signal to the PLC
interface when the machine reaches the switch area. The imaginary dog switches are called position switches
(PSW).
Position switch Nos. of PSW1 to PSW24 and signal devices
<axis> <dog1> <dog2> <check> Part system 1 Part system 2
PSW1 #7501 #7502 #7503 #7504 X1D00 X1D20
PSW2 #7511 #7512 #7513 #7514 X1D01 X1D21
PSW3 #7521 #7522 #7523 #7524 X1D02 X1D22
PSW4 #7531 #7532 #7533 #7534 X1D03 X1D23
: : : : : : :
PSW24 #7731 #7732 #7733 #7734 X1D17 X1D37
Position switches (PSW1 - PSW24) are used to set imaginary dog coordinates (dog1 and dog2) on the coordinate
axes, whose names are preset with <axis>, as alternatives for the dog switches provided on the machine axis.
When the machine reaches the switch area, a signal is output to the corresponding device of the PLC interface.
Position switch area checking can be performed at high-speed by parameter setting.
In high-speed checking, the parameter determines which is used between the command type machine position or
detector feedback position for area checking by each position switch.
For description of the parameter, refer to "Appendix 1.10 Position Switches".
Appendix 1.20.2 Setting and Operation Examples of dog1 and dog2
Settings of dog1 and

Positions of dog1 and dog2 Description
dog2
A signal is output when the Basic machine coordinate
dog1 dog2 system zero point
dog1 < dog2 machine reaches between
dog1 and dog2.
Imaginary
dog
A signal is output when the PSW
dog1 > dog2 dog2 dog1 machine reaches between dog1 width
dog2 and dog1. dog2
A signal is output when the

dog1 = dog2 dog1 ＝ dog2 machine reaches dog1 or
dog2.
489
MITSUBISHI CNC
For rotary axis
Settings of dog1 and

Positions of dog1 and dog2 Description
dog2
dog2 dog1
(Example)
dog1 ＝ 30.000
dog2 ＝ 330.000
A signal is output when the machine
dog1 < dog2
reaches between dog1 and dog2.
dog1 dog2
(Example)
dog1 ＝ - 30.000
dog2 ＝ 30.000
Signal output is the same when
dog1 is negative.
dog1 dog2
(Example)
dog1 ＝ 330.000
dog2 ＝ 30.000
A signal is output when the machine
dog1 > dog2
reaches between dog2 and dog1.
dog1 dog2
(Example)
dog1＝ - 30.000 When the range of dog1 and dog2
dog2＝ 390.000 include 0 to 360 degrees, a signal is
dog1<=0 and 360<=dog2
output whenever and wherever the
machine reaches.
Appendix 1.20.3 Canceling the Position Switch

Enter the position switch number to cancel (#75*1) in # ( ) and a slash "/" in DATA ( ) on the setting field, and then
press the INPUT key. This deletes the axis name for the specified position switch, thus invalidating the position
switch. The data in <dog1> and <dog2> are still stored in memory. To validate the position switch again, therefore,
it is enough to specify the axis name only.
490
Appendix 1.21 Bit Selection Parameters #6449 to #6496
Appendix 1.21 Bit Selection Parameters #6449 to #6496
Symbol
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
name
#6449 Setting and Battery alarm /
Control unit display unit Counter C Integrated
warning PLC counter PLC timer
0 R7824 L thermal - detection timer ST
thermal retention program on program on
alarm on disabled retention
mgmt on
#6450 External 1 0
alarm Alarm/ Full screen R F
R7824 H Operator Alarm
1 - operator display of -
message message on method method message
change message
display on
#6451 GX Onboard Onboard
Developer editing not simple Onboard
2 R7825 L - - serial
communication
possible operation mode on
on on
#6452 Branch
destination Serial handy Extended PLC
3 R7825 H - terminal - - instruction -
label check
comm. on mode valid
valid
#6453 Integrated timer ST
4 R7826 L - Variable/fixed
- - Message language change code
Number of points setting
#6454 Counter C Timer T

5 R7826 H Variable/fixed Variable/fixed
Number of points setting Number of points setting
#6455 Enable Enable ladder

ladder program writ-
R device access variables
6 R7827 L program ing during RUN - - - - - -
writing (in high-speed decimal point valid region
during RUN processing)
#6456
7 R7827 H - - - - - - - -
#6457
8 R7828 L
High-speed input specification 1
#6458
9 R7828 H
#6459
A R7829 L
#6460
B R7829 H
#6461
C R7830 L
High-speed output specification 1
#6462
D R7830 H
#6463
E R7831 L

#6464
F R7831 H
(Note 1) If invalidating the battery alarm/warning detection (#6449 bit4=1), "Battery alarm" signal and "Battery warning"
signal will not turn ON and the alarm messages will not be displayed either.
491
MITSUBISHI CNC
Symbol
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
name
#6465
0 - - - - - - - -
R7832 L High-speed input specification 3
#6466
1 R7832 H - - - - - - - -
#6467
2 R7833 L - - - - - - - -
#6468
3 R7833 H
#6469
4 R7834 L - - - - - - - -
#6470
5 R7834 H - - - - - - - -
#6471
6 R7835 L - - - - - - - -
#6472
7 R7835 H - - - - - - - -
#6473
8 R7836 L - -
#6474
9 R7836 H
#6475
A R7837 L
#6476
B R7837 H
#6477
C R7838 L - - - - - - - -
#6478
D R7838 H - - - - - - - -
#6479
E R7839 L - - - - - - - -
#6480
F R7839 H - - - - - - - -
(Note 1) Be sure to set "0" for the bits indicated by "-" or blank.
(Note 2) Parameters #6481 to #6496 are reserved for debugging by Mitsubishi.
(Note 3) Functions marked with ■ may not be available for some machine types.
492
Appendix 2
Explanation of Alarms
493
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 2 Explanation of Alarms
(Note) This alarm description is common for M700V/M70V/E70 Series.

Appendix 2.1 Operation Errors (M)
M01 Dog overrun 0001

Details
When returning to the reference position, the near-point detection limit switch did not stop over the
dog, but overran the dog.
Remedy
- Increase the length of the near-point dog.
- Reduce the reference position return speed.
M01 Some ax does not pass Z phase 0002

Details
One of the axes did not pass the Z-phase during the initial reference position return after the power
was turned ON.
Remedy
- Move the detector one rotation or more in the opposite direction of the reference position, and repeat
reference position return.
M01 R-pnt direction illegal 0003

Details
When manually returning to the reference position, the return direction differs from the axis movement
direction selected with the AXIS SELECTION key.
Remedy
- The selection of the AXIS SELECTION key's +/- direction is incorrect. The error is canceled by
feeding the axis in the correct direction.
M01 External interlock axis exists 0004

Details
The external interlock function has activated (the input signal is "OFF") and one of the axes has
entered the interlock state.
Remedy
- As the interlock function has activated, release it before resuming operation.
- Correct the sequence on the machine side.
- Check for any broken wires in the "interlock" signal line.
M01 Internal interlock axis exists 0005

Details
The internal interlock state has been entered.
The absolute position detector axis has been removed.
A command for the manual/automatic simultaneous valid axis was issued from the automatic mode.
The manual speed command was issued while the "tool length measurement 1" signal is ON.
A travel command has been issued to an inclined axis whose base axis is in control axis
synchronization across part systems.
Selected an axis other than the 1st axis when the manual speed command was issued.
Remedy
- The servo OFF function is valid, so release it first.
- An axis that can be removed has been issued, so perform the correct operations.
- The command is issued in the same direction as the direction where manual skip turned ON, so
perform the correct operations.
- During the manual/automatic simultaneous mode, the axis commanded in the automatic mode
became the manual operation axis. Turn OFF the "manual/automatic valid" signal for the
commanded axis.
- Turn ON the power again, and perform absolute position initialization.
- Turn OFF the "tool length measurement 1" signal to start the program by the manual speed
command.
- Cancel the control axis synchronization across part systems, then issue a travel command to the
inclined axis.
- Select the 1st axis of each part system when issuing the manual speed command.
494
M01 H/W stroke end axis exists 0006

Details
The stroke end function has activated (the input signal is "OFF") and one of the axes is in the stroke
end status.
Remedy
- Move the machine manually.
- Check for any broken wires in the "stroke end" signal line.
- Check for any limit switch failure.
M01 S/W stroke end axis exists 0007

Details
The stored stroke limit I, II, IIB or IB function has activated.
Remedy
- Move the machine manually.
- Correct any setting error of the parameters for the stored stroke limit.
M01 Chuck/tailstock stroke end ax 0008

Details
The chuck/tail-stock barrier function turned ON, and an axis entered the stroke end state.
Remedy
- Reset the alarm with reset, and move the machine in the reverse direction.
M01 Ref point return No. invalid 0009

Details
2nd reference position return was performed before 1st reference position return has been completed.
Remedy
- Execute 1st reference position return.
M01 Illegal op in mid pt sg block 0013

Details
The operation mode was changed to MDI during single block stop at the middle point of G28/G29/G30.
Remedy
- Change the operation mode.
- Reset to clear the alarm.
M01 Sensor signal illegal ON 0019

Details
The sensor signal was already ON when the "tool length measurement 1" signal was validated.
The sensor signal turned ON when there was no axis movement after the "tool length measurement 1"
signal was validated.
The sensor signal turned ON at a position within 100 μm from the final entry start position.
Remedy
- Disable the "tool length measurement 1" signal and move the axis in a safe direction.
- Disabling the sensor signal also clears the operation alarm.
(Note) When the "tool length measurement 1" signal is disabled, the axis can be moved in either
direction. Pay attention to the movement direction.
M01 Ref point retract invalid 0020

Details
Reference position retract was performed while the coordinates had not been established.
Remedy
- Execute reference position return.
495
MITSUBISHI CNC
M01 Tool ofs invld after R-pnt 0021

Details
Reference position return had been performed during the tool retract and return, which invalidated the
tool compensation amount after the reference position return.
Remedy
- The error is cleared if the operation mode is changed to other than reference position return before
the axis performs reference position return.
- The error is cleared when the tool return is completed.
- The error is cleared if reset 1 is input or the emergency stop button is pushed.
M01 R-pnt ret invld at abs pos alm 0024

Details
A reference position return signal was enabled during an absolute position detection alarm.
Remedy
- Reset the absolute position detection alarm, and then perform the reference position return.
M01 R-pnt ret invld at zero pt ini 0025

Details
A reference position return signal was input during zero point initialization of the absolute position
detection system.
Remedy
- Complete the zero point initialization, and then perform reference position return.
M01 High-accuracy skip disabled 0028

Details
The drive unit's hardware or software does not conform to the high-accuracy skip.
Remedy
- The software or hardware does not conform to the function. Contact service center.
M01 Hi-ac skip coord retrieval err 0029

Details
Failed to retrieve the skip coordinate value from the drive unit.
Remedy
- Check the wiring.
- Check the parameters.
M01 Now skip on 0030

Details
The "skip input" signal remains enabled when the operation has shifted from skip retract to
measurement.
Remedy
- Increase the skip retract amount.
M01 No skip 0031

Details
Even though the 1st skip was to the correct position, the 2nd skip could not be found.
Remedy
- Check whether the measurement target has moved.
M01 Rtn dir err in manual measure 0033

Details
Return direction in manual measurement is the opposite of the parameter setting.
Remedy
- Check and correct the "#2169 Man meas rtrn dir (Return direction in manual measurement)" setting.
- Move the axis manually to a safe position in the direction set by "#2169 Man meas rtrn dir (Return
direction in manual measurement)", then reset.
496
M01 Movement prohibited during tool retract 0035

Details
An axis movement was attempted from the tool retract position.
The movement was attempted by a manual command in the tool return.
Remedy
It is not allowed to move an axis arbitrarily from the tool retract position. Take the following steps to
move the axis.
- Cancel the program execution by reset.
- Use the tool escape and retract function and let the axis escape from the tool retract position.
The interruption by a manual command is not allowed in a tool return. Take the following step to move
the axis.
M01 Chopping axis R-pnt incomplete 0050

Details
Chopping mode has been entered while the chopping axis has not completed reference position
return.
All axes interlock has been applied.
Remedy
- Reset the NC or disable the "chopping" signal, and then carry out the reference position return.
M01 Synchronous error excessive 0051

Details
The synchronization error of the primary and secondary axes exceeded the allowable value under
synchronous control. A deviation exceeding the synchronization error limit value was found with the
synchronization deviation detection.
Remedy
- Select the correction mode and move one of the axes in the direction in which the errors are
reduced.
- Increase "#2024 synerr(allowable value)" or set "0" to disable error check.
- When using simple C-axis synchronous control, set "0" for "synchronous control operation method".
M01 No spindle select signal 0053

Details
Synchronous tapping command was issued when the "spindle selection" signals for all spindles were
OFF in the multiple-spindle control II.
Remedy
- Turn ON the "spindle selection" signal for the tapping spindle before performing the synchronous
tapping command.
M01 No spindle serial connection 0054

Details
Synchronous tapping command was issued in the multiple-spindle control II, while the spindle with the
"spindle selection" signal ON was not serially connected.
Remedy
- Make sure the "spindle selection" signal for the spindle is ON.
- Consider the machine construction when issuing the command.
M01 Spindle fwd/rvs run para err 0055

Details
Asynchronous tapping command was issued when M code of the spindle forward/reverse run
command, set by "#3028 sprcmm", was one of the followings in the multiple-spindle control II.
- M0, M1, M2, M30, M98, M99, or M198
- M code No. that commands to enable/disable the "macro interrupt" signal
Remedy
- Correct the "#3028 sprcmm (Tap cycle spindle forward run/reverse run M command)" setting.
497
MITSUBISHI CNC
M01 Tap pitch/thread number error 0056

Details
The command for the pitch or the number of threads is not correct in the synchronous tapping
command of the multiple-spindle control II.
The pitch is too small for the spindle rotation speed.
Thread number is too large for the spindle rotation speed.
Remedy
- Correct the pitch, number of threads or rotation speed of the tapping spindle.
M01 Wait for tap retract 0057

Details
The axis travel command is interlocked in the part system where the "Tap retract possible" signal is
ON.
Remedy
- If tap retract is necessary, perform it before issuing an axis travel command. However, tapping
retract is not allowed during automatic operation. Carry out tapping retract after resetting.
- If tap retract is not necessary, cancel the tap retract enabled state.
M01 Handle ratio too large 0060

Details
- The handle ratio is too large for the handle feed clamp speed.
(The handle feed clamp speed changes according to the rapid traverse rate, external feedrate,
maximum speed outside the soft limit range and etc. (or external deceleration speed when external
deceleration is valid))
Remedy
- Change the settings of the handle feed clamp speed or the handle ratio.
M01 R-pos offset value illegal 0065

Details
At the start of reference position initial setting, "#2034 rfpofs (Distance-coded reference position
detection offset) is not set to "0".
Remedy
- Set "#2034 rfpofs" to "0", then turn the power ON again to perform the reference position initial
setting.
M01 R-pos scan distance exceeded 0066

Details
Reference position could not be established within the maximum scan distance.
Remedy
- Check the scale to see if it has dirt or damage.
- Check if the servo drive unit supports this function.
M01 Illegal op in wk instl err cmp 0070

Details
One of the following operations was attempted during workpiece installation error compensation.
- Manual interruption
- Automatic operation handle interruption
- MDI interruption
- PLC interruption
Remedy
- Return the operation mode to the original mode to remove the cause.
M01 No operation mode 0101

Details
No operation mode
Remedy
- Check for any broken wires in the input mode signal line.
- Check for any failure of the MODE SELECT switch.
- Correct the sequence program.
498
M01 Cutting override zero 0102

Details
The "cutting feed override" switch on the machine operation panel is set to"0".
The override was set to "0" during a single block stop.
Remedy
- Set the "cutting feed override" switch to a value other than "0" to clear the error.
- If the "cutting feed override" switch has been set to a value other than "0", check for any short circuit
in the signal line.
M01 External feed rate zero 0103

Details
MANUAL FEEDRATE switch on the machine operation panel is set to "0" when the machine is in the
JOG or automatic dry run mode.
"Manual feedrate B" is set to "0" during the JOG mode when manual feedrate B is valid.
"Each axis manual feedrate B" is set to "0" during the JOG mode when each axis manual feedrate B is
valid.
Remedy
- Set the MANUAL FEEDRATE switch to a value other than "0" to release the error.
- If the MANUAL FEEDRATE switch has been set to a value other than "0" check for any short circuit
in the signal line.
M01 F 1-digit feed rate zero 0104

Details
The F1-digit feedrate has been set to "0" when the F1-digit feed command was executed.
Remedy
- Set the F1-digit feedrate (from "#1185 spd_F1 (F1 digit feedrate F1)" to "#1189 spd_F5 (F1 digit
feedrate F5)").
M01 Spindle stop 0105

Details
The spindle stopped during the synchronous feed/thread cutting command.
Remedy
- Rotate the spindle.
- If the workpiece is not being cut, start dry run.
- Check for any broken wire in the spindle encoder cable.
- Check the connections for the spindle encoder connectors.
- Check the spindle encoder pulse.
- Correct the program. (commands and addresses)
M01 Handle feed ax No. illegal 0106

Details
The axis, designated at handle feed, is out of specifications.
No axis has been selected for handle feed.
Remedy
- Check for any broken wires in the handle feed axis selection signal line.
- Check the number of axes in the specifications.
M01 Spindle rotation speed over 0107

Details
Spindle rotation speed exceeded the axis clamp speed during the thread cutting command.
Remedy
- Lower the commanded rotation speed.
499
MITSUBISHI CNC
M01 Fixed pnt mode feed ax illegal 0108

Details
The axis, designated in the manual arbitrary feed, is out of specifications.
The feedrate in manual arbitrary feed mode is illegal.
Remedy
- Check for any broken wires in the axis selection signal line or the feedrate line for the manual
arbitrary feed mode.
- Check the specifications for the manual arbitrary feed mode.
M01 Block start interlock 0109

Details
An interlock signal has been input to lock the block start.
Remedy
M01 Cutting block start interlock 0110

Details
An interlock signal has been input to lock the cutting block start.
Remedy
M01 Restart switch ON 0111

Details
Restart switch has been turned ON and manual mode has been selected before the restart search is
completed.
Remedy
- Search the block to restart.
- Turn the restart switch OFF.
M01 Program check mode 0112

Details
The automatic start button was pressed during program check or in program check mode.
Remedy
- Press the reset button to cancel the program check mode.
M01 Auto start in buffer correct 0113

Details
The automatic start button was pressed during buffer correction.
Remedy
- Press the automatic start button after the buffer correction is completed.
M01 In reset process 0115

Details
The automatic start button was pressed during resetting or tape rewinding.
Remedy
- When rewinding the tape, wait for the winding to end, or press the reset button to stop the winding,
and then press the automatic start button.
- During resetting, wait for the resetting to end, and then press the automatic start button.
M01 Playback not possible 0117

Details
The playback switch was turned ON during editing.
Remedy
- Cancel the editing by pressing the input or previous screen key before turning ON the playback
switch.
500
M01 Turn stop in normal line cntrl 0118

Details
The turning angle at the block joint exceeded the limit during normal line control.
In normal line control type I:
"#1523 C_feed (Normal line control axis turning speed)" has not been set.
In normal line control type II:
When turning in the inside of the arc, the set value for "#8041 C-rot. R" is larger than the arc radius.
Remedy
- Correct the program.
- Correct the "#1523 C_feed (Normal line control axis turning speed)" setting.
- Correct the "#8041 C rot. R" setting.
M01 Reverse run impossible 0119

Details
Either of the following conditions occurred:
- there is no block to run backward.
- eight blocks has been continued without any travel command.
Remedy
- Execute forward run to clear the alarm.
- Reset to clear the alarm.
M01 In synchronous correction mode 0120

Details
The synchronous correction mode switch was pressed in non-handle mode.
Remedy
- Select the handle or manual arbitrary feed mode.
- Turn OFF the correction mode switch.
M01 No synchronous control option 0121

Details
The synchronous control operation method was set (with R2589) while no synchronous control option
was provided.
Remedy
- Set "0" for "synchronous control operation method".
M01 Computer link B not possible 0123

Details
Cycle start was attempted before resetting was completed.
Computer link B operation was attempted at the 2nd or further part system in a multi-part system.
Remedy
- Perform the cycle start after resetting has been completed.
- Set "#8109 HOST LINK" to "0" and then set to "1" before performing the cycle start.
- Computer link B operation cannot be performed at the 2nd or further part system in a multi-part
system.
M01 X/Z axes simultaneous prohibit 0124

Details
The basic axis corresponding to the inclined axis was started simultaneously in the manual mode while
the inclined axis control was valid.
Remedy
- Turn the inclined axis and basic axis start OFF for both axes. (This is also applied for manual/
automatic simultaneous start.)
- Disable the basic axis compensation, or command it to axes one by one.
501
MITSUBISHI CNC
M01 Rapid override zero 0125

Details
The RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch on the machine operation panel is set to "0".
Remedy
- Set the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch to a value other than "0" to clear the error.
- If the RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE switch has been set to a value other than "0", check for any
short circuit in the signal line.
M01 Program restart machine lock 0126

Details
Machine lock was applied on the return axis being manually returned to the restart position.
Remedy
- Cancel the machine lock and resume the operation.
M01 Rot axis parameter error 0127

Details
Orthogonal coordinate axis name does not exist.
Rotary axis name does not exist.
A duplicate name is used for the designated orthogonal coordinate axis.
The number of axes that were selected to change tool length compensation along the tool axis amount
exceeds the maximum number of axes.
The designated orthogonal coordinate axis name is the same as the rotary axis name.
Remedy
- Correct the rotary axis configuration parameters.
M01 Restart pos return incomplete 0128

Details
Automatic return was performed with an axis whose return to the restart position was not complete.
Remedy
- Perform restart position return manually.
- Enable "#1302 AutoRP (Automatic return by program restart)" before executing the automatic start.
M01 PLC interruption impossible 0129

Details
After the automatic startup, the "PLC interrupt" signal was turned ON during buffer correction, program
restart, arbitrary reverse run, tool retract and return, high-speed high-accuracy control II, NURBS
interpolation or single block stop at the middle point of G28/G29/G30.
Remedy
- By turning OFF the "PLC interrupt" signal, or by resetting the NC the error can be cancelled.
M01 Restart posn return disabled 0130

Details
Restart position return was attempted in a mode where the return is disabled.
Remedy
- Correct the program restart position.
M01 Zero point return interruption 0131

Details
Compound type fixed cycle program was interrupted with manual zero point return, and cycle start was
carried out without carrying out reset.
Remedy
502
M01 Chopping override zero 0150

Details
The override became "0" in the chopping operation.
Remedy
- Correct the setting of "chopping override" (R2503).
- Correct the setting of "rapid traverse override" (R2502).
M01 Command axis chopping axis 0151

Details
A chopping axis movement command was issued from the program during the chopping mode. (This
alarm will not occur for the command with the movement amount "0".)
(All axes interlock state will be applied.)
Remedy
- Press the reset button or turn OFF the "chopping" signal. When the "chopping" signal is turned OFF,
the axis returns to the reference position and performs the movement command in the program.
M01 Bottom dead center pos. zero 0153

Details
The bottom dead center position is set to the same position as the upper dead center position.
Remedy
- Correct the bottom dead center position.
M01 Chopping disable for handle ax 0154

Details
Chopping has been attempted while the chopping axis is selected as the handle axis.
Remedy
- Select an axis other than the chopping axis as the handle axis, or start chopping after changing the
mode to the other mode.
M01 Dir cmnd mode invalid 0157

Details
- The drive unit's software or hardware does not conform to the direct command mode.
- Inclined axis control is active.
- Control axis synchronization across part system is active.
- Control axis superimposition was activated during direct command mode.
Remedy
- Turn the inclined axis control valid signal OFF.
- Turn the synchronous control request signal OFF.
- Turn the superimposition control request signal OFF.
M01 Dir cmnd mode restart invalid 0158

Details
- Automatic start was carried out without reset after the retract in direct command mode.
Remedy
- Finish the machining for now by resetting the NC.
M01 No speed set out of soft limit 0160

Details
The axis, without any maximum speed outside of the soft limit range set, was returned from the outside
of the soft limit range.
Remedy
- Correct the "#2021 out_f (Maximum speed outside soft limit range)" setting.
- Correct the soft limit range (with "#2013 OT- (Soft limit I-)" and "#2014 OT+ (Soft limit I+)").
503
MITSUBISHI CNC
M01 Ill. op during T tip control 0170

Details
Illegal operation was attempted during tool tip center control.
Remedy
- Change the operation mode to the previous one and restart.
M01 Illegal OP in tilted face cut 0185

Details
Any of the following illegal operations was attempted during inclined surface machining mode.
- Manual interrupt
- Handle interrupt in automatic operation
- MDI interrupt
- PLC interrupt
- Arbitrary reverse run
Remedy
- Switch the operation mode back to the previous to remove the cause of this failure.
M01 Interference check invalidated 0200

Details
The 3D machine interference check is invalidated. This alarm is output to NC alarm 5.
Remedy
- Validate all the interference check settings.
- If there is any axis which has not completed zero point return, establish the zero point first.
M01 Machine interference 1 0201

Details
It was judged that an interference occurred in the No.1 step interference check and caused a
deceleration stop.
When machine interference is detected, the interfered part is highlighted (yellow/red) and the part's
name is displayed on the 3D monitor's model display.
Remedy
- Move the axis in a direction which does not cause interference.
- Press RESET to cancel the alarm.
- You can move the axis in the same travel direction as before the interference.
But the axis movement is done using the 2nd step interference check distance.
(In manual operation)
M01 Machine interference 2 0202

Details
It was judged that an interference occurred in the No.2 step interference check and caused a
deceleration stop.
When machine interference is detected, the interfered part is highlighted (red) and the part's name is
displayed on the 3D monitor's model display.
Remedy
- Move the axis in a direction which doesn't cause interference.
M01 Multi ax for 5-ax manual feed 0230

Details
More than one axis was designated simultaneously in manual mode while the manual feed for 5-axis
machining was valid.
Remedy
- Command the manual feed to each axis one by one.
504
M01 5-ax manual feed coord sys err 0231

Details
- More than one of the three bits for selecting hypothetical coordinate system was turned ON.
- Hypothetical coordinate system was selected while the manual feed for 5-axis machining was
invalidated by the parameter setting.
Remedy
- Check the sequence program.
- Validate the manual feed for 5-axis machining (parameter "#7912 NO_MANUAL").
M01 Illegal op in 5 ax tool R comp 0232

Details
An illegal operation (such as manual interrupt) was attempted during tool radius compensation for 5-
axis machining.
Remedy
- Operations such as manual interrupt are disabled while the tool radius compensation for 5-axis
machining is being performed.
M01 Machining surface operation disabled 0250

Details
Machining surface operation (selection, indexing or cancel) was attempted while the operation is
disabled.
Remedy
- Cancel the other modes so that the inclined surface machining command (G68.2), tool axis direction
control (G53.1) and the inclined surface machining cancel command (G69) can be issued.
- Wait until the axes stop completely (until the smoothing for all axes reaches zero).
- Perform operation search for machining programs.
M01 Axs travel n/a in manual index 0251

Details
Moving a rotary axis was attempted during manual machining surface indexing, when a manual
operation mode other than handle mode was selected.
Remedy
- Change the operation mode to a handle mode before carrying out the manual surface indexing.
M01 Tool length compensation amt 0 0252

Details
The tool length compensation amount for performing the R-Navi indexing type 2 is 0.
Remedy
- Set the tool length compensation amount for performing the indexing type 2 to a value other than 0.
M01 Feat coord ill w/ multi-handle 0253

Details
Manual feed feature coordinate system was selected while two or more handles were ON.
Remedy
- Manual feed on a feature coordinate system is disabled while two or more handles are enabled (*).
- Press [Manual coord] and select the machine coordinate system.
- Reduce the number of enabled handles (*) to one.
(*) An enabled handle means the handle for which “Nth handle valid” signal (HSnS) is ON.
505
MITSUBISHI CNC
M01 Auto backlash adjust illegal 0270

Details
- A measurement condition adjustment or backlash adjustment was attempted to an axis with which
automatic backlash adjustment is impossible.
- A measurement condition adjustment or backlash adjustment was attempted even though all the
axes had not reached the 1st reference position.
- The operation mode is other than memory mode.
- The slave axis of synchronous control is selected as adjustment axis.
- An attempt has been made to start an adjustment by cycle start.
Remedy
- Check the adjustment axis.
- Start the adjustment after all the axes return to the 1st reference position.
- Check the operation mode.
- Select the master axis of synchronous control as adjustment axis when adjusting the slave axis.
- Start the adjustment by automatic backlash adjustment start signal.
M01 Operating auto backlash adjust 0271

Details
An illegal operation was attempted during measurement condition adjustment or backlash adjustment.
Remedy
- Continue the operation after canceling the measurement condition adjustment and backlash
adjustment.
M01 APLC password mismatch 0280

Details
The APLC authentication password is inconsistent.
Remedy
- Contact the machine tool builder.
M01 High-cycle sampling disabled 0290

Details
- The drive unit's hardware or software does not conform to the high-cycle sampling mode.
- High-cycle data are not used even when high-cycle sampling has been set.
- High-cycle sampling was attempted while the axis targeted for high-cycle sampling was moving.
- High-cycle sampling was attempted during speed monitor mode.
- High-cycle sampling was attempted while any of the following operations is being executed: Dog-
type zero point return, absolute position setting, synchronous tapping, spindle synchronization,
hobbing, tool spindle synchronization IC.
Remedy
- Set data for high-cycle sampling.
- Execute high-cycle sampling after stopping the axis targeted for high-cycle sampling.
- Execute high-cycle sampling after cancelling the speed monitor mode.
- Execute high-cycle sampling after stopping the currently executed functions.
506
M01 N/A during high-cycle sampling 0291

Details
- An attempt to activate "Speed monitor mode" was made during the high-cycle sampling mode.
- An attempt to change the gear signal was made during the high-cycle sampling mode.
- An attempt to execute spindle orientation was made during the high-cycle sampling mode.
- Spindle detach was attempted during the high-cycle sampling mode.
- Any of the following operations was attempted during the high-cycle sampling mode: Dog-type zero
point return, absolute position setting, spindle/C axis changeover, synchronous tapping, spindle
synchronization, hobbing, or tool spindle synchronization IC.
Remedy
- Change the speed monitor mode signal back, finish high-cycle sampling, and then select the speed
monitor mode.
- Change the gear signal back, finish high-cycle sampling, and then change the gear.
- Change the spindle orientation signal back, finish high-cycle sampling, and then execute orientation.
- Change the spindle detach signal back, finish high-cycle sampling, and then carry out spindle
detachment.
- Execute the operation after terminating high-cycle sampling.
M01 Illegal movement command during superimposition 1003

Details
- A machine command was issued to the superimposing axis.
- Reference position return was attempted on the superimposing axis.
- Skip command was issued to the master or superimposing axis.
- Dog-type reference position return was attempted on the master axis.
Remedy
M01 Superimposition command illegal 1004

Details
- Superimposition start command was issued to the axis which is executing the following functions.
Synchronization control
Milling interpolation
- Superimposition start command was issued to the axis which was under superimposition control.
- The superimposition command was issued to an axis that belongs to the same part system as a
basic or synchronous axis of synchronization across part systems.
Remedy
M01 G114.n command illegal 1005

Details
G114.n has been commanded during the execution of G114.n.
G51.2 has been commanded when G51.2 spindle-spindle polygon machining mode has been already
entered at another part system.
Remedy
- Command G113 to cancel the operation.
- Turn ON the "spindle synchronization cancel" signal to cancel the operation.
- Command G50.2 to cancel the operation.
- Turn ON the "spindle-spindle polygon cancel" signal to cancel the operation.
M01 Spindle in-use by synchro tap 1007

Details
The spindle is being used in synchronized tapping.
Remedy
- Cancel the synchronized tapping.
507
MITSUBISHI CNC
M01 GB spindle synchro signal OFF 1014

Details
- A forward run, reverse run, orientation, synchronous tapping, spindle synchronization, tool spindle
synchronization I, tool spindle synchronization II or C-axis servo ON command was issued to the
reference spindle while the guide bushing spindle synchronization signal was OFF.
- The guide bushing spindle synchronization signal was turned OFF during a forward run, reverse run,
orientation, synchronous tapping, spindle synchronization, tool spindle synchronization I, tool spindle
synchronization II or C-axis servo ON command.
Remedy
- Check the ladder program.
Details
- Orientation was commanded during the “guide bushing spindle synchronization” signal ON with
spindle zero point detection with contactless switch and turret indexing enabled.
- C axis servo ON was commanded during the “guide bushing spindle synchronization” signal ON with
spindle C axis parameter change enabled.
Remedy
M01 GB SP sync:Spindle type error 1015

Details
- A spindle drive unit other than the drive unit after MDS-D series or analog spindle is used for the
master spindle or guide bushing spindle.
Remedy
- Change the reference spindle or guide bushing spindle to a spindle that is drive unit after MDS-D
series.
M01 GB SP sync:Phase mem sgnl ilgl 1021

Details
- The guide bushing spindle synchronization phase memory signal was turned ON while the master
spindle or guide bushing spindle was rotating.
- The guide bushing spindle synchronization phase memory signal was turned ON while the guide
bushing spindle synchronization signal was OFF.
Remedy
M01 GB SP sync:Phase set sgnl ilgl 1022

Details
- The guide bushing spindle synchronization phase alignment signal was turned ON while the master
spindle or guide bushing spindle was stopped.
Remedy
M01 GB SP sync:Z phase not pass 1023

Details
- When the guide bushing spindle synchronization phase memory signal was ON, the master spindle
or guide bushing spindle’s Z-phase was not passed.
Remedy
M01 SP-C ax ctrl runs independntly 1026

Details
C axis mode command has been issued for polygon machining spindle.
C axis mode command has been issued for synchronized tapping spindle.
Polygon command has been issued for synchronized tapping spindle.
Spindle is being used as spindle/C axis.
Remedy
- Cancel the C axis command.
- Cancel the polygon machining command.
- Cancel the C axis with servo OFF.
508
M01 Synchronization mismatch 1030

Details
Different M codes were each commanded as synchronization M code in each of the two part systems.
Synchronization with the "!" code was commanded in another part system during M code
synchronization.
Synchronization with the M code was commanded in another part system during synchronization with
the "!" code.
Remedy
- Correct the program so that the M codes match.
- Correct the program so that the same synchronization codes are commanded.
M01 Multiple C axes select invalid 1031

Details
The "C axis selection" signal has been changed when the multiple C axes selection is not available.
The selected axis by the "C axis selection" signal cannot be controlled for the multiple C axes
selection.
Remedy
- Correct the parameter settings and program.
M01 Tap retract Sp select illegal 1032

Details
Tap retract has been executed with a different spindle selected. Cutting feed is in wait state until
synchronization is completed.
Remedy
- Select the spindle for which tap cycle was halted before turning ON the "tap retract" signal.
M01 Sp-Sp polygon cut interlock 1033

Details
Cutting feed is in wait state until synchronization is completed.
Remedy
- Wait for the synchronization to end.
M01 Mixed sync ctrl prmtr illegal 1034

Details
There is a mistake in the settings of mixed control axis parameters (crsax [1] to [8]).
Mixed control was attempted within one and the same part system.
Any of the parameter settings is disabling mixed control.
Remedy
- Correct the parameter settings for the mixed control (cross axis control).
509
MITSUBISHI CNC
M01 Mixed sync ctrl disable modal 1035

Details
Mixed control (cross axis control) was commanded for a part system in which the mixed control (cross
axis control) is disabled as shown below.
- During nose R compensation mode
- During pole coordinate interpolation mode
- During cylindrical interpolation mode
- During balance cut mode
- During fixed cycle machining mode
- During facing turret mirror image
- During constant surface speed control mode
- During hobbing mode
- During axis name switch
An axis was transferred to another part system, and mixed control was attempted with the part
system's maximum number of control axes exceeded.
An axis was removed from the part system, and mixed control was attempted with the part system's
number of axes zero.
Another axis exchange was attempted to the axis which was already transferred to another part
system for mixed control.
Mixed control was attempted with an axis of a part system not in automatic operation.
Remedy
M01 Synchro ctrl setting disable 1036

Details
"Synchronous control operation method" was set (with R2589) when the mode was not the C axis
mode.
"Synchronous control operation method" was set (with R2589) in the zero point not set state.
Mirror image is disabled.
External mirror image or parameter mirror image was commanded during facing turret mirror image.
Remedy
- Set the contents of the R2589 register to "0".
- Correct the program and parameters.
M01 Synchro start/cancel disable 1037

Details
Synchronous control start/cancel command was issued when the start/cancel is disabled.
Remedy
- Correct the program and parameters.
M01 Move cmnd invld to synchro ax 1038

Details
A travel command was issued to a synchronous axis in synchronous control.
Remedy
M01 No spindle speed clamp 1043

Details
The constant surface speed command (G96) was issued to the spindle which is not selected for the
spindle speed clamp command (G92/G50) under Multiple spindle control II.
Remedy
Press the reset key and carry out the remedy below.
- Select the spindle before commanding G92/G50.
510
M01 Cont ax superimpos II prm illg 1044

内容
- There is a mistake in the setting of the superimposition control base axis parameter (#2089 bsax_pl).
- Superimposition control is not available under the current parameter settings.
処置
- Correct the parameter.
M01 Sp synchro phase calc illegal 1106

Details
Spindle synchronization phase alignment command was issued while the "phase shift calculation
request" signal was ON.
Remedy
M01 GB SP sync:Cancel sgnl illegal 1137

Details
The guide bushing spindle synchronization temporary cancel signal was turned ON/OFF when the
master spindle and G/B spindle were in one of the following modes.
- During rotation (when not stopped)
- During tap cycle synchronization mode
- During spindle synchronization mode
- During tool-spindle synchronization I (polygon machining) mode
- During tool-spindle synchronization II (hobbing) mode
- During spindle C axis control C axis mode
- During orientation/indexing
Remedy
M01 GB SP sync runs independently 1138

Details
- The reference spindle was commanded as a spindle related to tool spindle synchronization IC
(polygon).
- The guide bushing spindle was commanded as a synchronous tapping spindle.
- The guide bushing spindle was commanded as a spindle related to spindle synchronization/tool
spindle synchronization I (polygon)/tool spindle synchronization II (hobbing).
Remedy
- Check the program.
M80 POSITION ERROR

Details
An axis position is illegal.
An alarm is displayed (AL4 is output) and a block stop is applied on the machining program.
When the block stop is not allowed in the thread cutting cycle and the like, the stop is applied at the
next position where allowed.
Remedy
Carry out reset. Then confirm that the system starts the operation. If the alarm is displayed again, turn
ON the emergency stop switch and turn the NC power OFF and ON.
M90 Parameter set mode

Details
The lock for setup parameters has been released. Setting the setup parameters is enabled while
automatic start is disabled.
Remedy
Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.
511
MITSUBISHI CNC
M91 INVALID MEASUR. 0002

Details
Data is over the range
The measurement result exceeds the tool data setting range.
Remedy
Correct the settings of "#2015 tlml- (Negative direction sensor of tool setter)" and "#2016 tlml+
(Positive direction sensor of tool setter or TLM standard length)".

Details
No corresponding No.
No measurement tool No. has been set.
The registered No. is out of the specifications.
Remedy
Correct the measurement tool No.

Details
Measurement axis illegal
Sensor has been turned ON while two or more axes are moving.
Remedy
Move a single axis when the sensor is contacted.

Details
Measurement axis has not returned to reference position
Reference position return has not been executed on a measurement axis in an incremental system.
Remedy
Carry out the reference position return on the measurement axis before measuring the tool.

Details
Sensor signal illegal ON
Sensor has already been ON when TLM mode is turned ON. The travel amount was so small that the
tool contacted the sensor.
Remedy
All axes are interlocked when this alarm has occurred.
Turn the TLM mode OFF or use the interlock cancel signal to move the tool off the sensor.
Ensure at least 0.1mm for the movement to the sensor.

Details
Speed at contact is below minimum
The tool has contacted the sensor at the lower speed than set in "#1508 TLM_Fmin (Minimum speed
toward tool setter)".
Remedy
Correct the feed rate to move the tool to the sensor.

Details
Speed at contact is over maximum
The tool has contacted the sensor at the higher speed than set in "#1509 TLM_Fmax (Maximum speed
toward tool setter)".
Remedy
Correct the feed rate to move the tool to the sensor.
512

Details
Change of compensation No. or sub-side selection during measurement
A compensation No. or sub-side valid signal state has been changed while a sensor signal is ON or a
compensation amount is being written.
Remedy
Carry out the measurement again.

Details
Error on response timing of sensor signal
A compensation No. has been changed at the same time as a sensor's response.
Remedy
Carry out the measurement again.
M92 IGNORE INT.LOCK

Details
Manual tool length measurement Interlock temporally canceled
"M01 Operation error 0005" and "M01 Operation error 0019", which occur at manual tool length
measurement, are temporally canceled. When a tool has contacted a sensor and "M01 Operation
error 0019" has occurred, tool escape is enabled by temporarily turning ON the interlock cancel
request. This alarm notifies that the interlock is disabled in the meantime.
Remedy
After carrying out the tool escape from the sensor, turn OFF the interlock temporary cancel signal for
manual tool length measurement.
513
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 2.2 Stop Codes (T)
T01 Axis in motion 0101

Details
Automatic start is not possible as one of the axes is moving.
Remedy
- Try automatic start again after all axes have stopped.
T01 NC not ready 0102

Details
Automatic start is not possible as the NC is not ready.
Remedy
- Another alarm has occurred. Check the details and remedy.
T01 Reset signal ON 0103

Details
Automatic start is not possible as the "reset" signal has been input.
Remedy
- Turn OFF the "reset" signal.
- Check for any failure of the reset switch which has caused the switch's continuous ON.
T01 Auto operation pause signal ON 0104

Details
The feed hold switch on the machine operation panel is ON (valid).
Remedy
- Correct the feed hold switch setting.
- The feed hold switch is B contact switch.
- Fix any broken wires in the feed hold signal line.
T01 H/W stroke end axis exists 0105

Details
Automatic start is not possible as one of the axes is at the stroke end.
Remedy
- Manually move any axis whose end is at the stroke end.
- Check for any broken wires in the stroke end signal line.
- Check for any failure in the stroke end limit switch.
T01 S/W stroke end axis exists 0106

Details
Automatic start is not possible as one of the axes is at the stored stroke limit.
Remedy
- Move the axis manually.
- If the axis's end is not at the stroke end, check the parameters.
T01 No operation mode 0107

Details
The operation mode has not been selected.
Remedy
- Select automatic operation mode.
- Check for any broken wires in the signal line for automatic operation mode (memory, tape, MDl).
514
T01 Operation mode duplicated 0108

Details
Two or more automatic operation modes have been selected.
Remedy
- Check for any short circuit in the mode (memory, tape, MDl) selection signal line.
- Check for any failure in the switch.
T01 Operation mode changed 0109

Details
The automatic operation mode has changed to another automatic operation mode.
Remedy
- Return to the original automatic operation mode, and execute automatic start.
T01 Tape search execution 0110

Details
Automatic start is not possible as tape search is being executed.
Remedy
- Wait for the tape search to be completed and then execute the automatic start.
T01 Cycle start prohibit 0111

Details
Automatic start is disabled because restart search is in execution.
Remedy
- Execute automatic start after the restart search is completed.
T01 CNC overheat 0113

Details
Automatic start is not possible because a thermal alarm (Z53 CNC overheat) has occurred.
Remedy
- Temperature of the control unit has exceeded the specified temperature.
- Take appropriate measures to cool the unit.
T01 Cycle st. prohibit(Host comm.) 0115

Details
Automatic start cannot is not possible because the NC is communicating with the host computer.
Remedy
- Wait for the communication with host computer to be ended and then execute the automatic start.
T01 Cycle st prohibit(Battery alm) 0116

Details
Automatic start is not possible because the voltage of the battery in the NC control unit has dropped.
Remedy
- Replace the battery of the NC control unit.
- Contact the service center.
T01 R-pnt offset value not set 0117

Details
Automatic operation is not possible because no reference position offset value has been set.
Remedy
- Perform the reference position initialization setting, then set "#2034 rfpofs(Distance-coded reference
position detection offset)".
515
MITSUBISHI CNC

Details
Tool retract position signal OFF
The axis was moved from the tool retract position. Tool retract position reached signal is OFF.
Remedy
Once the axis has been moved off the tool retract position, resuming the program is not possible.
Cancel the program by reset and then execute it from the start.
T01 In absolute position alarm 0138

Details
A start signal was input during an absolute position detection alarm.
Remedy
- Clear the absolute position detection alarm, and then input the start signal.
T01 In abs posn initial setting 0139

Details
A start signal was input during zero point initialization in the absolute position detection system.
Remedy
- Complete zero point initialization before inputting the start signal.
T01 Start during MDI operation at other part system disable 0141
Details
In multi-part system, a start signal was input for MDI mode while the MDI operation was being carried
out in another part system.
Remedy
- End the other part system's operation before starting.

Details
In manual coordinate system setting
Automatic start is not allowed during the manual coordinate system setting.
Remedy
The system restarts after either of the manual coordinate system setting completion signal or the error
end signal has been turned ON.
T01 In manual measurement 0143

Details
Automatic start is disabled because manual measurement is in execution.
Remedy
- Execute automatic start after the manual measurement is completed.
T01 APLC password mismatch 0160

Details
The APLC authentication password is inconsistent.
Remedy
- Contact the machine tool builder.

Details
Automatic start became disabled while servo auto turning is enabled.
Remedy
- Set "#1164 ATS" to "0" when the servo auto turning is not executed.

Details
Automatic start is not possible because the setting of setup parameters is enabled.
Remedy
- Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.
516

Details
Automatic start was attempted while a file was being deleted/written.
Remedy
- Wait for the file to be deleted/written and then execute the automatic start.
T01 Cycle st. prohibit (Term exp'd) 0193

Details
Automatic start is not possible because the valid term has been expired.
Remedy
- Obtain a decryption code from the machine tool builder and input it in the NC, then turn the power
ON again.
T02 H/W stroke end axis exists 0201

Details
An axis is at the stroke end.
Remedy
- Manually move the axis away from the stroke end limit switch.
- Correct the machining program.
T02 S/W stroke end axis exists 0202

Details
An axis is at the stored stroke limit.
Remedy
- Manually move the axis.
T02 Reset signal ON 0203

Details
The reset has been entered.
Remedy
- The program execution position has returned to the start of the program. Execute automatic
operation from the start of the machining program.
T02 Auto operation pause signal ON 0204

Details
The "feed hold" switch is ON.
Remedy
- Press the CYCLE START switch to resume the automatic operation.

Details
The operation mode has changed to another mode during automatic operation.
Remedy
- Return to the original automatic operation mode, and press the CYCLE START switch to resume the
automatic operation.
T02 Acc/dec time cnst too large 0206

Details
The acceleration and deceleration time constants are too large. (This alarm occurs with the system
alarm Z59.)
Remedy
- Set a larger value for "#1206 G1bF(Maximum speed)".
- Set a smaller value for "#1207 G1btL(Time constant)".
- Set a lower cutting speed.
517
MITSUBISHI CNC
T02 Abs posn detect alarm occurred 0215

Details
An absolute position detection alarm occurred.
Remedy
- Clear the absolute position detection alarm.
T02 Aux axis changeover error 0220

Details
A travel command was issued to an auxiliary axis.
Remedy
- Turn ON the "NC axis control selection" signal and press the CYCLE START switch to restart the
automatic operation with.
T03 Single block stop signal ON 0301

Details
The SINGLE BLOCK switch on the machine operation panel is ON.
The SINGLE BLOCK or MACHINE LOCK switch changed.
Remedy
T03 Block stop cmnd in user macro 0302

Details
A block stop command was issued in the user macro program.
Remedy

Details
Automatic mode changed to another automatic mode.
Remedy
- Return to the original automatic operation mode, and press the CYCLE START switch to resume the
T03 MDI completed 0304

Details
MDI operation has ended the last block.
Remedy
- Set the MDI operation again, and press the CYCLE START switch to start the MDl operation.
T03 Block start interlock 0305

Details
The interlock signal, which locks the block start, is ON.
Remedy
T03 Cutting blck start interlock 0306

Details
The interlock signal, which locks the block cutting start, is ON.
Remedy
T03 Inclined Z offset change 0310

Details
The "inclined axis control: No Z axis compensation" signal has turned ON or OFF during the program
operation.
Remedy
518
T03 Aux axis changeover error 0330

Details
The "NC axis control selection" signal was turned OFF while a NC axis was traveling.
Remedy
- Turn the "NC axis control selection" signal ON and press the CYCLE START switch to resume the
T04 Collation stop 0401

Details
Collation stop occurred.
Remedy
- Execute the automatic start to resume the automatic operation.
T10 Fin wait (Factors for waiting completion)

Details
The following Nos. are shown during the operation of the corresponding completion wait factor. The
numbers will disappear when the operation is completed.
The completion wait factor is indicated with four digits (in hexadecimal).
Display format of completion wait factor

0__ __ __
(a)(b)(c)
Each of the hexadecimal numbers (a), (b) and (c) indicates the following details.
(a)
bit0: In dwell execution
bit3: Unclamp signal wait (Note 1)
(b)
bit0: Waiting for spindle position to be looped
bit3: Door open (Note 2)
(c)
bit0: Waiting for MSTB completion
bit1: Waiting for rapid traverse deceleration
bit2: Waiting for cutting speed deceleration
bit3: Waiting for spindle orientation completion
(Note 1) This shows the wait state for the unclamp signal's ON/OFF for the index table indexing.
(Note 2) This shows the door open state caused by the door interlock function.
T11 Fin wait 0010 (Factors for waiting completion)

Details
The following Nos. are shown during the operation of the corresponding completion wait factor. The
numbers will disappear when the operation is completed.
The completion wait factor is indicated with four digits (in hexadecimal).
Display format of completion wait factor

0__ __ __
(a)(b)(c)
Each of the hexadecimal numbers (a), (b) and (c) indicates the following details.
bit0:Operation alarm display being postponed
Remedy
The parameter "#1342 AlmDly" may be able to postpone displaying a part of an operation alarm,
depending on the setting.
This stop code will remain displayed while any alarm is being postponed.
And it will disappear if the postponed alarm is displayed or canceled.
519
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 2.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms (S)

Appendix 2.3.1 Servo Errors (S01/S03/S04)
Servo alarm is displayed in the following format.
S
Axis name
Servo : Axis name
Spindle : "S", "T", "M", "N", "P", "Q", "R"
Error No.
Reset method
Message
Alarm class
Alarm class Message Reset method Resetting methods

After removing the cause of the alarm, reset the alarm by turning the
S01 Servo alarm PR
NC power ON again.
After removing the cause of the alarm, reset the alarm by inputting
S03 Servo alarm NR
the NC RESET key.
After removing the cause of the alarm, reset the alarm by turning the
S04 Servo alarm AR
drive unit power ON again.
Error No. consists of four digits (0010 to). Servo alarms are explained in ascending order of the error No. The four digits
on the left part of each alarm indicate the error No.
(Note) For the details of servo alarms, refer to your drive unit's instruction manual.
Drive unit alarms
0010 Insufficient voltage

Details
A drop of bus voltage was detected in main circuit.
- Servo stop method: Dynamic stop
- Spindle stop method: Coast to a stop
0011 Axis selection error

Details
The axis selection rotary switch has been incorrectly set.
- Servo stop method: Initial error
- Spindle stop method: Initial error
0012 Memory error 1

Details
A hardware error was detected during the power ON self-check.
0013 Software processing error 1

Details
An error was detected for the software execution state.
0014 Software processing error 2

Details
The current processing processor does not operate correctly.
520
0016 Init mag pole pos detect err

Details
In the built-in motor which uses the absolute position detector, the servo ON has been set before the
magnetic pole shift amount is set.
The magnetic pole position, detected in the initial magnetic pole position detection control, is not
correctly set.
0017 A/D converter error

Details
A current feedback error was detected.
0018 Motor side dtc: Init commu err

Details
An error was detected in the initial communication with the motor side detector.
0019 Detector commu err in syn cont

Details
An error of the shared detector on the machine side was detected on the secondary axis of the speed
command synchronization control.
001A Machine side dtc: Init comu er

Details
An error was detected in the initial communication with the machine side detector.
001B Machine side dtc: Error 1

Details
An error was detected by the detector connected to the machine side.
The error details are different according to the detector type.
[Detector alarm (Servo drive unit)]
- OSA105, OSA105ET2A, OSA166, OSA166ET2NA(MITSUBISHI) Memory alarm
- OSA18() CPU alarm
- MDS-B-HR() Memory error
- MBA405W(MITSUBISHI) CPU error
- AT343, AT543, AT545(Mitsutoyo) Initialization error
- LC193M, LC493M, LC195M, LC495M, RCN223M, RCN227M, RCN727M, RCN827M, EIB
Series(HEIDENHAIN) Initialization error
- MPRZ Scale(MHI) Installation accuracy fault
- SR75, SR85, SR77, SR87, RU77(Magnescale) Laser diode error
- RL40N Series(Renishaw) Initialization error
[Detector alarm (Spindle drive unit)]
- TS5690, TS5691(MITSUBISHI) Memory error
- MDS-B-HR() Initialization error
- OSA18() CPU error
- MBE405W(MITSUBISHI) CPU error
- EIB Series(HEIDENHAIN) Initialization error
- MPCI scale(MHI) Installation accuracy fault
(Note) A driver processes all reset types of alarms as "PR". However, "AR" will be applied according to
the detector.
521
MITSUBISHI CNC
001C Machine side dtc: Error 2

Details
- OSA105, OSA105ET2A, OSA166, OSA166ET2NA(MITSUBISHI) LED alarm
- MBA405W(MITSUBISHI) Waveform error
- AT343, AT543, AT545(Mitsutoyo) EEPROM error
Series(HEIDENHAIN) EEPROM error
- SR75, SR85, SR77, SR87, RU77(Magnescale) System memory error
- TS5690, TS5691(MITSUBISHI) Waveform error
- MBE405W(MITSUBISHI) Waveform error
- EIB Series(HEIDENHAIN) EEPROM error
the detector.
001D Machine side dtc: Error 3

Details
- OSA105, OSA105ET2A, OSA166, OSA166ET2NA(MITSUBISHI) Data alarm
- OSA18() Data alarm
- MDS-B-HR() Data error
- MBA405W(MITSUBISHI) Data error
- AT343, AT543, AT545(Mitsutoyo) Photoelectric type, static capacity type data mismatch
Series(HEIDENHAIN) Relative/ absolute position data mismatch
- MPRZ Scale(MHI) Detection position deviance
- SR75, SR85, SR77, SR87, RU77(Magnescale) Encoder mismatch error
- SAM/SVAM/GAM/LAN Series (FAGOR) Absolute position detection error
- RL40N Series (Renishaw) Absolute position data error
- OSA18() Data error
- MBE405W(MITSUBISHI) Data error
- MPCI scale(MHI) Detection position deviance
the detector.
001E Machine side dtc: Error 4

Details
- AT343, AT543, AT545(Mitsutoyo) ROM/RAM error
Series(HEIDENHAIN) ROM/RAM error
- MPRZ Scale(MHI) Scale breaking
- SAM/SVAM/GAM/LAM Series (FAGOR) H/W error
- MPCI scale(MHI) Scale breaking
the detector.
522
001F Machine side dtc: Commu error

Details
An error was detected in the communication with the machine side detector.
0021 Machine side dtc: No signal

Details
In the machine side detector, ABZ-phase feedback cannot be returned even when the motor moves.
0022 Detector data error

Details
An error was detected in the feedback data from the position detector.
0023 Excessive speed error

Details
The state that there is a difference between the actual speed and command speed continued for
longer than the excessive speed deviation timer setting.
0024 Grounding
Details
The motor power cable is in contact with FG (Frame Ground).
0025 Absolute position data lost

Details
The absolute position data was lost in the detector.
0026 Unused axis error

Details
In the multi-axis drive unit, there is an axis set to free, and the other axis detected a power module
error.
0027 Machine side dtc: Error 5

Details
- MDS-B-HR() Scale not connected
- AT343, AT543, AT545(Mitsutoyo) CPU error
Series(HEIDENHAIN) CPU error
- MPRZ Scale(MHI) Absolute value detection fault
- SAM/SVAM/GAM/LAN Series (FAGOR) CPU error
- MDS-B-HR() Connection error
- EIB Series(HEIDENHAIN) CPU error
the detector.
523
MITSUBISHI CNC

Details
- AT343, AT543, AT545(Mitsutoyo) Photoelectric type overspeed
Series(HEIDENHAIN) Overspeed
- SR75, SR85, SR77, SR87, RU77(Magnescale) Over speed
- RL40N Series (Renishaw) Overspeed error
- TS5690, TS5691(MITSUBISHI) Overspeed
- EIB Series(HEIDENHAIN) Overspeed
the detector.

Details
- AT343, AT543, AT545(Mitsutoyo) Static capacity type error
Series(HEIDENHAIN) Absolute position data error
- MPRZ Scale(MHI) Gain fault
- SR75, SR85, SR77, SR87, RU77(Magnescale) Absolute position data error
- MPCI scale(MHI) Gain fault
the detector.
002A Machine side dtc: Error 8

Details
- MBA405W(MITSUBISHI) Count error
- AT343, AT543, AT545(Mitsutoyo) Photoelectric type error
Series(HEIDENHAIN) Relative position data error
- MPRZ Scale(MHI) Phase fault
- SR75, SR85, SR77, SR87, RU77(Magnescale) Relative position data error
- TS5690, TS5691(MITSUBISHI) Relative position data error
- MBE405W(MITSUBISHI) Count error
- EIB Series(HEIDENHAIN) Relative position data error
- MPCI scale(MHI) Phase fault
the detector.
524
002B Motor side dtc: Error 1

Details
An error was detected by the detector connected to the motor side.
- OSA105, OSA105ET2A, OSA166, OSA166ET2NA(MITSUBISHI) Memory alarm
- OSA18() CPU alarm
- MDS-B-HR() Memory error
- AT343, AT543, AT545(Mitsutoyo) Initialization error
- LC193M, LC493M, RCN223M, RCN227M, RCN727M, RCN827M, EIB Series(HEIDENHAIN)
Initialization error
- MPRZ Series(MHI) Installation accuracy fault
- SR75, SR85, SR77, SR87, RU77(Magnescale) Laser diode error
- TS5690, TS5691(MITSUBISHI) Memory error
- MDS-B-HR() Initialization error
- OSA18() CPU error
- EIB Series(HEIDENHAIN) Initialization error
- MPCI scale(MHI) Installation accuracy fault
the detector.
002C Motor side dtc: Error 2

Details
- OSA105, OSA105ET2A, OSA166, OSA166ET2NA(MITSUBISHI) LED alarm
- AT343, AT543, AT545(Mitsutoyo) EEPROM error
EEPROM error
- SR75, SR85, SR77, SR87, RU77(Magnescale) System memory error
- TS5690, TS5691(MITSUBISHI) Waveform error
- EIB Series(HEIDENHAIN) EEPROM error
the detector.
002D Motor side dtc: Error 3

Details
- OSA105, OSA105ET2A, OSA166, OSA166ET2NA(MITSUBISHI) Data alarm
- OSA18() Data alarm
- AT343, AT543, AT545(Mitsutoyo) Photoelectric type, static capacity type data mismatch
Relative/ absolute position data mismatch
- MPRZ Series(MHI) Detection position deviance
- SR75, SR85, SR77, SR87, RU77(Magnescale) Encoder mismatch error
- SAM/SVAM/GAM/LAN Series (FAGOR) Absolute position detection error
- OSA18() Data error
- MPCI scale(MHI) Detection position deviance
the detector.
525
MITSUBISHI CNC
002E Motor side dtc: Error 4

Details
- AT343, AT543, AT545(Mitsutoyo) ROM/RAM error
- LC193M, LC493M, RCN223M, RCN227M, RCN727M, RCN827M, EIB Series(HEIDENHAIN) ROM/
RAM error
- MPRZ Series(MHI) Scale breaking
- SAM/SVAM/GAM/LAM Series (FAGOR) H/W error
- MPCI scale(MHI) Scale breaking
the detector.
002F Motor side dtc: Commu error

Details
An error was detected in the communication with the motor side detector.
0030 Over regeneration

Details
Over-regeneration level exceeded 100%. The regenerative resistor is overloaded.
0031 Overspeed
Details
The motor speed exceeded the allowable speed.
- Servo stop method: Deceleration stop enabled
- Spindle stop method: Deceleration stop enabled
0032 Power module overcurrent

Details
The power module detected the overcurrent.
0033 Overvoltage
Details
The bus voltage in main circuit exceeded the allowable value.
0034 NC-DRV commu: CRC error

Details
The data received from the NC was outside the setting range.
0035 NC command error

Details
The travel command data received from the NC was excessive.
526
0036 NC-DRV commu: Commu error

Details
The communication with the NC was interrupted.
0037 Initial parameter error

Details
An incorrect set value was detected among the parameters send from the NC at the power ON.
In the SLS (Safely Limited Speed) function, an error was detected in the relation between the safety
speed and safety rotation number in the speed observation mode.
0038 NC-DRV commu: Protocol error 1

Details
An error was detected in the communication frames received from the NC.
Or, removing an axis or changing an axis was performed in the synchronous control.
0039 NC-DRV commu: Protocol error 2

Details
An error was detected in the axis data received from the NC.
Or, in changing an axis, the parameter setting of the synchronous control was applied when the axis
was installed.
003A Overcurrent
Details
Excessive motor drive current was detected.
003B Power module overheat

Details
The power module detected an overheat.
003C Regeneration circuit error

Details
An error was detected in the regenerative transistor or in the regenerative resistor.
003D Pw sply volt err acc/dec

Details
A motor control error during acceleration/deceleration, due to a power voltage failure, was detected.
003E Magnet pole pos detect err

Details
The magnetic pole position, detected in the magnetic pole position detection control, is not correctly
detected.
527
MITSUBISHI CNC
0041 Feedback error 3

Details
Either a missed feedback pulse in the motor side detector or an error in the Z-phase was detected in
the full closed loop system.

Details
Either a missed feedback pulse in the position detection or an error in the Z-phase was detected. Or
the distance-coded reference check error exceeded the allowable value when the distance-coded
reference scale was used.

Details
An excessive difference in feedback was detected between the machine side detector and the motor
side detector.
0045 Fan stop

Details
An overheat of the power module was detected during the cooling fan stopping.
0046 Motor overheat

Details
Either the motor or the motor side detector detected an overheat.
Or, the thermistor signal receiving circuit of the linear motor or DD motor was disconnected.
Or, the thermistor signal receiving circuit was short-circuited.
0048 Motor side dtc: Error 5

Details
An error was detected by the detector connected to the main side.
The error details are different according to the connected detector.
- MDS-B-HR() Scale not connected
- AT343, AT543, AT545(Mitsutoyo) CPU error
- LC193M, LC493M, RCN223M, RCN227M, RCN727M, RCN827M, EIB Series(HEIDENHAIN) CPU
error
- MPRZ Series(MHI) Absolute value detection fault
- SAM/SVAM/GAM/LAM Series (FAGOR) CPU error
- MDS-B-HR() Connection error
- EIB Series(HEIDENHAIN) CPU error
the detector.
528
0049 Motor side dtc: Error 6

Details
- AT343, AT543, AT545(Mitsutoyo) Photoelectric type overspeed
Overspeed
- SR75, SR85, SR77, SR87, RU77(Magnescale) Over speed
- TS5690, TS5691(MITSUBISHI) Overspeed
- EIB Series(HEIDENHAIN) Overspeed
the detector.
004A Motor side dtc: Error 7

Details
- AT343, AT543, AT545(Mitsutoyo) Static capacity type error
Absolute position data error
- MPRZ Series(MHI) Gain fault
- SR75, SR85, SR77, SR87, RU77(Magnescale) Absolute position data error
- MPCI scale(MHI) Gain fault
the detector.
004B Motor side dtc: Error 8

Details
- AT343, AT543, AT545(Mitsutoyo) Photoelectric type error
Relative position data error
- MPRZ Series(MHI) Phase fault
- SR75, SR85, SR77, SR87, RU77(Magnescale) Relative position data error
- TS5690, TS5691(MITSUBISHI) Relative position data error
- EIB Series(HEIDENHAIN) Relative position data error
- MPCI scale(MHI) Phase fault
the detector.
004C Current err mag pole estim

Details
Current detection failed at the initial magnetic pole estimation.
004D Dual signal error

Details
An error was detected in the signal related to the dual signal.
529
MITSUBISHI CNC
004E NC command mode error

Details
An error was detected in the control mode send from the NC.
004F Instantaneous power interrupt

Details
The control power supply has been shut down for 50ms or more.
0050 Overload 1
Details
Overload detection level became 100% or more. The motor or the drive unit is overloaded.
0051 Overload 2
Details
In a servo system, current command of 95% or more of the unit’s max. current was given continuously
for 1 second or longer. In a spindle system, current command of 95% or more of the motor’s max.
current was given continuously for 1 second or longer.
0052 Excessive error 1

Details
A position tracking error during servo ON was excessive.

Details
A position tracking error during servo OFF was excessive.

Details
There was no motor current feedback when the alarm "Excessive error 1" was detected.
0056 Commanded speed error

Details
In the C-axis control mode, excessive speed error was detected.
0058 Collision detection 1: G0

Details
A disturbance torque exceeded the allowable value in rapid traverse modal (G0).
- Servo stop method: Maximum capacity deceleration stop
0059 Collision detection 1: G1

Details
A disturbance torque exceeded the allowable value in the cutting feed modal (G1).
530
005A Collision detection 2

Details
A current command with the maximum drive unit current value was detected.
005B Safely limited: Cmd spd err

Details
A commanded speed exceeding the safely limited speed was detected in the safely limited mode.
005D Safely limited: Door stat err

Details
The door state signal input in the NC does not coincide with the door state signal input in the drive unit
in the safely limited mode. Otherwise, door open state was detected in normal mode.
005E Safely limited: FB speed err

Details
A motor speed exceeding the safely limited speed was detected in the safely limited mode.
005F External contactor error

Details
A contact of the external contactor is welding.
0080 Motor side dtc: cable err

Details
The cable type of the motor side detector cable is for rectangular wave signal.
0081 Machine side dtc: cable err

Details
The cable type of the machine side detector cable does not coincide with the detector type which is set
by the parameter.
0087 Drive unit communication error

Details
The communication frame between drive units was aborted.
0088 Watchdog
Details
The drive unit does not operate correctly.
008A Drivers commu data error 1

Details
The communication data 1 between drivers exceeded the tolerable value in the communication
between drive units.
531
MITSUBISHI CNC
008B Drivers commu data error 2

Details
The communication data 2 between drivers exceeded the tolerable value in the communication
between drive units.
532
Power supply alarms
0061 Pw sply: Pwr module overcurnt

Details
Overcurrent protection function in the power module has started its operation.
0062 Pw sply: Frequency error

Details
The input power supply frequency increased above the specification range.
0066 Pw sply: Process error

Details
An error occurred in the process cycle.
0067 Pw sply: Phase interruption

Details
An open-phase condition was detected in input power supply circuit.
0068 Pw sply: Watchdog

Details
The system does not operate correctly.
0069 Pw sply: Grounding

Details
The motor power cable is in contact with FG (Frame Ground).
006A Pw sply: Ext contactor weld

Details
A contact of the external contactor is welding.
006B Pw sply: Rush circuit error

Details
An error was detected in the rush circuit.
006C Pw sply: Main circuit error

Details
An error was detected in charging operation of the main circuit capacitor.
006D Pw sply: Parameter error

Details
An error was detected in the parameter sent from the drive unit.
006E Pw sply: H/W error

Details
An error was detected in the internal memory.
An error was detected in the A/D converter.
An error was detected in the unit identification.
006F Power supply error

Details
No power supply is connected to the drive unit, or a communication error was detected.
0070 Pw sply: External EMG stop err

Details
A mismatch of the external emergency stop input and NC emergency stop input continued for 30
seconds.
533
MITSUBISHI CNC
0071 Pw sply: Instant pwr interrupt

Details
The power was momentarily interrupted.
0072 Pw sply: Fan stop

Details
A cooling fan built in the power supply unit stopped, and overheat occurred in the power module.
0073 Pw sply: Over regeneration

Details
Over-regeneration detection level became over 100%. The regenerative resistor is overloaded. This
alarm cannot be reset for 15 min from the occurrence to protect the regeneration resistor. Leave the
drive system energized for more than 15 min, then turn the power ON to reset the alarm.
0074 Pw sply: Option unit error

Details
An alarm was detected in the power backup unit (power supply option unit).
Check the LED display on the power backup unit to identify what alarm is occurring to the unit. Refer to
the instruction manual of your drive unit for details.
0075 Pw sply: Overvoltage

Details
L+ and L- bus voltage in main circuit exceeded the allowable value. As the voltage between L+ and L-
is high immediately after this alarm, another alarm may occur if this alarm is reset in a short time. Wait
more than 5 min before resetting so that the voltage drops.
0076 Pw sply: Function setting err

Details
The rotary switch setting of external emergency stop is not correct, or a wrong external emergency
stop signal is input.
Undefined number was selected for the rotary switch setting of the power supply.
0077 Pw sply: Power module overheat

Details
Thermal protection function in the power module has started its operation.
534
Appendix 2.3.2 Initial Parameter Errors (S02)
S02 Initial parameter error:PR 2201-2456 (Axis name)

Details
The servo parameter setting data is illegal.
The alarm No. is the No. of the servo parameter where the error occurred.
Remedy
Check the descriptions for the appropriate servo parameters and correct them.
Even when the parameter is set to a value within the setting range, an error is occurring due to the
hardware compatibility or specifications or in relation to several other parameters.
Refer to "Parameter Numbers during Initial Parameter Error" of each drive unit instruction manual for
details.
S02 Initial parameter error:PR 13001-13256 (Axis name)

Details
Parameter error
The spindle parameter setting data is illegal.
The alarm No. is the No. of the spindle parameter where the error occurred.
Remedy
Check the descriptions for the appropriate spindle parameters and correct them.
details.
Appendix 2.3.3 Safety Function Errors (S05)
S05 Safety function error:NR 0001 (Axis name)

Details
The STO signal has been input through the CN8 connector.
Remedy
Make sure that a short-circuiting connector has been inserted into CN8.
535
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 2.3.4 Parameter Errors (S51)
S51 Parameter error 2201-2456 (Axis name)

Details
Servo parameter setting data is illegal.
The alarm No. is the No. of the servo parameter where the warning occurred.
Remedy
Check the descriptions for the appropriate servo parameters and correct them.
details.
S51 Parameter error 13001-13256 (Axis name)

Details
Spindle parameter setting data is illegal.
The alarm No. is the No. of the spindle parameter where the warning occurred.
Remedy
Check the descriptions for the appropriate spindle parameters and correct them.
details.
536
Appendix 2.3.5 Servo Warnings (S52)

Servo warning is displayed in the following format.
S
Axis name
Servo : Axis name
Spindle : "S", "T", "M", "N", "P", "Q", "R"
Error No.
Message
Alarm class
Alarm class Message

S52 Servo warning
Error No. consists of four digits (0096 to). Servo warnings are explained in ascending order of the error No. The four
digits on the left part of each warning indicate the error No.
(Note) For the details of servo warnings, refer to your drive unit's instruction manual.
Drive unit warnings
0096 Scale feedback error

Details
An excessive difference in feedback amount was detected between the main side detector and the
MPI scale in MPI scale absolute position detection system.
- Reset method: Automatically reset once the cause of the warning is removed.
0097 Scale offset error

Details
An error was detected in the offset data that is read at the NC power-ON in MPI scale absolute position
detection system.
009B Detec cnv: Mag pole shift warn

Details
The difference between the magnetic pole position after the phase Z has been passed (magnetic pole
shift amount:SV028) and the initially detected position is excessive in the built-in motor's incremental
control system. The magnetic pole is controlled by the initial detection value.
009E Abs pos dtc: Rev count error

Details
An error was detected in the revolution counter data of the absolute position detector. The accuracy of
absolute position is not guaranteed.
009F Battery voltage drop

Details
The battery voltage to be supplied to the absolute position detector is dropping.
00A3 In initial setup of ABS posn.

Details
This warning is detected until the axis reaches the reference position during the initial setup of the
distance-coded reference check function. This warning turns OFF after the axis has reached the
position, thus set the value displayed on the drive monitor to the parameter.
This warning is detected during the initial setup of MBA405W. This warning turns OFF after the initial
setup is completed by having the axis pass the Z-phase of MBA405W and turning the NC power ON
again.
537
MITSUBISHI CNC
00A4 Dual signal warning

Details
An input was detected in the signal related to the dual signal.
00A6 Fan stop warning

Details
A cooling fan in the drive unit stopped.
00E0 Over regeneration warning

Details
Over-regeneration detection level exceeded 80%.
00E1 Overload warning

Details
A level of 80% of the Overload 1 alarm state was detected.
00E4 Set parameter warning

Details
An incorrect set value was detected among the parameters send from the NC in the normal operation.
00E6 Control axis detach warning

Details
A control axis is being detached. (State display)
00E7 In NC emergency stop state

Details
In NC emergency stop. (State display)
- Stop method: Deceleration stop enabled
00E8-00EF Power supply warning

Details
The power supply unit detected a warning. The error details are different according to the connected
power supply unit.
Refer to "Power supply warning".
- Stop method: - (EA: Deceleration stop enabled)
538
Power supply warnings
00E9 Instant pwr interrupt warning

Details
The power was momentarily interrupted.
00EA In external EMG stop state

Details
External emergency stop signal was input.
00EB Pw sply: Over regenerat warn

Details
Over-regeneration detection level exceeded 80%.
00EE Pw sply: Fan stop warning

Details
A cooling fan built in the power supply unit stopped.
00EF Pw sply: Option unit warning

Details
A warning is detected in the power backup unit (power supply option unit).
Check the LED display on the power backup unit to identify what alarm is occurring to the unit. Refer to
the using drive unit instruction manual for details.
Appendix 2.3.6 Safety Function Warnings (S53)
S53 Safety function warning 0001 (Axis name)

Details
The system has been set in the STO state.
The STO state is also entered at the time of emergency stop, but in this case, this warning will not
appear because the emergency stop has priority.
539
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 2.4 MCP Alarms (Y)
Y02 System alm: Process time over 0050

Details
System alarm: Process time is over.
Remedy
The software or hardware may be damaged.
Contact the service center.
(Note) When two or more "Y02 System alarms" occur at the same time, only the alarm which has
occurred first is displayed.
Y02 SV commu er: CRC error 1 0051 0000

Details
A communication error has occurred between controller and drive unit.
Remedy
- Take measures against noise.
- Check for any failure of the communication cable connectors between controller and drive unit or
between two drive units.
- Check for any failure of the communication cables between controller and drive unit or between two
drive units.
- A drive unit may be faulty. Take a note of the 7-segment LED contents of each drive unit and contact
the Service Center.
- Update the drive unit software version.
Y02 SV commu er: CRC error 2 0051 0001

Details
Remedy
drive units.
the Service Center.
Y02 SV commu er: Recv timing err 0051 0002

Details
Remedy
drive units.
the Service Center.
540
Y02 SV commu er: Data ID error 0051 xy03

Details
x: Channel No. (0 to)
y: Drive unit rotary switch No. (0 to)
Remedy
drive units.
the Service Center.
Y02 SV commu er: Recv frame No. 0051 xy04

Details
x: Channel No. (from 0)
y: Drive unit rotary switch No. (from 0)
Remedy
drive units.
the Service Center.
Y02 SV commu er: Commu error 0051 x005

Details
Remedy
drive units.
the Service Center.
Y02 SV commu er: Connect error 0051 x006

Details
Remedy
drive units.
the Service Center.
541
MITSUBISHI CNC
Y02 SV commu er : Init commu error 0051 xy20

Details
A drive unit stopped due to transition failure from initial communication to runtime.
y: Drive unit rotary switch No. (from 0)
Remedy
drive units.
the Service Center.
Y02 SV commu er: Node detect error 0051 xy30

Details
No response from drive unit to the request from NC when setting network configuration.
y: Station No. (from 0)
Remedy
drive units.
the Service Center.
Y02 SV commu er: Commu not support 0051 xy31

Details
Drive unit's software version doesn't support the communication mode that the controller requires.
y: Station No. (from 0)
Remedy
drive units.
the Service Center.
Y02 System alarm 0052 0001

Details
Transfer to buffer is not properly done in servo communication.
Remedy
Software/ hardware may have a fault.
Contact service center.
(Note) When two or more "Y02 System alarms 0051" alarms occur at the same time, only the alarm
which occurs first is displayed.
542
Y03 Drive unit unequipped axis name

Details
The drive unit is not correctly connected.
Alphabet (axis name): Servo axis drive unit not mounted
1 to 4: PLC axis drive unit not mounted
S: No.1 spindle drive unit not mounted
T: No.2 spindle drive unit not mounted
M: No.3 spindle drive unit not mounted
N: No.4 spindle drive unit not mounted
Remedy
Check the drive unit mounting state.
- Check the end of the cable wiring.
- Check for any broken wires.
- Check the connector insertion.
- The drive unit input power has not been ON.
- The drive unit axis No. switch is illegal.
Y05 Initial parameter error 3025

Details
The type of the spindle detector of the reference spindle or G/B spindle is not the one for connecting
with a spindle drive unit.
Remedy
Check the detectors of the reference spindle and G/B spindle whether it can be connected to the
spindle drive unit or not (#3025 enc-on=2).
Y05 Initial parameter error

Details
There is a problem in the value set for the number of axes or the number of part systems.
Remedy
Correct the value set for the following corresponding parameters:
"#1001 SYS_ON (System validation setup)",
"#1002 axisno (Number of axes)",
"#1039 spinno (Number of spindles)", etc.
Y05 Initial parameter error

Details
There is a problem in the value set for the number of axes or the number of part systems.
Remedy
Correct the value set for the following corresponding parameters:
"#1001 SYS_ON (System validation setup)",
"#1002 axisno (Number of axes)",
"#1039 spinno (Number of spindles)",
"#2187 chgPLCax (PLC axis switchover No.)", etc.
Y06 mcp_no setting error 0001

Details
There is a skipped number in the channels.
Remedy
Check the values set for the following parameters.
“#1021 mcp_no (Drive unit I/F channel No. (servo))”
“#3031 smcp_no (Drive unit I/F channel No. (spindle))”

Details
There is a duplicate setting for random layout.
Remedy
543
MITSUBISHI CNC

Details
The drive unit fixed setting "0000" and random layout setting "****" are both set.
Remedy

Details
The spindle/C axis "#1021 mcp_no (Drive unit I/F channel No. (servo))" and "#3031 smcp_no (Drive
unit I/F channel No. (spindle))" are not set to the same values.
Remedy

Details
A random layout has been set while "#1154 pdoor" has been set to "1" in two-part system.
Remedy

Details
The channel No. parameter is not within the setting range.
Remedy
Y07 Too many axes connected 00xy

Details
The number of axes connected to each channel exceeds the maximum number of connectable axes.
The exceeded number of axes per channel is displayed as alarm No.
x: Exceeded number of axes at drive unit interface channel 2 (0 to F)
y: Exceeded number of axes at drive unit interface channel 1 (0 to F)
This alarm also occurs when the drive unit is connected only with the 2nd channel without connecting
with the 1st channel.
Remedy
Remove connected axes from the channel whose alarm No. is other than '0' for the number displayed
as the alarm No. Keep the number of connected axes to or less than the maximum that can be
connected.
(Note 1) The number of axes is limited per each drive unit interface channel.
(Note 2)Maximum number of axes that can be connected differs depending on whether or not an
expansion unit is available or the setting of '#11012 16 axes for 1ch (Connecting 16 axes for
1ch)'.
With the expansion unit, up to eight axes can be connected to a channel. Without the expansion
unit, up to eight axes are allowed when '#11012 16 axes for 1ch (Connecting 16 axes for 1ch)' is
set to '0', sixteen axes when set to '1'.
(Note 3) If this alarm occurs, the alarm 'Y03 Message: Drive unit unequipped' will not occur.
(Note 4) This alarm is displayed taking precedence over the alarm 'Y08 Too many drive units
connected' and 'Y09 Too many axisno connected'.
544
Y08 Too many drive units connected 00xy

Details
The number of drive units connected to each channel exceeds 8.
The exceeded number of drive units per channel is displayed as alarm No.
x: Exceeded number of drive units at drive unit interface channel 2 (0 to F)
y: Exceeded number of drive units at drive unit interface channel 1 (0 to F)
Remedy
Remove drive units from the channel whose alarm No. is other than "0" for the number displayed as
the alarm No. Keep the number of connected drive units to 8 or less.
(Note 1) The drive unit is not counted when all the axes connected to it are invalid.
(Note 2) If this alarm occurs, the alarm "Y03 Message: Drive unit unequipped" will not occur.
(Note 3) The alarm "Y07 Too many axes connected" and "Y09 Too many axisno connected" are
displayed taking precedence over this alarm.
Y09 Too many axisno connected 00xy

Details
The No. of the axis (drive unit's rotary switch No.) connected to each channel is bigger than the No.
allowed.
If the axis No. of each channel is bigger than the No. allowed, "1" is displayed for the alarm No.
x: "1" when the axis No. at drive unit interface channel 2 is too big
y: "1" when the axis No. at drive unit interface channel 1 is too big
Remedy
For the channel whose alarm No. is "1", keep the axis No. (drive unit's rotary switch No.) not bigger
than the No. allowed.
(Note 1) The axis No. is limited per each drive unit interface channel.
(Note 2) The biggest allowed connected axis No. differs depending on whether or not an expansion
unit is available or the setting of "#11012 16 axes for 1ch (Connecting 16 axes for 1ch)". The
biggest connectable axis No. is as shown below.
With the expansion unit, axes No. '0' to '7' can be connected.
Without the expansion unit, axes No. '0' to '7' are allowed when '#11012 16 axes for 1ch
(Connecting 16 axes for 1ch)' is set to '0', axes No. '0' to 'F' when set to '1'.
(Note 3) If this alarm occurs, the alarm "Y03 Message: Drive unit unequipped" will not occur.
(Note 4) This alarm is displayed taking precedence over the alarm "Y08 Too many drive units
connected".
(Note 5) The alarm "Y07 Too many axes connected" is displayed taking precedence over this alarm.
Y11 Node Detect Err 8002-8300 xy00

Details
Drive unit does not respond to the request from NC when the NC is turned ON.
Error No. shows the No. of communication phase at which the response stopped.
x: Channel No. (0 or later)
y: Station No. with the error (0 or later)
Remedy
The communication error may be caused by the drive unit software version that does not correspond to
the NC software version. Check the drive unit software version.
This alarm is canceled after the NC restarts.
When the alarm is not canceled, write down the alarm No. and contact service center.
Y12 No commu. with axis drv unit

Details
Although the high-speed synchronous tapping option is valid, the connected drive unit doesn't support
the option.
Remedy
Replace the drive unit with that supports the option.
Y13 No commu. with sp drv unit

Details
Although the high-speed synchronous tapping option is valid, the connected drive unit doesn't support
the option.
Remedy
Replace the drive unit with that supports the option.
545
MITSUBISHI CNC
Y14 Comm btwn drives not ready

Details
Communication between drive units failed to be ready within a specified time.
Remedy
- There may be a faulty connection of drive units.
- Check if any of drive units is broken.
Y20 Parameter compare error 0001 (Axis name)

Details
The speed monitoring parameter in the NC does not correspond to the parameter transmitted to the
drive unit.
The name of the axis with an error is displayed.
Remedy
The NC or the servo drive unit may be damaged.
Y20 Sfty obsrvation: Cmd spd err 0002 (Axis name)

Details
The speed exceeding the speed set with the parameter was commanded during the speed monitoring
mode.
Remedy
Check the speed monitoring parameter and the sequence program.
Restart the NC.
Y20 Sfty obsrvation: FB pos err 0003 (Axis name)

Details
The commanded position, transmitted to the servo drive unit from NC, is totally different from the
feedback position received from the servo drive unit during the speed monitoring mode.
Remedy
The NC or the servo drive unit may be damaged.
Y20 Sfty obsrvation: FB speed err 0004 (Axis name)

Details
Actual rotation speed of the motor is exceeding the speed that has been set with speed monitoring
parameter during the speed monitoring mode.
Remedy
Correct the speed observation parameter and the sequence program.
Restart the NC.
Y20 Door signal: Input mismatch 0005 Door No.

Details
Door state signals on the NC side and the drive side do not match. It may be caused by the followings:
- Cable disconnection
- Damaged door switch
- Damaged NC or servo drive unit
Remedy
Check the cable.
Check the door switch.
Restart the NC.
546
Y20 No speed observation mode in door open 0006 Door No.

Details
The door open state was detected when the speed monitoring mode was invalid.
The causes may be same as the ones for 0005 (Door signal: Input mismatch). Also the sequence
program may not be correct.
Remedy
Correct the sequence program.
Restart the NC.
Y20 Speed obsv: Para incompatible 0007 (Axis name)

Details
Two speed monitoring parameters are not matched at the rising edge of the "speed monitor mode"
signal.
Remedy
Correct the relevant parameters so that the two speed monitoring parameters match.
Restart the NC.
Y20 Contactor welding detected 0008 Contactor No.

Details
Contactor welding was detected.
Displays the bit corresponding to the No. of the abnormal contactor.
Some contactors take a while to be shutdown after the servo ready is turned OFF, and the servo ready
was turned ON in the meantime.
Remedy
- Make sure that contactor's auxiliary B contact signal is output correctly to the device set on "#1330
MC_dp1(Contactor weld detection device 1)" and "#1331 MC_dp2(Contactor weld detection device
2)".
- If welding, replace the contactor.
- Restart the NC.
Y20 No spec: Safety observation 0009

Details
“#2313 SV113 SSF8/bitF (Servo function selection 8)” and “#13229 SP229 SFNC9/bitF (Spindle
function 9)” are set for a system with no safety observation option.
Remedy
Disable “#2313 SV113 SSF8/bitF (Servo function selection 8)” and “#13229 SP229 SFNC9/bitF
(Spindle function 9)”.
Then, restart the NC.
Y20 SDIO connector input volt err 0010

Details
24VDC power is not supplied to SDIO connector correctly. (SDIO 4A pin supply voltage was dropped
to 16V or less, or 1ms or more instant power interrupt was detected.)
In this case, "Pw sply:Inst pw interpt(DC24V)" alarm occurs because the contactor control output
signal cannot be controlled.
This state remains until restarting the NC even if the cause of the alarm has been removed.
Remedy
Check the wiring. Supply 24VDC power to the SDIO connector.
Restart the NC.
Y20 Device setting illegal 0011

Details
- The device set in "#1353 MC_ct1 (Contactor shutoff output 1 device)" does not exist.
- The device set in "#1353 MC_ct1 (Contactor shutoff output 1 device)" is used as an output device in
PLC program.
Remedy
- In "#1353 MC_ct1 (Contactor shutoff output 1 device)", set the device to which a remote I/O is
connected. Use the device to control the contactor.
- Confirm that the devices set by "#1353 MC_ct1 (Contactor shutoff output 1 device)" are not used as
an output device in PLC program.
547
MITSUBISHI CNC
Y20 Contactor operation abnormal 0012 Contactor No.

Details
Contactor's operation is not following the NC's commands.
Displays the No. of the abnormal contactor.
Remedy
- Check and correct "#1353 MC_ct1 (Contactor shutoff output 1 device)" setting.
- Check the wiring for contactor shutoff.
- Check for contactor's welding.
Y20 STO function operation illegal 0013

Details
The drive unit's STO function has failed to work properly.
Remedy
If this alarm has occurred alone, a drive unit failure can be suspected.
If other alarms have been generated at the same time, it is also possible that there is communication
problem. Check the optical cable wiring.
Y20 STO function illegal at pwr ON 0014

Details
The motor power has not been shut down with the STO function when the NC power was turned ON.
Remedy
If this alarm has occurred alone, a drive unit failure can be suspected.
If other alarms have been generated at the same time, it is also possible that there is communication
problem. Check the optical cable wiring.
Y20 Dual signal: parameter setting error 0027

Details
A setting of #2118 SscDrSel, #3071 SscDrSelSp, #2180 S_DIN, or #3140 S_DINSp is not correct.
Remedy
- Correct the parameter setting.
Y20 Safety observation: parameter memory error 0031 (Parameter No.))

Details
The following parameters are not consistent with the check data.
#2180 S_DIN, #3140 S_DINSp
Remedy
- Correct the parameter setting.
- Restore the backup data, as the parameter or check
data may be corrupted.
Y21 Speed obsv signal: Speed over 0001 (Axis name)

Details
The speed exceeds the safety speed limit when the "speed monitor mode" signal is ON.
Remedy
Decelerate the speed to reset the warning and start the speed monitor.
Y51 Parameter G0tL illegal 0001

Details
The time constant has not been set or exceeded the setting range.
Remedy
Correct "#2004 G0tL (G0 time constant (linear))".
Y51 Parameter G1tL illegal 0002

Details
Remedy
Correct "#2007 G1tL (G1 time constant (linear))".
548
Y51 Parameter G0t1 illegal 0003

Details
Remedy
Correct "#2005 G0t1 (G0 time constant (primary delay) / Second-step time constant for soft
acceleration/deceleration)".
Y51 Parameter G1t1 illegal 0004

Details
Remedy
Correct "#2008 G1t1 (G1 time constant (primary delay)/Second-step time constant for soft
Y51 Parameter grid space illegal 0009

Details
The grid space is illegal.
Remedy
Correct "#2029 grspc(Grid interval)".
Y51 Parameter stapt1-4 illegal 0012

Details
Remedy
Correct the parameters from "#3017 stapt1(Tap time constant (Gear: 00))" to "#3020 stapt4(Tap time
constant (Gear: 11))".
Y51 Slave axis No. illegal 0014

Details
In the axis synchronization, parameter settings for slave axis have been attempted in different part
system from that of master axis.
Remedy
- Correct the "#1068 slavno (Slave axis number)" setting.
Y51 Parameter skip_tL illegal 0015

Details
The time constant has exceeded the setting range.
Remedy
Correct "#2102 skip_tL (Skip time constant linear)".
Y51 Parameter skip_t1 illegal 0016

Details
The time constant has exceeded the setting range.
Remedy
Correct "#2103 skip_t1 (Skip time constant primary delay / Second-step time constant for soft
Y51 Parameter G0bdcc illegal 0017

Details
"#1205 G0bdcc (Acceleration and deceleration before G0 interpolation)" for the 2nd part system is set
to acceleration/deceleration before G0 interpolation.
Remedy
Correct "#1205 G0bdcc (Acceleration and deceleration before G0 interpolation)".
549
MITSUBISHI CNC
Y51 OMR-II parameter error 0018

Details
An illegal setting was found in the OMR-II-related parameters. OMR-II has been disabled.
Remedy
Correct the related parameter settings.
Y51 PLC indexing stroke length err 0019

Details
"#12804 aux_tleng (Linear axis stroke length)" has not been set or exceeded the setting range while
the linear axis equal indexing is enabled for the PLC indexing axis.
Remedy
Correct "#12804 aux_tleng (Linear axis stroke length)".
Y51 No hi-accu acc/dec t-const ext 0020

Details
There is no expansion option for the high-accuracy acceleration/deceleration time constant.
Remedy
Set "#1207 G1btL (Time constant)" to a value within the setting range with no expansion specification
for the extended high-accuracy time constant.
(Note) In the case of the system with two part systems, the expansion option for the high-accuracy
acceleration /deceleration time constant cannot be enabled.
Y51 Superimpos linear G0 error 0022

Details
Remedy
Check "#2092 plG0tL G0 time constant for superimposition control (linear)".
Y51 Superimpos linear G1 error 0023

Details
Remedy
Check "#2094 plG1tL G1 time constant for superimposition control (linear)".
Y51 Parameter G0tL_2 illegal 0033

Details
The time constant is out of the specified range.
Remedy
Correct "#2598 G0tL_2 (G0 time constant 2 (linear))".
Y51 Parameter G0t1_2 illegal 0034

Details
The time constant is out of the specified range.
Remedy
Correct "#2599 G0t1_2 (G0 time constant 2 (primary delay)/Second-step time constant for soft
Y51 Values of PC1/PC2 too large 0101

Details
The PC1 and PC2 settings for the rotary axis are too large.
Remedy
Correct "#2201 SV001 PC1 (Motor side gear ratio)" and "#2202 SV002 PC2 (Machine side gear ratio)".
550
Y90 No spindle signal 0001-0007

Details
There is an error in the spindle encoder signal.
The data transmission to the drive unit is stopped when this error occurs.
Remedy
Check the spindle encoder's feedback cable and the encoder.
551
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 2.5 System Alarms (Z)
Z02 System error

Details
The operation result is illegal.
Remedy
- Contact the service center.
Z31 Socket open error(socket) 0001

Details
Socket open error (socket)
Remedy
Set the parameter then turn the power OFF and ON again.
Z31 Socket bind error(bind) 0002

Details
Socket bind error (bind)
Remedy
Z31 Connection wait queue error(listen) 0003

Details
Connection wait queue error (listen)
Remedy
Z31 Connection request error(accept) 0004

Details
Connection request error (accept)
Z31 Data recv error(socket error) 0005

Details
Data receive error (socket error)
Z31 Data recv error(data error) 0006

Details
Data receive error (data error)
Z31 Data send error(socket error) 0007

Details
Data send error (socket error)
Z31 Data send error(data error) 0008

Details
Data send error (data error)
Z31 Socket close error(close) 000A

Details
Socket close error (close)
Remedy
552
Z34 DeviceNet error

Details
Any of the following errors has occurred in the DeviceNet unit.
- Master function error (X03 is ON)
- Slave function error (X08 is ON)
- Message communication error (X05 is ON)
If the errors have occurred in more than one unit, the error No. of the unit with the smallest slot No. is
displayed.
If the master function, slave function and message communication errors have occurred at the same
time, the error is displayed in the following priority order.
1. Master function error
2. Slave function error
3. Message communication error
Remedy
- Select the [Ext. PLC link control] menu on the maintenance screen to open the unit confirmation
screen, and check the unit in error and details to cancel the error.
For the details of the DeviceNet unit errors, refer to "External PLC Link II (Bus connection) MELSEC-
Q Series Appendix 2 (DeviceNet)"BNP-C3039-276 (Appendix 2).
Z35 Direct Socket connection error 0001

Details
- Connection has failed.
- Five or more clients attempted a connection.
Remedy
- Check the connection of the network cables, and check for broken wires and a failure of the network
connection devices such as hub.
- When using the Direct Socket communication I/F, connect up to four clients.
Z35 Direct Socket receive error 0002

Details
- Receiving data from a client has failed.
Remedy
Z35 Direct Socket send error 0003

Details
- Sending data to a client has failed.
Remedy
Z35 Direct Socket timeout error 0004

Details
There was no response from client computers, and a timeout error occurred.
Remedy
Check the connection of the network cables, and check for broken wires and a failure of the network
Z35 Direct Socket comm OFF 0005

Details
The direct Socket communication I/F is OFF.
Remedy
Check the parameter "#11051 Direct Socket OFF".
553
MITSUBISHI CNC
Z40 Format mismatch

Details
"#1052 MemVal (No. of common variables shared in part system designation)", formatted at "0", was
set to "1".
Remedy
- Reset "#1052 MemVal (No. of common variables shared in part system designation)" to "0" or format
and restart.
Z51 EEPROM ERROR

Details
The data read from EEPROM does not coincide with the data that has been written into it.
Remedy
- If the same alarm occurs with the same operation, a hardware fault may be the cause. Contact the
service center.
Z52 Battery fault 000x

Details
The voltage of the battery in the NC control unit has dropped. (The battery used to save the internal
data.)
0001: Battery warning
0002: Battery detecting circuit error
0003: Battery alarm
(Note)The display of "Z52 battery fault 0001" can be removed by resetting. However, the warning state
will not be cleared until the battery is replaced.
Remedy
- Replace the battery of the NC control unit.
- Check for any disconnection of the battery cable.
- After fixing the battery's fault, check the machining program.
Z53 CNC overheat

Details
The controller or operation board temperature has risen above the designated value.
(Note)Temperature warning
When an overheat alarm is detected, the alarm is displayed and the overheat signal is output
simultaneously. Automatic operation will be continued, while restarting after resetting or
stopping with M02/M30 is not possible. (Restarting after block stop or feed hold is possible.)
The alarm will be cleared and the overheat signal will turn OFF when the temperature drops
below the specified temperature.
Z53 CNC overheat 000x
[000x]
(For all models)
0001: The temperature in the control unit is high.
(For M700VS only)
0004: The temperature in the control unit is high.
0005: The temperature in the control unit 2 is high.
The ambient temperature must be lowered immediately when a "Z53 CNC overheat" alarm
occurs. However, if the machining needs to be continued, set "#6449/bit7 Control unit
temperature alarm ON" to "0". Then the alarm will be invalidated.
Remedy
- Cooling measures are required.
- Turn OFF the controller power, or lower the temperature with a cooler, etc.
554
Z55 RIO communication stop

Details
An error occurs in the communication between the control unit and remote I/O unit.
Disconnection of a cable
Fault in remote I/O unit
Fault of power supply to remote I/O unit
The alarm and the I/O unit No. is displayed when an error occurs in the communication between the
control unit and remote I/O unit.
The remote I/O unit No. is displayed in eight digits. Two digits (in hexadecimal) are used for each
board and part system.
[Display format of remote I/O unit No. ]
Z55 RIO communication stop __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
(a) (b) (c) (d)(e) (f) (g) (h)
(a)(b): Remote I/O 2nd part system communication interrupted station
(c)(d): Remote I/O 1st part system communication interrupted station
(e)(f): Remote I/O 3rd part system communication interrupted station
(g)(h): Board connection remote I/O communication interrupted station
(a)(b) indicates the following station in hexadecimal.
bit0: RIO (0th station)
bit1: RIO (first station)
bit2: RIO (second station)
bit3: RIO (third station)
bit4: RIO (fourth station)
bit5: RIO (fifth station)
bit6: RIO (sixth station)
bit7: RIO (seventh station)
This also applies for the remote I/O 1st part system communication interrupted station, remote I/O 3rd
part system communication interrupted station and board connection remote I/O communication
interrupted station.
Remedy
- Check and replace the cables.
- Replace the remote I/O unit.
- Check the power supply (existence of supply and voltage).
Z57 System warning

Details
Program memory capacity has been set over the value that can be formatted.
An expansion device/expansion cassette has not mounted after formatting.
The mounted expansion device/expansion cassette is different from the one that was mounted at
formatting.
Remedy
Check the followings.
- Program memory capacity
- Mounting of an expansion device/expansion cassette
- APLC release option
Z58 ROM write not completed

Details
A machine tool builder macro program has not been written to FROM after being registered/ edited/
copied/ condensed/ merged/ the number changed/ deleted.
Remedy
- Write the machine tool builder macro program to FROM.
The program does not need to be written to FROM unless the editing operations and so on need to be
valid after the NC power OFF.
Z59 Acc/dec time cnst too large

Details
Acceleration and deceleration time constants are too large.
(This alarm is output at the same time as "T02 0206".)
Remedy
- Set the larger value for "#1206 G1bF(Maximum speed)".
- Set the smaller value for "#1207 G1btL(Time constant)".
- Set the lower feedrate.
555
MITSUBISHI CNC
Z60 Fieldbus communication error n1 n2 n3 n4

Details
A communication error has occurred on the Fieldbus communication with HN571/HN573/HN575.
[n1 :Shows state of the master channel (shown in hexadecimal number)]
00 :Offline In initializing
40 :Stop Cutting I/O communication
80 :Clear Resetting output data of each slave by sending 0 data.
C0 :In operation I/O In I/O communication
[n2 :Shows error state (shown in hexadecimal number)]
bit0 :Control error Parameter error
bit1 :Auto clear error Communication with all the slave channels was cut because a communication
with one slave channel had an error.
bit2 :Non exchange error Slave channel with communication error is found.
bit3 :Fatal error The communication cannot be continued because severe network failure exists.
bit4 :Event error Short-circuit was found on the network.
bit5 :Not ready CNC communication is not ready.
bit6 :Time out error Time out was detected in communication with each channel.
bit7 :Not used
[n3 :Shows error No. (shown in hexadecimal number)]
- Error in master channel (when remote address with an error is FF (hexadecimal number))
0 :No error Operating normally
32 :No USR_INT Damage in HN571. Replace HN571.
33 :No global data field
34 :No FDL-task
35 :No PLC-task
37 :Master parameter incorrect
39 :Slave parameter incorrect
3C :Data offset exceeding allowable set value received. Check the configuration setting.
3D :Slave data send range overlap
3E :Slave data receive range overlap
3F :Not set data hand shake Damage in HN571. Replace HN571.
40 :RAM range exceeded
41 :Slave parameter data set illegal
CA :No segment
D4 :Data base read illegal Download the configuration data again.
D5 :Operating system illegal Damage in HN571. Replace HN571.
DC :Watch dog error
DD :Hand shake mode No data communication by 0
DE :Master auto clear mode When setting auto clear mode, the auto clear mode was performed
because one slave was not able to connect in run time.
- Error in slave channel (when remote address with an error is other than FF (hexadecimal number))
Check the configuration of slave channel in which error has occurred. Check if there is any short-
circuit in wire to bus.
2 :Station overflow reported
3 :Station stopped responding to master command
9 :No slave required responding data
11 :No station respond
12 :No master to logical token ring
15 :Illegal parameter requested
[n4 : Shows slave No. where communication error has occurred. (shown in hexadecimal number)]
'FF' means an error in master channel.
Z64 Valid term soon to be expired xx

Details
The valid term will be expired in less than a week. Remaining valid term is xx days.
Remedy
ON again.
Z65 Valid term has been expired

Details
The valid term has been expired with no decryption code input.
Remedy
ON again.
556
Z67 CC-Link communication error

Details
A communication error occurred during CC-Link communication using CC-Link unit.
Remedy
- Refer to "List of Messages" in CC-Link (Master/Slave) Specification manual (BNP-C3039-214).
Z68 CC-Link unconnected

Details
A cable between CC-Link unit and a device is disconnected or broken.
Remedy
- Connect the cable.
- Check for any broken cables.
Z69 External link error 2

Details
A FROM/TO instruction was used while the MELSEC-Q interface expansion module is not installed.
Remedy
Install the MELSEC-Q interface expansion module.

Details
A negative value was set for an I/O No. in the FROM/TO instruction.
Remedy
Correct the I/O No.

Details
A negative value was set for transfer size in the FROM/TO instruction.
Remedy
Correct the transfer size.

Details
The number of FROM/TO instructions within one scan has exceeded 50.
Remedy
Correct the user PLC (ladder sequence) so that the number of FROM/TO instructions per scan is 50 or
less.

Details
The access to the buffer memory by the FROM/TO instruction has exceeded 12K words per scan.
Remedy
Correct the user PLC (ladder sequence) so that the buffer memory access by the FROM/TO instruction
won't exceed 12K words per scan. (The total size of FROM/TO is up to 12K words.)

Details
A FROM/TO instruction was used in high-speed processing.
Remedy
Delete the FROM/TO instruction from high-speed processing.

Details
The bit device number designated in the FROM/TO instruction is not a multiple of 16.
Remedy
Correct the bit device number designated in the FROM/TO instruction to be a multiple of 16.
557
MITSUBISHI CNC

Details
With a FROM/TO instruction, a value out of the address range (negative value, or 0x8000 or over) was
set as the head address of the buffer memory.
Remedy
Correct the head address of the buffer memory.

Details
An alarm occurred in the MELSEC module mounted on the extension base.
Remedy
Check for any disconnection of the MELSEC module and the cables on the extension base. Then turn
the CNC's power ON again.

Details
The I/O No. designated in the FROM/TO instruction is different from the mounted location of the
intelligent function module on the extension base (the module's I/O No.).
Remedy
Correct the I/O No. Then turn the CNC's power ON again.
Z82 3D machine interference/No machine model 0001

Details
Machine model is not registered.
Remedy
Movement can be resumed after the cancellation. However, the 3D machine interference check will
become invalid.
- Inform the machine tool builder if an alarm occurs.
Z82 3D machine interference/Machine model illegal 0002

Details
Machine model is illegal.
Remedy
Movement can be resumed after the cancellation. However, the 3D machine interference check will
become invalid.
- Inform the machine tool builder if an alarm occurs.
Z82 3D machine Interference check load excess 003

Details
The calculation of the interference check took time and caused a deceleration.
Remedy
- Inform the machine tool builder.
- Restart the axis in case of a manual operation.
- In case of an automatic operation, the operation will automatically resume when the processing load
of the interference check decreases.
Z82 3D machine Interference check error 004

Details
The interference check failed.
Remedy
- Take a note of the failed status and contact the service center.
- Press RESET to cancel the alarm. Invalidate the 3D machine interference check to continue the
operation.
558
Z83 NC started during SP rotation 0001

Details
The NC was started while the spindle was rotating.
Remedy
Turn the power OFF and confirm that the spindle is not rotating, then turn the power ON again.
559
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 2.6 Absolute Position Detection System Alarms (Z7*)
Z70 Abs posn base set incomplete 0001 (Axis name)

Details
Zero point initialization is incomplete. Otherwise, the spindle was removed.
Remedy
Complete zero point initialization.
(Note) To release alarm "Z70 Abs data error", enter the parameter data output when establishing the
absolute position and turn ON the power again. For the rotary axis, however, the alarm cannot
be released by entering the parameter data.
- Zero point initialization: Required
Z70 Absolute position lost 0002 (Axis name)

Details
The absolute position basic point data saved in the NC has been damaged.
Remedy
Set the parameters. If the basic point data is not restored by setting the parameters, perform zero point
initialization.
- Zero point initialization: (Required)
Z70 Abs posn param changed 0003 (Axis name)

Details
Any of the parameters for absolute position detection has been changed.
#1003 iunit
#1016 iout
#1017 rot
#1018 ccw
#1040 M_inch
#2049 type
Remedy
Correct the parameter settings. Then turn the power ON again and perform zero point initialization.
Z70 Abs posn initial set illegal 0004 (Axis name)

Details
The zero point initialization point is not at the grid position.
Remedy
Perform the zero point initialization again.
Z70 Abs posn param restored 0005 (Axis name)

Details
The data has been restored by inputting the parameters during the alarm No.0002.
Remedy
Turn the power ON again to start the operation.
- Zero point initialization: Not required
560
Z70 Abs data error 0006

Details
Deviation of the servo axis with scale when the power is OFF exceeds the set value in "#2051 check
(Check)".
Remedy
Search for the factor which led the deviation of the servo axis at the power OFF.
- Zero point initialization: Not required
- Alarm reset when power is turned OFF: -
- Servo alarm No.: -
Z70 Abs posn data lost 0080 (Axis name)

Details
The absolute position data has been lost. An error of the multi-rotation counter data in the detector and
so on may be the cause.
Remedy
Replace the detector and complete zero point initialization.
- Servo alarm No.: (9E)etc.
Z70 Abs posn error(servo alm 25) 0101 (Axis name)

Details
The servo alarm No. 25 was displayed and the power was turned ON again.
Remedy
Perform zero point initialization again.
- Servo alarm No.: -25
Z70 Abs posn error(servo alm E3) 0106 (Axis name)

Details
The servo alarm No. E3 was displayed and the power was turned ON again.
Remedy
Perform zero point initialization again.
- Servo alarm No.: (E3)
Z71 AbsEncoder:Backup voltage drop 0001 (Axis name)

Details
Backup voltage in the absolute position detector dropped.
Remedy
Replace the battery, check the cable connections, and check the detector. Turn the power ON again
and perform zero point initialization.
- Alarm reset when power is turned OFF: -(Z70-0101 is displayed after the power is turned ON again.)
- Servo alarm No.: 25
561
MITSUBISHI CNC
Z71 AbsEncoder: Commu error 0003 (Axis name)

Details
Communication with the absolute position detector has been disabled.
Remedy
Check and replace the cables, card or detector. Turn the power ON again and perform zero point
initialization.
- Zero point initialization: (Required) only when the detector has been replaced.
- Alarm reset when power is turned OFF: Reset
Z71 AbsEncoder: Abs data changed 0004 (Axis name)

Details
Absolute position data has been changed at the absolute position establishment.
Remedy
initialization.
Z71 AbsEncoder: Serial data error 0005 (Axis name)

Details
An error of the serial data was found in the absolute position detector.
Remedy
initialization.
Z71 AbsEncoder: Abs/inc posn diffr 0006 (Axis name)

Details
Servo alarm E3
Absolute position counter warning
Remedy
Operation is possible until the power is turned OFF.
- Zero point initialization: (Required) after the power is turned ON again.
- Alarm reset when power is turned OFF: Reset (Z70-0106 is displayed after the power is turned ON
again.)
- Servo alarm No.: E3
Z71 AbsEncoder: Initial commu er 0007 (Axis name)

Details
Initial communication with the absolute position detector is not possible.
Remedy
initialization.
Z72 Message: Position check error (Axis name)

Details
An error is detected at the comparison of detector's absolute position and controller coordinate values
in the absolute position detection system.
Remedy
562
Z73 Battery for abs data fault 0001

Details
Low backup battery
Servo alarm 9F
Low battery voltage
Remedy
This is displayed when the battery voltage is0 low or the cable has been damaged.
The absolute position initialization is not required.
(Note) When this alarm has occurred, do not turn OFF the drive unit power in order to protect the
absolute position data. Replace the battery with the drive unit power ON.
563
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 2.7 Distance-coded Reference Scale Errors (Z8*)
Z80 Basic position lost 0001

Details
The basic point data saved in the NC has been damaged.
Remedy
- Set the parameters. If the basic point data is not restored by setting the parameters, perform zero
point initialization.
Z80 Basic position restore 0002

Details
The basic point data has been restored by setting the parameters.
Remedy
- Turn the power ON again to start the operation.
Z80 No spec: Distance-coded scale 0003

Details
The distance-coded reference scale has been set available although this function is out of the
specifications.
Remedy
- Check the specifications.
- If you do not use this function, correct the detector type with the servo parameter.
Z81 R-pos adjustment data lost 0001

Details
Reference position adjustment value data saved in the NC has been damaged.
Remedy
- Set the parameter. If the data is not restored by setting the parameter, establish the reference
position again.
Z81 R-pos adjustment data restored 0002

Details
After the 'Z81 R-pos adjustment data lost 0001', the data has been recovered by setting the parameter.
Remedy
- Establish the reference position to start the operation.
564
Appendix 2.8 Emergency Stop Alarms (EMG)
EMG Emergency stop PLC

Details
The user PLC has entered the emergency stop state during the sequence process.
Remedy
- Investigate and remove the cause of the user PLC emergency stop.
EMG Emergency stop EXIN

Details
The "emergency stop" signal is significant (open).
Remedy
- Cancel the "emergency stop" signal.
EMG Emergency stop SRV

Details
An alarm occurred in the servo system causing an emergency stop.
Remedy
- Investigate and remove the cause of the servo alarm.
EMG Emergency stop STOP

Details
The user PLC (ladder sequence) is not running.
Remedy
- Check the setting of the control unit rotary switch CS2. Correct it if set to "1".
- Check the [RUN/SP] (run/stop) switch on the PLC edit file save screen (onboard function). Turn it
OFF if ON.
EMG Emergency stop SPIN

Details
Spindle drive unit is not mounted.
Remedy
- Cancel the causes of the other emergency stop.
- Check the "emergency stop" signal input in the spindle drive unit.
EMG Emergency stop PC_H

Details
Failure in the high-speed PC processing abnormal
Remedy
- Correct the sequence program. (To stop monitoring the high-speed PC processing temporarily, set
"1" in "#1219 aux03/bit1 (Stop high-speed PC monitoring function)". Disable the monitoring function
only as a temporary measure.)
EMG Emergency stop PARA

Details
Setting of the door open II fixed device is illegal.
Setting of the parameters for dog signal random assignment is illegal.
Remedy
- Correct the "#1155 DOOR_m" and "#1156 DOOR_s" settings. (When the door open II fixed device is
not used, set "#1155 DOOR_m" and "#1156 DOOR_s" to "100".)
- Correct the "#2073 zrn_dog (Origin dog Random assignment device)", "#2074 H/W_OT+ (H/W OT+
Random assignment device)", "#2075 H/W_OT- (H/W OT- Random assignment device)" and "#1226
aux10/bit5 (Arbitrary allocation of dog signal)" settings.
565
MITSUBISHI CNC
EMG Emergency stop LINK

Details
An emergency stop occurs when the FROM/TO instruction is not executed within 500ms.
Remedy
- Execute the FROM/TO instruction one or more times every 500ms.
The time in which no interrupt request is issued from MELSEC is measured and stored in the following
R registers:
R10190: Current timeout counter
R10191: Maximum timeout counter after power ON
R10192: Maximum timeout counter after system is started up (this is backed up)
Details
MELSEC is in error and reset states.
Remedy
- Check the MELSEC states.
Details
The contents of MELSEC-specific code area in buffer memory have been damaged.
Remedy
- Check the MELSEC states.
Details
PLC serial link communication has stopped.
(Note) When "WAIT" is entered in the PLC serial link, only the preparation sequence has been
established before the communication stops. It is supposed that the settings of the serial link
parameters "#1902 Din size" and "#1903 Dout size" are incorrect or the "#1909 Tout (ini)" set-
time is too short in basic specification parameters.
Remedy
- Check the CC-Link card wiring and the external sequencer transmission.
- Check the link communication errors shown on the diagnostic screen.
- Correct the settings of the serial link parameters in basic specification parameters.
EMG Emergency stop WAIT

Details
The preparation sequence is not sent from the master station. Otherwise, the contents of the received
preparation sequence are inconsistent with those of the parameters, so that the usual sequence
cannot be started.
(Note) When "LINK" is also entered for the PLC serial link, refer to "Note" in the section, "LINK".
Remedy
- Check that the CC-Link card switch setting and wiring as well as the external sequencer
transmission are normal.
- Check the diagnostic screen for link communication errors.
EMG Emergency stop XTEN

Details
The CC-Link card is operating incorrectly.
Switch/parameter settings for the CC-Link card are incorrect.
Remedy
- Replace the CC-Link card.
- Correct the switch/parameter settings for the CC-Link card.
EMG Emergency stop LAD

Details
The sequence program has an illegal code.
Remedy
- Correct any illegal device Nos. or constants in the sequence program.
566
EMG Emergency stop CVIN

Details
The "emergency stop" signal for power supply is significant (open) because the external emergency
stop function for power supply is enabled.
Remedy
- Cancel the "emergency stop" signal.
- Make sure that NC reset 1 signal, NC rest 2 signal, and reset & rewind signal are all OFF. (All part
systems must be OFF on a multi-part system machine.)
EMG Emergency stop MCT

Details
The contactor shutoff test is being executed.
Remedy
- The emergency stop is reset automatically after the contactor shutoff is confirmed.
- If the contactor shutoff is not confirmed within 5 seconds after the "contactor shutoff test" signal has
been input, the "contactor welding detected" alarm occurs and the emergency stop status remains.
- Make sure that the contactor's auxiliary B contact signal is correctly output to the device that is set in
"#1330 MC_dp1" and "#1331 MC_dp2" (Contactor weld detection device 1 and 2), and then turn the
power ON again.
EMG Emergency stop IPWD

Details
The data backup for power failure might not have been executed successfully at the previous power
failure.
Remedy
- If this message appears frequently, the power supply may be deteriorated. Contact the service
center.
EMG Emergency stop SUIN

Details
The emergency stop input signal (M0) is OFF in the NC/PLC safety circuit.
Remedy
- Check the conditions for turning ON the emergency stop input signal.
EMG Emergency stop STP2

Details
Sequence programs stopped in CNC.
Remedy
- Correct the rotary switch 1 (on the right) of the control unit if set to “1”.
EMG Emergency stop MULT

Details
An error related to Q bus or Qr bus occurred.
Remedy
- Refer to the error No. that follows the message “A01 Multi CPU error” to take a remedy.
EMG Emergency stop LINE

Details
An error was detected when communicating with the drive unit.
Remedy
- Check the wiring.
567
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 2.9 Computer Link Errors (L)
L01 Serial port being used -2

Details
Serial port has already been opened or cannot be used.
Remedy
- Set the port not to shared by Anshin-net and so on.
- Correct the parameter settings for tape operation port.
L01 Timeout error -4

Details
Communication ended with timeout.
(CNC has a 248-byte receive buffer. The time during which CNC receives 248 bytes exceeds the
'TIME-OUT' value set in the I/O device parameter.
Remedy
- Set a greater timeout value in the input/output device parameter.
- Check the software in HOST and make sure that the HOST transmits data in response to DC1(data
request) from CNC.
- Set '#9614 START CODE' to '0'.
L01 Host ER signal OFF -10

Details
ER signal in HOST (or DR signal in CNC) is not turned ON.
Remedy
- Check for any disconnected cable.
- Check for any broke wire.
- Make sure that the HOST power is turned ON.
L01 Parity H error -15

Details
Communication ended with parity H.
Remedy
- Check the software in HOST and make sure that the data to be transmitted to CNC is ISO code.
L01 Parity V error -16

Details
Communication ended with parity V.
Remedy
- Correct the data to transmit to CNC.
L01 Overrun error -17

Details
CNC received 10 bytes or more data from HOST in spite of DC3 (request to stop data transfer)
transmission from CNC to the HOST, which terminated the communication.
CNC received 10 bytes or more data from HOST during the data transmission from CNC to the HOST.
Remedy
- Check the software in HOST and make sure that the HOST stops transmitting data within 10 bytes
after receiving DC3.
- Correct the software in HOST not to transmit data such as a command or header to CNC during
receiving a machining program.
568
Appendix 2.10 User PLC Alarms (U)

(Note) For details of user PLC alarms (U), refer to the PLC Programming Manual.
U01 No user PLC - -

Details
PLC program is not input.
(Note 1) The number of PLC program steps displayed on the screen may not match the actual number
of error occurrence steps because of the PLC program timing. Use this as a guideline of the
occurrence place.
(Note 2) Emergency stop (EMG) will be applied.
Remedy
Download the PLC program with the format selected by the PLC environment selection parameters (bit
selection "#51/bit4").
U10 Illegal PLC 0x0010 -

Details
PLC scan time error
The scan time is 1 second or longer.
(Note) The number of PLC program steps displayed on the screen may not match the actual number of
error occurrence steps because of the PLC program timing. Use this as a guideline of the
occurrence place.
Remedy
Edit the PLC program to make the size smaller.

Details
PLC program operation mode illegal
The downloaded PLC program is compatible with the designated mode.
occurrence place.
Remedy
Turn the power ON again or download the PLC program with the same format as at the power ON.

Details
GPPW ladder code error
occurrence place.
Remedy
Download the PLC program with a correct GPPW format.
U10 Illegal PLC 0x008x -

Details
PLC4B ladder code error
An illegal circuit was found in the PLC4B ladder.
bit1: PC medium-speed circuit illegal
bit2: PC high-speed circuit illegal
occurrence place.
Remedy
Download the correct PLC4B format PLC program.
569
MITSUBISHI CNC
U10 Illegal PLC 0x0400 Number of ladder steps

Details
Software illegal interrupt
An abnormal stop occurred in the PLC program process due to an illegal code for software command.
occurrence place.
Remedy
Turn the power ON again.
If the error is not reset, download the correct PLC program.
U10 Illegal PLC 0x800x Number of PLC program steps

Details
Software exception
An abnormal stop occurred in PLC program process due to a bus error, etc.
bit0: BIN command operation error
bit1: BCD command operation error
occurrence place.
Remedy
Refer to the methods for using the BCD and BIN function commands.
Details
Software exception
An abnormal stop occurred in PLC program process due to a bus error, etc.
bit6: CALL/CALLS/RET command error
bit7: IRET command execution error
occurrence place.
(Note 2) Emergency stop (EMG) is applied for bit6/7.
Remedy
Turn the power ON again.
If the error is not reset, download the correct PLC program.
U50 PLC stopped

Details
The PLC program is stopped.
occurrence place.
Remedy
Start the PLC program.
U55 PLC stopped / is not saved

Details
The PLC program is stopped and not written into ROM.
occurrence place.
Remedy
Write the PLC program into ROM.
570
U60 Ladder is not saved

Details
The PLC program is not written into ROM.
occurrence place.
Remedy
Write the PLC program into ROM.
571
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 2.11 Network Service Errors (N)
N001 Modem initial error

Details
An error occurred in the modem connection at the power ON.
Remedy
- Check the connection between the NC and modem, connection port and power supply to modem.
N002 Redial over

Details
- The number of redials exceeded due to the dial transmission failure.
Remedy
- Wait a while, and then dial again.
N003 TEL unconnect

Details
- The phone line is not connected.
Remedy
- Check for any disconnection in the modem's phone line.
N004 Net communication error

Details
- An error other than the above occurred during communication.
Remedy
- Note down how the error occurred and contact the service center.
N005 Invalid net communication

Details
- The modem connection port is being used for another function such as input/output.
- The modem connection port settings are incorrect.
Remedy
- Stop using the modem connection port with the other function, and then turn the power ON again.
- Correct the settings of the modem connection port.
N006 Received result of diagnosis

Details
- A diagnosis data file has been received.
Remedy
- Clear the message.
N007 Send data size over

Details
- A file larger than Anshin-net server capacity (64Kbyte) has been transmitted in machining data
sharing.
Remedy
- Reduce the size of machining program file so that it won't exceed the capacity of Anshin-net server.
N008 No file on server

Details
- The file reception failed in machining data sharing because no file exists on Anshin-net server.
Remedy
- Confirm that a machining program file exists on Anshin-net server before receiving it.
572
Appendix 2.11 Network Service Errors (N)
N009 Password error

Details
- The file reception failed in machining data sharing due to a wrong password.
Remedy
- Input the password again.
N010 Customer number error

Details
- The file reception failed in machining data sharing due to a wrong customer number.
Remedy
- Input the customer number again.
N011 Storage capacity over

Details
- The file reception failed in machining data sharing because the size of the file to be received is
bigger than free space in the NC.
Remedy
- Ensure sufficient free space in the NC.
N012 File deletion error

Details
- A file on Anshin-net server cannot be deleted in machining data sharing.
Remedy
- Confirm that the file exists on Anshin-net server.
- Note down how the error occurred and contact the service center.
573
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 2.12 Program Errors (P)
P10 No. of simultaneous axes over

Details
The number of axis addresses commanded in a block is exceeds the specifications.
Remedy
- Divide the alarm block command into two.
P11 Illegal axis address

Details
The axis address commanded by the program does not match any of the ones set by the parameter.
Remedy
- Correct the axis names in the program.
P20 Division error

Details
The issued axis command cannot be divided by the command unit.
Remedy
P29 Not accept command

Details
The command has been issued when it is impossible.
- The normal line control command (G40.1, G41.1, G42.1) has been issued during the modal in which
the normal line control is not acceptable.
- The command has been issued during the modal in which the 2-part system synchronous thread
cutting is not acceptable.
Remedy
P30 Parity H error

Details
The number of holes per character on the paper tape is even for EIA code and odd for ISO code.
Remedy
- Check the paper tape.
- Check the tape puncher and tape reader.
P31 Parity V error

Details
The number of characters per block on the paper tape is odd.
Remedy
- Make the number of characters per block on the paper tape even.
- Set the parameter parity V selection OFF.
P32 Illegal address

Details
An address not listed in the specifications has been used.
Remedy
- Correct the program address.
- Correct the parameter settings.
P33 Format error

Details
The command format in the program is not correct.
Remedy
574
P34 Illegal G code

Details
The commanded G code is not in the specifications.
An illegal G code was commanded during the coordinate rotation command.
Remedy
- Correct the G code address in the program.
Details
G51.2 or G50.2 was commanded when "#1501 polyax (Rotational tool axis number)" was set to "0".
G51.2 or G50.2 was commanded when the tool axis was set to the linear axis ("#1017 rot (Rotational
axis)" is set to"0").
Remedy
P35 Setting value range over

Details
The setting range for the addresses has been exceeded.
Remedy
P36 Program end error

Details
"EOR" has been read during tape and memory mode.
Remedy
- Enter the M02 and M30 command at the end of the program.
- Enter the M99 command at the end of the subprogram.
P37 O, N number zero

Details
"0" has been specified for program or sequence No.
Remedy
- Designate program Nos. within a range from 1 to 99999999.
- Designate sequence Nos. within a range from 1 to 99999.
P38 No spec: Add. Op block skip

Details
"/n" has been issued while the optional block skip addition is not in the specifications.
Remedy
P39 No specifications
Details
- A non-specified G code was commanded.
- The selected operation mode is out of specifications.
Remedy
P45 G-CODE COMB.

Details
The combination of G codes in a block is inappropriate.
A part of unmodal G codes and modal G codes cannot be commanded in a same block.
Remedy
Correct the combination of G codes.
Separate the incompatible G codes into different blocks.
575
MITSUBISHI CNC
P48 Restart pos return incomplete

Details
A travel command was issued before the execution of the block that had been restart-searched.
Remedy
- Carry out program restart again.
Travel command cannot be executed before the execution of the block that has been restart-
searched.
P49 Invalid restart search

Details
- Restart search was attempted for the 3-dimensional circular interpolation.
- Restart search was attempted for the mixed control (cross axis control) command (G110).
- Restart search was attempted during the cylindrical interpolation, polar coordinate interpolation, or
tool tip center control.
- Restart search was attempted from a block (G68.2) during the inclined surface machining mode or
from the inclined surface machining mode cancel command block (G69).
- Restart search was attempted to the program after direct command mode.
Remedy
- Correct the restart search position.
P50 No spec: Inch/Metric change

Details
Inch/Metric changeover (G20/G21) command was issued while the function is out of specifications.
Remedy
P60 Compensation length over

Details
The commanded movement distance is excessive (over 231).
Remedy
- Correct the command range for the axis address.
P61 No spec: Unidirectional posit.

Details
Unidirectional positioning (G60) was commanded while the function is out of specifications.
Remedy
P62 No F command
Details
- No feed rate command has been issued.
- There is no F command in the cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate interpolation immediately
after the G95 mode is commanded.
Remedy
- The default movement modal command at power ON is G01. This causes the machine to move
without a G01 command if a movement command is issued in the program, and an alarm results.
Use an F command to specify the feed rate.
- Specify F with a thread lead command.
P63 No spec: High-speed machining

Details
High-speed machining cancel (G5P0) was commanded while the high-speed machining is out of
specifications.
Remedy
576
P65 No spec: High speed mode 3

Details
Remedy
- Check whether the specifications are provided for the high-speed mode III.
P70 Arc end point deviation large

Details
- There is an error in the arc start and end points as well as in the arc center.
- The difference of the involute curve through the start point and the end point is large.
- When arc was commanded, one of the two axes configuring the arc plane was a scaling valid axis.
Remedy
- Correct the numerical values of the addresses that specify the start and end points, arc center as
well as the radius in the program.
- Correct the "+" and "-" directions of the address numerical values.
- Check for the scaling valid axis.
P71 Arc center error

Details
- An arc center cannot be obtained in R-specified circular interpolation.
- A curvature center of the involute curve cannot be obtained.
Remedy
- Correct the numerical values of the addresses in the program.
- Correct the start and end points if they are inside of the base circle for involute interpolation. When
carrying out tool radius compensation, make sure that the start and end points after compensation
will not be inside of the base circle for involute interpolation.
- Correct the start and end points if they are at an even distance from the center of the base circle for
involute interpolation.
P72 No spec: Herical cutting

Details
A helical command has been issued though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
- Check whether the specifications are provided for the helical cutting.
- An Axis 3 command has been issued by the circular interpolation command. If there is no helical
specification, move the linear axis to the next block.
P73 No spec: Spiral cutting

Details
A spiral command was issued though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
- Issue the G02.1 and G03.1 commands for circular interpolation.
- Check whether the specifications are provided for the spiral cutting.
P74 Can't calculate 3DIM arc

Details
The 3-dimension circular cannot be obtained because the end block was not specified during 3-
dimension circular interpolation supplementary modal.
The 3-dimension circular cannot be obtained due to an interruption during 3-dimension circular
interpolation supplementary modal.
Remedy
P75 3DIM arc illegal

Details
An illegal G code was issued during 3-dimension circular interpolation modal.
Otherwise, 3-dimension circular interpolation command was issued during a modal for which a 3-
dimension circular interpolation command cannot be issued.
Remedy
577
MITSUBISHI CNC
P76 No spec: 3DIM arc interpolat

Details
G02.4/G03.4 was commanded though there is no 3-dimension circular interpolation specification.
Remedy
P80 No spec: Hypoth ax interpolat

Details
Hypothetical axis interpolation (G07) was commanded though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P90 No spec: Thread cutting

Details
A thread cutting command was issued though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P91 No spec: Var lead threading

Details
Variable lead thread cutting (G34) was commanded though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P93 Illegal pitch vaule

Details
An illegal thread lead (thread pitch) was specified at the thread cutting command.
Remedy
- Correct the thread lead for the thread cutting command.
P100 No spec: Cylindric interpolat

Details
A cylindrical interpolation command was issued though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P110 Plane select during figure rot

Details
Plane selection (G17/G18/G19) was commanded during figure rotation.
Remedy
P111 Plane selected while coord rot

Details
Plane selection commands (G17, G18, G19) were issued during a coordinate rotation was being
commanded.
Remedy
- Always command coordinate rotation cancel after the coordinate rotation command, and then issue
a plane selection command.
578
P112 Plane selected while R compen

Details
- Plane selection commands (G17, G18, G19) were issued while tool radius compensation (G41, G42)
and nose R compensation (G41, G42, G46) commands were being issued.
- Plane selection commands were issued after completing nose R compensation commands when
there were no further axis movement commands after G40, and compensation has not been
cancelled.
Remedy
- Issue plane selection commands after completing (axis movement commands issued after G40
cancel command) tool radius compensation and nose R compensation commands.
P113 Illegal plane select

Details
The circular command axis does not correspond to the selected plane.
Remedy
- Select a correct plane before issuing a circular command.
P120 No spec: Feed per rotation

Details
Feed per rotation (G95) was commanded though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P121 F0 command during arc modal

Details
F0 (F 1-digit feed) was commanded during the arc modal (G02/G03).
Remedy
P122 No spec: Auto corner override

Details
An auto corner override command (G62) was issued though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
- Delete the G62 command from the program.
P123 No spec: High-accuracy control

Details
High-accuracy control command was issued though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P124 No spec: Inverse time feed

Details
- The inverse time option is not provided.
Remedy
P125 G93 mode error

Details
- The issued G code command is illegal during G93 mode.
- G93 command was issued during a modal for which inverse time feed cannot be performed.
Remedy
579
MITSUBISHI CNC
P126 Invalid cmnd in high-accuracy

Details
An illegal command was issued during the high-accuracy control mode.
- A G code group 13 command was issued during the high-accuracy control mode.
- Milling, cylindrical interpolation or pole coordinate interpolation was commanded during the high-
accuracy control mode.
Remedy
P127 No spec: SSS Control

Details
The SSS control valid parameter has been set although there is no SSS control specification.
Remedy
- Check the specifications. Set "#8090 SSS ON" to "0" when there is no SSS control specification.
P128 Machin condtn select I disable

Details
Machining condition selection I was commanded during the mode where the selection command is
unavailable.
Remedy
- Check the program and see whether any unavailable mode is included during machining condition
selection I. If any, cancel that mode.
P130 2nd M function code illegal

Details
The 2nd miscellaneous function address, commanded in the program, differs from the address set in
the parameters.
Remedy
- Correct the 2nd miscellaneous function address in the program.
P131 No spec: Cnst surface ctrl G96

Details
A constant surface speed control command (G96) was issued though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
- Issue a rotation speed command (G97) instead of the constant surface speed control command
(G96).
P132 Spindle rotation speed S=0

Details
No spindle rotation speed command has been issued.
Remedy
P133 Illegal P-No. G96

Details
The illegal No. was specified for the constant surface speed control axis.
Remedy
- Correct the parameter settings and program that specify the constant surface speed control axis.
P134 G96 Clamp Err.

Details
The constant surface speed control command (G96) was issued without commanding the spindle
speed clamp (G92/G50).
Remedy
Press the reset key and carry out the remedy below.
- Issue the G92/G50 command before the G96 command.
- Command the constant surface speed cancel (G97) to switch to the rotation speed command.
580
P140 No spec: Pos compen cmd

Details
The position compensation command (G45 to G48) is out of specifications.
Remedy
P141 Pos compen during rotation

Details
Position compensation was commanded during the figure rotation or coordinate rotation command.
Remedy
P142 Pos compen invalid arc

Details
Position compensation cannot be executed with the issued arc command.
Remedy
P150 No spec: Nose R compensation

Details
- Tool radius compensation commands (G41 and G42) were issued though they are out of
specifications.
- Nose R compensation commands (G41, G42, and G46) were issued though they are out of
specifications.
Remedy
P151 Radius compen during arc mode

Details
A compensation command (G40, G41, G42, G43, G44, or G46) has been issued in the arc modal (G02
or G03).
Remedy
- Issue the linear command (G01) or rapid traverse command (G00) in the compensation command
block or cancel block.
(Set the modal to linear interpolation.)
P152 No intersection
Details
- In interference block processing during execution of a tool radius compensation (G41 or G42) or
nose R compensation (G41, G42, or G46) command, the intersection point after one block is
skipped cannot be determined.
- The compensation amount cannot be calculated during the tool radius compensation for 5-axis
machining (G41.2,G42.2).
Remedy
P153 Compensation interference

Details
An interference error has occurred while the tool radius compensation command (G41 or G42) or nose
R compensation command (G41, G42 or G46) was being executed.
Remedy
P154 No spec: 3D compensation

Details
A three-dimensional compensation command was issued though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
581
MITSUBISHI CNC
P155 Fixed cyc exec during compen

Details
A fixed cycle command has been issued in the radius compensation mode.
Remedy
- Issue a radius compensation cancel command (G40) to cancel the radius compensation mode that
has been applied since the fixed cycle command was issued.
P156 R compen direction not defined

Details
A shift vector with undefined compensation direction was found at the start of G46 nose R
compensation.
Remedy
- Change the vector to that which has the defined compensation direction.
- Change the tool to that which has a different tip point No.
P157 R compen direction changed

Details
During G46 nose R compensation, the compensation direction is reversed.
Remedy
- Change the G command to that which allows the reversed compensation direction (G00, G28, G30,
G33, or G53).
- Change the tool to that which has a different tip point No.
- Enable "#8106 G46 NO REV-ERR".
P158 Illegal tip point

Details
An illegal tip point No. (other than 1 to 8) was found during G46 nose R compensation.
Remedy
- Correct the tip point No.
P159 C-CMP REMAINS

Details
One of the followings was commanded while the compensation has not been canceled (the
compensation amount remained).
(1) Automatic tool nose R compensation (G143)
(2) Radius compensation (G145)
(3) Plane selection (G17 to G19)
(4) Skip (G31 or G31.1/G31.2/G31.3)
(5) Fixed cycle for drilling (G81 to G89)
(6) Compound type fixed cycle II (G74 to G76)
Remedy
- Cancel the compensation (with compensation amount "0") before commanding.
- Command the G00 move block before the block with a command among (1) to (6).
P160 G53 CMP. ERR

Details
- G53 was commanded during nose R compensation (by G41/G42/G46).
- G53 was commanded to the block where the nose R compensation mode is changed (with G40/
G41/G42/G46).
- G53 was commanded while nose R compensation amount has not been cleared.
Remedy
- When issuing G53 after G40 command, move the compensation plane axis by G00/G01/G02/G03
command before issuing G53.
582
P161 No spec: 5ax tool R compensate

Details
Tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining is not included in the specifications.
Remedy
P162 Disable Cmd in 5ax tool R comp

Details
A command (G or T command, etc) was issued during tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining,
although it is disabled during the compensation.
Remedy
- Cancel the tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining.
P163 5 ax tool R comp is disable

Details
Tool radius compensation for 5-axis machining was commanded in a mode where the command is
disabled.
Remedy
- Cancel the mode that disables the command.
P170 No offset number

Details
- No compensation No. (DOO, TOO or HOO) command was given when the radius compensation
(G41, G42, G43 or G46) command was issued. Otherwise, the compensation No. is larger than the
number of sets in the specifications.
- When setting the L system tool life management II, the tool group management program was
executed with the tool life management disabled.
Remedy
- Add the compensation No. command to the compensation command block.
- Check the number of sets for the tool compensation Nos. and correct the compensation No.
command to be within the number of sets.
- When setting the L system tool life management II ("#1096 T_Ltyp"="2"), enable the tool life
management ("#1103 T_Life"="1") to execute a tool group management program.
P171 No spec:Comp input by prog G10

Details
Compensation data input by program (G10) was commanded though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P172 G10 L number error

Details
An address of G10 command is not correct.
Remedy
- Correct the address L No. of the G10 command.
P173 G10 P number error

Details
The compensation No. at the G10 command is not within the permitted number of sets in the
specifications.
Remedy
- Check the number of sets for the tool compensation Nos. and correct the address P designation to
be within the number of sets.
583
MITSUBISHI CNC
P174 No spec:Comp input by prog G11

Details
Compensation data input by program cancel (G11) was commanded though there is no specification of
compensation data input by program.
Remedy
P177 Tool life count active

Details
Registration of tool life management data with G10 was attempted when the "usage data count valid"
signal was ON.
Remedy
- The tool life management data cannot be registered during the usage data count. Turn the "usage
data count valid" signal OFF.
P178 Tool life data entry over

Details
The number of registration groups, total number of registered tools or the number of registrations per
group exceeded the range in the specifications.
Remedy
- Correct the number of registrations.
P179 Illegal group No.

Details
- A duplicate group No. was found at the registration of the tool life management data with G10.
- A group No. that was not registered was designated during the T****99 command.
- An M code command, which must be issued as a single command, coexists in the same block as
that of another M code command.
- The M code commands set in the same group exist in the same block.
Remedy
- Register the tool life data once for one group: commanding with a duplicate group No. is not allowed.
- Correct to the group No.
P180 No spec: Drilling cycle

Details
A fixed cycle command (G72 - G89) was issued though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P181 No spindle command (Tap cycle)

Details
Spindle rotation speed (S) has not been commanded in synchronous tapping.
Remedy
- Command the spindle rotation speed (S) in synchronous tapping.
- When "#8125 Check Scode in G84" is set to "1", enter the S command in the same block where the
synchronous tapping command is issued.
P182 Synchronous tap error

Details
- Connection to the main spindle unit was not established.
- The synchronous tapping was attempted with the spindle not serially connected under the multiple-
spindle control I.
Remedy
- Check connection to the main spindle.
- Check that the main spindle encoder exists.
- Set 1 to the parameter #3024 (sout).
584
P183 No pitch/thread number

Details
The pitch or number of threads has not been commanded in the tap cycle of a fixed cycle for drilling
command.
Remedy
- Specify the pitch data and the number of threads by F or E command.
P184 Pitch/thread number error

Details
- The pitch or the number of threads per inch is illegal in the tap cycle of the fixed cycle for drilling
command.
- The pitch is too small for the spindle rotation speed.
- The thread number is too large for the spindle rotation speed.
Remedy
- Correct the pitch or the number of threads per inch.
P185 No spec: Sync tapping cycle

Details
Synchronous tapping cycle (G84/G74) was commanded though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P186 Illegal S cmnd in synchro tap

Details
S command was issued during synchronous tapping modal.
Remedy
- Cancel the synchronous tapping before issuing the S command.
P190 No spec: Turning cycle

Details
A lathe cutting cycle command was issued though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
- Check the specification.
- Delete the lathe cutting cycle command.
P191 Taper length error

Details
In the lathe cutting cycle, the specified length of taper section is illegal.
Remedy
- Set the smaller radius value than the axis travel amount in the lathe cycle command.
P192 Chamfering error

Details
Chamfering in the thread cutting cycle is illegal.
Remedy
- Set a chamfering amount not exceeding the cycle.
P200 No spec: MRC cycle

Details
The compound type fixed cycle for turning machining I (G70 to G73) was commanded though it is out
of specifications.
Remedy
585
MITSUBISHI CNC
P201 Program error (MRC)

Details
- The subprogram, called with a compound type fixed cycle for turning machining I command, has at
least one of the following commands: reference position return command (G27, G28, G29, G30);
thread cutting (G33, G34); fixed cycle skip-function (G31, G31.n).
- An arc command was found in the first movement block of the finished shape program in compound
type fixed cycle for turning machining I.
Remedy
- Delete G27, G28, G29, G30, G31, G33, G34, and fixed cycle G codes from the subprogram called
with the compound type fixed cycle for turning machining I commands (G70 to G73).
- Delete G02 and G03 from the first movement block of the finished shape program in compound type
fixed cycle for turning machining I.
P202 Block over (MRC)

Details
The number of blocks in the shape program of the compound type fixed cycle for turning machining I is
over 50 or 200 (the maximum number differs according to the model).
Remedy
- Set a 50/200 or less value for the number of blocks in the shape program called by the compound
type fixed cycle for turning machining I commands (G70 to G73). (The maximum number differs
according to the model).
P203 D cmnd figure error (MRC)

Details
A proper shape will not obtained by executing the shape program for the compound type fixed cycle for
turning machining I (G70 to G73).
Remedy
- Correct the shape program for the compound type fixed cycle for turning machining I (G70 to G73).
P204 E cmnd fixed cycle error

Details
A command value of the compound type fixed cycle for turning machining (G70 to G76) is illegal.
Remedy
- Correct the command value of the compound type fixed cycle for turning machining (G70 to G76).
P210 No spec: Pattern cycle

Details
A compound type fixed cycle for turning machining II (G74 to G76) command was commanded though
it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P220 No spec: Special fixed cycle

Details
There are no special fixed cycle specifications.
Remedy
P221 No. of special fixed holes = 0

Details
"0" has been specified for the number of holes in special fixed cycle mode.
Remedy
P222 G36 angle error

Details
A G36 command specifies "0" for angle intervals.
Remedy
586
P223 G12/G13 radius error

Details
The radius value specified with a G12 or G13 command is below the compensation amount.
Remedy
P224 No spec: Circular (G12/G13)

Details
There are no circular cutting specifications.
Remedy
P230 Subprogram nesting over

Details
Over 8 times of subprogram calls have been done in succession from a subprogram.
- A M198 command was found in the program in the data server.
- The program in the IC card has been called more than once (the program in the IC card can be
called only once during nested).
Remedy
- Correct the program so that the number of subprogram calls does not exceed 8 times.
P231 No sequence No.

Details
The sequence No., commanded at the return from the subprogram or by GOTO in the subprogram
call, was not set.
Remedy
- Specify the sequence Nos. in the call block of the subprogram.
P232 No program No.

Details
- The machining program has not been found when the machining program is called.
- The file name of the program registered in IC card is not corresponding to O No.
Remedy
- Enter the machining program.
- Check the subprogram storage destination parameters.
- Ensure that the external device (including IC card) that contains the file is mounted.
P235 Program editing

Details
Operation was attempted for the file under program editing.
Remedy
- Execute the program again after completion of program editing.
P240 No spec: Variable commands

Details
A variable command (with #) was issued though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P241 No variable No.

Details
The variable No. commanded is out of the range specified in the specifications.
Remedy
- Correct the program variable No.
587
MITSUBISHI CNC
P242 = not defined at vrble set

Details
The "=" sign has not been commanded when a variable is defined.
Remedy
- Designate the "=" sign in the variable definition of the program.
P243 Can't use variables

Details
An invalid variable has been specified in the left or right side of an operation expression.
Remedy
P244 Invalid set date or time

Details
Date or time was set earlier than current date or time in the system variables (#3011, #3012) when the
system lock was valid.
Remedy
- Date or time cannot be changed.
P250 No spec: Figure rotation

Details
Figure rotation (M98 I_J_P_H_L_) was commanded though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P251 Figure rotation overlapped

Details
Figure rotation command was issued during figure rotation.
Remedy
P252 Coord rotate in fig. rotation

Details
A coordinate rotation related command (G68, G69) was issued during figure rotation.
Remedy
P260 No spec: Coordinates rotation

Details
A coordinate rotation command was issued though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P261 G code illegal (Coord rot)

Details
Another G code or a T command has been issued in the block of coordinate rotation command.
Remedy
P262 Illegal modal (Coord rot)

Details
A coordinate rotation command has been issued during modal in which coordinate rotation is not
allowed.
Remedy
588
P270 No spec: User macro

Details
A macro specification was commanded though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P271 No spec: Macro interrupt

Details
A macro interruption command has been issued though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P272 NC and macro texts in a block

Details
An executable statement and a macro statement exist together in the same block.
Remedy
- Place the executable statement and macro statement in separate blocks in the program.
P273 Macro call nesting over

Details
The number of macro call nests exceeded the limit imposed by the specifications.
Remedy
- Correct the program so that the macro calls do not exceed the limit imposed by the specifications.
P275 Macro argument over

Details
The number of argument sets in the macro call argument type II has exceeded the limit.
Remedy
P276 Illegal G67 command

Details
A G67 command was issued though it was not during the G66 command modal.
Remedy
- Issue G66 command before G67 command, which is a call cancel command.
P277 Macro alarm message

Details
An alarm command has been issued in #3000.
Remedy
- Refer to the operator messages on the diagnosis screen.
- Refer to the instruction manual issued by the machine tool builder.
P280 Brackets [ ] nesting over

Details
Over five times have the parentheses "[" or "]" been used in a single block.
Remedy
- Correct the program so that the number of "[" or "]" is five or less.
P281 Brackets [ ] not paired

Details
A single block does not have the same number of commanded parentheses "[" as that of "]".
Remedy
- Correct the program so that "[" and "]" parentheses are paired up properly.
589
MITSUBISHI CNC
P282 Calculation impossible

Details
The arithmetic formula is incorrect.
Remedy
- Correct the formula in the program.
P283 Divided by zero

Details
The denominator of the division is zero.
Remedy
- Correct the program so that the denominator for division in the formula is not zero.
P288 IF EXCESS
Details
Over ten times of IF statement nesting have been done.
Remedy
Correct the program so that the number of IF statement nesting does not exceed ten.
P289 IF-ENDIF MMC.

Details
An IF statement is not ended with ENDIF.
THEN/ELSE has been commanded while there is no IF command.
Remedy
- Correct the program so that IF statements are ended with ENDIFs.
- Put IF[condition] before THEN/ELSE command.
P290 IF sentence error

Details
There is an error in the "IF[<conditional>]GOTO(" statement.
Remedy
P291 WHILE sentence error

Details
There is an error in the "WHILE[<conditional>]DO(-END(" statement.
Remedy
P292 SETVN sentence error

Details
There is an error in the "SETVN(" statement when the variable name setting was made.
Remedy
- The number of characters in the variable name of the SETVN statement must be 7 or less.
P293 DO-END nesting over

Details
The number of DO-END nesting levels in the "WHILE[<conditional>]DO(-END(" statement has
exceeded 27.
Remedy
- Correct the program so that the nesting levels of the DO-END statement does not exceed 27.
P294 DO and END not paired

Details
The DOs and ENDs are not paired off properly.
Remedy
- Correct the program so that the DOs and ENDs are paired off properly.
590
P295 WHILE/GOTO in tape

Details
There is a WHILE or GOTO statement on the tape during tape operation.
Remedy
- Apply memory mode operation instead of tape mode that does not allow the execution of the
program with a WHILE or GOTO statement.
P296 No address (macro)

Details
A required address has not been specified in the user macro.
Remedy
P297 Address-A error

Details
The user macro does not use address A as a variable.
Remedy
P298 G200-G202 cmnd in tape

Details
User macro G200, G201, or G202 was specified during tape or MDI mode.
Remedy
P300 Variable name illegal

Details
The variable names have not been commanded properly.
Remedy
- Correct the variable names in the program.
P301 Variable name duplicated

Details
A duplicate variable name was found.
Remedy
- Correct the program so that no duplicate name exists.
P310 Not use GMSTB macro code

Details
G, M, S, T, or B macro code was called during fixed cycle.
Remedy
P350 No spec: Scaling command

Details
The scaling command (G50, G51) was issued though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P360 No spec: Program mirror

Details
A mirror image (G50.1 or G51.1) command has been issued though the programmable mirror image
specifications are not provided.
Remedy
591
MITSUBISHI CNC
P370 No spec: Facing t-post MR

Details
The facing turret mirror image specifications are not provided.
Remedy
P371 Facing t-post MR illegal

Details
- Mirror image for facing tool posts was commanded to an axis in external mirror image or parameter
mirror image.
- The commanded mirror image for facing tool posts enables the mirror image for a rotary axis.
Remedy
P380 No spec: Corner R/C

Details
The corner R/C was issued though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
- Delete the corner chamfering/corner rounding command in the program.
P381 No spec: Arc R/C

Details
Corner chamfering II or corner rounding II was commanded in the arc interpolation block though it is
out of specifications.
Remedy
P382 No corner movement

Details
The block next to corner chamfering/ corner rounding is not a travel command.
Remedy
- Replace the block succeeding the corner chamfering/ corner rounding command by G01 command.
P383 Corner movement short

Details
The travel distance in the corner chamfering/corner rounding command was shorter than the value in
the corner chamfering/corner rounding command.
Remedy
- Set the smaller value for the corner chamfering/corner rounding than the travel distance.
P384 Corner next movement short

Details
The travel distance in the following block in the corner chamfering/corner rounding command was
shorter than the value in the corner chamfering/corner rounding command.
Remedy
- Set the smaller value for the corner chamfering/corner rounding than the travel distance in the
following block.
P385 Corner during G00/G33

Details
A block with corner chamfering/corner rounding was given during G00 or G33 modal.
Remedy
592
P390 No spec: Geometric

Details
A geometric command was issued though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P391 No spec: Geometric arc

Details
There are no geometric IB specifications.
Remedy
P392 Angle < 1 degree (GEOMT)

Details
The angular difference between the geometric line and line is 1° or less.
Remedy
- Correct the geometric angle.
P393 Inc value in 2nd block (GEOMT)

Details
The second geometric block has a command with an incremental value.
Remedy
- Issue a command with an absolute value in the second geometric block.
P394 No linear move command (GEOMT)

Details
The second geometric block contains no linear command.
Remedy
- Issue the G01 command.
P395 Illegal address (GEOMT)

Details
The geometric format is invalid.
Remedy
P396 Plane selected in GEOMT ctrl

Details
A plane switching command was issued during geometric command processing.
Remedy
- Complete the plane switching command before geometric command processing.
P397 Arc error (GEOMT)

Details
In geometric IB, the circular arc end point does not contact or cross the next block start point.
Remedy
- Correct the geometric circular arc command and the preceding and following commands.
P398 No spec: Geometric1B

Details
A geometric command was issued though the geometric IB specifications are not provided.
Remedy
593
MITSUBISHI CNC
P411 Illegal modal G111

Details
- G111 was issued during milling mode.
- G111 was issued during nose R compensation mode.
- G111 was issued during constant surface speed.
- G111 was issued during mixed control (cross axis control).
- G111 was issued during fixed cycle.
- G111 was issued during polar coordinate interpolation.
- G111 was issued during cylindrical interpolation mode.
Remedy
- Before commanding G111, cancel the following commands.
- Milling mode
- Nose R compensation
- Constant surface speed
- Mixed control (cross axis control)
- Fixed cycle
- Polar coordinate interpolation
- Cylindrical interpolation
P412 No spec: Axis name switch

Details
Axis name switch (G111) was issued though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P420 No spec: Para input by program

Details
Parameter input by program (G10) was commanded though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P421 Parameter input error

Details
- The specified parameter No. or set data is illegal.
- An illegal G command address was input in parameter input mode.
- A parameter input command was issued during fixed cycle modal or nose R compensation.
- G10L70, G11 were not commanded in independent blocks.
Remedy
P430 R-pnt return incomplete

Details
- A command was issued to move an axis, which has not returned to the reference position, away
from that reference position.
- A command was issued to an axis removal axis.
Remedy
- Execute reference position return manually.
- Disable the axis removal on the axis for which the command was issued.
P431 No spec: 2,3,4th R-point ret

Details
A command for second, third or fourth reference position return was issued though there are no such
command specifications.
Remedy
594
P432 No spec: Start position return

Details
Start position return (G29) was commanded though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P433 No spec: R-position check

Details
Reference position check (G27) was commanded though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P434 Compare error

Details
One of the axes did not return to the reference position when the reference position check command
(G27) was executed.
Remedy
P435 G27 and M commands in a block

Details
An M command was issued simultaneously in the G27 command block.
Remedy
- Place the M code command, which cannot be issued in a G27 command block, in separate block
from G27 command block.
P436 G29 and M commands in a block

Details
An M command was issued simultaneously in the G29 command block.
Remedy
- Place the M code command, which cannot be issued in a G29 command block, in separate block
from G29 command block.
P438 G52 invalid during G54.1

Details
A local coordinate system command was issued during execution of the G54.1 command.
Remedy
P450 No spec: Chuck barrier

Details
The chuck barrier on command (G22) was specified although the chuck barrier is out of specifications.
Remedy
P451 No spec: Stroke chk bef travel

Details
Stroke check before travel (G22/G23) was commanded though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P452 Limit before travel exists

Details
An illegal command, which places the axis travel start/end point in the prohibited area or moves the
axis through the prohibited area, was detected when Stroke check before travel (G22) was
commanded.
Remedy
- Correct the coordinate values of the axis address commanded in the program.
595
MITSUBISHI CNC
P460 Tape I/O error

Details
An error has occurred in the tape reader. Otherwise an error has occurred in the printer during macro
printing.
Remedy
- Check the power and cable of the connected devices.
- Correct the I/O device parameters.
P461 File I/O error

Details
- A file of the machining program cannot be read.
- IC card has not been inserted.
Remedy
- In memory mode, the programs stored in memory may have been destroyed. Output all of the
programs and tool data and then format the system.
- Ensure that the external device (including an IC card, etc) that contains the file is mounted.
- Correct the parameter settings for HD operation or IC card operation.
P462 Computer link commu error

Details
A communication error occurred during the BTR operation.
Remedy
- "L01 Computer link error" is displayed simultaneously. Take the remedy corresponding to the error
No.
P480 No spec: Milling

Details
- Milling was commanded though it is out of specifications.
- Polar coordinate interpolation was commanded though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P481 Illegal G code (mill)

Details
- An illegal G code was used during the milling mode.
- An illegal G code was used during cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate interpolation.
- The G07.1 command was issued during the tool radius compensation.
Remedy
P482 Illegal axis (mill)

Details
- A rotary axis was commanded during the milling mode.
- Milling was executed though an illegal value was set for the milling axis No.
- Cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate interpolation was commanded during mirror image.
- Cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate interpolation was commanded before the tool
compensation was completed after the T command.
- G07.1 was commanded when cylindrical interpolation was not possible (there is no rotary axis, or
external mirror image is ON).
- An axis other than a cylindrical coordinate system axis was commanded during cylindrical
interpolation.
Remedy
- Correct the machining program, parameters and PLC interface signals.
596
P484 R-pnt ret incomplete (mill)

Details
- Movement was commanded to an axis that had not completed reference position return during the
milling mode.
- Movement was commanded to an axis that had not completed reference position return during
cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate interpolation.
Remedy
- Carry out manual reference position return.
P485 Illegal modal (mill)

Details
- The milling mode was turned ON during nose R compensation or constant surface speed control.
- A T command was issued during the milling mode.
- The mode was switched from milling to cutting during tool compensation.
- Cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate interpolation was commanded during the constant
surface speed control mode (G96).
- The command unacceptable in the cylindrical interpolation was issued.
- A T command was issued during the cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate interpolation mode.
- A movement command was issued when the plane was not selected just before or after the G07.1
command.
- A plane selection command was issued during the polar coordinate interpolation mode.
- Cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate interpolation was commanded during tool radius
compensation.
- The G16 plane in which the radius value of a cylinder is "0" was specified.
- A cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate interpolation command was issued during coordinate
rotation by program.
Remedy
- Issue G40 or G97 before issuing G12.1.
- Issue a T command before issuing G12.1.
- Issue G40 before issuing G13.1.
- Specify the radius value of a cylinder other than "0", or specify the X axis's current value other than
"0" before issuing G12.1/G16.
P486 Milling error

Details
- The milling command was issued during the mirror image (when parameter or external input is
turned ON).
- Polar coordinate interpolation, cylindrical interpolation or milling interpolation was commanded
during mirror image for facing tool posts.
- The start command of the cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate interpolation was issued during
the normal line control.
Remedy
P501 Cross (G110) impossible

Details
Mixed control (cross axis control) command (G110) was issued in the following modes.
- During nose R compensation mode
- During pole coordinate interpolation mode
- During cylindrical interpolation mode
- During balance cut mode
- During fixed cycle machining mode
- During facing turret mirror image
- During constant surface speed control mode
- During hobbing mode
- During axis name switch
Remedy
597
MITSUBISHI CNC
P503 Illegal G110 axis

Details
- The commanded axis does not exist.
- The mixed control (cross axis control) (G110) was commanded to the axis for which the mixed
control (cross axis control) is disabled.
- The number of axes included in the mixed control (cross axis control) (G110) command is exceeding
the maximum number of axes per part system.
Remedy
P511 Synchronization M code error

Details
- Two or more synchronization M codes were commanded in the same block.
- The synchronization M code and "!" code were commanded in the same block.
- Synchronization with the M code was commanded in 3rd part system or more. (Synchronization with
the M code is valid only in 1st part system or 2nd part system.)
Remedy
P520 Control axis superimposition/Designated axis illegal

Details
An axis which was impossible to superimpose was designated as a master axis or superimposing
axis.
Remedy
Correct the program.
P521 Illegal synchronization axis

Details
The axis specified as a basic or synchronous axis of synchronization across part systems cannot be
synchronized.
Remedy
P530 DEC. POINT ERR

Details
A decimal point was added to the address where the decimal point command is not allowed. ("#1274
ext10/bit0 (Type of address enabling/disabling decimal point command)")
Remedy
Do not add any decimal point to the addresses where the decimal point is not allowed.
P544 No spec: Wk instl err cmp

Details
The workpiece installation error compensation function is out of the specifications.
Remedy
P545 Invld cmd in wk instl err cmp

Details
During workpiece installation error compensation, a command impossible to issue (such as G
command) was issued.
Remedy
- Check the program. If you wish to issue a command impossible to issue (such as G command)
during workpiece installation error compensation, cancel workpiece installation error compensation
once.
598
P546 Wk instl err cmp cmd invalid

Details
- Workpiece installation error compensation was commanded in a G modal in which commanding it is
not allowed.
- An illegal G command was issued in the block that has a workpiece installation error compensation
command.
Remedy
- Check the program. Also check the G modals which were issued at commanding the workpiece
installation error compensation, and cancel illegal ones.
- Issue the G command in a separate block.
P547 Illegal wk instl err cmp cmd

Details
A command in which the rotary axis's travel distance exceeds 180 degrees was issued.
Remedy
- Divide the travel command so that the rotary axis's travel distance per block is less than 180
degrees.
P550 No spec: G06.2(NURBS)

Details
There is no NURBS interpolation option.
Remedy
P551 G06.2 knot error

Details
The knot (k) command value is smaller than the value for the previous block.
Remedy
- Specify the knot by monotone increment.
P552 Start point of 1st G06.2 err

Details
The block end point immediately before the G06.2 command and the G06.2 first block command value
do not match.
Remedy
- Match the G06.2 first block coordinate command value with the previous block end point.
P554 Invld manual interrupt in G6.2

Details
Manual interruption was executed in a block that applies the G06.2 mode.
Remedy
- Execute the manual interruption in the block that does not apply the G06.2 mode.
P555 Invalid restart during G06.2

Details
Restart was attempted from the block that applies G06.2 mode.
Remedy
- Restart from the block that does not apply the G06.2 mode.
P600 No spec: Auto TLM

Details
An automatic tool length measurement command (G37) was issued though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
599
MITSUBISHI CNC
P601 No spec: Skip

Details
A skip command (G31) was issued though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P602 No spec: Multi skip

Details
A multiple skip command (G31.1, G31.2, G31.3 or G31 Pn) was issued though it is out of
specifications.
Remedy
P603 Skip speed 0

Details
The skip speed is "0".
Remedy
- Specify the skip speed.
P604 TLM illegal axis

Details
No axis was specified in the automatic tool length measurement block. Otherwise, two or more axes
were specified.
Remedy
- Specify only one axis.
P605 T & TLM command in a block

Details
The T code is in the same block as the automatic tool length measurement block.
Remedy
- Specify the T code before the automatic tool length measurement block.
P606 T cmnd not found before TLM

Details
The T code was not yet specified in automatic tool length measurement.
Remedy
- Specify the T code before the automatic tool length measurement block.
P607 TLM illegal signal

Details
The measurement position arrival signal turned ON before the area specified by the D command or
"#8006 ZONE d". Otherwise, the signal remained OFF to the end.
Remedy
P608 Skip during radius compen

Details
A skip command was issued during radius compensation processing.
Remedy
- Issue a radius compensation cancel (G40) command or remove the skip command.
600
P610 Illegal parameter

Details
- The parameter setting is not correct.
- G114.1 was commanded while the spindle synchronization was selected with the PLC interface
signal.
- G110 was commanded while the mixed control (cross axis control) was selected with the PLC
interface signal.
- G125 was commanded while the control axis synchronization across part systems was selected with
the PLC interface signal.
- G126 was commanded while the control axis superimposition was selected with the PLC interface
signal.
Remedy
- Correct the settings of "#1514 expLinax (Exponential function interpolation linear axis)" and "#1515
expRotax (Exponential function interpolation rotary axis)".
P611 No spec: Exponential function

Details
There is no specification for the exponential interpolation.
Remedy
P612 Exponential function error

Details
A travel command for exponential interpolation was issued during mirror image for facing tool posts.
Remedy
P700 Illegal command value

Details
Spindle synchronization was commanded to a spindle that is not connected serially.
Remedy
P900 No spec: Normal line control

Details
A normal line control command (G40.1, G41.1, or G42.1) was issued though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P901 Normal line control axis G92

Details
A coordinate system preset command (G92) was issued to a normal line control axis during normal line
control.
Remedy
P902 Normal line control axis error

Details
- The normal line control axis was set to a linear axis.
- The normal line control axis was set to the linear type rotary axis II axis.
- The normal line control axis has not been set.
- The normal line control axis is the same as the plane selection axis.
Remedy
- Correct the normal line control axis setting.
601
MITSUBISHI CNC
P903 Plane chg in Normal line ctrl

Details
The plane selection command (G17, G18, or G19) was issued during normal line control.
Remedy
- Delete the plane selection command (G17, G18, or G19) from the program of the normal line control.
P920 No spec: 3D coord conv

Details
There is no specification for 3-dimensional coordinate conversion.
Remedy
P921 Illegal G code at 3D coord

Details
The commanded G code cannot be performed during 3-dimensional coordinate conversion modal.
Remedy
- Refer to "MITSUBISHI CNC 700/70 Series Programming Manual (Machining Center System)" for
usable G commands.
- When the parameter "#8158 Init const sur spd" is enabled, disable the parameter or issue the
constant surface speed control cancel (G97) command.
P922 Illegal mode at 3D coord

Details
A 3-dimensional coordinate conversion command was issued during a modal for which 3-dimensional
coordinate conversion cannot be performed.
Remedy
usable G commands.
P923 Illegal addr in 3D coord blk

Details
A G code and G68 was commanded in a block though the G code cannot be commanded with G68.
Remedy
usable G commands.
P930 No spec: Tool axis compen

Details
A tool length compensation along the tool axis command was issued though it is out of specifications.
Remedy
P931 Executing tool axis compen

Details
There is a G code that cannot be commanded during tool length compensation along the tool axis.
Remedy
P932 Rot axis parameter error

Details
There is an illegal linear axis name or rotary axis name set in the rotary axis configuration parameters.
There is an illegal setting in the parameter concerning the configuration of the inclined surface
machining axis.
Remedy
- Set the correct value and turn the power ON again.
602
P940 No spec: Tool tip control

Details
There is no specification for tool tip center control.
Remedy
P941 Invalid T tip control command

Details
A tool tip center control command was issued during a modal for which a tool tip center control
command cannot be issued.
Remedy
P942 Invalid cmnd during T tip ctrl

Details
A G code that cannot be commanded was issued during tool tip center control.
Remedy
P943 Tool posture command illegal

Details
In tool tip center control type 1, if the signs at the tool-side rotary axis or table base-side rotary axis
start and finish points differ, a tool base-side rotary axis or table workpiece-side rotary axis rotation
exists for the same block, and does not pass a singular point.
In tool tip center control type 2, the posture vector command is incorrect.
Remedy
P950 No spec: Tilt face machining

Details
Inclined surface machining option is not supported.
Remedy
P951 Ill cmd in tilt face machining

Details
A forbidden command (G command, etc) was issued during inclined surface machining.
Remedy
- Check the program. If you want to execute a command (G command, etc) that is unavailable during
inclined surface machining, cancel the inclined surface machining.
P952 Inclined face cut prohibited

Details
Inclined surface machining was commanded during the mode where the machining is unavailable.
Inclined surface machining was commanded during interruption.
Remedy
- Check the program and see whether any unavailable mode is included during inclined surface
machining command. If any, cancel that mode.
P953 Tool axis dir cntrl prohibited

Details
Tool axis direction control was commanded during the mode where the control is unavailable.
Remedy
- Check the program and see whether any unavailable mode is included during tool axis direction
control. If any, cancel that mode.
603
MITSUBISHI CNC
P954 Inclined face command error

Details
The address to issue the inclined surface machining command is incorrect.
Remedy
P955 Inclined face coord illegal

Details
Impossible to define an inclined surface with the values you specified.
Remedy
P956 G68.2P10 surface not defined

Details
The coordinate system for the machining surface selected with G68.2P10 has not been defined.
Remedy
- Set the machining surface so that the coordinate system can be defined.
P957 Tool axis dir ctrl cmp amt 0

Details
When the tool axis direction control type 2 (G53.6) was commanded, a tool length compensation No.
whose compensation amount is 0 was commanded.
Remedy
- Correct the program. Set the tool length compensation amount, or command a tool length
compensation No. whose compensation amount is not 0.
P960 No spec: Direct command mode

Details
G05 P4 was commanded while direct command mode option is OFF.
Remedy
P961 Invalid during dir cmnd mode

Details
- A G code other than G05 P0 was commanded in direct command mode.
- A sequence No. command, F code command, MSTB command or variable command was issued.
- A corner chamfering command or corner R command was issued.
- A travel command was issued to an axis that had not been command in the G05 P4 block.
Remedy
P962 Dir cmnd mode cmnd invalid

Details
G05 P4 was commanded in a modal where direct command mode is not available.
Remedy
P963 Illegal direct cmnd mode cmnd

Details
The commanded coordinate value was beyond the maximum travel distance in direct command mode.
Remedy
- Correct the coordinate value in direct command mode.
604
P990 PREPRO error

Details
Combining commands that required pre-reading (nose R offset, corner chamfering/corner rounding,
geometric I, geometric IB, and compound type fixed cycle for turning machining) resulted in eight or
more pre-read blocks.
Remedy
- Delete some or all of the combinations of commands that require pre-reading.
605
MITSUBISHI CNC
Appendix 2.13 Troubleshooting

Appendix 2.13.1 Troubleshooting for NC
In case of the error during startup, the 7-segment LED change as follows.
Take a note of the 7-segment LED contents and contact the Service Center.
LED display Cause

0E Undefined interruption signal
0F Bus error, Address error or Interrupt exception (ASIC)
0A Checksum check error in Boot ROM (Flash ROM)
0C Checksum check error in DOSFS (Flash ROM)
0d Memory test error in DRAM
0b Time out error in ASIC
0G Initialization error in Graphic controller
0U Unsupported H/W
.(period) No correct boot data in Flash ROM
(cf) In case of SRAM clear, 7-segment LED change as follows (RSW2’C’)
LED display Result

0y Memory test pass in SRAM
0c Memory test error in SRAM
Appendix 2.13.2 Troubleshooting for drive system

Refer to the instruction manual of your drive unit for drive system-related troubleshooting information.
606
Revision History
Date of
Manual No. Revision details
revision
Mar. 2010 IB(NA)1500958-A First edition created.
- Corrected Alarms/Parameters to support the system software G1 version.
May. 2010 IB(NA)1500958-B
- Mistakes were corrected.
- Added "Handling of our product".
- Updated the contents of "6.2.3.2 MS Coinfigurator".
- Reviewed "7. Setting the Position Detection System"
- Changed the structure of Chapter 8 as explanation of H/W OT was added.
Old: 8 Setting the Stored Stroke Limit
8.1 Outline
8.2 Detailed Explanation
New: 8 Setting the Tool Entry Prohibited Range
Nov. 2011 IB(NA)1500958-C
8.1 Stroke End (H/W OT)
8.2.1 Outline
8.2.2 Detailed Explanation
- Added "12.7 USB Memory"
- Added "Appendix 2.13.1 Troubleshooting for NC"
- Corrected Alarms/Parameters to support the system software H0 version.
- Corresponded to MDS-D2/DH2,MDS-DJ,MDS-DM2.
- Reviewed structure of Chapter 6.
Old: 6.2.3 Servo Simplified Adjustment
New: 6.3 Servo Simplified Adjustment
Jul. 2013 IB(NA)1500958-D
- Changed "6.2.3.2 MS Configurator" to "6.3.2 Outline of NC Analyzer".
- Added description of "Setting of system lock"
- Corrected Alarms/Parameters to support the system software J1 version.
- Added and revised the contents of "13.1 Durable Parts" and "13.1.2 Backlight".
- Added "8.2.2.7 Change Area for Stored Stroke Limit l".
Jan. 2014 IB(NA)1500958-E - Reviewed contents of "10 Setting the System Lock".
- Corrected Alarms/Parameters to support the system software K1 version.
Global Service Network
AMERICA EUROPE
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION INC. (AMERICA FA CENTER) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
Central Region Service Center GOTHAER STRASSE 10, 40880 RATINGEN, GERMANY
500 CORPORATE WOODS PARKWAY, VERNON HILLS, ILLINOIS 60061, U.S.A. TEL: +49-2102-486-0 / FAX: +49-2102-486-5910
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650
Germany Service Center
Michigan Service Satellite KURZE STRASSE. 40, 70794 FILDERSTADT-BONLANDEN, GERMANY
ALLEGAN, MICHIGAN 49010, U.S.A. TEL: + 49-711-770598-123 / FAX: +49-711-770598-141
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650
France Service Center DEPARTEMENT CONTROLE NUMERIQUE
Ohio Service Satellite 25, BOULEVARD DES BOUVETS, 92741 NANTERRE CEDEX FRANCE
LIMA, OHIO 45801, U.S.A. TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650
CINCINATTI, OHIO 45201, U.S.A. France (Lyon) Service Satellite DEPARTEMENT CONTROLE NUMERIQUE
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 120, ALLEE JACQUES MONOD 69800 SAINT PRIEST FRANCE
TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25
Minnesota Service Satellite
ROGERS, MINNESOTA 55374, U.S.A. Italy Service Center
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 VIALE COLLEONI, 7 - CENTRO DIREZIONALE COLLEONI PALAZZO SIRIO INGRESSO 1
20864 AGRATE BRIANZA (MB), ITALY
West Region Service Center TEL: +39-039-6053-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206
16900 VALLEY VIEW AVE., LAMIRADA, CALIFORNIA 90638, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-714-699-2625 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 Italy (Padova) Service Satellite
VIA G. SAVELLI, 24 - 35129 PADOVA, ITALY
Northern CA Satellite TEL: +39-039-6053-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206
SARATOGA, CALIFORNIA 95070, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-714-699-2625 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 U.K. Branch
TRAVELLERS LANE, HATFIELD, HERTFORDSHIRE, AL10 8XB, U.K.
Pennsylvania Service Satellite TEL: +49-2102-486-0 / FAX: +49-2102-486-5910
PITTSBURG, PENNSYLVANIA 15644, U.S.A.
TEL: +1-732-560-4500 / FAX: +1-732-560-4531 Spain Service Center
CTRA. DE RUBI, 76-80-APDO. 420
Connecticut Service Satellite 08173 SAINT CUGAT DEL VALLES, BARCELONA SPAIN
TORRINGTON, CONNECTICUT 06790, U.S.A. TEL: +34-935-65-2236 / FAX: +34-935-89-1579
TEL: +1-732-560-4500 / FAX: +1-732-560-4531
Poland Service Center
South Region Service Center UL.KRAKOWSKA 50, 32-083 BALICE, POLAND
1845 SATTELITE BOULEVARD STE. 450, DULUTH, GEORGIA 30097, U.S.A. TEL: +48-12-630-4700 / FAX: +48-12-630-4701
TEL +1-678-258-4529 / FAX +1-678-258-4519
Mitsubishi Electric Turkey A.Ş Ümraniye Şubesi
Texas Service Satellites Turkey Service Center
GRAPEVINE, TEXAS 76051, U.S.A. ŞERIFALI MAH. NUTUK SOK. NO.5 34775
TEL: +1-678-258-4529 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519 ÜMRANIYE, ISTANBUL, TURKEY
HOUSTON, TEXAS 77001, U.S.A. TEL: +90-216-526-3990 / FAX: +90-216-526-3995
TEL: +1-678-258-4529 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519
Czech Republic Service Center
Tennessee Service Satellite KAFKOVA 1853/3, 702 00 OSTRAVA 2, CZECH REPUBLIC
Nashville, Tennessee, 37201, U.S.A. TEL: +420-59-5691-185 / FAX: +420-59-5691-199
TEL: +1-678-258-4529 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519
Russia Service Center
Florida Service Satellite 213, B.NOVODMITROVSKAYA STR., 14/2, 127015 MOSCOW, RUSSIA
WEST MELBOURNE, FLORIDA 32904, U.S.A. TEL: +7-495-748-0191 / FAX: +7-495-748-0192
TEL: +1-678-258-4529 / FAX: +1-678-258-4519
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. (SCANDINAVIA)
Canada Region Service Center Sweden Service Center
4299 14TH AVENUE MARKHAM, ONTARIO L3R OJ2, CANADA HAMMARBACKEN 14 191 49 SOLLENTUNA, SWEDEN
TEL: +1-905-475-7728 / FAX: +1-905-475-7935 TEL: +46-8-6251000 / FAX: +46-8-966877
Canada Service Satellite Bulgaria Service Center

EDMONTON, ALBERTA T5A 0A1, CANADA 4 A.LYAPCHEV BOUL., POB 21, BG-1756 SOFIA, BULGARIA
TEL: +1-905-475-7728 FAX: +1-905-475-7935 TEL: +359-2-8176009 / FAX: +359-2-9744061
Mexico Region Service Center Ukraine (Kharkov) Service Center

MARIANO ESCOBEDO 69 TLALNEPANTLA, 54030 EDO. DE MEXICO APTEKARSKIY LANE 9-A, OFFICE 3, 61001 KHARKOV, UKRAINE
TEL: +52-55-3067-7500 / FAX: +52-55-9171-7649 TEL: +380-57-732-7774 / FAX: +380-57-731-8721
Monterrey Service Satellite Ukraine (Kiev) Service Center

MONTERREY, N.L., 64720, MEXICO 4-B, M. RASKOVOYI STR., 02660 KIEV, UKRAINE
TEL: +52-81-8365-4171 TEL: +380-44-494-3355 / FAX: +380-44-494-3366
Belarus Service Center

BRAZIL OFFICE 9, NEZAVISIMOSTI PR.177, 220125 MINSK, BELARUS
TEL: +375-17-393-1177 / FAX: +375-17-393-0081
MELCO CNC do Brasil Comércio e Serviços S.A
Brazil Region Service Center South Africa Service Center
ACESSO JOSE SARTORELLI, KM 2.1 CEP 18550-000, BOITUVA-SP, BRAZIL 5 ALBATROSS STREET, RHODESFIELD, KEMPTON PARK 1619, GAUTENG, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: +55-15-3363-9900 / FAX: +55-15-3363-9911 TEL: +27-11-394-8512 / FAX: +27-11-394-8513
ASEAN CHINA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PTE. LTD. (ASEAN FA CENTER) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION (CHINA) LTD. (CHINA FA CENTER)
Singapore Service Center China (Shanghai) Service Center
307 ALEXANDRA ROAD #05-01/02 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC BUILDING SINGAPORE 159943 1-3,5-10,18-23/F, NO.1386 HONG QIAO ROAD, CHANG NING QU,
TEL: +65-6473-2308 / FAX: +65-6476-7439 SHANGHAI 200336, CHINA
TEL: +86-21-2322-3030 / FAX: +86-21-2308-3000
Malaysia (KL) Service Center China (Ningbo) Service Dealer
60, JALAN USJ 10 /1B 47620 UEP SUBANG JAYA SELANGOR DARUL EHSAN, MALAYSIA China (Wuxi) Service Dealer
TEL: +60-3-5631-7605 / FAX: +60-3-5631-7636 China (Jinan) Service Dealer
China (Hangzhou) Service Dealer
Malaysia (Johor Baru) Service Center China (Wuhan) Service Satellite
17 & 17A, JALAN IMPIAN EMAS 5/5, TAMAN IMPIAN EMAS, 81300 SKUDAI, JOHOR MALAYSIA.
TEL: +60-7-557-8218 / FAX: +60-7-557-3404 China (Beijing) Service Center
9/F, OFFICE TOWER 1, HENDERSON CENTER, 18 JIANGUOMENNEI DAJIE,
Philippines Service Center DONGCHENG DISTRICT, BEIJING 100005, CHINA
UNIT NO.411, ALABAMG CORPORATE CENTER KM 25. WEST SERVICE ROAD TEL: +86-10-6518-8830 / FAX: +86-10-6518-8030
SOUTH SUPERHIGHWAY, ALABAMG MUNTINLUPA METRO MANILA, PHILIPPINES 1771 China (Beijing) Service Dealer
TEL: +63-2-807-2416 / FAX: +63-2-807-2417
China (Tianjin) Service Center
UNIT 2003, TIANJIN CITY TOWER, NO 35 YOUYI ROAD, HEXI DISTRICT,
VIETNAM TIANJIN 300061, CHINA
TEL: +86-22-2813-1015 / FAX: +86-22-2813-1017
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC VIETNAM CO.,LTD China (Shenyang) Service Satellite
Vietnam (Ho Chi Minh) Service Center China (Changchun) Service Satellite
UNIT 01-04, 10TH FLOOR, VINCOM CENTER 72 LE THANH TON STREET, DISTRICT 1,
HO CHI MINH CITY, VIETNAM China (Chengdu) Service Center
TEL: +84-8-3910 5945 / FAX: +84-8-3910 5946 ROOM 407-408, OFFICE TOWER AT SHANGRI-LA CENTER, NO. 9 BINJIANG DONG ROAD,
JINJIANG DISTRICT, CHENGDU, SICHUAN 610021, CHINA
Vietnam (Hanoi) Service Satellite TEL: +86-28-8446-8030 / FAX: +86-28-8446-8630
SUITE 9-05, 9TH FLOOR, HANOI CENTRAL OFFICE BUILDING, 44B LY THUONG KIET STREET,
HOAN KIEM DISTRICT, HANOI CITY, VIETNAM China (Shenzhen) Service Center
TEL: +84-4-3937-8075 / FAX: +84-4-3937-8076 ROOM 2512-2516, 25/F., GREAT CHINA INTERNATIONAL EXCHANGE SQUARE, JINTIAN RD.S.,
FUTIAN DISTRICT, SHENZHEN 518034, CHINA
TEL: +86-755-2399-8272 / FAX: +86-755-8218-4776
INDONESIA China (Xiamen) Service Dealer
China (Dongguan) Service Dealer
PT. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDONESIA
Indonesia Service Center
GEDUNG JAYA 11TH FLOOR, JL. MH. THAMRIN NO.12, JAKARTA PUSAT 10340, INDONESIA KOREA
TEL: +62-21-3192-6461 / FAX: +62-21-3192-3942
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION KOREA CO., LTD. (KOREA FA CENTER)
Korea Service Center
THAILAND 1480-6, GAYANG-DONG, GANGSEO-GU, SEOUL 157-200, KOREA
TEL: +82-2-3660-9602 / FAX: +82-2-3664-8668
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FACTORY AUTOMATION (THAILAND) CO.,LTD
Thailand Service Center Korea Taegu Service Satellite
12TH FLOOR, SV.CITY BUILDING, OFFICE TOWER 1, NO. 896/19 AND 20 RAMA 3 ROAD, 4F KT BUILDING, 1630 SANGYEOK-DONG, BUK-KU, DAEGU 702-835, KOREA
KWAENG BANGPONGPANG, KHET YANNAWA, BANGKOK 10120,THAILAND TEL: +82-53-382-7400 / FAX: +82-53-382-7411
TEL: +66-2-682-6522-31 / FAX: +66-2-682-6020
TAIWAN
INDIA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TAIWAN CO., LTD. (TAIWAN FA CENTER)
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDIA PVT. LTD. Taiwan (Taichung) Service Center (Central Area)
India Service Center NO.8-1, INDUSTRIAL 16TH RD., TAICHUNG INDUSTRIAL PARK, SITUN DIST.,
2nd FLOOR, TOWER A & B, DLF CYBER GREENS, DLF CYBER CITY, TAICHUNG CITY 40768, TAIWAN R.O.C.
DLF PHASE-III, GURGAON 122 002, HARYANA, INDIA TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 / FAX: +886-4-2359-0689
TEL: +91-124-4630 300 / FAX: +91-124-4630 399
Ludhiana satellite office Taiwan (Taipei) Service Center (North Area)
Jamshedpur satellite office 10F, NO.88, SEC.6, CHUNG-SHAN N. RD., SHI LIN DIST., TAIPEI CITY 11155, TAIWAN R.O.C.
TEL: +886-2-2833-5430 / FAX: +886-2-2833-5433
India (Pune) Service Center
EMERALD HOUSE, EL-3, J-BLOCK, MIDC BHOSARI. PUNE – 411 026, MAHARASHTRA, INDIA Taiwan (Tainan) Service Center (South Area)
TEL: +91-20-2710 2000 / FAX: +91-20-2710 2100 11F-1., NO.30, ZHONGZHENG S. ROAD, YONGKANG DISTRICT, TAINAN CITY 71067, TAIWAN, R.O.C
Baroda satellite office TEL: +886-6-252-5030 / FAX: +886-6-252-5031
Mumbai satellite office
India (Bangalore) Service Center

PRESTIGE EMERALD, 6TH FLOOR, MUNICIPAL NO. 2,
LAVELLE ROAD, BANGALORE - 560 043, KAMATAKA, INDIA
TEL: +91-80-4020-1600 / FAX: +91-80-4020-1699
Chennai satellite office
Coimbatore satellite office
OCEANIA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUSTRALIA LTD.

Australia Service Center
348 VICTORIA ROAD, RYDALMERE, N.S.W. 2116 AUSTRALIA
TEL: +61-2-9684-7269 / FAX: +61-2-9684-7245
Notice
Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the contents described in this
manual. However, please understand that in some unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible.
Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments regarding the use of this
product.
Duplication Prohibited
This manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without written permission from
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
COPYRIGHT 2010-2014 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

M70V Set Up Manual (Ver-E)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

M70V Set Up Manual (Ver-E)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

M70V Set Up Manual (Ver-E)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Introduction

This is a setup manual for MITSUBISHI CNC M70V Series.

Notes on Reading This Manual

The following sings indicate prohibition and compulsory.

This sign indicates prohibited behavior (must not do).

For example, indicates "Keep fire away".

This sign indicated a thing that is pompously (must do).

For example, indicates "it must be grounded".

The meaning of each pictorial sing is as follows.

CAUTION rotated Danger Electric shock

Not applicable in this manual.

Do not cancel an emergency stop before confirming the basic operation.

1. Items related to product and manual

2. Items related to faults and abnormalities

3. Items related to setup

Do not replace the battery while the power is ON.

Do not short-circuit, charge, heat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.

Dispose of the spent battery according to local laws.

Do not pull the cables when connecting/disconnecting it.

Do not replace cooling fan while the power is ON.

Dispose of the replaced cooling fan according to the local laws.

Do not replace backlight while the power is ON.

Dispose of the spent backlights according to the local laws.

Do not replace control units while the power is ON.

Do not replace display units while the power is ON.

Do not replace keyboard units while the power is ON.

Do not replace DX units while the power is ON.

Do not replace hard disk units while the power is ON.

5. Items related to servo parameters and spindle parameters

(Note) This symbol mark is for EU countries only.

Please, help us to conserve the environment we live in!

Handling of our product

본 제품의 취급에 대해서

2 Connecting and Setting the Hardware ....................................................................................................... 5

3 Setting Up with M70/M700/E70 SETUP INSTALLER ............................................................................... 29

4 Setting the Parameters and Date/Time .................................................................................................... 39

5 PLC Program Writing................................................................................................................................. 49

6 Confirming the Basic Operation ............................................................................................................... 61

8 Setting the Tool Entry Prohibited Range ............................................................................................... 85

9 Confirming the Spindle Operation............................................................................................................ 99

10 Setting the System Lock ....................................................................................................................... 103

11 Setting the Deceleration Check ............................................................................................................ 107

12 Data Backup and Restoration ............................................................................................................... 115

13 Hardware Replacement Methods.......................................................................................................... 121

14 Cables ..................................................................................................................................................... 145

Appendix 1 Explanation of Parameters .................................................................................................... 151

Appendix 2 Explanation of Alarms............................................................................................................ 493

1.1 Device Configuration

1.2 Hardware Configuration

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(A) Cancel key

(A) Rotary switch 1

1.3 Flow of Initial Setup

Confirming the connection between

PLC Program Writing Refer to section 5

Write the created PLC program to NC's ROM using GX Developer.

Setting the Position Detection System Refer to section 7

Set the tool entry prohibited range.

Confirm that the spindle operates properly in manual/MDI operation.